TARGET: JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016: Course: VIJETA (JP) Date: 02-04-2015
TARGET: JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016: Course: VIJETA (JP) Date: 02-04-2015
Total Marks : 29 Max. Time : 29 min.
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 to Q.4 (3 marks 3 min.) [12, 12]
Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.5 to Q.6 (4 marks 4 min.) [8, 8]
Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.7 to Q.9 (3 marks 3 min.) [9, 9]
1. One mole of an ideal gas at a temperature T1 expands slowly according to the law
p
= constant. Its final temperature is T2. The work done by the gas is :
V
p
T1 =
V
T2
R 2R
(A) R(T2 T1) (B) 2R(T2 T1) (C*) (T2 T1) (D) (T2 T1)
2 3
2. A bead of mass m is attached to one end of a spring of natural length R and spring constant k =
( 3 1)mg
. The other end of the spring is fixed at point A on a smooth vertical ring of radius R as
R
shown in figure. The normal reaction at B just after it is released to move is
m R
( 3 1)mg
k= R A
R
(fixed) () B
B
30°
A
mg 3 3 mg
(A) (B) 3 mg (C) 3 3mg (D*)
2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.(D) The extension is spring is x = 2R cos 30° – R = 3 1R
Applying Newton's second law to the bead normal to circular ring at point B
N=k 3 1 R cos 30° + mg cos 30°
3 1
= mg 3 1 R cos 30° + mg cos 30°
R
3 3mg
N= .
2
3. A sounding body emitting a frequency of 150 Hz is dropped from a height. During its fall under gravity it
crosses a balloon moving upwards with a constant velocity of 2m/s one second after it started to fall.
The difference in the frequency observed by the man in balloon just before and just after crossing the
body will be: (given that -velocity of sound = 300m/s; g = 10m/s2)
150 Hz
1 2m/s
(
= 300m/s; g = 10m/s2
(A*) 12 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 4
Sol. v v0
f f0
v vs
300 2
when approaching : fa = 150
300 10
300 2
when receding : fr = 150 fa – fr 12 Hence (A).
300 10
4. A particle is projected at angle 60º with speed 10 3 , from the point ' A ' as shown in the fig. At the
same time the wedge is made to move with speed 10 3 towards right as shown in the figure. Then the
time after which particle will strike with wedge is (g = 10 m/sec2) :
'A' 60º 10 3
(wedge) 10 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1
Sol. Suppose particle strikes wedge at height ‘S’ after time t. S = 15t – 10 t2 = 15t – 5 t2. During this time
2
distance travelled by particle in horizontal direction = 5 3 t. Also wedge has travelled travelled extra
distance
S 15t 5t 2
x= =
tan 30 1/ 3
Total distance travelled by wedge in time t = 10 3 t. = 5 3 t + 3 (15 – 5t2)
t = 2 sec.
Alternate Sol.
(by Relative Motion)
2u sin 30 2 10 3 1
T= = = 2 sec. 15
g cos 30 10 3
t = 2 sec. 30°
10 3 5 3
A
5.* A particle performing S.H.M. undergoes displacement of (where A = amplitude of S.H.M.) in one
2
second. At t = 0 the particle was located at either extreme position or mean position. The time period of
S.H.M. can be : (consider all possible cases)
A
( A = )
2
t = 0
: ()
(A*) 12s (B*) 2.4 (C*) 6s (D*) 1.2s
T T
Sol. It T be the time period ; time to go from O to Q is and from M to P is .
12 6
A
The displacement is when particle goes from O to Q, from O to N to Q,
2
from O to N to O to P, and so on
T T T 5T T T 7T
t= or t = or t=
12 4 6 12 2 12 12
Hence possible time period T is
12 1 12 1
T = 12 s or T= = 2.4 s or T= s
5 7
A
similarly displacement is when particle goes from M to P or M to N to P
2
Hence the possible time period T is
6 1
T = 1 × 6 = 6 s or T = s = 1.2 s
5
Ans. T = 1.2 s, 6s, 2.4s, 12s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
T T
Hindi. T O Q M P
12 6
A
O Q, O N Q, O N O P
2
T T T 5T T T 7T
t= or t = t=
12 4 6 12 2 12 12
T
12 1 12 1
T = 12 s T= = 2.4 s s T=
5 7
A
M P M N P
2
T
6 1
T = 1 × 6 = 6 s or T = s = 1.2 s
5
Ans. T = 1.2 s, 6s, 2.4s, 12s
6.* In the figure shown all the surface are smooth. All the blocks A, B and C are movable, x-axis is
horizontal and y-axis vertical as shown. Just after the system is released from the position as shown.
A, B C x- y-
y
A
B x
C
Horizontal Surface
(A*) Acceleration of 'A' relative to ground is in negative y-direction
(B*) Acceleration of 'A' relative to B is in positive x-direction
(C*) The horizontal acceleration of 'B' relative to ground is in negative x-direction.
(D*) The acceleration of 'B' relative to ground along the inclined surface of 'C' is greater than g sin .
(A*) 'A' y-
(B*) 'B' 'A' x-
(C*) 'B' x-
(D*) 'B' 'C' g sin
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (Tough) There is no horizontal force on block A, therefore it does not move in x-direction, whereas there
is net downward force (mg – N) is acting on it, making its acceleration along negative y-direction.
Block B moves downward as well as in negative x-direction. Downward acceleration of A and B will be
equal due to constrain, thus w.r.t. B, A moves in positive x-direction.
x-, (mg –
N) y-
B x- A B
B A x-
B B
B
NC
Mg
The force acting vertically downward on block B are mg and NA(normal reaction due to block A). Hence
the component of net force on block B along the inclined surface of B is greater than mg sin . Therefore
the acceleration of 'B' relative to ground directed along the inclined surface of 'C' is greater than g sin
B mg + NA ( A ) B
B mg sin B
C g sin
COMPREHENSION
A 2kg block hangs without vibrating at the bottom end of a spring with a force constant of 400 N/m. The
top end of the spring is attached to the ceiling of an elevator car. The car is rising with an upward
acceleration of 5 m/s2 when the acceleration suddenly ceases at time t = 0 and the car moves upward
with constant speed. (g = 10 m/s2)
400 N/m 2
5 2 t = 0
(g = 10 2)
7. What is the angular frequency of oscillation of the block after the acceleration ceases?
(A*) 10 2 rad/s (B) 20 2 rad/s (C) 20 rad/s (D) 32 rad/s
K
Sol. = = 200 rad/s
m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. The amplitude of the oscillations is
(A) 7.5 cm (B) 5 cm (C*) 2.5 cm (D) 1 cm
9. The initial phase angle observed by a rider in the elevator, taking upward direction to be positive and
positive extreme position to have /2 phase constant, is equal to
/2
(A) zero (B) /2 rad (C) rad (D*) 3 /2 rad
Sol. 8, 9
Maximum extension the spring from natural position is x.
Then mg + ma = kx
2(10 5)m
x= = 7.5 cm
400
Extension of the spring when it is stretched to equilibrium line is x'.
mg =kx'
2 10
x' = = 5 cm
400
Therefore amplitude A = x –x' = 2.5 cm
If upward direction is taken as positive at t = 0, x = – A
Using x = A sin (w t + f)
– A = A sin f
Eq. line
3
f= F= 0
2 A
8, 9
x V=0
mg + ma = kx
2(10 5)m
x= = 7.5 cm
400
x'
mg =kx'
2 10
x' = = 5 cm
400 Eq. line
A = x –x' = 2.5 cm F= 0
t = 0 x = – A A
x = A sin (w t + f)
V=0
– A = A sin f
3
f=
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
T EST INFORM ATION
1. The value of = Cp/Cv for a gaseous mixture consisting of 2.0 moles of oxygen and
3.0 moles of helium. The gases are assumed to be ideal.
2.0 3.0 = Cp/Cv
7 29 23 25
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
5 19 19 19
2. Figure shows the kinetic energy K of a simple pendulum versus its angle from the vertical. The
pendulum bob has mass 0.2 kg. The length of the pendulum is equal to (g = 10 m/s2).
K 0.2
(g = 10 2).
K(mJ)
15
10
5
(mrad)
-100 0 100
(A) 2.0 m (B) 1.8 m (C*) 1.5 m (D) 1.2 m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1
Sol. mVm2 = 15 × 10–3 Vm = 0.150 m/s
2
g
A = 0.150 m/s L qm. = 0.150 m/s
L
0.150 0.150
gL = 3
L= = 1.5 m
100 10 0.1
3. A particle is revolving in a circle increasing its speed uniformly. Which of the following is constant?
4. A bead of mass m is located on a parabolic wire with its axis vertical and vertex at the origin as shown
in figure and whose equation is x2 = 4ay. The wire frame is fixed in vertical plane and the bead can slide
on it without friction. The bead is released from the point y = 4a on the wire frame from rest. The
tangential acceleration of the bead when it reaches the position given by y = a is :
x2 = 4ay
m
y = 4a y = a
:
g 3g g g
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 2 2 5
Sol. x = 4ay
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. In the shown arrangement if f1, f2 and T be the frictional forces on 2 kg block, 3kg block and tension in
the string respectively, then their values are:
f1, f2 2 kg 3kg T
fmax = 2 fmax = 6
Net force without friction on system is ‘7N’ in right side so first maximum friction will come on 3 kg block.
7N 3Kg
1 2
2kg 2 3kg 8
1 6
So f2 = 1 N, f3 = 6 N, T = 2N
f2 = 1 N, f3 = 6 N, T = 2N
6. A block is attached with a spring and is moving towards a fixed wall with speed v as shown in figure. As
the spring reaches the wall, it starts compressing. The work done by the spring on the wall during the
process of compression is :
v
(A) 1/2 mv2 (B) mv2 (C) Kmv (D*) zero
Sol. As point of application of force is not moving, therefore work done by the force is zero
COMPREHENSION
A pulse is started at a time t = 0 along the +x direction on a long, taut string. The shape of the pulse at
t = 0 is given by function f(x) with
t = 0 +x t = 0
f(x)
x x
1 for 4 x 0 4 x 0 1
4 4
f(x ) x 1 for 0 x 1 f(x ) 0 x 1 x 1
0 otherwise 0
here f and x are in centimeters. The linear mass density of the string is 50 g/m and it is under a tension
of 5N,
f x (cm) 50 g/m 5N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. The shape of the string is drawn at t = 0 and the area of the pulse enclosed by the string and the x-axis
is measured. It will be equal to
t = 0 x-
(A) 2 cm2 (B*) 2.5 cm2 (C) 4 cm2 (D) 5 cm2
Sol. Shape of the pulse at t = 0
t = 0
y(cm)
1
x(cm)
–4 0 1
Solution of the wave equation that gives displacement of any piece of the string at any time
(x vt ) (x vt )
1 for vt 4 x vt 1 vt 4 x vt
4 4
y f ( x, t ) ( x vt ) 1 for vt x vt 1 y f ( x, t ) (x vt ) 1 vt x vt 1
0 otherwise 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In each situation of column-I, the x-coordinate of a particle moving along x-axis is given in terms of time
t. ( is a positive constant). Match the equation of motion given in column-I with the type of motion
given in column-II.
-I x- t x- (
) -I -II
Column-I Column-II
(A) sin t – cos t (p) SHM
(B) sin3 t (q) Periodic
(C) sin t + sin3 t + sin5 t (r) Periodic but not SHM
(D) exp (– 2 t2) (s) Non periodic
-I -II
(A) sin t – cos t (p) (SHM)
(B) sin3 t (q) (periodic)
(C) sin t + sin3 t + sin5 t (r)
(D) exp (– t )
2 2
(s)
Ans. (A) p,q (B) q,r (C) q,r (D) s
1 1
Sol. (A) x 2 sin t cos t x = 2 sin ( t – ) is periodic with SHM.
2 2 4
(B) x = sin t can not be written
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
T EST INFORMATION
1. Two plane mirrors are inclined at 70º. A ray incident on one mirror at angle after reflection falls on the
second mirror and is reflected from there parallel to the first mirror is:
70º
:
(A*) 50º (B) 45º (C) 30º (D) 55º
2. A gas undergoes an adiabatic process and an isothermal process. The two processes are plotted on a
P-V diagram. The resulting curves intersect at a point P. Tangents are drawn to the two curves at P.
These make angles of 135º & 121º with the positive V-axis. If tan 59º = 5/3, the gas is likely to be:
P-V
P P V 135º
121º tan 59º = 5/3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The given system is displaced by distance ‘A’ and released. Both the blocks (each of mass m) move
together without relative slipping in the whole process. The magnitude of frictional force between them
at time ‘t’ is :
‘A’
m ‘t’
:
very rough ()
k m
m
smooth ()
x=0
KA KA KA
(A*) |cos t| (B) cos t (C) |sin t| (D) KA |cos t|
2 2 2
K
where ( ) =
2m
Sol. a= x2
Kx KA
a= = cos t
2m 2m
KA
f = ma = cos t
2
4. An ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process abcda which is shown by pressure- density curve.
abcda
P
d
c
a
b
1 2
(A*) Work done by the gas in the process 'bc' is zero
(B*) Work done by the gas in the process 'cd' is negative
(C) Internal energy of the gas at point 'a' is greater than at state 'c'
(D*) Net work done by the gas in the cycle is negative.
(A*) bc
(B*) cd
(C) a c
(D*)
P R P
Sol. = RT T
M0 M0 d
Slope of the curve Temperature
Hence cd and ab are isothermal processes. a
1 c
V
i.e. bc and da are constant volume process d
(A) and (B) are true. V 2 V1 V
Temp. in cd process is greater than ab. Equivalent PV diagram.
Net work done by the gas in the cycle is negative, as is clear by the PV-diagram.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
P R
Sol. = RT T
M0 M0
P
cd ab d
1
V a
c
bc da d
(A) (B) V
V2 V1
cd ab PV
PV-
5. A particle is performing SHM along x-axis such that its acceleration along x-axis is :
a = 2 – x where a is in m/s2 and x is in meter. If speed of the particle at x = 1 is zero then CORRECT
statement is :
x- x– a = 2 – x
a m/s2 x x = 1 :
(A) time period of oscillation is second (B*) amplitude of oscillation is 1 m
3
(C*) speed of the particle at x = 1.5 m is m/s (D*) speed of particle at x = 3 m is zero
2
(A) (B) 1 m
3
(C) x = 1.5 m m/s (D) x = 3 m
2
Sol. a = –[x – 2]
mean position x = 2, left extreme x = 1, right extreme x = 3
x = 2 x = 1, x = 3
amplitude x = 1
=1
vmax = 1 ; v= A2 x2
1 3
= 1 1 = .
4 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. For the given uniform semi-circular disc of mass m and radius r. Choose the correct alternative(s) :
(C : Centre of mass of the disc, O : Centre of the circular part)
m r :
(C : , O : )
(A) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through O
mr 2
is
4
mr 2
O
4
(B*) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through O
mr 2
is
2
mr 2
O
2
(C*) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through A
3mr 2
is
2
3mr 2
A
2
(D) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through C
mr 2
is
2
mr 2
C
2
7. A river of width 100 m is flowing with a velocity of 1.5 m/s. A man start from one end with rest relative
the river. He raws with an acceleration of 2 m/s2 relative to the river. If the man want to cross the river
in minimum time, by how much distance (in meters) will he be drifted (flown) in the direction of river flow
during the crossing.
100 m 1.5 m/s
2 m/s2
()
Ans : 15
Sol.
From A to B in y–direction,
y-A B ,
1
Sy = uyt + ayy2
2
1
100 = 0 + (B) t2
2
t = 10 sec.
From A to B, in x–direction,
x-A B, ,
Sx = uxt
Sx = (1.5) × (10) = 15 m.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
A U–tube, open from both the ends, contains two arms, arm–1 and arm–2 each of having equal cross–
section and height of each arm is 1m. Water of density w and an unknown liquid of density is filled as
shown.
U– –1 –2
1m w
A tuning fork of frequency 300 Hz is vibrated on arm–1, then air column vibrates in fundamental tone. If
the same tuning fork is vibrated on arm–2, , then air column vibrates in 1st overtone Vsound = 300 m/sec.,
g = 10 m/sec2, density of water w = 103 kg/m3, atmospheric pressure = 105 Pa). Neglect the effect of
surface tension and end correction.
300 Hz –1 –2
(V = 300 m/sec., g = 10
m/sec2, w
= 103 kg/m3, = 105 Pa).
Sol.
2
= 0.75 m
0
+ wg(0.75) = 0
+ g (0.25)
=3 w.
9. Now we use a tuning fork of frequency 302 Hz, instead of 300 Hz, with how much velocity should we
move the tuning fork, so that resonance is created with the air column in any arm ?
300 Hz 302 Hz
?
(A) 2 m/sec. towards the tube (B*) 2 m/sec. away from the tube
(C) 4 m/sec. towards the tube (D) 4 m/sec. away from the tube
(A) 2 m/sec. (B*) 2 m/sec.
(C) 4 m/sec (D) 4 m/sec.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. For resonance appeared frequency for the tube should be still 300 Hz
300 Hz
V V0
f' = f0
V Vs
300 0
300 = 302
300 ( V)
V = 2 m/sec away from the tube.
V = 2 m/sec
10. Four particles are moving with different velocities in front of stationary plane mirror (lying in y-z plane).
At t = 0, velocity of A is v A î , velocity of B is v B î 3 ĵ , velocity of C is v C 5 î 6 ĵ , velocity of
D is v D 3 î ĵ . Acceleration of particle A is a A 2 î ĵ and acceleration of particle C is a C 2tˆj .
The particle B and D move with uniform velocity (Assume no collision to take place till t = 2 seconds).
All quantities are in S.I. Units. Relative velocity of image of object A with respect to object A is denoted
by V A ', A . Velocity of images relative to corresponding objects are given in column I and their values
are given in column II at t = 2 second. Match column I with corresponding values in column II.
yz t = 0 A
vA î , B v î 3 ĵ , C v B5 î 6ˆj , D v 3 î ĵ A
C D
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
T EST INFORMATION
1. An object moves in front of a fixed plane mirror. The velocity of the image of the object is
(A) Equal in the magnitude and in the direction to that of the object.
(B) Equal in the magnitude and opposite in direction to that of the object.
(C) Equal in the magnitude and the direction will be either same or opposite to that of the object.
(D*) Equal in magnitude and makes any angle with that of the object depending on direction of motion
of the object.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D*)
Sol. When object moves normal to the mirror, image velocity will be opposite to it. When object moves
parallel to the mirror, image velocity will be in the same direction.
2. A point object is moving along principal axis of a concave mirror with uniform velocity towards pole.
Initially the object is at infinite distance from pole on right side of the mirror as shown. Before the object
collides with mirror, the number of times at which the distance between object and its image is 40 cm
are.
40 cm
(A) one time (B) two times (C*) three times (D) Data insufficient
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. As the object moves from infinity to centre of curvature, the distance between object and image reduces
from infinity to zero.
As the object moves from centre of curvature to focus, the distance between object and image
increases from zero to infinity.
As the object moves from focus to pole, the distance between object and its image reduces from infinity
to zero. Hence the distance between object and its image shall be 40 cm three times.
Sol.
40 cm
3. A force F = 4 î 10 ĵ acts on a body at a point having position vector 5 î 3 ĵ relative to origin of co-
ordinates on the axis of rotation . The torque acting on the body is :
F 4 î 10 ĵ
5 î 3 ĵ
(A) 38k̂ (B) 25 k̂ (C*) 62 k̂ (D) none of these
Sol. F = 4 î – 10 ĵ
r = (–5 î – 3 ĵ )
=r × F
= (– 5 î – 3 ĵ ) × (4 î – 10 ĵ )
= 50k̂ + 12 k̂ = 62 k̂
4. The fraction of a floating object of volume V0 and density d0 above the surface of a liquid of density d
will be
V0 d0 d
d0 dd0 d d0 dd0
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
d d d0 d d d0
Sol. For the floatation V0d0g = Vin d g
d
Vin = V0 0
d
d d d0 Vout d d0
Vout = V0 – Vin = V0 – V0 0 V0
d d v0 d
5. If the tension and diameter of a sonometer wire of fundamental frequency n is doubled and density is
halved then its fundamental frequency will become -
n
n n
(A) (B) 2n (C*) n (D)
4 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
n T
Sol. The frequency of vibrating wire is n = , where T is the tension in the wire.
2 m
1 T
We have n =
2 m
Here, m = mass per unit length = r2d
1/ 2
1 T 1 T
n or n
2 r 2d r d
1/ 2
n1 r2 T1 d2
n2 r1 T2 d1
We have given,
T1 1 d1 r1 1
, 2 ,
T2 2 d 2 r2 2
n1 2 1
or 1
n2 1 2
or n2 = n1 = n
1 T
. n
2 r 2d
2
n' T' r d
=
n T r' d'
2
1
= 2 2=1
2
n' = n
6. Two SHM’s are represented by y = a sin ( t – kx) and y = b cos ( t – kx). The phase difference
between the two is :
y = a sin ( t – kx) y = b cos ( t – kx)
3
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 4 6 4
Sol. y = a sin ( t – kx)
y = b cos ( t – kx) =y b sin( t k )
2
7. An aeroplane revolves in a circle above the surface of the earth at a fixed height with speed 100 km/hr.
The magnitude of change in velocity after completing 1/2 revolution will be.
100
(A*) 200 km/hr (B) 150 km/hr (C) 300 km/hr (D) 400 km/hr
Sol. V V1 V2
= V ( V2 )
= 2V
V = 2V
= 2 × 100 km/hr = 200 km/hr. Ans
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. A particle moves from position r1 3 î 2ˆj 6k̂ to position r2 14 î 13 ĵ 9k̂ under the action of force .
The (4 î ĵ 3k̂ ) N work done by this force will be
(4 î ĵ 3k̂ ) N r1 3 î 2ˆj 6k̂ r2 14 î 13 ĵ 9k̂
(A*) 100 J (B) 50 J (C) 200 J (D) 75 J
Sol. W = F . ( r2 r1 ) = 100 J
9. An inclined plane is inclined at an angle with the horizontal. A body of mass m rests on it, if the
coefficient of friction is µ, then the minimum force that has to be applied on the body parallel to the
inclined plane to make the body just move up the inclined plane is-
(A) mgsin (B) µmgcos
(C) µmgcos – mgsin (D*) µmgcos + mgsin
m µ
(A) mgsin (B) µmgcos
(C) µmgcos – mgsin (D*) µmgcos + mgsin
Sol. F mgsin + g cos
Fmin = mgsin + g cos
10. Two bodies are projected with the same velocity if one is projected at an angle of 30º and the other at
an angle of 60º to the horizontal, the ratio of the maximum heights reached is-
30° 60°
–
(A) 3 : 1 (B*) 1 : 3 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
11. A body covered a distance of L m along a curved path of a quarter circle. The ratio of distance to
displacement is
L m
2 2 2
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2
Sol. Displacement d1 = 2r
r
Distance from A to B d2 =
2
r
d2 2 =
=
d1 2r 2 2
d1 = 2r
r
A B d2 =
2
r
d2 2 =
=
d1 2r 2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. The load versus elongation graph for four wires of the same materials is shown in the figure. The
thinnest wire is represented by the line :
(A) OC (B) OD (C*) OA (D) OB
F/ A
Sol. =y
/
F yA
= = slope
13. An ideal gas changes from state a to state b as shown in Fig. What is the work done by the gas in the
process ?
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
P
Sol. T P or = constant
T
P nR
As = constant or V = constant W = 0.
T V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. A mass of 100g strikes the wall with speed 5m/s at an angle as shown in figure and it rebounds with the
same speed. If the contact time is 2 × 10–3 sec., what is the force applied on the mass by the wall :
100g 5m/s
2 × 10–3 sec
60º
60º
100g
(A) 250 3 to right (B) 250 N to right (C*) 250 3 N to left (D) 250 N to left
(A) 250 3 (B) 250 N (C*) 250 3 N (D) 250 N
Px (P f x P l x ) mV sin 60 (mV sin 60 )
Sol. Fx = = = = – 250 3 N towards left
t t 2 10 3
16. A ball of mass 'm', moving with uniform speed, collides elastically with another stationary ball. The
incident ball will lose maximum kinetic energy when the mass of the stationary ball is
'm'
(A*) m (B) 2m (C) 4m (D) infinity
Sol. If mass = m
first ball will stop v = 0
so k.e. = 0 (min )
In other cases there will be some kinetic energy
(K.E. can't be negative )
17. A man of mass 60 kg standing on a platform executing S.H.M. in the vertical plane. The displacement
from the mean position varies as y = 0.5 sin (2 ft). The value of f, for which the man will feel
weightlessness at the highest point is: (y is in metres)
60 kg
y = 0.5 sin (2 ft) f
, : (y )
g 2g
(A) (B) 4 g (C*) (D) 2 2g
4 2
Sol. If he feels weightlessness then at the highest point, acceleration must be g.
2A
2g
g= =2 f= 2g f=
2
d2 x
18. A particle of mass 'm' executes SHM according to the equation + kx = 0. Its time period will be :
dt 2
d2 x
m + kx = 0 –
dt 2
2 m
(A*) (B) 2 (C) 2 k (D) 2 k
k k
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. Assuming earth to be a perfectly spherical body, the time period of a simple pendulum is maximum:
:
(A) at the poles (B*) at the equator
(C) between north pole & the equator (D) between south pole & the equator
(A) (B*)
(C) (D)
20. Angle of incidence of the incident ray for which reflected ray intersect perpendiculaly the principal axis.
i
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
T EST INFORMATION
1. A uniform disk of mass 300kg is rotating freely about a vertical axis through its centre with constant
angular velocity . A boy of mass 30kg starts from the centre and moves along a radius to the edge of
the disk. The angular velocity of the disk now is
300 kg
30 kg
0 4 5
(A) (B) 0 (C) 0
(D*) 0
6 5 5 6
Sol. As = 0, angular momentum remains conseved :
300R 2 300R 2
L= 0 0 = 30R 2 .
2 2
150 0 = 180 = 5/6 0 Ans.
2. A man is holding an umbrella at angle 30° with vertical with lower end towards himself, which is
appropriate angle to protect him from rain for his horizontal velocity 10 m/s. Then which of the following
will be true-
10 m/s 30°
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A) rain is falling at angle 30° with vertical, towards the man
30°
(B*) rain may be falling at angle 30° with vertical, away from the man
30º
(C) rain is falling vertically
(D) none of these
Sol.
3. In Resonance tube experiment, if 400 Hz tuning fork is used, the first resonance occurs when length of
air column in the tube is 19 cm. If the 400 Hz. tuning fork is replaced by 1600 Hz tuning fork then to get
resonance, the water level in the tube should be further lowered by (take end correction = 1 cm)
400 Hz
19 cm 400 Hz 1600 Hz
(= 1 cm )
(A*) 5 cm (B) 10 cm (C*) 15 cm (D) 20 cm
V V
Sol. For first resonance with 400 Hz tuning fork eq = = = (19 + 1) = 20 cm
4 f0 4( 400 )
V V
400 Hz eq
= = = (19 + 1) = 20 cm
4 f0 4( 400 )
V V 20
If we use 1600 Hz tuning fork = 5 cm
4 f0 4 (1 1600 ) 4
V V 20 400 Hz
1600 Hz = 5 cm
4 f0 4 (1600 ) 4
for Resonance
V 3V 5V 7V 20 cm
eq
= , , , , ....
4 f0 4 f0 4 f0 4 f0
-----
1 cm + = 5 cm , 15 cm , 25 cm , 35 cm , 45 cm ..... -----
-----
= 4 cm , 14 cm , 24 cm , 34 cm , 44 cm ..... -----
-----
water level should be further lowered by -----
-----
-----
24 – 19 = 5 cm 34 – 19 = 15 cm
4. Heat is supplied to a certain homogeneous sample of matter at a uniform rate. Its temperature is plotted
against time as shown in the figure. Which of the following conclusions can be drawn?
(A*) its specific heat capacity is greater in the solid state than in the liquid state.
(B) its specific heat capacity is greater in the liquid state than in the solid state.
(C*) its latent heat of vaporization is greater than its latent heat of fusion.
(D) its latent heat of vaporization is smaller than its latent heat of fusion.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A*)
(B)
(C*)
(D)
Sol. Slope of graph is greater in the solid state i.e., temperature is rising faster, hence lower heat capacity.
The transition from solid to liquid state takes lesser time, hence latent heat is smaller.
i.e.,
5. A bullet is fired with speed 50 m/s at 45° angle find the height of the bullet when its direction of motion
makes angle 30° with the horizontal.
50 m/s 45° 30°
y
v
u=50 30°
Sol. h
45°
o x
[ Ans.: 2 F2b/ma ]
Sol. As Rod is in linear motion only (there’s no rotation of the rod), Net torque about COM must be zero.
Hence F1. – F2 b =0 ........(1)
2 2
also for linear motion.
F2 – F1 = ma ........(2)
solving (1) and (2)
(1) (2)
2F2b
= Ans.
ma
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A quantity of an ideal monoatomic gas consists of n moles initially at temperature T1. The pressure and
volume are then slowly doubled in such a manner so as to trace out a straight line on a P-V diagram.
T1 n
P-V
W
7. For this process, the ratio is equal to (where W is work done by the gas) :
nRT1
W
(W ) :
nRT1
(A*) 1.5 (B) 3 (C) 4.5 (D) 6
V2 2 V1
3 P2 2P1
Sol. W = Area under the curve = P1V1
2
V2 2 V1
3 P2 2P1
W = = PV
2 1 1
Q
8. For the same process, the ratio is equal to (where Q is heat supplied to the gas) :
nRT1
Q
( Q ) :
nRT1
(A) 1.5 (B) 3 (C) 4.5 (D*) 6
Sol. Q = dU + W
dU = nCv dT
For final state P2V2 = 2P1 2V1
P2V2 = 2P1 2V1 = 4P1V1 = nR(4T1)
Hence final temp. is 4T1
4T1
3 9
dU = n . R . 3T1 = nRT1
2 2
3 9
Q= . nRT1 + nRT1 = 6nRT1
2 2
Q
=6
nRT1
C
9. If C is defined as the average molar specific heat for the process then has value
R
C
C
R
(A) 1.5 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 6
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. nC T = Q nC T = 6n RT1
dT = 4T1 – T1 = 3T1
C
n . C . 3T1 = 6nRT1 =2
R
10. Consider a uniform wire of length , cross-sectional area A. Young’s modulus of the material of the wire
is Y. Some information related to the wire is given in column-I and dependence of the result is given in
column-II. Then match the appropriate choice between the columns and match the list given in options :
Column-I Column-II
(A) Let us suspend the wire vertically from a (p) Young’s Modulus
rigid supported and attach a mass m at
its lower end. If the mass is slightly pulled
down and released, it executes S.H.M.
of a time period which will depend on
(B) Work done in stretching the wire up to length (q) elongation (x)
+ x will depend on
(C) If the given wire is fixed between two rigid (r) length ( )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(B) + x (q) (x)
(C) (r) ( )
(D) F (s) (A)
x
F = kx, k
k
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
T EST INFORMATION
1. A uniform cylinder of mass M lies on a fixed plane inclined at an angle with horizontal. A light string is
tied to the cylinder’s right most point, and a mass m hangs from the string, as shown. Assume that the
coefficient of friction between the cylinder and the plane is sufficiently large to prevent slipping. For the
cylinder to remain static, the value of mass m is-
M
m
m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Two blocks A (5kg) and B(2kg) attached to the ends of a spring constant 1120N/m are placed on a
smooth horizontal plane with the spring undeformed. Simultaneously velocities of 3m/s and 10m/s
along the line of the spring in the same direction are imparted to A and B then
A (5kg) B(2kg) 1120N/m
A B 3m/s 10m/s
-
k = 1120 N/m
5kg 2kg
(A) when the extension of the spring is maximum the velocities of A and B are zero.
(B*) the maximum extension of the spring is 25cm.
(C*) the first maximum compression occurs 3 /56 seconds after start.
(D*) maximum extension and maximum compression occur alternately.
(A) A B
(B*) 25cm
(C*) 3 /56
(D*)
Sol. At max. extension both should move with equal velocity.
k = 1120 N/m
5kg 2kg
By momentum conservation,
(5 × 3) + (2 × 10) = (5 + 2)V
V = 5 m/sec.
Now, by energy conservation
1 1 1 1
5 × 32 + × 2 × 102 = (5 + 2)V2 + kx2
2 2 2 2
Put V and k
1
xmax = m = 25 cm.
4
Also first maximum compression occurs at ;
3T 3 3 10 3
t= = 2 = 2 = sec.
4 4 k 4 7 1120 56
m1m 2
(where reduced mass, = )
m1 m 2
4. A variable force F = 10 t is applied to block B placed on a smooth surface. The coefficient of friction
between A & B is 0.5. (t is time in seconds. Initial velocities are zero)
B F = 10 t A B 0.5
(t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
fmax = × 3g
= 0.5 × 30 = 15 N
block A starts sliding when friction force becomes max. i.e. fmax = 15
at that instant (F.B. D.)
5. A point source S is centered in front of a 70 cm wide plane mirror. A man starts walking from the source
along a line parallel to the mirror in a single direction. Maximum distance that can be walked by man
without losing sight of the image of the source is _____.
S 70 cm
_____
[Ans. 70 cm ]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
70 70
From figure if man moves from source to point A 70cm . Then he can see image
2 2
70 70
If man moves from source to point B 70cm . then he can not loose sight of image.
2 2
6. A Plane mirror revolves as shown at constant angular velocity making 2 rps about its normal. With
what velocity will the light spot move along a spherical screen of radius of 10 m if the mirror is at the
centre of curvature of the screen and the light is incident from a fixed direction.
COMPREHENSION
A concave mirror of radius of curvature 20 cm is shown in the figure. A circular disc of diameter 1 cm is
placed on the principle axis of mirror with its plane perpendicular to the principal axis at a distance 15
cm from the pole of the mirror. The radius of disc starts increasing according to the law r = (0.5 + 0.1 t)
cm/sec where t is time is second.
20 cm 1 cm
(pole) 15 cm
r = (0.5 + 0.1 t) cm/sec t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. All dimensions of the disc are perpendicular to the principal axis. Hence all dimensions are equally
magnified, resulting in an image in the shape of a circular disc.
8. In the above question, the area of image of the disc at t = 1 second is :
t = 1
(A) 1.2 cm2 (B*) 1.44 cm2 (C) 1.52 cm2 (D) none of these
Sol. At t = 1 sec.
r = 0.5 t + 0.1 t = 0.6 cm
f 10
m= = =–2
f u 10 15
Radius of image = 2r = 1.2 cm
Area of image = (1.2)2 = 1.44 cm2 .
= 2r = 1.2 cm
= (1.2)2 = 1.44 cm2 .
9. What will be the rate at which the radius of image will be changing
(A*) 0.2 cm/sec increasing (B) 0.2 cm/sec decreasing
(C) 0.4 cm/sec increasing (D) 0.4 cm/sec decreasing
(A*) 0.2 cm/sec (B) 0.2 cm/sec
(C) 0.4 cm/sec (D) 0.4 cm/sec
dr
Sol. = 0.1
dt
rimage = |m|robject = 2robject
drimage dr
= 2. = 0.2 = 0.2 cm/sec.
dt dt
10. Consider a system of particles (it may be rigid or non rigid). In the column- some condition on force
and torque is given. Column- contains the effects on the system. (Letters have usual meaning)
( ) - -
Column-I Column-II
(A) Fres 0 (p) Psystem will be constant
(B) res 0 (q) L system will be constant
(C) External force is absent (r) total work done by all forces will be zero
(D) No nonconservative force acts. (s) total mechanical energy will be constant.
-I -II
(A) F = 0 (p) Psystem
(B) =0 (q) L system
(C) (r)
(D) (s)
Ans. (A) p (B) q (C) p,q (D) s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A) If resultant force is zero, Psystem will be constant.
(B) If resultant torque is zero, L system will be constant.
(C) If external forces are absent, both Psystem and L system will be constant.
(D) If no non conservative force acts, total mechanical energy of system will be constant.
(A) P
(B) L
(C) P L
(D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-26
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
2. The molecules of an ideal gas have 6 degrees of freedom. The temperature of the gas is T. The
average translational kinetic energy of its molecules is:
6 T
3 6 1
(A*) kT (B) kT (C) k T (D) kT
2 2 2
3. An ideal gas is taken through cyclic process as shown in the figure. The net work done by the gas is:
4. A person AB of height 170 cm is standing infront of a plane mirror. His eyes are at height 164 cm. At
what distance from P should a hole be made in the mirror so that he cannot see the top of his head.
170 cm 164 cm P
(A*) 167 cm (B) 161 cm (C) 163 cm (D) none of these
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A convex mirror cannot form (for real or virtual object):
:
(A*) real, diminished image (B) virtual, diminished image
(C) real, enlarged image (D) virtual, enlarged image
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
8. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other at 90º. A ray of light is incident on one mirror and the
reflected light goes to the other mirror. The ray will undergo a total deviation of :
90º
(A*) 180º (B) 90º (C) 45º
(D) cannot be found because angle of incidence is not given.
i'
Sol.
i
9. AB is an incident beam of light and CD is a reflected beam (the number of reflections for this may be 1
or more than 1) of light. AB & CD are separated by some distance (may be large). It is possible by
placing what type of mirror on the right side.
AB CD ( )AB CD
()
10. A particle performs S.H.M. on x axis with amplitude A and time period T. The time taken by the particle
to travel a distance A/5 starting from rest is:
x- A T
A/5
T T 4 T 1 T 1
(A) (B*) cos 1 (C) cos 1 (D) sin 1
20 2 5 2 5 2 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Particle is starting from rest, i.e. from one of its extreme position.
A
As particle moves a distance we can represent it on a circle as shown.
5
A
5
y
4A / 5 4 4
cos = = cos–1
A 5 5
4A/5 A/5
1 P
x
4 4
t = cos –1
t= cos–1
A
5 5 Q
1 4
= cos –1
5
Method : As starts from rest i.e. from extreme position x = A sin ( t + )
x = A sin ( t + )
A
At t = 0 ; x = A = A– = A cos t
2 5
4 4
= cos t t = cos–1
5 5
T 4
t= cos–1
2 5
11. The resultant amplitude due to super position of x1 = sin t, x2 = 5 sin ( t + 37º) and
x3 = 15 cos t is:
x1 = sin t, x2 = 5 sin ( t + 37º) x3 = 15 cos t :
(A) 17 (B) 21 (C*) 13 (D) none of these
Sol. x1 = sin t ; x2 = 5 sin ( t + 37º)
x3 = 15 sin ( t – /2)
By the phasor diagram;
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. Heat required to vaporize 4g of water by boiling at 373 K is 2160 calories. The specific heat of water in
this condition is :
4g 373 K 2160
(A) 0.36 cal/g-K (B) 5.4 cal/g-K (C) zero (D*) infinity
Sol. Q = mS T
Since in boiling T = 0, S =
T = 0, S =
14. A string vibrates in 5 segments to a frequency of 480 Hz. The frequency that will cause it to vibrate in 2
segments will be
5 480Hz 2
(A) 96 Hz (B*) 192 Hz (C) 1200 Hz (D) 2400 Hz
15. When a wave pulse travelling in a string is reflected from a rigid wall to which string is tied as shown in
figure. For this situation two statements are given below.
(pulse)
v
(1) The reflected pulse will be in same orientation of incident pulse due to a phase change of radians
(2) During reflection the wall exert a force on string in upward direction
For the above given two statements choose the correct option given below.
(A) Only (1) is true (B) Only (2) is true (C) Both are true (D*) Both are wrong
(1)
(2)
(A) (1) (B) (2) (C) (D*)
Sol. Reflected pulse will be inverted as it is reflected by a denser medium. The wall exerts force in
downward direction.
16. A stone is projected from ground and hits a smooth vertical wall after 1 sec. and again falls back on the
ground. The time taken by stone to reach the ground after the collision is 3 secs. The maximum height
reached by the same stone if the vertical wall were not to be present is. (g = 10 m/s2)
1 sec.
3 secs
(g = 10 m/s2)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Time of flight of projectile depends on vertical component of velocity and not on the horizontal
component. Collision of the stone with the vertical wall changes only the horizontal component of
velocity of stone.
Thus the total time of flight in absence of wall is also T = 1 + 3 = 4sec
T = 1 + 3 = 4sec
2u y
=4 or uy = 20 m/s
g
2u 2y 400
or Hmax = = = 20 metres.
2g 20
17. A thick plane mirror shows a number of images of the filament of an electric bulb. Of these, the
brightest image is the-
(A) First (B*) Second (C) Last (D) Fourth
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
Sol. A thick mirror forms a number of images. Image is formed by front surface which is unpolished and
hence, reflects only a small part of light, while second image is formed by polished surface which
reflects most of intensity. Hence second image is brightest.
(front)
18. A ball rise with constant velocity, to the surface of a liquid whose density is four times that of the ball.
The ratio of the frictional force to weight of the ball is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C*) 3 (D) 4
19. The work done per unit volume in stretching a wire is
(A*) (1/2) stress x strain (B) (1/4) stress x elongation
(C) (1/2) stress x elongation force x elongation (D) force x elongation
(A*) (1/2) x (B) (1/4) x
(C) (1/2) x x (D) x
20. A particle performs uniform circular motion with an angular momentum L. If the frequency of particle's
motion is doubled and its kinetic energy is halved, the angular momentum becomes :
L
(A) 2L (B) 4L (C) L/2 (D*) L/4
Sol. L= '=2
1 1 2 1
I = ' '2
2 2 2
2
I = 2
´4
2
I
´=
8
I I L
L´ = ´ ´ = 2 = =
8 4 4
NCERT Questions to be discussed
Q. No. 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.15, 9.16, 9.37
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Board Level Questions
1. Derive mirror formula and expression for linear magnification by drawing suitable ray diagram.
2. Draw a ray diagram to show lateral shift produced by a glass slab and prove that net deviation
produced by glass slab is zero.
3. What is total internal reflection? How it differs from normal reflection. What is role of TIR in optical
fibres?
TIR
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A ring of radius R lies in vertical plane. A bead of mass ‘m’ can move along the ring without friction.
Initially the bead is at rest at the bottom most point on ring. The minimum constant horizontal speed v
with which the ring must be pulled such that the bead completes the vertical circle
R ‘m’
The condition for bead to complete the vertical circle is, its speed at top position
vtop 0
From conservation of energy
1 1
m + mg (2R) = mv2
2 2
or v = 4gR
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A block of mass M rests on a rough horizontal surface. The co-efficient of friction between the block and
the surface is . A force F = M g acting at angle with the vertical side of the block pulls it. In which of
the following cases, the block can be pulled along the surface?
M
F = M g
(A) tan (B) cot (C) cot ( /2) (D*) cot ( /2) >
Sol. N = Mg(1 – cos )
(A*) The maximum speed is after t = s. (B*) Time taken to cover first 0.10 m, t = s.
20 20
(C) Time taken to cover first 0.05 m, t = s. (D*) Time taken to cover first 0.05 m, t = s.
40 30
(A*) t = s (B*) 0.10 m t = s
20 20
(C) 0.05 m t = s
40
(D*) 0.05 m t = s
30
K
Sol. = = 10 rad/s
m
2 2
T= s
10
2
Maximum speed will be at the natural length of the spring at T/4 = s.
10 4 20
T
Time taken to cover 0.1 m is s
204
1 T 2 2 2 K
Time taken to cover × 0.1m is = s = = 10 rad/s
2 4 3 10 4 3 30 m
T= 2 2
s
10
2
T/4 = = s.
10 4 20
T
0.1 m s
4 20
1
T 2 2 2
2 × 0.1m = s
4 3 10 4 3 30
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A vessel is partly filled with liquid. When the vessel is cooled to a lower temperature, the space in the
vessel, unoccupied by the liquid remains constant. Then the volume of the liquid (VL), volume of the
vessel (Vv), the coefficients of cubical expansion of the material of the vessel ( v) and of the liquid ( L)
are related as
(VL), (Vv),
( v) ( L)
(A*) L> v
(B) L
< v
(C) v/ L=Vv/VL (D*) v/ L=VL/Vv
Sol. VL = VV
YL VV
L
VL = VV
V
or
YV VL
but VV > VL L
> V
5. In the figure, an object is placed at distance 25 cm from the surface of a convex mirror, and a plane
mirror is set so that the image formed by the two mirrors lie adjacent to each other in the same plane.
The plane mirror is placed at 20 cm from the object. What is the radius of curvature of the convex
mirror?
25 cm
20 cm
?
Sol. Image due to plane mirror will form at a distance of 20 cm left of the mirror.
Since image formed by two mirrrors lie adjacent to each other.
For convex mirror, image position is 15 cm towards left.
u = – 25 cm
v = + 15 cm
1 1 1 2
using + = =
v u f R
1 1 2
– =
15 25 R
R = 75 cm.
Ans. R = 75 cm.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. In the figure shown M1 and M2 are two spherical mirrors of focal length 20 cm each. AB and CD are
their principal axes respectively which are separated by 1 cm. PQ is an object of height 2 cm and kept
at distance 30 cm from M1. The separation between the mirrors is 50 cm. Consider two successive
reflections first on M1 then on M2. Find the size of the 2nd image. Also find distances of end points P
and Q of that image from the line AB.
20 M1 M2 AB CD
1 PQ 2 M1 30
50 M1 M2
AB P Q
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A point object is placed on principal axis of a concave mirror ( of focal length 15 cm) at a distance u =
61 cm from pole. A slab of thickness t = 3 cm and refractive index = 1.5 is placed with two sides
perpendicular to principal axis, such that its nearest face is x0 cm from pole. The final image of object is
to be considered after refraction by slab, reflection by mirror and final refraction by slab.
15 cm (pole) u = 61 cm
t = 3 cm = 1.5
x0 cm
f =15cm f =15cm
object
x0 x0
9. If x0 = 30 cm and the object is given velocity 18 m/s towards left then the speed of image at that instant
is
x0 = 30 cm 18 m/s
(A*) 2 m/s (B) 6 m/s (C) 9 m/s (D) 162 m/s
Sol. 8 to 10
1 1
The shift due to slab is t 1 31 = 1cm towards left. Hence the object appears to mirror at a
1 .5
distance 61 – 1 = 60 cm.
1 1 1
From mirror formula we get v =20 cm.
v u f
1 1
t 1 31 = 1cm 61 – 1 =
1. 5
60 cm
1 1 1
v = 20 cm.
v u f
f =15cm =1.5
1cm I object
1cm
x0
t = 3cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Hence the mirror forms the image at v = 20 cms towards right. The slab again causes a shift of 1cm
towards right. hence the final image is formed at a distance of 21 cm from pole.
Shifting of slab towards left does no cause any change to position of final image .
The slab only causes apparent shift, but does not cause any change to velocity of image. Hence the
velocity of image is only due to mirror. The object appears at a distance u= 60 cm from mirror and
mirror forms its image at v=20 cm. Hence the velocity of image is
2 2
v 20
=× velocity of object= 18 = 2 m/s towards right
u 60
v = 20 cms 1cm
21 cm
u = 60 cm v = 20 cm
2 2
v 20
=× = 18 = 2 m/s
u 60
10. In column-II some situations are listed and correspondingly a physical quantity is defined as x match
the entries of column-I with column-II :
-II x -I -II
Column-I Column-II
-I -II
(A) x increases (p) Consider an ideal gas in a closed container.
Temperature of gas is increased
x = no. of molecules moving with most probable speed
x =
(B) x decreases (q) If unit of mass, length and time are doubled
x = numerical value of gravitational constant
,
x =
(C) x = remains same (r) An object moves from forcus to pole of a concave mirror
with constant speed along principle axis
x = speed of image as object moves
x =
O
x = wavelength of sound as observed by O
x = O
Ans. (A) – s ; (B) – p, r ; (C) – q
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. For the given incident ray as shown in figure, the condition of total internal reflection of the ray will be
satisfied if the refractive index of block will be :
3 1 2 1 3 7
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 2 2 6
3 1 2 1 3 7
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 2 2 6
Sol. For total internal reflection angle of incidence should be greater than critical angle. For total internal
reflection to take place, angle of incidence > critical angle
i.e. i>C
or >C
or sin > sin C
1
but sin C =
1
i.e. , = ... (i)
cos r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
From Snell’s law,
sin 45 1
= sin r =
sin r 2
1
cos r = 1 sin 2 r = 1 2
2
Thus, equation (i) becomes (i)
1 1
> 2
=
1 1
1 1 2
2 2 2
1 3
or 2
– =1 or =
2 2
10
2. A particle A of mass kg is moving in the positive direction of x. Its initial position is x = 0 & initial
7
velocity is 1 m/s. The velocity at x = 10 is: (use the graph given)
10
kg A x- x = 0 1m/s
7
x = 10 : ()
Power (in watts)
()
4
x
10 (in m)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A car is initially at rest, 330 m away from a stationary observer. It begins to move towards the observer
with an acceleration of 1.1 m/s2, sounding its horn continuously. 20 second later, the driver stops
sounding the horn. The velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s. The observer will hear the sound of the horn
for a duration of:
330 m 1.1 m/s2,
20 sec.
330 m/s
(A) 20 sec (B) 21 sec (C) 62/3 sec (D*) 58/3 sec
Sol.
dN
dV
V0
speed V
(A*) The value of aV0 is 2N. aV0 2N
(B*) The ratio Vavg / V0 is equal to 2/3. V/ V0 2/3
(C*) The ratio Vrms / V0 is equal to 1/ 2 . V/ V0 1/ 2
(D*) Three fourth of the total particle has a speed between 0.5 V0 and V0.
0.5 V0 V0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Area under the curve is equal to number of molecules of the gas sample. Hence
1
N = . a . V0 aV0 = 2N
2
V0
1 1 a 2 Vavg 2
Vavg = vN( V )dV = C. .V dV = V
N N v0 3 0 V0 3
0 0
V0
2 1 1 a V2 Vrms 1
v rms V 2N( V )dV = V2 .V dV = 0
N N v0 2 V0 2
0 0
3
Area under the curve from 0.5 V0 to V0 is of total area.
4
3
0.5 V0 V0
4
5. A particle is executing SHM between points -Xm and Xm , as shown in figure-I. The velocity V(t) of the
particle is partially graphed and shown in figure-II. Two points A and B corresponding to time t1 and
time t2 respectively are marked on the V(t) curve.
–I -Xm Xm V(t)
–IIA B, t1 t2 V(t)
+x B
O Xm t1
-Xm
t2 t
A Figure-II
Figure-I
(A) At time t1 , it is going towards Xm .
(B*) At time t1, its speed is decreasing.
(C*) At time t2, its position lies in between –Xm and O.
(D) The phase difference between points A and B must be expressed as 90° < < 180°.
(A) t1 , Xm
(B*) t1 ,
(C*) t2 ,–Xm O
(D) A B , 90° < < 180°
Sol. At time t1, velocity of the particle is negative i.e. going towards –Xm. From the graph, at time t1, its
speed is decreasing. Therefore particle lies in between –Xm and 0.
At time t2, velocity is positive and its magnitude is less than maximum i.e. it has yet not crossed O.
It lies in between –Xm and 0.
Phase of particle at time t1 is (180 + 1). Phase of particle at time t2 is (270 + 2)
Phase difference is 90 + ( 2 – 1)
2 – 1 can be negative making < 90° but can not be more than 90°.
t1 –Xm t1
–Xm 0
t2 O –Xm
0
t1 (180 + 1). t2 (270 + 2)
90 + ( 2 – 1)
< 90° 2 – 1 90°
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. When the temperature of a copper coin is raised by 80 oC, its diameter increases by 0.2%,
80 oC 0.2%
(A*) percentage rise in the area of a face is 0.4%
0.4%
(B) percentage rise in the thickness is 0.4%
0.4%
(C*) percentage rise in the volume is 0.6%
0.6%
(D*) coefficient of linear expansion of copper is 0.25x10-4 / oC.
0.25x10-4 / oC
A
Sol. × 100 = 2× × 100
A
% increase in Area % = 2 × 0.2 = 0.4
V
× 100 = 3 × 0.2 = 0.6 %
V
Since l=l T
= 0.25 × 10–4 / ºC
7. A uniform ring of radius 4 cm placed on a rough horizontal surface is given a sharp impulse as in figure.
As a consequence it acquires a linear velocity of 2 m/s. If coefficient of friction between the ring and the
horizontal surface be 0.4. Find the velocity of centre of mass after which the ring will start pure rolling.
4 cm
2 m/s 0.4
Ans. 1
Sol. Suppose velocity of ring
When it starts pure rolling is v. Angular momentum can be constant about point of contact as there is no
external torque acting about it. Thus
m.2.R = m.R2 + mvR
v = 1m/s
[ Ans.: 1 m/s]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
Consider the situation in figure. The bottom of the pot is a reflecting plane mirror, S is a small fish and T
is a human eye. Refractive index of water is 4/3.
S T
4/3
60 cm
60 cm
30 cm
8. At what distance from itself will the fish see the image of the eye in upward direction?
(A) 35 cm (B) 45 cm (C) 55 cm (D*) 110 cm
Sol. Distance of image of eye from fish in upward direction
d 60 4
d= + 30 = = 60 × + 30 = 110 cm
nrel 3
1
4
3
9. At what distance from itself will the fish see the image of the eye in downward direction?
(A) 90 cm (B) 110 cm (C*) 170 cm (D) 180 cm
Sol. Distance of first image of eye from the refraction at water surface
60
v= = 80
1
4
3
Distance of image of eye from mirror due to refraction
= 80 + 60 = 140
Distance of second image in downward direction from mirror = 140 cm
Distance of second image from fish in downward direction = 140 + 30 = 170 cm
60
v= = 80
1
4
3
= 80 + 60 = 140
= 140 cm
= 140 + 30 = 170 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Figure shows snap shot of a progressive wave and standing wave along a string. Match the column I
and II.
(snap shot)
-I -II
Progressive wave
y
A D
x
B
C
Standing wave
y
E F H
G
Column-I Column-II
-I -II
(A) Particles in same phase (P) A & D
(B) Particles with same amplitude (Q) E & F
of oscillations
(R) B & C
(C) Particles always having same speed (S) G & H
Ans. A P, Q ; B P, R, S ; C P, S
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Three containers of same base area, same height are filled with three different liquids of same mass as
shown in the figure. If F1, F2, F3 are the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the container in case
I, II and III respectively, then we have the relation:
F1, F2 F3 I, II III
(A) F1 = F2 = F3 (B) F1 > F2 > F3 (C) F3 > F2 > F1 (D*) F2 < F3 < F1
Sol. Force on bottom surface = gH × A
2. A particle is projected with a velocity u making an angle with the horizontal. The instantaneous
power of the gravitational force
'u'
(A*) varies linearly with time
(B) is constant throughout
(C) is negative for complete path
(D) None of the above
Sol. At any time
v = [(u cos ) î + (u sin – gt) ĵ ]
P = F.v ( mg ĵ). u cos î (u sin gt ) ĵ = mg2 t – mgu sin
Hence, power varies linearly with time.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. In a cyclic process, a gas is taken from state A to B via path- as shown in the indicator diagram and
taken back to state A from state B via path- . In the complete cycle :
A B
B A
(A*) work is done on the gas. (B) heat is given to the gas
(C) no work is done by the gas. (D) nothing can be said about work as data is insufficient
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
Sol. As work done in state ( ) is more than in state ( )
4. The equation of a string wave is given by (all quantity expressed in S.I. units) Y = 5 sin10 (t – 0.01x)
along the x-axis. The magnitude of phase difference between the points separated by a distance of 10
m along x- axis is
S.I. Y = 5 sin10 (t – 0.01x) x-
x 10 m
(A) /2 (B*) (C) 2 (D) /4.
Sol. The magnitude of phase difference between the points separated by distance 10 metres
10
= k × 10 = [10 × 0.] × 10 =
5. Two interferring waves have the same wavelength, frequency and amplitude. They are travelling in the
same direction but 900 out of phase compared to individual waves. The resultant wave will have the
same.
(A) amplitude and velocity but different wavelength
(B) frequency and velocity but different wavelength
(C*) wavelength and velocity but different amplitude
(D) amplitude and frequency but different wavelength
900
(A)
(B)
(C*)
(D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. The potential energy of a particle executing SHM changes from maximum to minimum in 5 s. Then the
time period of SHM is :
5
(A) 5 s (B) 10 s (C) 15 s (D*) 20 s
Sol. P.E. is maximum at extreme position and minimum at mean position.
T
Time to go from extreme position to mean position is, t = ; where T is time period of SHM
4
T
t = ; T
4
T
5s=
4
T = 20 s.
7. A force F (3 î 4 ĵ ) N acts on a 2 kg movable object that moves from an initial position di 3 î 2 ĵ m
to a final position d f 5 î 4 ˆj m in 6 s. The average power delivered by the force during the interval is
equal to :
F (3 î 4 ˆj) N 2 kg
d i 3 î 2 ĵ m d 5 î 4 ˆj m 6
f
50 50
(A*) 8 watt (B) watt (C) 15 watt (D) watt.
6 3
50 50
(A*) 8 (B) (C) 15 (D)
6 3
Sol. d df di = 8 î 6 ĵ
W = F.d = 24 + 24 = 48 J
W
Pav = = 8 Watt
t
Sol. Wavelength and velocity are medium dependent. Final amplitude is decided by the superposition of
individual amplitudes.
8. The velocity of sound in a gas at temperature 27º C is V then in the same gas its velocity will be 2V at
temperature :
27º C V 2V
(A) 54° C (B) 327° C (C*) 927° C (D) 108° C
Sol. In a gas,
RT
V= V
M
V 300
= T = 300 × 4 = 1200 K
2V M
= 927º C Ans.
9. In an adiabatic expansion of air the volume increases by 5 %. The percentage change in pressure is:
5 % -
(A) 2 % (B) 3 % (C) 5 % (D*) 7 %
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3 4
10. A thin prism of glass is placed in air and water respectively. If ng = and nw = , then the ratio of
2 3
deviation produced by the prism for a small angle of incidence when placed in air and water separately
is :
3 4
ng = nw = ,
2 3
(A) 9 : 8 (B) 4 : 3 (C) 3 : 4 (D*) 4 : 1
3 A
Sol. a
= 1 ×A=
2 2
3/2 A
W
= 1 A =
4 /3 8
air 4
=
water 1
11. The moment of inertia of a door of mass m, length 2 and width about its longer side is
m 2
2
11m 5m 2 m 2
(A) (B) (C*) (D) none of these
24 24 3
m 2
Sol. (C) (about YY') =
12
m 2
(C) (YY' ) =
12
Using parallel axis theorem : ()
2
m m 2 m 2
(about AD) AD = = Ans.
12 4 3
mass
12. The dimensions of are same as that of :
Force cons tan t of SHM
( ) )
SHM
1
(A) time () (B*) (time)2 ()2 (C) acceleration () (D)
(acceleration) ( )
13. A particle is moving with velocity 5 m/s towards east and its velocity changes to 5 m/s north in 10 sec.
Find the acceleration.
5 m/s 10 sec 5 m/s
1 1
(A) 2 N–W (B*) N–W (C) N–E (D) 2 N–E
2 2
V1 V
Sol. a =
t
a = 5 ĵ 5 î
10
5 2 1
| a |= = m/s2
10 2
Direction north west
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. A force of 6N acts on a body at rest of mass 1 kg. During this time, the body attains a velocity of 30
m/s. The time for which the force acts on the body is-
(A) 10 seconds (B) 8 seconds
(C) 7 seconds (D*) 5 seconds
1 6N 30
(A) 10 (B) 8 (C) 7 (D*) 5
Sol. v = u + at
F
30 = 0 + ×t
m
6
30 = ×t
1
t = 5 sec.
15. A particle is projected along a rough plane inclined up at an angle of 45° with the horizontal, if the
1
coefficient of friction is , then the retardation is-
2
g g g 1 g 1
(A) (B) (C*) 1 (D) 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
45°
1
2
g g g 1 g 1
(A) (B) (C*) 1 (D) 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
g 1
Sol. a = g sin 45º + g cos45º = 1
2 2
16. Two springs have their force constant as k1 and k2(k1 > k2). When they are stretched by the same force
up to equilibrium -
k1 k2(k1 > k2)
(A) No work is done by this force in case of both the springs
(B) Equal work is done by this force in case of both the springs
(C*) More work is done by this force in case of second spring
(D) More work is done by this force in case of first spring
F 1 F2
Sol. F = K1x1 , x1 = , W1 = K1 x12 =
K1 2 2K 1
F2
similarly W2 = since K1 > K2 , W1 < W2
2K 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. A particle P will be stationary with respect to bowl inside a hemispherical bowl of radius 0.5 m at a height
0.2 m from the bottom when the bowl is rotated at an angular speed (g = 10 m/sec2)-
0.5m
0.3m
0.4m P
0.2m
0.5 0.2 P
(g = 10 m/sec2)-
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-26
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-27
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of image of an object placed between the optical centre and
focus of a thin convex lens. Write two characteristics of the image formed. Using this diagram, derive
the relation between object distance u, image distance v and focal length f of the convex lens. Draw the
graph showing the variation of v with u.
u v f v u
4. Figure shows a conv ex spherical surface with centre of curv ature C, separating the two
media of refractive indices n 1 and n 2 , Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of the
image of a point object O lying on the principal axis. Derive the relationship between
the object and image distance in terms of refractive indices of the media and the
radius of curvature R of the surface.
C n1 n 2 ,
O
R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-28
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. As shown in figure, S is a point on a uniform disc rolling with uniform angular velocity on a fixed rough
horizontal surface. The only forces acting on the disc are its weight and contact forces exerted by
horizontal surface. Which graph best represents the magnitude of the acceleration of point S as a
function of time
S
S
Sol. Since angular velocity is constant, acceleration of centre of mass of disc is zero. Hence the magnitude
of acceleration of point S is 2x where is angular speed of disc and x is the distance of S from centre.
Therefore the graph is
S 2x
x S
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. For the angle of minimum deviation of a prism to be equal to its refracting angle, the prism must be
made of a material whose refractive index :
(A) lies between 2 and 1 (B*) lies between 2 and 2
(C) is less than 1 (D) is greater than 2
(A) 2 1 (B*) 2 2
(C) 1 (D) 2
Sol. min
= i + e–A
min
= A then
2A = i + e in case of min i = e min
i = e
A
2A = 2i r1 = r2 =
2
i=A
then 1 sin i = n sin r1
A
sin A = n sin
2
A A A
2 sin cos = n sin
2 2 2
A
2 cos =n
2
when A = 90° = imax
then nmin = 2
i = A= 0 nmax = 2
(A*) If light is incident on surface 1 from left, the image formed after the first refraction is definitely
Virtual for a real object :
1
(B*) If the object is real, then the final image formed after two refractions may be real :
(C*) If the object is real, then the final image formed after two refractions may be virtual :
(D) If light is incident on surface 1 from left, the image formed after the first refraction is definitely real
for a real object :
1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2 1 2 1
Sol.
v u R
( 2 – 1) is +ve and R is – ve if u is –ve, v will always be –ve
i.e. for real object image is always virtual.
Sol. Hindi
n1 < n2
n2 n 2 n1 n1
= – ve
v ( u) ( R)
(1)
n1 > n2
n2 (n1 n 2 ) n1 n n 2 n1
= 1
v ( u) ( R) u R
n1 n 2 n1 (n1 n2 )R
> or u < .... (2)
u R n1
n1 n2
u > R .... (3)
n1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A small object stuck on the surface of a glass sphere (n = 1.5) is viewed from the diametrically opposite
position. Find transverse magnification.
(n = 1.5)
Ans. 3
n2 n1 n2 n1
Sol. v u = R
1 1 .5 1 1.5
= v = –4R
v 2R R
n1v 1.5 ( 4R )
m= =
n 2u 1 ( 2R )
m = 3.
5. A man is standing at the edge of a 1m deep swimming pool, completely filled with a liquid of refractive
index. 3 / 2 The eyes of the man are 3 m above the ground. A coin located at the bottom of the pool
appears to be at an angle of depression of 300 with reference to the eye of man. Then horizontal
distance (represented by x in the figure) of the coin from the eye of the man is ____________ mm.
1m 3 / 2
3 m 300
_________x
Ans. d = 4000 mm
Sol.
3
sin 60º = sinr r = 45º
2
S = h = 1m
y = H tan600 = 3m
x= S + y = 4m = 4000 mm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
There is an insect inside a cabin eying towards a thick glass plate P1. Insect sees the images of light
source across the glass plate P1 ouside the cabin. Cabin is made of thick glass plates of refractive
3
index = and thickness 3 cm. Insect is eying from the middle of the cabin as shown in figure. (glass
2
plates are partially reflective and consider only paraxial rays)
P1
3
P1 = 3 cm
2
6. At what distance (from eye of insect) will the eye see first image?
() ?
(A) 5 cm (B) 7 cm (C) 11 cm (D*) 14 cm
Sol. As it is posible only when, when light reflects from P1 after refraction from the plate P2 of light coming
from light source.
P2 P1
First image will form due to reflection from the right surface of P1 . As light ray is falling on P1 from 11
cm so it will form image at 11 cm in left. So, distance of first image from insect is 11 + 3 = 14 cm.
P1 P1 11 cm
11 cm 11 + 3 = 14 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. At what distance (from eye of insect) will the eye see second image?
() ?
(A) 11 cm (B) 13 cm (C) 16.5 cm (D*) 18 cm
Sol. Second image will form due to reflection on left surface of P1.
P1
33 39
For left surface of P1 light seems to coming from the distance = +3= cm
2 2
33 39
P1 = +3= cm
2 2
45
So, light seems to coming from cm from right surfaces of P1 .
2
45
P1 cm
2
45 3
So, final position of second image will be = = 15 cm.
2 2
= 45 3 = 15 cm
2 2
So, distance of second image from insect = 18 cm.
= 18 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. A sample of gas goes from state A to state B in four different manners, as shown by the graphs. Let W
be the work done by the gas and U be change in internal energy along the path AB. Correctly match
the graphs with the statements provided.
A B
AB W U
P
(p) W U
P B
(B) (q) Both W and U are negative
A
T
(q) W U
T A
(C) (r) W is positive whereas U is negative
B
V
(r) W U
V
A
(D) (s) W is negative whereas U is positive
B
P
(s) W U
Ans. (A) s (B) q (C) r (D) q
Sol. in (A), V is on vertical axis.
(a) , V
Part-I
(-I)
P
V is decreasing, W is negative.V , W
As negative work in part-II is greater than positive work in part-I, net work during the process is
negative.
Using PV = nRT and as Vremains same for initial and final points of the process, it is obvious that final
temp. is greater than initial temperature as pressure has increased. Therefore dU is positive. Hence
option (S) is connected with (A).
Similar arguments can be applied to other graphs.
-II -I,
PV = nRT V
dU (S), (a)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A body of mass 'm' sliding down a movable inclined plane of mass 2 m, assuming friction is absent
everywhere the kinetic energy of 2 m as a function of time is: (m remains on 2m)
'm' 2 m
2 m (m 2m )
2. A particle is projected from a point P (2, 0, 0)m with a velocity 10 m/s making an angle 45º with the
horizontal. The plane of projectile motion passes through a horizontal line PQ which makes an angle of
37º with positive x-axis, xy plane is horizontal. The coordinates of the point where the particle will strike
the line PQ is: (Take g = 10 m/s2)
P (2, 0, 0)m 45° 10 m/s
PQ x 37º xy
PQ : ( g = 10 m/s2)
(A*) (10, 6, 0)m (B) (8, 6, 0)m (C) (10, 8, 0)m (D) (6, 10, 0)m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Range = 10 m.
For point where particle strikes line PQ
= 10 m.
PQ
3. A cylinderical optical fibre (quarter circular shape) of refractive index n = 2 and diameter d = 4mm is
surrounded by air. A light beam is sent into the fibre along its axis as shown in figure. Then the smallest
outer radius R (as shown in figure) for which no light escapes after first incident on curved surface of
fibre is :
n = 2 d = 4mm () ( )
R
()
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A source of sound, emitting frequency of 300 Hz, moving towards a stationary reflecting wall with speed
50 m/sec. There are five observes A,B,C,D and E as shown in figure. Speed of sound is 350 m/sec.
300 Hz 50 m/sec.
A,B,C,D E 350 m/sec.
5. Object O is moving with velocity î 2 ĵ 3k̂ and mirror (lies in y-z plane) is moving with velocity 2 î .
O î 2 ĵ 3k̂ (y-z ) 2î
O x
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Velocity of image along x-axis
= 2 vmx – vox = (2 × 2 – 1) = 3
y and z components of velocity of image are equal to y and z components of velocity of object
v i = 3 î 2 ĵ 3k̂
v i m = v i – v m = î 2 ĵ 3k̂
v i o = v i – v o = 2 î
v o m = v o – v m = – î 2 ĵ 3k̂
x- y z y z
= 2 vmx – v ox = (2 × 2 – 1) = 3
v i = 3 î 2 ĵ 3k̂
v i m = v i – v m = î 2 ĵ 3k̂
v i o = v i – v o = 2 î
v o m = v o – v m = – î 2 ĵ 3k̂
6. A 2 kg uniform cylinder is placed on a plank of mass 4 kg which in turn rests on a smooth horizontal
plane. A constant horizontal force of 20 N is applied on the plank. If no slipping occurs between cylinder
and plank obtain the acceleration of the cylinder and the plank.
2 kg (plank)
20 N 4 kg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A sinusoidal wave is propagating in negative x–direction in a string stretched along x-axis. A particle of
string at x = 2m is found at its mean position and it is moving in positive y direction at t = 1 sec. If the
amplitude of the wave, the wavelength and the angular frequency of the wave are 0.1meter, /4 meter
and 4 rad/sec respectively.
x– (sinusoidal) x-
t = 1 sec x = 2m
y- 0.1 m, /4 m
4 rad/sec
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In the situation shown, a plane surface seperates two medium of refractive index n1 & n2
(consider near normal incidence)
n1 n2
()
Column–I Column–II
(A) A real object is placed in the medium n1. (p) Real
The image fromed can be
(D) If n1 is denser medium and a real object is moving away (s) In medium n2
from plane surface in the medium n2. The image formed
will be
(t)
Ans. (A) – q ,r, t ; (B) – q,s,t ; (C) – p,s,t ; (D) – q,s,t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. In SHM, the phase difference between the displacement and acceleration is:
:
(A) 0 (B) /2 (C*) (D) 2
2. The acceleration of a particle moving along x-axis is a = – 100x + 50. It is released from x = 2. Here ‘a’
and ‘x’ are in S.I units. The motion of particle will be :
x- a = – 100x + 50 x = 2 ‘a’ ‘x’ S.I
(A) periodic, oscillatory but not SHM.
(B) periodic but not oscillatory.
(C) oscillatory but not periodic.
(D*) Simple harmonic with amplitude 1.5 m 1.5
Sol. The equation a = – 100x + 50 (a = – kx form)
itself shows that the particle performs SHM
Since particle is released from x = 2 so this is an extreme position.
Mean position is at x = 0.5
so, amplitude of SHM = 2 – 0.5 = 1.5
Hence (D).
3. The average velocity of molecules of a gas of molecular weight M at temperature T is:
T M
3RT 8RT 2RT
(A*) 0 (B) (C) (D)
M M M
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. The average rotational kinetic energy of hydrogen molecule at a temperature T is E. The average
translational kinetic energy of helium at same temperature will be :
T E
2E 5E 3E
(A) (B) (C) E (D*)
3 3 2
Sol. Law of equipartition of energy
1
< KER > = 2 . kT = E
2
1
< KET > = 3. kT
2
3E
< KET > =
2
5. For an adiabatic process graph between PV and V for a monoatomic gas is :
PV V
PV PV PV PV
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. The resultant amplitude due to superposition of two waves y1 = 5sin ( t kx) and y2 = 5 cos ( t kx 150°)
y1 = 5sin ( t kx) y2 = 5 cos ( t kx 150°)
(A*) 5 (B) 5 3 (C) 5 2 3 (D) 5 2 3
12. Under similar conditions of temperature and pressure, In which of the following gases the
velocity of sound will be largest.
(A*) H2 (B) N2 (C) He (D) CO2
RT
Sol. The speed of sound in air is v =
M
RT
Sol. v =
M
13. An observer approaches towards a stationary source of sound at constant velocity and recedes away at
the same speed. The graph of wavelength observed with time is :
14. A cylinder rolls without slipping over a horizontal plane. The radius of the cylinder is equal to 10cm. The
curvature radius of trajectory traced out by the point A in figure shown, is :
10 cm A
:
A
C
B
15. The equation of a string wave is given by (all quantity expressed in S.I. units) Y = 5 sin10 (t – 0.01x)
along the x-axis. The magnitude of phase difference between the points separated by a distance of 10
m along x- axis is
Y = 5 sin10 (t – 0.01x) x- S.I.
x 10 m
(A) /2 (B*) (C) 2 (D) /4.
Sol. The magnitude of phase difference between the points separated by distance 10 metres
10
= k × 10 = [10 × 0.01] × 10 =
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. Water of mass m2 = 1 kg is contained in a copper calorimeter of mass m1 = 1 kg. Their common
temperature t = 10°C. Now a piece of ice of mass m3 = 2 kg and temperature is –11°C dropped into the
calorimeter. Neglecting any heat loss, the final temperature of system is. [specific heat of copper = 0.1
Kcal/ kg°C, specific heat of water =1 Kcal/kg°C, specific heat of ice = 0.5 Kcal/kg°C, latent heat of
fusion of ice = 78.7 Kcal/kg]
m1 = 1kg m2 = 1 kg
t = 10°C m3 = 2 kg
–11°C
[= 0.1 Kcal/ kg°C, = 1 Kcal/kg°C,
= 0.5 Kcal/kg°C, = 78.7 Kcal/kg]
(A*) 0°C (B) 4°C (C) – 4°C (D) – 2°C
Sol. Loss in heat from calorimeter + water as temperture changes from 10°C to 0°C
= m1C110 + m2C210 = 1 × 1 × 10 + 1 × 0.1 × 10 = 11 kcal
Gain in heat of ice as its temperature changes from –11°C to 0°C
= m3C3 × 11 = 2 × 0.5 × 11 = 11 kcal
Hence ice and water will coexist at 0°C without any phase change.
+ 10°C 0°C
= m1C110 + m2C210 = 1 × 1 × 10 + 1 × 0.1 × 10 = 11 kcal
–11°C 0°C
= m3C3 × 11 = 2 × 0.5 × 11 = 11 kcal
0°C
17. If the frequency of a wave is increased by 25 %, then the change in its wavelength will be:
(medium not changed)
25 % ()
(A) 20 % increase (B*) 20 % decrease (C) 25 % increase (D) 25 % decrease
(A) 20 % (B*) 20 % (C) 25 % (D) 25 %
Sol. Since, the medium has not changed, speed of wave remains same.
v = f = constant
f1 1 = f 2 2
f1 1
= (1.25f1) 2
( frequency increased by 25%)
1
2
= 2
decreases.
1.25
1 2
% change in wavelength = × 100
1
1
1
= 1 .25 × 100 = 0. 25 × 100 = 20%
1 1.25
18. The moment of inertia of a thin disk of mass M and radius R about the specified axis is
M
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. A uniform ladder of length 5 m and mass 100 kg is in equilibrium between vertical smooth wall and
rough horizontal surface. Find minimum friction co-efficient between floor and ladder for this equilibrium.
5 m 100 kg
Wall
N2
mg
37° A
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
Floor f = N2
mg = N2 .......(i)
For horizontal equilibrium ;
N2 = N1 .......(ii)
Torque about A ;
N1 × 5 sin37º = mg × 2.5 cos37º .......(iii)
Solving ; = 2/3
20. A body when suspended from a spring, vibrates with an energy of 8.0 J provided the amplitude is 0.04
m. If the mass of the body is reduced to half and the system is again set into vibration with the same
amplitude, the energy of the system now is
8.0 J 0.04 m
(A) 4 J (B*) 8 J (C) 12 J (D) 16 J
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
F C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A block of mass 10 kg is released on a fixed wedge inside a cart which is moved with constant velocity
10 m/s towards right. Take initial velocity of block with respect to cart zero. Then work done by normal
reaction (with respect to ground )on block in two seconds will be: (g = 10 m/s2).
10 m/s 10 kg
2
: (g = 10 m/s2).
The component of velocity of the block normal to the incline is v sin 37°. Hence the displacement of the
block normal to the incline in t = 2 second is
3
S = v sin 37° × 2 = 10 × × 2 = 12 m.
5
The work done by normal reaction
4
W = mg cos 37° S = 100 × × 12 = 960 J
5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
V1=
V2=
P
Sol. 1 2
T
PV = nRT Here V2 > V1
4. The specific heat of a diatomic ideal gas can be (R is universal gas constant)
( R
(A*) 7R/2 (B*) 5R/2 (C*) 0 (D*) Infinite
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. AB wire is vibrating in its fundamental mode. Wire AB is in resonance with resonance tube in which air
column is also vibrating with its fundamental mode. Sound speed is 400 m/sec and linear mass density
of AB wire is 10–4 kg/m and g = 10 m/sec2, value of mass m = [ (10–1)] kg, then find value of . Neglect
the masses of wires in comparison to block's mass 'm'.
AB AB,
400 m/sec AB 10–4 kg/m g = 10 m/sec2
m = [ (10–1)] kg 'm'
Ans. 6
Sol.
2m( 2m)
T1 = 2T0 = g
m 2m
8m 80m
T1 = g = ................(i)
3 3
In resonance,
fwire = ftube
(1)V1 (1)V2
2 1 4 2
T1
( 400 )
=
2( x ) x
4
2
T1 = (16 × 104)
From (i),
80
m = 10–4 (16 × 104)
3
m = 0.6 kg.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A glass prism with a refracting angle of 600 has a refractive index 1.52 for red and 1.6 for violet light.
A parallel beam of white light is incident on one face at an angle of incidence, which gives minimum
deviation for red light. Find :
[Use: sin (50º) = 0.760; sin (31.6º) = 0.520 ; sin (28.4º) = 0.475; sin (56º) = 0.832 ; = 22/7]
600 1.52 1.6
[Use: sin (50º) = 0.760; sin (31.6º) = 0.520 ; sin (28.4º) = 0.475; sin (56º) = 0.832 ; = 22/7]
Sol.
µR = 1.52
µv = 1.6
Minimum deviation condition for red is r = 30° (1) sin i = (1.52) sin30°
i = 50º, R
= (50º) 2 – 60° = 40°
10. The length of the spectrum if it is focussed on a screen by a lens of focal length 100 cm is :
100 cm
10 10 5
(A*) cm (B) m (C) cm (D) m
3 3 3 3
10
Sol. if = 100 × 6 × cm = m
180 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. An object O (real) is placed at focus of an equi-biconvex lens as shown in figure 1. The refractive index
of lens is = 1.5 and the radius of curvature of either surface of lens is R. The lens is surrounded by
air. In each statement of column-I some changes are made to situation given above and information
regarding final image formed as a result is given in column-II. The distance between lens and object is
unchanged in all statements of column-I. Match the statements in column-I with resulting image in
column-II.
O () -1 (equi-biconvex)
= 1.5 R -I
-II -I
-I -II
Column-I Column-II
(A) If the refractive index of the lens is (p) final image is real
doubled (that is, made 2 ) then
(B) If the radius of curvature is doubled (q) final image is virtual
(that is, made 2R) then
(C) If a glass slab of refractive index = 1.5 (r) final image becomes smaller in
is introduced between the object size in comparison to size of image
and lens as shown, then before the change was made
R R
slab
(D) If the left side of lens is filled with a medium (s) final image is of same size of object.
of refractive index = 1.5 as shown, then
R R
air
O
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
-I -II
(A) (p)
( 2 )
(B) (q)
( 2R )
(C) = 1.5 (r)
R R
(D) = 1.5 (s)
R R
air
O
(t)
Ans. (A) p,r,t (B) q,r (C) q,r, (D) q,r
Sol. (Tough) Initially the image is formed at infinity.
(A) As m is increased the focal length decreases. Hence the object is at a distance larger than focal
length. Therefore final image is real. Also final image becomes smaller is size in comparison to size
of image before the change was made.
(B) If the radius of curvature is doubled, the focal length decreases. Hence the object is at a distance
lesser than focal length. Therefore final image is virtual. Also final image becomes smaller is size in
comparison to size of image before the change was made.
(C) Due to insertion of slab the effective object for lens shifts right wards. Hence final image is virtual.
Also final image becomes smaller is size in comparison to size of image before the change was
made.
(D) The object comes to centre of curvature of right spherical surface as a result. Hence the final image
is virtual. Also final image becomes smaller is size in comparison to size of image before the
change was made.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A symmetrical uniform solid cube of side 5 m is placed on a horizontal surface beside a vertical wall,
one side of cube is making an angle 45° with the floor as shown. If coefficient of friction is the same
for both wall and floor, the minimum value of for cube not to slip?
5
45°
5m
45°
(A) =1 (B*) = 0
(C) = 1/3 (D) impossible to balance for any value of .
(D)
Sol. At angles 45º N and Mg balance each other and they both pass through COM, so no need of friction to
balance it
45° Mg N
N
Mg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. The angular momentum of a particle relative to a certain point O varies as L a bt 2 where a and b
are constant vectors with a perpendicular to b . The torque relative to the point O acting on the
particle when angle between and L is 45º is :
O L a bt 2 a b
a b O L 45º
a b a
(A) 2a (B) 2b (C*) 2b (D) zero
b a b
Sol.
dL
2bt = 2bt
dt
a a a
tan = 2
= tan45º t= 2b .
bt b b
3. Two points of a rod move with velocities 3 v & v perpendicular to the rod and in the same direction,
separated by a distance ' r'. Then the angular velocity of the rod is:
3 v v
' r'
3v 4v 5v 2v
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
r r r r
v rel`
Ans. rod = point = ; vrel. being the velocity of one point w.r.t. other.
r
vrel.
3v v
= and ‘r’ being the distance between them.
r
‘r’
2v
=
r
4. The angular velocity of a rigid body about any point of that body is same:
(A) only in magnitude (B) only in direction
(C*) both in magnitude and direction necessarily
(D) both in magnitude and direction about some points, but not about all points.
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Suppose a rod is having angular velovity w about point C .
B v + r1
r1
C v
r2
r2 v
A
Choose two points A and B as shown in the fig. velocity of B w.r.t A = (v + r1) – (v – r2)
VB ,A = (r1 + r2)
v B,A
(r r )
Angular velocity of B w.r.t A = = 1 2 = = Ans (C)
AB r1 r2
5. A particle of mass m is performing simple harmonic motion as shown in figure (a) and (b). In figure (b),
the charge q of particle is such that qE = mg. If their velocities are same at mean position and let A1 and
A2 be their amplitudes and T1 and T2 be their time periods then.
(a) (b) m (b)
q qE = mg A1 A2 T1
T2 :
7. A force of 6.4 N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1 m. The mass that must be suspended from the spring
so that it oscillates with a period of /4 second, is
6.4 N 0.1 m
4
:
(A) /4 kg (B) / kg (C*) 1 kg (D) 10 kg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. In a cyclic process ABCA for an ideal gas. In AB, BC and CA process 50 J, 20 J and 5 J heat is
supplied to an ideal gas. In process AB internal energy of gas increases by 60 J and in process BC
work done by gas is 30 J. The increase in internal energy of gas in process CA is :
ABCA AB, BC CA 50 J, 20 J 5 J
AB 60 J BC 30 J
CA :
(A) 50 J (B*) – 50 J (C) 75 J (D) 55 J
Sol.
9. One mole of an ideal gas is taken from state A to state B by three different processes, (a) ACB (b) ADB
(c) AEB as shown in the P V diagram. The heat absorbed by the gas is:
( A B (a) ACB (b) ADB (c) AEB
P V )
(A) greater in process (b) then in (a) ( (b) (a) )
(B) the least in process (b) ((b) )
(C) the same in (a) and (c) ((a) (c) )
(D*) less in (c) than in (b) ((c) (b) )
Sol. Heat absorbed by gas in three processes is given by
QACB = U + WACB
QADB = U
QAEB = U + WAEB
The change in internal energy in all the three cases is same. And WACB is +ve, VAEB is –ve.
Hence QACB > QADB > QAEB
WACB WAEB
QACB > QADB > QAEB
10. Heat energy absorbed by a system in going through a cyclic process is shown in the figure [ V in litres
and p in kPa ] is:
[ V p , kPa ] :
V(Litre)
P(k Pa )
(A) 107 J (B) 104 J (C*) 102 J (D) 10 7 J
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1
11. The correct curve between V/T and for an ideal gas at constant pressure is :
V
1
V/T
V
Sol. PV = nRT
V nR
= = constant.
T P
12. A wire of density 9 × 103 kg/m3 is stretched between two clamps 1 m apart and is subjected to an
extension of 4.9 × 10–4 m. What will be the lowest frequency of transverse vibrations in the wire ?
(Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2)
9 × 103 kg/m3 1 m 4.9 × 10–4 m
(Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2)
(A*) 35 Hz (B) 43 Hz (C) 40 Hz (D) 50 Hz
13. The length of the wire shown in figure between the pulleys is 1.5 m and its mass is 12.0 g. The
frequency of vibration with which the wire vibrates in three loops forming antinode at the mid point of
the wire is - (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
1.5 12.0
(g = 9.8 m/s2)
9kg 9kg
(A) 210 Hz (B) 140 Hz (C) 70 Hz (D*) none of these
Sol. =1m
9 9 . 8 1 .5
v= = 105 m/s
12 10 3
105 1
f= = 105 Hz
1
14. Amplitude of a travelling wave on a string is 1mm. If linear mass density of string is 10–4 kg m–1 , tension
in the string is 1N and frequency of vibration is 10Hz, then average power needed to maintain such
waves in string is : ( 2 = 10)
1mm 10–4 kg m–1 1N
10Hz ( 2 = 10)
(A) 3 × 10–5 W (B*) 2 × 10–5 W (C) 4 × 10–5 W (D) 10–5 W
2
A 2v w 10 4
4 2
10 2 10 6
10 4
Sol. Pav. = = =2 2
× 10–6 = 2 × 10–5 W
2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. The moment of inertia of a uniform thin rod of mass m and length about two axis PQ and RS passing
through centre of rod C and in the plane of the rod are PQ and RS respectively. Then PQ + RS is equal to
m L C
PQ RS PQ RS PQ + RS
m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
3 2 4 12
Sol.
The M of rod about axis PQ figure(a) and M of rod about axis P Q figure (b) are same by symmetry.
PQ (a) P Q (b)
m 2
PQ
+ RS
PQ
= + RS
=
12
by perpendicular axis theorem. ()
16. A point charge + Q is placed at the centroid of an equilateral triangle. When a second charge + Q is
placed at a vertex of the triangle, the magnitude of the electrostatic force on the central charge is 8 N.
The magnitude of the net force on the central charge when a third charge + Q is placed at another
vertex of the triangle is:
+ Q + Q
8 N + Q
(A) zero (B) 4 N (C) 4 2 N (D*) 8 N
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. The ratio of the intensities of the mechanical waves propagating in the same medium Y1=10 sin( t –
kx) and Y2= 5 [sin ( t – kx) + 3 cos (kx – t)] is
Y1=10 sin( t – kx) Y2= 5 [sin ( t – kx) + 3 cos (kx – t)]
(A*) 1:1 (B) 1:2 (C) 2:1 (D) 4:1
[ Ans. 1:1 ]
18. The deviation caused for red, yellow and violet colours for crown glass prism are 2.840, 3.280 and 3.720
respectively. The dispersive power of prism material is :
2.840, 3.280 3.720
:
11 92 117 22
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
41 250 250 57
Sol. Dispersive power is given by
v r
3.72 2. 84 11
=
3 .28 41
19. The average density of Earth’s crust 10 km beneath the surface is 2.7 gm/cm3. The speed of
longitudnal seismic waves at that depth is 5.4 km/s. The bulk modulus of Earth’s crust considering its
behaviour as fluid at that depth, is :
10 2.7 3
5.4 (B)
(A*) 7.9 × 1010 Pa (B) 5.6 × 1010 Pa (C) 7.9 × 107 Pa (D) 1.46 × 107 Pa
(A*) 7.9 × 1010 (B) 5.6 × 1010 (C) 7.9 × 107 (D) 1.46 × 107
B
Sol. (A) V = B = V2
p
= (5.40 × 103 m/s)2 (2.7 × 103)
= 7.9 × 1010 Pa.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Board Level Question
4. Draw a graph to show the variation of the angle of deviation with that of the angle of incidence i for a
monochromatic ray of light passing through a glass prism of refracting angle A. Hence, deduce the
relation,
A i
sin(A m ) / 2
=
sin A / 2
5. Does dispersive power of the material of a prism depend on the shape, size and angle of the prism ?
Explain?
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. 1 mole of an ideal gas undergoes an isothermal expansion as energy is added to it as heat Q. Graph
shows the volume V versus Q. The gas temperature is nearly equal to : (use R = 8.31 J/K.mole)
QV Q
(R = 8.31 J/K.mole)
R2 1 R2
+1=0 =1
2 x2 2x 2
R2 R
x2 = x= .
2 2
d2 R2 R
and also 2
x = + ve at x = .so T will be minimum
dx 2x 2
3. The dispersive powers of two materials are 0.30 & 0.28. They are used to construct two lenses which
are kept in contact to eliminate chromatic aberration (that means the fv = fr, the focal length of
combination is same for red and violet) If the focal length) (for av. color) of the lens made of the material
of dispersive power 0.30 is 10 cm, then the focal length (for av. color) of the lens of other material is :
0.30 & 0.28
(Chromotic aberration) ( fv = fr ,
) 0.3
10 cm
(A) 28/3 cm (B*) 0.28/3 m (C) 0.75/7 m (D) none of these
4. A uniform rod of mass M and length L leans against a frictionless wall, with quarter of its length hanging
over a corner as shown. Friction at corner is sufficient to keep the rod at rest. Then the ratio of
magnitude of normal reaction on rod by wall and the magnitude of normal reaction on rod by corner is
M L
1 2 1 2
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 sin sin 2 cos cos
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
5. An electron is placed just in the middle between two long fixed line charges of charge density + each.
The wires are in the xy plane (Do not consider gravity)
+ xy
(e) ()
6. Two free point charges +q and +4q are placed a distance x apart. A third charge is so placed that all the
three charges are in equilibrium. Then
+q +4q, x
(A*) unknown charge is -4q/9 -4q/9
(B) unknown charge is -9q/4 -9q/4
(C*) It should be at (x/3) from smaller charge between them
(x/3)
(D) It should be placed at (2x/3) from smaller charge between them.
(2x/3)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
For equilibrium of all the changes net force on each charge should be zero.
kqQ 4kqQ
– = 0 (Net force on Q) d = x/3
d 2
( x d) 2
kqQ 4kq 2
& 2
+ = 0 (Net force on A )
d x2
4 x
Q = q & d =
9 3
7. Calculate the magnitude of electrostatic force on a charge placed at a vertex of a triangular pyramid
(4 vertices, 4 faces), if 4 equal point charges are placed at all four vertices of pyramid of side ‘a’.
(4 , 4 )
'a'
2
Sol. cos
3
Kq2 2 6 q2
Fnet = 3Fcos = 3 =
a 2 3 4 0 a2
6 q2
[ Ans. ]
4 0 a2
COMPREHENSION
An extended object of size 2 cm is placed at a distance of d (cm) in medium (refractive index n = 3)
from pole, on the principal axis of a spherical curved surface.The medium on the other side of refracting
surface is air (refractive index n = 1).
2 d (cm) (
n = 3) n = 1
n=3 n=1 n=3 n=1
2cm 2cm
d d
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. For d = 20 cm, The size of image is d = 20 cm
1 2 6 3
(A) cm (B) cm (C*) cm (D) cm
6 15 5 2
v n1 4 3 6
Sol. Size of image = × size of object = 2= cm.
u n2 20 1 5
v n1 4 3 6
= = 2 = cm.
u n2 20 1 5
10. In each situation of column-I a mass distribution is given and information regarding x and y-coordinate
of centre of mass is given in column-II. Match the figures in column-I with corresponding information of
centre of mass in column-II.
-I -II x y-
-II
Column-I Column-II
(A) An equilateral triangular wire frame is (p) xcm > 0
made using three thin uniform rods of
mass per unit lengths , 2 and 3 as
shown
(B) A square frame is made using per unit (q) ycm > 0
length lengths , 2 , 3 and 4 as
shown
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
-I -II
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1 2
1. When a point charge of C is placed along the axis of a thin disc of total charge C (uniform
3 3
distribution) and radius 3.95 cm such that distance between point charge and centre of disc is 1 m, then
force experienced by disc is approximately :
2
3.95 cm C
3
1
C 1m
3
:
(A) 4mN (B) 6mN (C) 3mN (D*) 2mN
Sol. Behaviour of disc is like a point charge because distance between the disc and the point charge is very
large in comparison to radius of disc.
2 1
9 10 9 C C
F= 3 3 = 2mN
12
2. A wire having a linear density 0.1kg/m is kept under a tension of 490 N. It is observed that it resonates
at a frequency of 400Hz and the next higher frequency 450Hz. Find the length of the wire
0.1kg/m 490 N 400Hz
450Hz
(A) 0.4m (B*) 0.7m (C) 0.6m (D) 0.49m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Consider the arrangement shown in the figure. Assuming frictionless contacts, then the magnitude of
external horizontal force P applied at the lower end for equilibrium of the rod will be : (The rod is uniform
and its mass is ' m ')
P
(' m ' )
mg mg mg mg
(A) (B*) cot (C) tan (D) sec
2 2 2 2
Sol. The F.B.D. of rod is as shown
For rod to be in translational equilibrium
N1 = P ....(1)
N2 = W = mg ....(2)
For rod to be in rotational equilibrium, net torque on rod about any axis is zero.
Net torque on rod about B is zero
i.e.,
mgcos – N2 cos + P sin = 0 .......(3)
2
from equation (2) and (3) solving we get
mg
P= cot
2
4. A uniform rod of length 4L and mass M is suspended from a horizontal roof by two light strings of length
L and 2L as shown. Then the tension in the left string of length L is
4L M L 2L
L
Mg Mg 3 Mg
(A*) (B) (C) Mg (D)
2 3 5 4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
5. A uniform disc of mass m and radius r and a point mass m are arranged as shown in the figure. The
acceleration of point mass is: (Assume there is no slipping between pulley and thread and the disc can
rotate smoothly about a fixed horizontal axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane)
g g
(A) (B)
2 3
2g
(C*) (D) none of these
3
Sol. Let a & be linear
and angular acceleration of disc respectively r
a=r .........(i)
Xm T
Torque about centre of disc
=
1
mgr = mr 2 mr 2
2
m
3
mgr = mr 2 .........(ii)
2 mg
From eqn. (i) & (ii)
3 a
mgr = mr 2
2 r
2g
a=
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. Two identical discs of mass m and radius r are arranged as shown in the figure. If is the angular
acceleration of the lower disc and acm is acceleration of centre of mass of the lower disc, then relation
between acm, & r is :
m r
acm , ,acm, r :
r
(A) acm = (B*) acm = 2 r
2
(C) acm = r (D) none of these
Sol.
mr 2
Tr = 1
..........(1)
2
mr 2
Tr = .......... (2)
2
1
= .......... (3)
From (1) & (2)
accn . of point b = accn of point a
r 1 = acm – r .......... (4)
Hence 2 r = acm Ans. (B)
7. A force of 6.4N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1m. The mass that must be suspended from the spring
so that it oscillates with a time period of /4 second.
6.4 N 0.1 m /4
4
(A) kg (B) kg (C*) 1 kg (D) 10 kg
4
6 .4
Sol. Spring constant ( ) K = = 64 N/m.
0. 1
m m
Now () T = 2 or 2 m = 1 kg
k 4 64
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
PV
8. The gas law = constant for a given amount of a gas is true for :
T
PV
=
T
(A) isothermal change only. (B) adiabatic change only.
(C*) both isothermal & adiabatic changes. (D) neither isothermal nor adiabatic change.
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
Sol. As PV = nRT
PV
For n = constant : = constant
T
for all changes. Hence (C)
9. If a tuning fork of frequency (f0) 340 Hz and tolerance 1% is used in resonance column method [v = 2f0
( 2 – 1)], the first and the second resonance are measured at 1 = 24.0 cm and 2 = 74.0 cm. Find max.
permissible error in speed of sound.
[v = 2f0 ( 2 – 1)] ( 0) 340 Hz
(tolerance ) 1% 1 = 24.0 cm 2
= 74.0 cm
(permissible)
(A) 1.5% (B) 1.3% (C) 1.2% (D*) 1.4%
Ans. (D)
Sol. v = 2f0 ( 2 – 1),
v f0 1 2 1 0.1 0. 1
= = + = 1.4%.
v max f0 2 1 100 74 24
10. Two vibrating strings of same length, same cross section area and stretched to same tension is made
of materials with densities & 2 . Each string is fixed at both ends. If v1 represents the fundamental
mode of vibration of the one made with density and v2 for another, then v1/v2 is:
2 v 1
v2 v1/v2
1 1
(A) (B) 2 (C*) 2 (D)
2 2
V1 2 2
Sol. = = = 2 Ans.
V2 1
11. What is the percentage change in the tension necessary in a sonometer of fixed length to produce a
note one octave lower (half of original frequency) than before
(A) - 25% (B) - 50% (C) - 67% (D*) - 75%
Sol. In Sonometer ()
V T
V1 T1 T1
=2= T2 =
V2 T2 4
%
T1
T1
T1 T2 4
× 100 = 100 = 75% Ans.
T1 T1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-26
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. The tension, length, diameter and density of a string B are double that of another string A. Which of the
following overtones of B is same as the fundamental frequency of A. (They are fixed at both the ends)
B A B A
(A) 1st (B) 2nd (C*) 3rd (D) 4th
13. A string 1m long fixed at one end is made to oscillate by a 300Hz vibrator attached to its other end. The
string vibrates in 3 loops. The speed of transverse waves in the string is equal to
1m 300Hz
(A) 100 m/s (B*) 200 m/s (C) 300 m/s (D) 400 m/s
14. A person calculates electric field due to a point charge q at a distance r from the point charge. If value
of q is known with 2% error and r is measured with 1% error, then the percentage error in calculation of
1
electric field is (assume that there is no error in k = ):
4 0
q r q 2%
r 1% ,
1
(k = ):
4 0
kq dE dq dr
Sol. E= –2
r2 E q r
dE dq dr
For percentage error +2
E q r
15. Two point charges 2q and q are placed at some distance as shown in the figure. If the charge q is
moved towards right then electric field at a point which on line AB and equidistant from both point
charges at any instant:
2q q q AB
(A*) decrease (B) increase (C) remains same (D) may increase or decrease
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
kq 4kq
= 2
= 2
a a
2
On increasing a E will decrease
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-27
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. A parallel beam of light is incident on a lens of focal length 10 cm. A parallel slab of refractive index 1.5
and thickness 3 cm is placed on the other side of the lens. Find the distance of the final image from the
lens.
10 cm 1.5 3
cm
Sol. As rays are parallel to the principal axis, image is created by lens at the focus.
By placing of glass-slab,
1 1
Shift = 1 .t = 1 3 = 1 cm.
1. 5
Irrespective of separation,
Image is shifted to the right by 1 cm.
Total distance from lens 10 + 1 = 11 cm Ans.
17. A body is located on a wall. Its image of equal size is to be obtained on a parallel wall with the help of a
convex lens. The lens is placed at a distance d ahead of second wall, then the required focal length will
be:
d d
(A) Only (B*) Only
4 2
d d
(C) More than but less than (D) Less than
4 4
d
d
d d d d d
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
4 2 4 2 4
Sol. The lens formula can be written as
1 1 1
= .... (i)
f v u
Given , v=d
For equal size image
|v|=|u|=d
By sign convention , u = – d
1 1 1 d
= or f=
f d d 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-28
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. An equiconvex lens is cut into two halves along (i) XOX’ and (ii) YOY’ as shown in the figure. Let f, f ’,f ’’
be the focal lengths of the complete lens, of each half in case (i), and of each half in case (ii),
respectively.
(A) f ’ = f, f ’’ = f (B) f ’ = 2f, f ’’ = 2f (C*) f ’ = f, f ’’ = 2f (D) f ’ = 2f, f ’’ = f
Sol. Initially, the focal length of equiconvex lens is
1 1 1
= ( – 1)
f R1 R2
1 1 1 2(u 1)
= ( – 1) =
f R1 R 2 R
Case I : When lens is cut along XOX’ then each half is again equiconvex with
I XOX’
R1 = + R, R2 = – R
1 1 1
Thus, = ( – 1)
f R ( R)
1 1 2 1
= ( – 1) = ( – 1) =
R R R f'
f’=f
Case II : When lens is cut along YOY’, then each half becomes plano-convex with
I YOY’
R1 = R, R2 =
1 1 1
Thus, = ( – 1)
f' R1 R2
1 1
= ( – 1)
R
( 1) 1
= =
R 2f
Hence f ’ = f, f ’’ = 2f
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-29
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. Two springs of same spring constants are arranged as shown in figure. A block of mass m strikes one
of the spring with velocity v. Find the period of oscillation of the block. (The block does not stick to the
spring)
m v
v m
m m 2 m 2 2m 2
(A) 2 (B*) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
k V k V 2k V k V
20. A ring of mass m and radius R rolls on a horizontal rough surface without slipping due to
an applied force ‘F’. The friction force acting on ring is : –
m R F
F 2F F
(A) (B) (C) (D*) Zero
3 3 4
Sol. (D) F + f = ma .... (1)
a
Also ; FR – fR =
R
F – f = ma .... (2) [ = mR 2 ]
From (1) & (2)
f = 0.
1. A person looking at a mesh of crossed wires. He is able to see the vert ical wires more
distinctly than the horizontal wires. What is the reason of this defect, By what name this
defect is known. How is such a defect of vision can be corrected?
Ans. The defect (called astigmatism) arises because the curvature of the cornea plus eye-
lens refracting system is not the same in different planes. [The eye-lens is usually
spherical i.e., has the same curvature on different planes but in some cases the
curv ature in the v ertical plane is enough, so sharp images of vertical wires can be
formed on the retina, but the curvature is insufficient in the horizontal planes, so
horizontal wires appear blurred. This defect can be corrected by using a cylindrical lens
with its axis along the vertical. Clearly, parallel rays in the vertical plane will suffer no
extra refraction, but those in the horizontal plane can get the required extra convergence
due to refraction by the curv ed surface of the cylindrical lens if the curvature o the
cylindrical surface is chosen appropriately.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-30
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Draw a labelled ray diagram of a reflecting (Cassegrain) telescope and explain its working.
(Cassegrain)
3. List some advantages of a reflecting telescope, especially for high resolution astronomy.
Ans. No chromatic aberration due to the objective because only reflection is involved;
spherical aberration reduced by using a mirror of the shape of paraboloid ; brighter
image than in a refracting telescope of equivalent size because in the latter intensity of
light is partially lost due to reflection and absorption by the objectiv e lens glass; mirror
entails grinding and polishing of only one side; high resolution (as well as brightness of
a point object) achieved by using a mirror of large aperture which is easier to support
(its back side being av ailable) than a lens o the same aperture.
(brighter image)
( )
(support)
4. Why is rainbow formed in the sky ?
Ans. Rainbow is formed due to the dispersion of sun rays, when they fall on the suspended tiny droplets of
water (which acts as prisms of small angles). The rainbow will be visible to an observer having sun at
his back.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-31
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. One mole of an ideal monatomic gas undergoes a linear process from A to B, in which is pressure P
and its volume V change as shown in figure
As the volume of the gas is increased, in some range of volume the gas expands with absorbing the
heat (the endothermic process) ; in the other range the gas emits the heat (the exothermic process).
Then the volume after which if the volume of gas is further increased the given process switches from
endothermic to exothermic is
A B P
V
2 V0 3 V0 5 V0
(A) (B) (C*) (D) none of these
8 8 8
P0
Sol. From The P–V graph, the relation between P and V is P V P0 .... (1)
V0
Also the ideal gas state equation for one mole isPV =RT .... (2)
P0 V
From equation (1) and (2) is T V 1
R V0
Hence the graph of T vs. V is a parabola given by
P0
P–V P V P V P0 .... (1)
V0
PV =RT .... (2)
P0 V
(1) (2) T V 1
R V0
T V
V0 P V
Obviously T is maximum at V= . There maximum value of T is 0 0
2 4R
V0 P0 V0
T V = T
2 4R
Q= U+W
where U is the change in the internal energy of the gas; and W is work, done by the gas. For one mole
of the monatomic ideal gas U = 3/2R T. Work equals the area under the graph P vs. V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Therefore, for the process from the initial state with P1V1 = 3/2 RT1 to the state with P,V,T the heat
given to system is
U W U =
3/2R T. P V
P1V1 = 3/2 RT1 P,V, T
Q = (3/2) R (T – T1) + (1/2) (P + P1 (V – V1)
3
2 1
= (PV – P1V1) +
(PV + P1V + PV1 – P1V1) .... (3)
2
1 1
= 2PV + P1V – PV1 – 2P1V1
2 2
from equation 1 and 3 we get
P 5 5 V1
1 3 Q = 2 0 V2 P0 V 2P0 V1
V0 2 4 V0
dQ
The process switches from endothermic to exothermic as changes from positive to negative, that
dV
dQ 5
is at = 0. Solving we get V = V0
dV 8
dQ dQ
=
dV dV
5
0. V = V
8 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. The angle of deviation ( ) vs angle of incidence (i) is plotted for a prism. Pick up the correct statements.
" " " i "
(A*) The angle of prism is 60°
60°
(B*) The refractive index of the prism is n = 3
n = 3
(C*) For deviation to be 65° the angle of incidence i1 = 55°
65° i1 = 55°
(D) The curve of ' ' vs 'i' is parabolic
' ' 'i'
Sol. = i + e – A (for minimum derivation i = e)
minimum deviation = 2i – A
= i + e – A (i = e)
= 2i – A
60 = 2 × 60 – A A = 60°
m 60 60
sin A sin
2 2
n= = = 3
A 60
sin sin
2 2
= i1 + e – A
1
65° = i1 + 70° – 60° or i1 = 55°
the versus i curve is not parabolic
5. A particle is describing circular motion in a horizontal plane in contact with the smooth inside surface of
a fixed right circular cone with its axis vertical and vertex down. The height of the plane of motion above
the vertex is h and the semivertical angle of the cone is . The period of revolution of the particle:
h
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. As N sin = mg
N cos = m 2 r
g
tan = 2 T2 tan
r
when increases T also increases Nsin
N
T
Also T2 r tan
Ncos
but r = h tan
T2 h tan2 a h
for constant
T2 h
Thus when h increases T also increases
h T
6. A point charge Q is located at centre of a fixed thin ring of radius R with uniformly distributed charge-Q.
The magnitude of the electric field strength at the point lying on the axis of the ring at a distance x from
the centre is (x >> R) _______________.
Q, R -Q
x (x >> R )
___________
3QR 2
[ Ans. ]
8 0 x4
COMPREHENSION
Two point charges are placed at point a and b. The field strength to the right of the charge Qb on the
line that passes through the two charges varies according to a law that is represented graphically in the
figure. The electric field is taken positive if its direction is towards right and negative if its direction is
towards left.
'a' 'b' Qb
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Qa
8. Ratio of magnitudes of charges will be equal to :
Qb
Qa
Qb
2 2 4
(A) 1 (B*) 1 (C) 1 (D) 1
x1 x1 x1 x
E at A = 0 (A = 0 E = 2)
2 2
Qa Qb Qa x1
1
( x1)2 (x1 )2 Qb x1 x1
K Qa K Qb 1 Qb 1
E at a general X x E 2 2
= K Qa
2 Qa x2
( x ) (x ) ( x)
2
dE 2 x1 2
If E is a maximum , 0 3
=0
dx ( x) x1 x3
2
2
3 3 x1 x1 3
( + x) = x ; +x = x
x1 x1
x2 = 2
x1 3
1
x1
2
x1 3
1 2
x1 Qa
Ans: x2 = , 1
Qb x1
Charge b is negative and charge a is positive b a
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. The column gives the two point charge system separated by 2a and the column gives the variation
of magnitude of electric field intensity at point on the x-axis. Match the situation in Column with the
results in Column and indicate your answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix
given in the OMR.
2a
x-
11. The column gives the two point charge system separated by 2a and the column gives the variation
of magnitude of electric field intensity at point on the x-axis. Match the situation in Column with the
results in Column
2a
x-
Column – Column –
q q
x' + + x
(0, 0) a
(A) (-a, 0) (a, 0) (p) Increases as x increases in the interval 0 x
x 0 x < a
q -q
x' + – x
(-a, 0) (0, 0) a (a, 0)
(B) (q) Decreases as x increases in the
interval 0 x < a
x 0 x < a
y
q (0,+a)
q (0,–a)
y
–q – (0,+a)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A ray hits the y-axis making an angle with y-axis as shown in the figure. The variation of refractive
x 1
index with x-coordinate is = 0 1 for 0 x d 1 and = 0 for x < 0, where d is a
d 0
positive constant. The maximum x-coordinate of the path traced by the ray is
y- y- x-
x 1
= 0 1 0 x d 1 = 0 , x < 0 d
d 0
x-
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol (C)
Weight = Buoyant force
= Oil
V V
V mg = g+
2 Hg 2 oil Mercury
PH g Poil 13. 6 0 .8 14.4
rm = = = = 7.2
2 2 2
3. Two identical straight wires are stretched so as to produce 6 beats/sec. when vibrating simultaneously.
On changing the tension slightly in one of them, the beat frequency remains unchanged. Denoting by
T1, T2, the higher & the lower initial tensions in the strings, then it could be said that while making the
above changes in tension:
(A) T2 was decreased (B*) T2 was increased (C) T1 was increased (D*) T1 was decreased
6 /
T1 T2
(A) T2 (B*) T2 (C) T1 (D*) T1
4. A fixed ring of radius R is placed horizontally as shown in the figure. It carries uniform charge
distribution on it’s circumference. A point mass m is in equilibrium at y height above centre of ring . For
small disturbance along y-axis the particles is in.
R
m h y
y
g
R R
(A) Stable equilibrium if y = (B*) Unstable equilibrium at y
2 2
(C*) Stable equilibrium at y = R (D) Unstable equilibrium at y = R
R R
(A) y = (B*) y =
2 2
(C*) y = R (D) y = R
5. Two infinite plane sheets A and B are shown in the figure. The surface charge densities on A and B are
(2/ ) × 10–9 C/m2 and (–1/ ) × 10–9 C/m2 respectively. C, D, E are three points where electric fields (in
N/C) are EC, ED and EE respectively.
A B A B (2/ ) × 10-9 C/m2
(–1/ ) × 10-9 C/m2 C, D E (N/C) EC , ED EE
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. At E,
9 9
2/ 10 1/ 10
EE = EA – EB = – = 18, towards right. ()
2. 0 2. 0
At D
9 9
( 2 / ) 10 (1/ ) 10
EO = EA + EB = + = 54, towards right. ()
2 0 2 0
6. A 10 cm long rod carries a charge of + 50 C distributed uniformly along its length, Find
the magnitude of the electric field at a point 10 cm from both the ends of the rod.
10 + 50 C
10
Ans. 5.2 × 10 7 N/C
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows an irregular wedge of mass m placed on a smooth horizontal surface. Horizontal part BC
is rough.The other part of the wedge is smooth.
m (wedge) BC
7. What minimum velocity should be imparted to a small block of same mass m so that it may reach point
B:
B
Energy equation :
1 1
mu2 = (2m)v2 + mgH.
2 2
Substituting v = u/2 :
u = 2 gH
8. The magnitude of velocity of wedge when the block comes to rest (w.r.t. wedge) on part BC is :
(wedge) BC
(A*) gH (B) g(H h) (C) 2 gH (D) none of these
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
u
Ans. When the block comes to rest, the wedge continues to move at V = = gH on the smooth surface.
2
(since, momentum of wedge-block system remains conserved).
9. If the coefficient of friction between the block and wedge is , and the block comes to rest with respect
to wedge at a point D on the rough surface then BD will be :
D
BD
H H h h
(A) (B*) (C) (D) none of these
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Four positive charges (2 2-1) Q are arranged at corner of a square. Another charge q is placed at the
centre of the square. Resultant force acting on each corner is zero If q is
(2 2-1) Q q
q
(A*) – 7Q/4 (B) – 4Q/7 (C) -Q (D) None
2. A circular platform is mounted on a frictionless vertical axle. Its radius R = 2m and its moment of inertia
about the axle is 200 kgm2. it is initially at rest. A 50 kg man stands on the edge of the platform and
begins to walk along the edge at the speed of 1ms–1 relative to the ground. Time taken by the man to
complete one revolution with respect to disc is :
R = 2m
200 kgm2 50 kg
1ms–1
:
3
(A) s (B) s (C*) 2 s (D) s
2 2
Sol. using angular momentum conservation
Li = 0
Lt = mvR –
mvR =
1
= (v + R)t = 2 R
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The region in space with x2 + y2 + z2 R2 and z < 0 has uniform volume charge density . If electric
R R
field at point 0, 0, is E , then the electric field at point 0, 0, will be :
2 2
R
x2 + y2 + z2 R2 z < 0 0, 0,
2
R
E , 0, 0, :
2
z
y
R R R
(A) E k̂ (B*) E k̂ (C) – E (D) k̂ E
6 0 6 0 6 0
R
Sol. Let electric field at point 0, 0, is E'
2
If similar inverted hemisphere is placed given hemisphere to form a complete sphere, then net electric
R
field at point 0, 0, will be :
2
R
E' E k̂
3 0 2
R
E' E k̂
6 0
4. In displacement method, the distance between object and screen is 96 cm. The ratio of length of two
images formed by a convex lens placed between them is 4.84.
(A*) Ratio of the length of object to the length of shorter image is 11/5.
(B*) Distance between the two positions of the lens is 36 cm.
(C) Focal length of the lens is 22.5 cm.
(D*) Distance of the lens from the shorter image is 30 cm.
96 cm
4.84
(A*) 11/5
(B*) 36 cm
(C) 22.5 cm
(D*) 30 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Position 2
v u
O
Sol. Principle axis 2
u v 1
Position 1
v u v2
For first & second position = 1, = 2 2
= 1
= 4.84
u O v O u 2
v
=2.2 and v + u = 96 v = 66 , u = 30
u
O v 11
= = 2.2 = A is True
2 u 5
Distance between two position of lens = v - u = 36 cm B is True
uv 66 30
Focal length of lens f = = 20.63 C is False
u v 66 30
Distance of lens from shorter image = u = 30 cm D is True
2
v u v
= 1 , = 2 = 1 = 4.84
u O v O u2 2
v
=2.2 and v + u = 96 v = 66 , u = 30
u
O v 11
= = 2.2 = A
2 u 5
= v - u = 36 cm B
uv 66 30
f = = 20.63 C
u v 66 30
= u = 30 cm D
5. A source emit sound waves of frequency 1000 Hz. The source moves to the right with a speed of 32
m/s relative to ground. On the right a reflecting surface moves towards left with a speed of 64 m/s
relative to ground. The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s :
1000 Hz 32 m/s
64 m/s
332 m/s
(A*) wavelength of sound infront of source is 0.3 m
(B*) number of waves arriving per second which meets the reflected surface is 1320
(C) speed of reflected wave is 268 m/s
(D*) wavelength of reflected waves is nearly 0.2 m
(A*) 0.3 m
(B*) 1320
(C) 268 m/s
(D*) 0.2 m
V Vs 332 32
Sol. '= = = 0.3 m
f 1000
V V0 332 64
f' = f = 1000 × = 1320 Hz
V VS 332 32
V V0
'' = = 0.2 m.
f'
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. Consider a solid non conducting sphere of radius R. There is uniform volume charge density 1 from
R R R
r = 0 to r = , and from r = and r = R the volume charge density is 2. If electric field at r = and r
2 2 2
1
=R have same magnitude then is :
2
R
R r = 0 r = 1
2
R R
r = r = R 2 r = r =R
2 2
1
:
2
R
1
R/2
7
Ans.
3
R 1R
Sol. Electric field at r = E1 =
2 6 0
1 4 R3 4 7R 3
Electric field at r = R E2 = 1 2
4 0 R2 3 8 3 8
R 1 7 2
=
0 24 24
If E1 = E2
1R R ( 1 7 2)
6 0 0 24
4 1 = 1 +7 2
3 1=7 2
1 7
2 3
COMPREHENSION
One end of massless inextensible string of length is fixed and other end is tied to a small ball of mass
m. The ball is performing a circular motion in vertical plane. At the lowest position, speed of ball is
20g . Neglect any other forces on the ball except tension and gravitational force. Acceleration due to
gravity is g.
m
20g
g
7. Motion of ball is in nature of
(A) circular motion with constant speed
(B*) circular motion with variable speed
(C) circular motion with constant angular acceleration about centre of the circle.
(D) none of these
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A)
(B*)
(C)
(D)
Sol. As speed of ball is variable, so motion is non uniform circular motion.
8. At the highest position of ball, tangential acceleration of ball is -
-
(A*) 0 (B) g (C) 5 g (D) 16 g
Sol. At the highest position of ball, net tangential force is zero, hence tangential acceleration of ball is zero,
9. During circular motion, minimum value of tension in the string -
-
(A) zero (B) mg (C) 10 mg (D*) 15 mg
Sol. Tension in the string is minimum when ball is at the highest position. By conservation of energy
1 1
mv2 + mg (2 ) = m(20 g )
2 2
v2 = 16 g where v is the velocity of ball at the highest point.
v2 = 16 g v
mv 2
So T + mg =
m16g
T= – mg = 15 mg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Figure shows three circular arcs, each of radius R and total charge as indicated. The net elecric
potential at the centre of curvature is :
R
+Q
45°
30°
–2Q •
R
+3Q
Q Q 2Q Q
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 0R 4 0R 0R 0R
Sol. V = V1 + V2 + V3
1 Q 1 2Q 1 3Q 1 2Q
= . + + = .
4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. The moment of inertia of a door of mass m, length 2 and width about the axis AB in plane of the door
and at an angle 45° with x-axis as shown in the figure is
m 2 AB
ABx-45°
y
45° x
2
11m 5m 2 m 2
(A) (B*) (C) (D) none of these
24 24 3
y
C
A
45°
45° x
Sol.
D B
3. A solid sphere, a hollow sphere and a disc, all having same mass and radius, are placed at the top of
an incline and released. The friction coefficients between the objects and the incline are same and not
sufficient to allow pure rolling. Least time will be taken in reaching the bottom by
:
(A) the solid sphere (B) the hollow sphere
(C) the disc (D*) all will take same time.
(A) (B)
(C) (D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (D) Since linear acceleration is same for all (a = Mg sin – Mg cos ) as they have same mass 'M' and
same ' '
(D) (a = Mg sin – Mg cos ) 'M' ' '
Hence, all will reach the bottom simultaneously.
Hence (D)
5. A block of mass 1 kg falls from a height of 5 m on a vertical spring fastened to a horizontal board placed
on the floor. If the spring constant of the spring is 10 N/m, the maximum compression that the spring
undergoes is:
5 m 1 kg
10 N/m ,:
(A) 1.7 m (B) 3.4 m (C*) 4.3 m (D) 0.43 m
6. A uniform circular disc of radius r placed on a horizontal rough surface has initially a velocity v0 and an
angular velocity 0 as shown in the figure. The disc comes to rest after moving some distance in the
direction of motion. Then v0/ 0 is:
r v0 0
v0/ 0 :
7. A solid cylinder is sliding on a smooth horizontal surface with velocity v0 without rotation. It enters on the
rough surface. After that it has travelled some distance, select the correct statement:
v0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A)
(B*)
(C)
(D)
Sol.
Sol.
horizontal table. Initially spring is in its natural length . Mass m is given a velocity ‘v’ perpendicular to
the spring and released. The velocity perpendicular to the spring when its length is + x, will be
m
m v
+ x [M.Bank_Rotation_4.48]
2v 2v 2 v
(A) (B) (C*) (D) zero
x x x
Sol. (C)
since torque about O is zero,
angular momentum of mass m is conserved
O
m
v
m v = m v ( + x) ; v =
x
9. Two plane mirrors are kept such that angle between their reflecting surfaces is 40º. A point object is
kept symmetrically with respect to the mirrors. The total number of images formed by one mirror is:
2
s Cu
11. The reflecting surface of a plane mirror is vertical. A particle is projected in a vertical plane which is
also perpendicular to the mirror. The initial speed of the particle is 10 m/s and the angle of projection is
60° from the normal of the mirror. The point of projection is at a distance 5m from the mirror. The
particle moves towards the mirror. Just before the particle touches the mirror, the velocity of approach
of the particle and the image is ;
10 m/s 60º
5m
;
(A*) 10 m/s (B) 5 m/s (C) 10 3 m / s (D) 5 3m / s
10m/s
10sin 60° = 5m/s
Sol. 60°
10cos 60° = 5m/s
(Vi,m )x = – (Vo,m)x
(Vi – Vm )x = – (Vo – Vm)x
Vix – O = Vox
Vix = – 5m/s
Vapp = 5 – (–5) = 10 m/s
12. Astronomial telescope has two lenses of focal powers 0.5 D and 20 D. Then its magnifying power in
normal adjustment is :
0.5 D 20 D
(A) 10 (B) 20 (C) 80 (D*)40
Sol. Given :
Focal power of the first lens P1 0.5D
Focal power of the second lens P2 2D
P2 20
The magnifying power of the astronomical telescope is given by m =40
P1 0 .5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. The plane face of a plano-convex lens is silvered. If be the refractive index and R, the radius of
curvature of curved surface, then the system will behave like a concave mirror of radius of curvature :
14. Four types of oscillatory systems ; a simple pendulum ; a physical pendulum ; a torsional pendulum and
a spring–mass system, each of same time period are taken to the Moon. If time periods are measured
on the moon, which system or systems will have it unchanged ?
(A) only spring–mass system.
(B*) spring–mass system and torsional pendulum.
(C) spring–mass system and physical pendulum.
(D) None of these
(A) (B*)
(C) (D)
Sol. (B) Both the spring–mass system & torsional pendulum have no dependence on gravitational
acceleration for their time periods.
15. A particle is moving along x axis has potential energy U = (2 20x + 5 x2) Joules.
The particle is released at x = 3. The maximum value of ' x ' will be: [M.Bank_SHM_21.6]
[ x is in meters and U is in joules ]
x U = 2 20 X + 5 x2 X = 3
' x ' [ x U ]
(A) 5 m (B) 3 m (C*) 7 m (D) 8 m
Sol. U = 2 – 20 x + 5x2
dU
F=– = 20 – 10x
dx
At equilibrium position (); F = 0
20 – 10x = 0
x=2
Since particle is released at x = – 3, therefore amplitude of particle is 5.
x = – 3 5
5 5
–3 0 2 7
It will oscillate about x = 2 with an amplitude of 5.
maximum value of x will be 7.
x = 2 5
x 7
16. The lower end of a capillary tube is at a depth of 12 cm and water rises 3 cm in it. The mouth pressure
required to blow an air bubble at the lower end will be x cm of water column, where x is
12 cm 3 cm
x cm x :
(A) 12 (B*) 15 (C) 3 (D) 9
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Pressure due to 15 cm long liquid column needs to be balanced.
P0
P0
P0
P0
12cm
PM
g3= 2S
2S
For case -I : g3 =
R
2S
For case -II : PM = P0 + g12 + = P0 + g15
R
17. An ideal gas with adiabatic exponent ( = 1.5) undergoes a process in which work done by the gas is
same as increase in internal energy of the gas. The molar heat capacity of gas for the process is:
( = 1.5)
(A*) C = 4R (B) C = 0 (C) C= 2R (D) C = R
Sol. PdV = nC v dt
dQ = 2dU
nCdT = 2nCv dT C = 2Cv
2R
C= = 4R.
1. 5 1
R
18. The molar heat capacity of a polytropic process (PVn) is C = Cv + . The value of the polytropic
10
exponent n is :
R
(PVn) C = Cv + n
10
(A) 11 (B) 10 (C) – 10 (D*) –9
Sol. For polytropic process
R R R
C = CV – = –
(n 1) 10 (n 1)
n=–9
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. A uniform horizontal beam of length L and mass M is attached to a wall by a pin connection. Its far end
is supported by a cable that makes an angle with the horizontal. If a man of mass ‘m’ stands at a
distance from the wall, the tension in the cable in equilibrium is.
L M
m
20. In a solid sphere volume charge density varies with distance from centre ‘r’ according to given graph
‘r’
R/2 R r
Which of the following is best representation of electric field versus ‘r’ outside the sphere :
‘r’
E
E
E 1
1
E 2
r
r
(A*) (B)
R r R r
E
E
(C) (D)
R r R r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. At pressure P and absolute temperature T a mass M of an ideal gas fills a closed container of volume
V. An additional mass 2M of the same gas is added into the container and the volume is then reduced
V T
to and the temperature to . The pressure of the gas will now be:
3 3
P T M V 2M
V T
3 3
P
(A) (B) P (C*) 3 P (D) 9 P
3
M
Sol. If M0 is molecular mass of the gas then for initial condition PV = . RT ...(1)
M0
After 2M mass has been added
V 3M T
P . = .R. ...(2)
3 M0 3
By dividing (2) by (1)
P = 3P
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A sphere of radius R contains a total charge +Q which is uniformly distributed throughout its volume. At
a distance 2R from the centre of sphere, a particle having charge +q is fixed. P is a point on surface of
sphere and lying on line joining the centre of sphere and point charge. For what value of q will the
electric field at P be zero.
R +Q
2R +q P
q P
Q 3
(A) (B*) Q (C) Q (D) 2Q
2 2
Sol. The electric field at P shall be zero if q = Q.
P q = Q
3. A particle ‘A’ of mass m collides head on with another stationary particle ‘B’ of the same mass ‘m’.The
kinetic energy lost by the colliding particle 'A' will be maximum if the coefficient of the restituition is
m 'A' B
'A'
(A*) 1 (B) 0 (C) 0.5 (D) none
Sol. All energy is transfered to other particles.
4. An open elevator is ascending with zero acceleration and speed 10 m/s. A ball is thrown vertically up by
a boy when he is at a height 10 m from the ground, the velocity of projection is 30m/s with respect to
elevator. Choose correct option, assuming height of the boy very small : (g = 10 m/s2)
10 m/s 10 m
30m/s
(g = 10 m/s2)
(A*) Maximum height attained by the ball from ground is 90 m.
(B*) Maximum height attained by the ball with respect to lift from the point of projection is 45 m.
(C*) Time taken by the ball to meet the elevator again is 6 sec
(D*) The speed of the ball when it comes back to the boy is 20 m/s with respect to ground.
(A*) 90 m
(B*) 45 m
(C*) 6 sec
(D*) 20 m/s
Sol. (A) Absolute velocity of ball = 40 m/s (upwards)
hmax = hi = ff
( 40 ) 2
= 10 +
2 10
h = 90 m
(30 )2
(B) Maximum height from left = = 45 m
2 10
(C) The ball unless meet the elevator again when displacement of ball = displacement of lift
1
40 t – × 10 × t2 = 10 × t
2
t = 6s.
1
(D) Let t0 be the total time taken by the ball to reach the ground then – 10 = 40 × to – × 10 × to2
2
t0 = 8.24 s.
time taken by the ball for each the ground after crossing the elevator = t0 – t = 2.24 s.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A) = 40 m/s ( )
hmax = hi = ff
( 40 ) 2
= 10 +
2 10
h = 90 m
(30 ) 2
(B) = = 45 m
2 10
(C) =
1
40 t – × 10 × t2 = 10 × t t = 6s.
2
1
(D) t0 – 10 = 40 × to – × 10 × to2
2
t0 = 8.24 s.
= t0 – t = 2.24 s.
5. Two particles are projected under gravity with speed 4m/s and 3m/s simultaneously from same point
and at angles 53º and 37º with the horizontal surface respectively as shown in figure. Then :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A circular ring of mass m and radius R rests flat on a frictionless surface. A bullet also of mass m and
moving with a velocity v, strikes the ring and gets embedded in it. The thickness of the ring is much
smaller than R. Find the angular velocity with which the system rotates after the bullet strikes the ring.
m R m v
R
[ Ans.: = v/3R ]
Sol.
Let velocity of COM after collision is v & angular velocity is .
conserving linear momentum
v
mv = 2mv v = 2 ............(1)
conserving angular momentum about COM
R
mv. =
2
MR 2 MR 2
= ( Ring COM + mass
) = MR 2
4 2
MR 2 R 3
= MR 2 = mv. = MR2
4 2 2
V
=
3R
7. A charge Q is distributed uniformly within the material of a hollow sphere of inner and outer radii r1 and
r2 as shown in figure. Find the electric field at a point P a distance x away from the centre for r1 < x < r2.
Q( x 3 r13 )
[Ans. 2
]
4 0x (r23 r13 )
Q, r1 r2
Q( x 3 r13 )
x P r1 < x < r2 [Ans. 2
]
4 0x (r23 r13 )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A tank of base area 4 m2 is initially filled with water up to height 2m. An object of uniform cross-section
2m2 and height 1m is now suspended by wire into the tank, keeping distance between base of tank and
that of object 1m. Density of the object is 2000kg/m3. Take atmospheric pressure 1 × 105N/m2 ;
g = 10m/s2.
4 m2 2m 1m 2m2
1m
2000kg/m3 = 1 × 105N/m2 ; g = 10m/s2
A=2m2 1m
1m
4m2
8. The downwards force exerted by the water on the top surface of the object is :
(A) 2.0 × 105 N (B*) 2.1 × 105 N (C) 2.2 × 105 N (D) 2.3 × 105 N
Sol.
(i) By conservation of volume
4 × h = 4 × 2 + 2 × 1 = 10
h = 2.5m T
Pressure at top of the object P1A
= P0 + 0.5 × 1000 × 10 = 1.05 × 105 N/m2
F = P1A = 1.05 × 105 × 2 = 2.1 × 105 N .5m
By F.B.D. T + P2A = mg = P1A
T = mg + (P1 – P2) A A=2m2 1m
h
= mg – (P2 – P1) A
mg
= 2 × 2000 × 10 – (.2 × 105) P2A
= .4 × 105 – 0.2 × 105 = 0.2 × 105 N 4m2
Fb = V. wg
= 2 × 1000 × 10 = 0.2 × 105 N
It is also equal to net contact force by the liquid = P2A – P1A
= 0.2 × 105N
Note : Net contact force and buoyant force are same.
(i)
4 × h = 4 × 2 + 2 × 1 = 10
h = 2.5m
= P0 + 0.5 × 1000 × 10
= 1.05 × 105 N/m2
F = P1A
= 1.05 × 105 × 2 = 2.1 × 105 N
F.B.D.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
T + P2A = mg = P1A
T = mg + (P1 – P2) A
= mg – (P2 – P1) A
= 2 × 2000 × 10 – (.2 × 105)
= .4 × 105 – 0.2 × 105 = 0.2 × 105 N
Fb = V. wg
= 2 × 1000 × 10 = 0.2 × 105 N
= P2A – P1A = 0.2 × 105N
:
10. In each of the four situations of column -I , a stretched string or an organ pipe is given along with the
required data. In case of strings the tension in string is T = 102.4 N and the mass per unit length of
string is 1 g/m. Speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. Neglect end corrections. The frequencies of
resonance are given in column -II. Match each situation in column-I with the possible resonance
frequencies given in Column -II.
-I
T = 102.4 N 1 g/m 320 m/s
-II -I -II
Column-I Column-II
0.5m
fixed end free end
0.5m
0.5m
0.5m
0.5m
2. Find the electric field intensity at any point on the axis of a uniformly charged ring or hoop. What
happens, if ring is far away from the point ?
3. Define electric potential at a point. Derive an expression for the potential at a point due to a point
charge.
[4 Mark]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A small block of mass m is pushed towards a movable wedge of mass m and height h with initial
velocity u. All surfaces are smooth. The minimum value of u for which the block will reach the top of the
wedge
m u m h
u
h m
u
1 1
(A) 2gh (B) 2gh (C*) 2gh 1 (D) 2gh 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A triangular medium has varying refracting index n = n0 + ax, where x is the distance (in cm) along x–
4
axis from origin and n0 = . A ray is incident normally on face OA at the mid–point of OA. The range of
3
a so that light does not escape through face AB when it falls first time on the face AB (OA = 4 cm, OB =
3 cm and AB = 5 cm) : (Surrounding medium is air)
n = n0 + ax, x, x-
4
(cm ) n0 = . OA a
3
AB AB (OA = 4 cm, OB = 3 cm
AB = 5 cm) : ()
1 2 1
(A) a > (B*) a > (C) a > (D) None of these
9 9 3
3
Sol. Clearly, PM = cm
2
1
37º > sin–1
n0 a( 3 / 2)
3 1
>
5 3a
n0
2
ga
3n0 + >5
2
ga
>1
2
2
a>
9
3. An infinite large charge sheet with surface charge density is placed in x – y plane. A uniformly
charged spherical shell total charge Q of radius R is placed such that center of the shell is at (0, 0, 2R).
consider points A and B with coordinates A(0,0, R/2) and B(0,0, 7R/2)
x – y Q R
(0, 0, 2R) A B
A(0,0, R/2) B(0,0, 7R/2)
3 R
(A*) VA – VB =
2 0
R KQ
(B) VA – VB = +
2 0 2R
(C*) Electric field inside shell is non zero and uniform
Q
(D) Net force on hemispherical portion is
4 0
Q
4 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A 500 g block P rests on a frictionless horizontal table at a distance of 400 mm from a fixed pin O
. The block is attached to pin O by an elastic cord of constant k = 100N/m and of undeformed length
900 mm . If the block is set in motion perpendicularly as shown in figure. The speed in the begining is
such that the distance from O to the block P will reach the maximum value of 1.2 m. (assume there is
no loss in energy due to jerk)
500 g P (fixed) O 400 mm
O k = 100N/m
900 mm
P, O1.2 m (jerk)
P
m v
400mm
Sol.
u2
(c) an =
r
u2 Kx 100 0.3
r= an 60m / s2
an m 0.5
(1. 5) 2 2.25
r= = = 0.0375 m
( 60) 60
= 3.75 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. Two blocks A and B of equal masses m kg each are connected by a light thread, which passes over a
massless pulley as shown. Both the blocks lie on wedge of mass m kg. Assume friction to be absent
everywhere and both the blocks to be always in contact with the wedge. The wedge lying over smooth
horizontal surface is pulled towards right with constant acceleration a (m/s2). (g is acceleration due to
gravity).
A B m kg
m kg
wedge
a (m/s2) (g ).
m
(A*) Normal reaction acting on block B is (3g + 4a)
5
m
B (3g + 4a)
5
m
(B*) Normal reaction acting on block A is (4g – 3a)
5
m
A (4g – 3a)
5
m
(C) Normal reaction acting on block A is (4g + 3a)
5
m
A (4g + 3a)
5
(D*)The maximum value of acceleration a for which normal reactions acting on the block A and block B
4
are nonzero is g
3
4
a A B g
3
Sol. The FBD of A and B are
Applying Newton's second law to block A
and B along normal to inclined surface
NB – mg cos 53° = ma sin 53°
mg cos 37° – NA = ma sin 37°
m m
Solving NA = (4g – 3a) and NB = (3g + 4a)
5 5
For NA to be non zero
4g – 3a > 0
4g
or a<
3
A B FBD
A B
NB – mg cos 53° = ma sin 53°
mg cos 37° – NA = ma sin 37°
m m
NA = (4g – 3a) NB = (3g + 4a)
5 5
NA
4g
4g – 3a > 0 or a<
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A non uniform string of mass 45 kg and length 1.5 m has a variable linear mass density given by =
kx, where x is the distance from one end of the string and k is a constant. Tension in the string is 15 N
which is uniform. Find the time (in second) required for a pulse generated at one end of the string to
travel to the other end.
45 kg, 1.5m
= kx, x k
15 N
Ans. 2
M
dM 2M
Sol. = Kx = dM = Kx dx and K = 2
dx
0 0
F F dx
V= = =
Kx dt
t
F
xdx = dt
K
0 0
3
4 K 4 3 2m 8M 8 45 1.5
t= . = . 2 = = = 2.
g f 9 9F 9 15
COMPREHENSION
"If deformation is small, the stress in a body is proportional to the corresponding strain."
This fact is known as Hooke's law. Thus, if a rod is strectched by equal and opposite forces F each, a
tensile stress F/ A is produced in the rod where A is the area of cross section. The length of the rod
increases from its natural value L to L + L. Tensile strain is L/L.
By Hooke's law, for small deformations,
Tensile stress
Y
Tensile strain
is a constant for the given material. This ratio of tensile stress over tensile strain is called Young
modulus for the material. In the situation described above, the Young modulus is
F/ A FL
Y
L/L A L
If the rod is compressed, compressive stress and compressive strain appear. Their ratio Y is same as
that for the tensile case.
"
F F/ A A
L L + L L/L
y
(Young modulus)
F/ A FL
Y [HC Verma]
L/L A L
Y
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. Two persons pull a rope towards themselves. Each person exerts a force of 100 N on the rope. Find
the Young modulus of the material of the rope if it extends in length by 1 cm. Original length of the rope
2
= 2 m and the area of cross section = 2 cm .
100 N
1 cm = 2
m = 2 cm2.
8 2 7 2 8 2 8 2
(A) 0.5 × 10 N/m (B) 1 × 10 N/m (C) 2 × 10 N/m (D*) 1 × 10 N/m
8. A uniform heavry rod of weight W, cross-sectional area A and length L is hanging from a fixed support.
Young modulus of the material of the rod is Y. Neglect the lateral contraction. The elongation of the rod
is
W A L
Y
WL WL WL 3WL
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2AY AY 4 AY 2 AY
Sol. Consider a small length dx of the rod at a distance x from the fixed end. The part below this small
element has length L – x. The tension T of the rod at the element equals the weight of the rod below it.
W
T = (L – x)
L
Elongation in the element is given by elongation = original length × stress/Y
Tdx (L x) Wdx
= = .
AY LAY
L L
(L x ) Wdx W x2 WL
The total elongation = = Lx = .
LAY LAY 2 2AY
0 0
9. A sphere of mass 20 kg is suspended by a metal wire of unstretched length 4 m and diameter 1mm.
When in equilibrium, there is a clear gap of 2 mm between the sphere and the floor. The sphere is
gently pushed aside so that the wire makes an angle with the vertical and is released. Find the
maximum value of so that the sphere does not rub the floor. Young modulus of the metal of the wire is
2.0 × 1011 N m-2. Make appropriate approximations.
20 kg 4 m 1mm
2 mm
2.0 × 1011 N m–2
(A*) 37° (B) 53° (C) 30° (D) 60°
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Match the statements in Column with the results in Column
Column – I Column – II
(A) Work done by ideal gas during free expansion (p) zero
(B) A wedge block system is as shown in the fig. (q) non zero
The wedge lying on horizontal surface is accelerated to
right by a horizontal force F. All surfaces are smooth. Work
done by normal reaction exerted by wedge on block in any
time interval is
(C) There is a uniformly positive charge solid sphere with centre O. (r) negative
There is a point on surface A. Then VA – VO is
(D) A uniform cylinder lies over a rough horizontal platform. The (s) positive
platform is accelerated horizontally as shown with acceleration
a. The cylinder does not slip over the platform.The work done
by the force of friction on the cylinder w.r.t ground in any time interval is
– I – II
(A) (p)
(B) (q)
F
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A)
(B) (
)
3kq
(C) VO =
2R
kq
VA =
R
(D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Block A in the figure is released from rest when the extension in the spring is x0. (x0 < Mg/k). The
maximum downwards displacement of the block is (ther is no friction) :
A x0 (x0 < Mg/k)
:
3. When a ball is released from rest in a very long column of viscous liquid, its downward acceleration is
‘a’(just after release). Then its acceleration when it has acquired two third of the maximum velocity
‘a’ (
)
a 2a a
(A*) (B) (C) (D) none of these
3 3 6
Sol. (A)
When the ball is just released, the net force on ball is Weff (= mg – buoyant force)
The terminal velocity ‘vf’ of the ball is attained when net force on the ball is zero.
Viscous force 6 r vf = Weff
2
When the ball acquires rd of its maximum velocity vf
3
2
the viscous force is = Weff.
3
2 1
Hence net force is Weff – Weff = Weff
3 3
a
required acceleration is =
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2
6 ph r vf 6ph r 2 vf = We ff
3 3
W eff = 6ph r vf
4. An isosceles trapezium of refracting material of refractive index 2 and dimension of sides being 5cm,
5cm, 10cm and 5cm. The angle of minimum deviation by this when light is incident from air and
emerges in air is:
2 5cm, 5cm, 10cm 5cm
:
1
(A) 22 (B) 45° (C*) 30° (D) 60°
2
Sol. If we complete the trapezium as shown It becomes an equilateral triangle
A = 60°
A min
sin
2
A A
sin
2
5 5
60 min
sin
2 10
2
60
sin
2
min = 30°
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. Consider a uniformly charged solid cube of side 'a' and volume charge density . The centre of cube is
1 x y
O and one of vertex is A. The potential at one of the vertex is given by c a . Where c is a
4 0
dimensionless constant. Select correct alternatives.
'a' O
1 x y
A c a c
4 0
VA 1 VO 1
(A*) x = 1 (B*) y = 2 (C*) (D)
VO 2 VA 2
Sol. Dimensionaly
x
C C
(m) y
m m3
comparing both sides
x = 1, y = 2
cube of side a can be assumed to be madeup of eight small cubes of side a/2.
VA
If VA is potential at vertex of big cube then potential at vertex of small cube will be
4
VA
so net potential of centre VO = 8
4
6. A non – conducting semicircular disc (as shown in figure) has a uniform surface charge density .
Select the correct alternative for electric field and potential at centre
b
(A) E = K n (B*) V =K (b – a).
a
E 1 n(b / a )2 E (b a )
(C*) = (D) =
V (b a ) V 2 n( b / a)
b
2K dx b
Sol. E= dE = =2K n
x a
x a
b
K x dx E 2k n(b / a) ln(b / a )2
V = dV = =K (b – a). = =
x V k (b a ) (b a )
x a
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. An ideal monatomic gas is at P0, V0. It is taken to final volume 2V0 when pressure is P0/2 in a process
which is straight line on P-V diagram. Then
P0, V0 P0/2 2V0
PV-
Sol.
P0 V 0
(A) TA = and
nR
P / 2 . 2V 0 P V
TB = 0 = 0 0
nR nR
TA = TB
(B) As TA = TB, U=0
P
(C) Slope of isothermal curve = .
V
P
(D) Slope of adiabatic curve =
V
8. A string 25 cm long fixed at both ends and having a mass of 2.5 g is under tension. A pipe closed from
one end is 40 cm long. When the string is set vibrating in its first overtone and the air in the pipe in its
fundamental frequency, 8 beats per second are heard. It is observed that decreasing the tension in the
string decreases the beat frequency. If the speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. Find tension in the string.
25 cm (fixed) 2.5 g
40 cm
8
320 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. 5
Sol. = 0.1 g / cm = 10–2 Kg/m
25
Ist overtone
= 25 cm = 0.25 m
1 T
fs =
s
pipe in fundamental freq
= 160 cm = 1.6 m
V
fp =
p
by decreasing the tension , beat freq is decreased
1 T 320
fs > fp fs –fp = 8 = 8 T = 27.04 N
0.25 10 2 1 .6
COMPREHENSION.
The ratio of volume stress over volume strain is called Bulk modulus. If P be the volume stress (same
as pressure) and V be the increase in volume, the Bulk modulus is defined as
P
B
V/V
The minus sign makes B positive as volume actually decreases on applying pressure. Quite often, the
change in volume is measured corresponding to a change in pressure. The bulk modulus is then
defined as
P dP
B=– = –V
V/V dV
Compressibility K is defined as the reciprocal of the bulk modulus.
1 1 dV
K= =–
B V dP
P
V
P
B
V/V
B
P dP
B=– = –V
V/V dV
K
1 1 dV
K= =–
B V dP
9. Find the increase in pressure required to decrease the volume of a water sample by 0.01%. Bulk
modulus of water = 2.1 × 109 N m–2.
0.01%
= 2.1 × 109 N m–2
(A*) 2.1 × 105 N/m2 (B) 2.4 × 105 N/m2 (C) 3.2 × 105 N/m2 (D) 4.2 × 105 N/m2
V
Sol. P = –B = 2.1 × 109 × 10–4
V
5 2
2.1 × 10 N/m
10. Estimate the change in the density of water in ocean at a depth of 400 m below the surface. The
density of water at the surface = 1000 kg m–3 and the bulk modulus of water = 2 × 109 N m-2.
400 m
= 1000 kg m–3 = 2 × 109 N m-2
3 3 3 3
(A*) 2 kg/m (B) 3 kg/m (C) 0.5 kg/m (D) 20 kg/m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. P = gh =103×10×400 = 4 × 106 N/m2
v
– =
v
v 4 10 6
P= –B =B = = 2 × 10–3
v 2 10 9
= 2 kg/m3
11. Two blocks of masses 20 kg and 10 kg are kept or a rough horizontal floor. The coefficient of friction
between both blocks and floor is = 0.2. The surface of contact of both blocks are smooth. Horizontal
forces of magnitude 20 N and 60 N are applied on both the blocks as shown in figure. Match the
statement in column-I with the statements in column-II.
20 kg 10 kg
= 0.2 20 N 60 N
-I -II
F=20N
1
20kg 10kg
F1=20N F=60N
2
20kg 10kg left
F2=60N =0.2 right
left
=0.2 right
rough horizontal floor
Column-I Column-II
(A) Frictional force acting on block of mass 10 kg (p) has magnitude 20 N
(B) Frictional force acting on block of mass 20 kg (q) has magnitude 40 N
(C) Normal reaction exerted by 20 kg block on 10 kg block (r) is zero
(D) Net force on system consisting of 10 kg block (s) is towards right (in horizontal
and 20 kg block direction).
-I -II
(A) 10 kg (p) 20 N
(B) 20 kg (q) 40 N
(C) 20 kg 10 kg (r)
(D) 10 kg 20 kg (s) ()
Ans. (A) p,s (B) p,s (C) q,s (D) r
Sol. The minimum horizontal force required to push the two block system towards left
= 0.2 × 20 × 10 + 0.2 × 10 × 10 = 60.
Hence the two block system is at rest. The FBD of both of blocks is as shown. The friction force f and
normal reaction N for each block is as shown.
FBD f
N
F1=20N F2=60N
fmax=40N fmax=
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A particle of unit mass undergoes one-dimensional motion such that its velocity varies according to :
v(x) = b x–2n
where b and n are constants and x is the position of the particle. The acceleration of the particle as
function of x, is given by :
v(x) = b x–2n
b n x x
(A*) –2nb2 x –4n – 1 (B) –2b2 x –2n + 1 (C) –2nb2 e –4n + 1 (D) –2nb2 x –2n – 1
Sol. (A)
V (x) = bx–2n
dv
a=v =bx –2n b(–2n)x –2n–1
dx
= – 2b2 n x–4n–1
2. The Fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of
an organ pipe open at both the ends. The length of organ pipe open at both the ends is:
20 cm
(A) 100 cm (B*) 120 cm (C) 140 cm (D) 80 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
V 3V
4(20cm) 2 open
open
= 120 cm
3. The refracting angle of a prism 'A', and refractive index of the material of the prism is cot(A/2). The
angle of minimum deviation is :
A, cot(A/2)
(A*) 1800 – 2A (B) 900 – A (C) 1800 + 2A (D) 1800 – 3A
A
m
sin
2
Sol. =
sin A / 2
A m
sin
2 cos A / 2
cot A/2 =
sin A / 2 sin A / 2
m A
Sin sin(90 A / 2)
2
min
= 1800 – 2A
1
4. A Carnot engine, having efficiency of as heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done
10
on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is :
1
10
10 J ,
(A) 99 J (B*) 90 J (C) 1 J (D) 100 J
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. A mass m moves in a circle on a smooth horizontal plane with velocity v0 at a radius R0. The mass is
attached to string wihich passes through a smooth hole in the plane as shown.
R
The tension in the string is increased gradually and finally m moves in a circle of radius 0 . The final
2
value of the kinetic energy is :
m R0 v0
R0
m,
2
1 1
(A) mv 02 (B*) 2mv 20 (C) mv 20 (D) mv 20
4 2
Sol.
6. Two identical thin plano-convex glass lenses (refractive index = 1.5) each haveing radius of curvature
of 20 cm are placed with their convex surfaces in contact at the center. The intervening space is filled
with oil of refractive index 1.7. The focal length of the combination is :
1.5 20 cm
1.7
(A) –25 cm (B*) –50 cm (C) 50 cm (D) –20 cm
Sol.
1 1.5 1 1
= –1 – f1 = 40 cm
f1 1 –20
1 1.7 1 1 100
= –1 – f1 = – cm
f2 1 –20 20 7
f3 is also 40 cm
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
feq f1 f2 f3 feq 40 –100 40
7
feq = –50 cm Ans is (B)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A block A of mass m1 rests on a horizotal table. A light string connected to it passes over a frictionless
pulley at the edge of table and from its other end another block B of mass m2 is suspended. The
coefficient of kinetic friction between the block and the table is mk. When the block A is sliding towards
right on the table, the tension in the string is :
'A' m1
'A' m2
B mk
'A'
(m2 km1 ) g m1m2 (1 k ) g m1m2 (1 k ) g (m2 k m1 ) g
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
(m1 m2 ) (m1 m2 ) (m1 m2 ) (m1 m2 )
Sol.
m2 g – k m1g
a=
m1 m2
m2g – T = (m2) (a)
m2 g – k m1g
m2g – T = (m2)
m1 m2
m1mg 1 k g
sol ving get T =
m1 m2
8. A particle is executing SHM along a straight line. Its velocities at distances x1 and x2 from the mean
position are V1 and V2 respectively. Its time period is:
x1 x2
V1 V2
x 22 x12 V12 V22 V12 V22 x12 x 22
(A*) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
V12 V22 x12 x 22 x12 x 22 V12 V22
Sol. V12 w 2 (A 2 x12 )
V12 w 2 (A 2 x 22 )
v12 v 22
substructing x12 x 22
w2 w2
v12 v 22 v12 v 22 x22 x12
2
= x 22 x12 w= T=2
w x 22 x12 v12 v 22
9. A ship A is moving Westwards with a speed of 10 km h–1 and a ship B 100 km South of A, is moving
Northwards with a speed of 10 km h–1. The time after which the distance between them becomes
shortest, is:
'A' 10 km h–1 'B' A
100 km 10 km h–1
(A*) 5 h (B) 5 2 h (C) 10 2 h (D) 0 h
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
VA = 10 ( ˆi)
V = 10 (ˆj)
B
10. A rod of weight W is supported by two parallel knife edges A and B and is in equilibrium in a horizontal
position. The knives are at a distance d from each other. The centre of mass of the rod is at distance x
from A. The normal reaction on A is :
W A B
A B 'd' A x A
Wd W(d x) W(d x) Wx
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
x x d d
Sol. (C) equating torque about center of mass
NA x = NB (d-x)
NA + NB = mg
W(d x)
solving NA =
d
11. Two blocks of masses m1, m2 move with initial velocities u1 and u2 . On collision, energy is used to
make some permanent deformation. If final velocities of particles be v1 and v2 then we must have:
m1, m2 u1 u2
v1 v2
1 1 1 1
(A) m1u12 m2u22 m1v12 m2 v 22
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
(B*) m1u12 m2u 22 m1v12 m2 v 22
2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
(C) m12u12 m2u2 m1 v1 m2 v 2
2 2 2 2
(D) m12u1 m22 u2 m12 v1 m22 v 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 1 1 1
Sol. (B) mv12 mv 22 m1u12 m 2u22
2 2 2 2
By energy conservation
12. A wind with speed 40 m/s blows paralel to the roof of a house. The area of the roof is 250 m2. Assuming
that the pressure inside the house is atmospheric pressure, the force exerted by the wind on the roof
and the direction of the direction of the force will be : (Pair = 1.2 kg / m3)
(A) 4.8 x 105 N, upwards (B*) 2.4 x 105 N, upwards
(C) 2.4 x 10 N, downwards
5
(D) 4.8 x 105 N, downwards
250 m 40 m/s
2
1
Fner = 1.2 40 40 250 N
2
= 2.4 × 105 N
13. Figure below shows two paths that may be taken by a gas to go from a state A to a state C.
In process AB, 400J of heat is added to the system and in process BC, 100 J of heat is added to the
system.The heat absorbed by the system in the process AC will be:
A C
AB, 400J BC 100 J AC
(A) 500 J (B*) 460 J (C) 300 J (D) 380 J
Sol. (B)
For a complite cycle
Qcycle = Wcycle
1
+ 400 + 100 + QC A
=
(2 × 10–3) (4 × 104)
2
QC A = – 460 J
QA C = + 460 J
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. If energy (E), velocity (V) and time (T) are chosen as the fundamental quantities, the dimensional
formula of surface tension will be:
(E), (V) (T)
(A) [EV-1 T-2] (B*) [EV-2T-2] (C) [E-2V-1T-3] (D) [EV-2 T-1]
Sol. (B)
Let surface tension
= Ea Vb Tc
equating the dimension of LHS and RHS
b
M1L1T –2 L
(M1L2 T –2 )a (T)C
L T
M1L0T–2 = MaL2a+b T–2a – b + c
a = 1, 2a + b = 0, –2a – b + c = –2
a = 1, b = – 2 c = – 2
15. Three blocks A, B and C of masses 4 kg, 2 kg and 1 kg respectively, are in contact on a frictionless
surface, as shown. If a force of 14 N is applied on the 4 kg block then the contact force between A and
B is :
() A, B C
() 4 kg, 2 kg 1 kg 4 kg (A) 14 N
A B :
16. Three identical spherical shells, each of mass m and radius r are placed as shown in figure. Consider
an axis XX' which is touching to two shells and passing through diameter of third shell.
Moment of inertia of the system consisting of these three sphereical shell about XX' axis is :
() m r
XX'
XX' :
16 2 11 2
(A) 3 mr2 (B) mr (C*) 4 mr2 (D) mr
5 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2
Sol. (D) Idiameter = MR 2
3
2 5
Itengential =MR 2 MR 2 MR 2
3 3
2 5
so Itotal = MR2 MR 2 2 4MR 2
3 3
12
= MR 2 4MR 2
3
17. A particle of mass m is driven by a machine that delivers a constant power k watts. If the particle starts
from rest the force on the particle at time is :
'm' () k
't'
1 mk –1/ 2
(A) mkt –1/ 2 (B) 2mkt –1/ 2 (C) mkt –1/ 2 (D*) t
2 2
dw
Sol. P
dt
1
w = Pt = mV 2
2
2Pt
so. V
m
dV 2P 1
Hence a .
dt m 2 t
2Pm2 1 Pm
so from = ma .
m 2 t 2t
CP
18. The ratio of the specific heats in terms of degrees of freedom (n) is given by:
Cv
CP
(n)
Cv
n 2 n 1
(A) 1 (B*) 1 (C) 1 (D) 1
3 n 2 n
Sol. (B)
f
1 R
CP 2 2
1
CV f f
R
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. When two displacement represented by x = a sin ( t) and y = b cos ( t) are superimposed the motion
is
a
(A) simple harmonic with amplitude (B) simple harmonic with amplitude a2 b2
b
(a b)
(C) simple harmonic with amplitude (D*) not a simple harmonic
2
x = a sin ( t) y = b cos ( t)
a
(A) (B) a2 b2
b
(a b)
(C) (D*)
2
20. One mole of an ideal diatomic gas undergoes a transition from A to B along a path AB as shown in the
figure,
1 AB A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Ans.
Consider an element of charge dq. Due to this element, the electric field at the point on axis, which is at
a distance x from the centre of the ring is dE.
There are two components of this electric field
dE
dEX dEY
The y-component of electric field due to all the elements will be cancelled out to each other. So net
electric field intensity at the point will be only due to X-component of each element.
Q Q
K(dq) x k x
Enet = dE x = dECos = = dq
O
R2 x2 R2 X2 (R 2 x2 )3 / 2 O
KQx
Enet = 2
[R x 2 ]3 / 2
dE R 2KQ
E will be max when = 0, that is at x= and Emax =
dx 2 3 3 R2
KQ
if x>>R, E = 2 , hence the ring will act like a point charge
x
2. Two infinite parallel planes have uniform charge densities ± . What is the electric field
(a) in the region between the planes and
(b) outside the plates ?
In what way does the infinite extension of the planes simplify your derivation ?
±
(a)
(b)
Ans. (a) in the region between the two infinite parallel planes having uniform charge densities ± , the
electric field is equal to / 0.
(b) The electric field is zero in the region outside the plates. The problem has symmetry due to infinite
extension of planes.
(a) ± / 0 .
(b)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Obtain expression for potential energy of the configuration of three charges. Hence, generalise the
result for a system of n point charges.
n
Ans. Potential energy of a system of three point charges.
Let us calculate the potential energy of a system of three charges q1, q2 and q3 located at r1 , r2 , r3
respectively. To bring q1 first from infinity to r1 , no work is required. Next we bring q2 from infinity to r2 .
As before, work done in this step is
1 q1q2
q2V1( r2 ) = ...(1)
4 0 r12
The charges q1 and q2 produce a potential, which at any point P is given by
1 q1 q2
V1 . 2 ...(2)
4 0 r1P r2P
Work done next in bringing q3 from infinity to the point is q3 times V1 . 2 at r3
1 q1q3 q2 q3
q3 V1 . 2 (r3 ) (3)
4 0 r13 r23
The total work done in assembling the charges at the given locations is obtained by adding the work
done in different steps (eq. (1) to (3)
1 p 3 cos 2 1
Ans. E= . 3
4 0 r
where is the angle, which the line joining the observation point and the centre of the dipole makes
with the dipole.
5. Does an electric dipole always experience a torque, when placed in a uniform electric field ?
Ans. No it does not experience a torque, when it is placed along the direction of electric field.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
(A) (B)
(C) (D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. An automobile enters a turn of radius R. If the road is banked at an angle of 450 and the coefficient of
friction is 1, the minimum and maximum speed with which the automobile can negotiate the turn without
skidding is :
R 450 1
rg rg rg
(A) and rg (B) and rg (C) and 2 rg (D*) 0 and infinite
2 2 2
rg rg rg
(A) rg (B) rg (C) 2 rg (D*)
2 2 2
mv 2
fy' = N – mg cos – sin = 0.
R
mv 2
fx' = cos + N – mg sin =0
R
mv 2 mv 2
cos + (mg cos + sin ) – mg sin =0
R R
( Rg cos Rg sin )
v2 =
(cos sin )
Rg Rg
for = 45º and = 1 : v min = =0
1 1
F.B.D for maximum speed (w.r.t. automobile)
mv 2 mv 2
fx' = cos – mg sin – (mg cos + sin ) = 0
R R
for = 45º and = 1
vmax = (infinite)
3. A hollow cylinder has mass M, outside radius R2 and inside radius R1. Its moment of inertia about an
axis parallel to its symmetry axis and tangential to the outer surface is equal to :
M, R2 R1
M M M M
(A) (R22 + R12) (B) (R22 – R12) (C) (R2 + R1)2 (D*) (3R22 + R12)
2 2 4 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. A bob of mass m and charge q is suspended with the help of a string of length as shown in figure. A
point charge q is brought from infinity to the initial position of the bob along dotted horizontal line. The
charge is moved very slowly such that bob always remains nearly in equilibrium. In final situation string
makes 60° angle with vertical.
m q
q
60°
60°
m
q
Far away
m q
q q Final situation
Initial situation
60°
m
q
m q
q q
2
kq
(A*) Tension in the string in final situation is 2
kq2
(B*) Work done by gravity on the system in this process is
2
(C*) Tension in the string in final situation is mg
3kq 2
(D*) Work done by external forces on the system in this process.is
2
kq2
(A*) 2
kq2
(B*)
2
(C*) mg
3kq 2
(D*)
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Work done against gravitation force (Wg) = mgh
kq 2
Work done against electrostatic force (We) =
FBD in final situation
60° Fe
T
m
q
mg
q
Fe = mg
So total work done = We + Wg
kq 2
= + mg ( h= )
2 2
3kq 2
=
2
6. A disc (A) of radius r rolls without slipping around another fixed disc (B) of radius R. The centre of disc
A moves with constant speed v then angular velocity of the:
r (A), R (B)
A v :
A
v
R
B
v
(A*) The disc A is
r
v
(B) The disc A is
R r
v
(C*) The centre of disc A w.r.t. centre of disc B is
R r
v
(D) The centre of disc A w.r.t. centre of disc B is
r
v
(A*) A
r
v
(B) A
R r
v
(C*) A B
R r
v
(D) A B
r
v
Sol. Since velocity of point on disc B in contact with fixed disc should be zero so =
r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are connected to a massless spring of natural length L and spring
constant K. The blocks are initially resting on a smooth horizontal floor with the spring at its natural
length as shown in the figure. A third identical block C also of mass m moves on the floor with speed v
along the line joining A and B and collides elastically with A, then :
A B m, L K
,
m C v A B A
:
K
(A) the K.E. of the A B system at maximum compression of the spring is zero
A B
(B*) the K.E. of the A B system at maximum compression of the spring is mv2/4
A B mv2/4
(C) the maximum compression of the spring is v (m / K )
v (m / K )
(D*) the maximum compression of the spring is v (m / 2K )
v (m / 2K )
Sol. In elastic collision the velocities are exchanged if masses are same.
after the collision ;
VC = 0 VA = v
Now the maximum compression will occur when both the masses A and B move with same velocity.
mv = (m + m) V (for system of A – B and spring)
v
V=
2
2
1 v mv 2
KE of the A – B system = × 2m =
2 2 4
And at the time of maximum compression ;
2
1 1 v 1 m
mv2 = × 2m + K X2max Xmax = v
2 2 2 2 2k
COMPREHENSION
A sinusoidal wave travels along a taut string of linear mass density 0.1 g/cm. The particles oscillate
along y-direction and wave moves in the positive x-direction. The amplitude and frequency of oscillation
are 2mm and 50 Hz respectively. The minimum distance between two particles oscillating in the same
phase is 4m.
0.1 g/cm
y- x-
2mm 50 Hz 4m
8. The tension in the string is (in newton)
(
(A) 4000 (B*) 400 (C) 25 (D) 250
Sol. = 4m and f = 50 Hz.
V = f = 200 m/s
T
V= T = v2 = (0.01) × (200)2 = 400 N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. The amount of energy transferred (in Joules) through any point of the string in 5 seconds is
5 ()
2 2 2
(A) (B) (C*)
10 50 5
(D) Cannot be calculated because area of cross-section of string is not given.
Sol. Since integral number of waves shall cross a point is 5 seconds, therefore power transmitted in 5
seconds is
5 5
= <P> × 5 = 2 2 f2 A2 v × 5
2
=2× 2 × (50)2 × (2 × 10–3)2 × (0.01) × 200 × 5 =
5
10. If at x = 2m and t = 2s, the particle is at y = 1mm and its velocity is in positive y-direction, then the
equation of this travelling wave is : (y is in mm, t is in seconds and x is in metres)
x = 2m t = 2s y = 1mm y
(y mm , t x )
x x
(A) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 30°) (B) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 120°)
2 2
x
(C) y = 2 sin ( – 100 t + 150°) (D*) None of these
2
Sol. The equation of waves is
y = A sin(kx – t + 0)
2
where K = = , = 2 f = 100 and A = 2
2
at x = 2 and t = 2 y = 1 mm
1 = 2 sin( – 200 + 0) solving 0 = –30°
x
y = 2 sin 100 t 30
2
y = A sin(kx – t + 0)
2
K = , = 2 f = 100 and A = 2
2
at x = 2 and t = 2 y = 1 mm
1 = 2 sin( – 200 + 0) 0 = –30°
x
y = 2 sin 100 t 30
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. If force (F), velocity(V) and time (T) are taken as fundamental units, the dimensions of mass are
(A) [FVT–1] (B) [FVT-2] (C) [FV–1T–1] (D*) [FV–1T]
(F), (V) (T)
(A) [FVT–1] (B) [FVT-2] (C) [FV–1T–1] (D) [FV–1T]
Ans. (D)
L ML
Sol. F=M× 2 =
T TT
ML
F=
T
FTV–1 = M
2. A projectile is fired from the surface of the earth with a velocity of 5ms–1 and angle with the horizontal.
Another projectile fired from another planet with a velocity of 3ms–1 at the same angle follows a
trajectory which is identical with the trajectory of the projectile fired from the earth. The value of the
acceleration due to gravity on the planet is : (given acceleration due to gravity on earth = 9.8 ms–2)
(A*) 3.5 (B) 5.9 (C)16.3 (D)110.8
5ms–1
3ms–1 ( )
g = 9.8 ms–2
(A) 3.5 (B) 5.9 (C)16.3 (D)110.8
Ans. (A)
Sol.
52 32
g a
9
a = 9.8 ×
25
a = 3.5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A particle is moving such that its position coordinates (x,y) are
(2m, 3m) at time t = 0,
(6m,7m) at time t = 2s and
(13m, 14m) at time t = 5 s,
Average velocity vector Vav from t = 0 to t = 5 s is :
1 7 11
(A) 13 î 14 j (B) î j (C) 2 î j (D*) î j
5 3 5
(x,y)
(2m, 3m) t = 0,
(6m,7m) t = 2s
(13m, 14m) t = 5 s
t = 0 t = 5 s Vav
1 7 11
(A) 13 î 14 j (B) 1î j (C) 2 î j (D) î j
5 3 5
Ans (D)
Sol. r 2 î 3 ĵ
rf 13 î 14 ĵ
s 11î 11ĵ
11î 11ĵ
<v > =
5
4. A system consists of three masses m1, m2 and m3 connected by a string passing over a pulley P. The
mass m1 hangs freely and m2 and m3 are on a rough horizontal table (the coefficient of friction = ). The
pulley is frictionless and of negligible mass. The downward acceleration of mass m1 is : (Assume m1 =
m2 = m3 = m)
m2 m
m31
P
m13
g (1 g ) 2g g(1 2 ) g(1 2 )
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
9 3 3 2
m1, m2 m3 P
m1 m2 m3 =
m1 = m2 = m3 = mm1
m2 m
m31
P
m13
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
g (1 g ) 2g g(1 2 ) g(1 2 )
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
9 3 3 2
Ans. (C)
mg 2 mg
Sol. a=
3m
g 2 mg 1 2
a= =g
3m 3
5. The force 'F' acting on a particle of mass 'm' is indicated by the force-time graph shown below. The
change in momentum of the particle over the time interval from zero to 8 s is :
'm' 'F' t = 0 8 s
6. A balloon with mass 'm' is descending down with an acceleration 'a' (where a < g). How much mass
should be removed from it so that is starts moving up with an acceleration 'a' ?
'm' 'a' ( a < g)
'a'
2ma 2ma ma ma
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
g a g a g a g a
Ans. (A)
Sol. mg – F = ma .....(A)
F – (m – m')g = (m – m')a
from (A)
F – mg + m g = ma – m a
mg – ma – mg + m g = ma – m a
m (g + a) = 2ma
2ma
m =
g a
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A body of mass (4m) is lying in x-y plane at rest. It suddenly explodes into three pieces. Two pieces,
each of mass (m) move perpendicular to each other with equal speeds ( ). The total kinetic energy
generated due to explosion is :
3
(A)m 2 (B*) m 2 (C) 2m 2 (D) 4m 2
2
4m x-y
'm' ' '
3 2 2 2
(A)m 2
(B) m (C) 2m (D) 4m
2
Ans. (B)
Sol.
pi = pf
O = mv î + mv ĵ + 2m
v v
v = î ĵ
2 2
v
|v | =
2
2
v v v v mv 2 3
KE = mv 2 mv 2 2m = mv2 + mv 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
a = t
T =
Ans. (C)
Sol. X = A cos t
v = A sin t
a = – a 2 cos t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. A solid cylinder of mass 50 kg and radius 0.5 m is free to rotate about horizontal axis. A massless string
is wound round the cylinder with one end attached to it and other hanging freely. Tension in the string
required to produce an angular acceleration of 2 revolutions s–2
(A) 25 N (B) 50 N (C) 78.5 N (D*) 157 N
50 kg 0.5 m
2 –2
(A) 25 N (B) 50 N (C) 78.5 N (D) 157 N
Ans. (D)
MR 2
Sol. (T) × (R) =
2
MR 50 0.5
T= = (2 × 2 ) = 157N
2 2
10. The ratio of the acceleration for a solid sphere (mass 'm' and radius 'R') rolling down an incline of angle
' ' without slipping and slipping down the incline without rolling is :
(A*) 5 : 7 (B) 2 : 3 (C) 2 : 5 (D) 7 : 5
' ' 'm' 'R'
(A) 5 : 7 (B) 2 : 3 (C) 2 : 5 (D) 7 : 5
Ans. (A)
g sin
Sol. a1 =
I
1
MR 2
g sin 5
a1 = = g sin
2 7
1 MR 2
5
a1 5
a2 7
11. If we study the vibration of a open pipe at both ends, then the following statement is not true :
(A) Odd harmonics of the fundamental frequency will be generated
(B) All harmonics of the fundamental frequency will be generated
(C*) Pressure change will be maximum at both ends
(D) Open end will be antinode for displacement wave
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Ans. (C)
Sol. Pressure change will be minimum at both ends
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. In the figure, a proton moves a distance d in a uniform E as shown in the figure. If W is work done by
the electric field and U is change in the electric potential energy of the proton then.
E d
W U
E
+
P
d
(A*) W < 0 and U > 0 (B) W > 0 and U < 0
(C) W > 0 and U > 0 (D) W < 0 and U < 0
(A*) W < 0 U > 0 (B) W > 0 U < 0
(C) W > 0 U > 0 (D) W < 0 U < 0
Sol. Change particle is moved anti parallel to electrostatic force, hence external aqent has to do work.
13. Copper of fixed volume 'V' is drawn into wire of length ' '. When this wire is subjected to a constant
force 'F', the extension produced in the wire is ' '. Which of the following graph is a straight line ?
(A) versus 1/ (B) versus 2
(C) versus 1/ 2
(D) versus
'V' ' ' 'F'
' '
(A) 1/ (B) 2 (C) 1/ 2 (D)
Ans. (B)
Sol. V= A
F/ A
Y=
Y F
=
A
F F
.
YA Y V
F 2
YV
2
14. A certain number of spherical drops of a liquid of radius 'r' coalesce to form a single drop of radius 'R'
and volume 'V'. If 'T' is the surface tension of the liquid then:
1 1 1 1
(A) Energy = 4VT is released. (B) Energy = 3VT is released.
r R r R
1 1
(C) Energy = 3VT is released. (D) Energy is neither released nor absorbed.
r R
'r' 'R' 'V'
'T'
1 1 1 1
(A) 4VT (B) 3VT
r R r R
1 1
(C) 3VT (D)
r R
Ans. (C)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. U = (ST) ( A)
A(initial ) = (4 r2)n
A(final ) = 4 R2
A = (4 r2)n – 4 R2
4 3 4
r n R3
3 3
R3
n=
r3
R3 R3 R3 4 R3 1 1
A= 4 2
.r 2 R2 = 4 = 3
r r R 3 r R
1 1
A = 3V
r R
1 1
U = 3VT
r R
15. Steam at 1000C is passed into 20g of water at 100C When water acquires a temperature of 800C, the
mass of water present will be:
[ Take specific heat of water = 1 cal g–1 0 C–1 and latent heat of steam = 540 cal g–1 ]
100C 20g 1000C 800C
[ = 1 cal g–1 0 C–1 = 540 cal g–1 ]
(A) 24 g (B) 31.5 g (C) 42.5 g (D) 22.5 g
Ans. (D)
Sol. m(g) steam at 100° m(g) water at 100°C + 540m .....(A)
m(g) water at 100°C m(g) water at 80°C + (m)(A) (20) .....(B)
(A) + (B)
m(g) steam at 100°C m(g) water at 80° + 560m (cal) .....(C)
20 g water at 10°C + (20) (A) 70 20 g water at 80°C .....(D)
from (C) and (D)
mix + 1400 cal (20 + m) g water at 80°C + 560m (cal)
1400 = 560m
2.5 = m
Total mass of water present
= (20 + 2.5)g
= 22.5g
Sol. m(g) 100° 100°C m(g) + 540m .....(A)
m(g) 100°C 80°C m(g) + (m)(A) (20) .....(B)
(A) + (B)
m(g) 100°C 80° m(g) + 560m (cal) .....(C)
10°C 20 g + (20) (A) 70 80°C 20 g .....(D)
(C) (D)
+ 1400 cal 80°C (20 + m) g + 560m (cal)
1400 = 560m
2.5 = m
= (20 + 2.5)g
= 22.5g
16. A monoatomic gas at a pressure P, having a volume V expands isothermally to a volume 2V and then
adiabatically to a volume 16V. The final pressure of the gas is : (take = 5/3)
P V 2V
16V = 5/3
(A) 64 P (B) 32 P (C) P/64 (D) 16P
Ans. (C)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Isothermally PV = P12V
P
P1 =
2
Adiabatically
P
(2V) = Pf (16V)
2
5
P 1 3
Pf =
2 23
5
P 1 3 P
Pf = =
2 23 ( 2) ( 2)5
P
Pf =
64
17. A thermodynamics system undergoes cyclic process ABCDA as shown in Fig. The work done by the
system in the cycle is:
ABCDA
P0 V0
(A) P0V0 (B) 2P0V0 (C) (D) Zero
2
Ans. (D)
Sol. Work done in process ODA = 1/2 × P0 × V0
While work done in the process OBC = –1/2 P0V0
Sol. ODA = 1/2 × P0 × V0
OBC = –1/2 P0V0
= 0
18. The mean free path of molecules of a gas (radius 'r') is inversely proportional to:
'r'
(A) r3 (B) r2
(C) r (D) None of these
Ans. (B)
1
Sol. Mean free path
2 nd2
1 1
So
d2 r2
19. If n1, n2 and n3 are the fundamental frequencies of three segments into which a string is divided, then
the original fundamental frequency n of the string is given by:
n1, n2 n3
n
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(A*) (B)
n n1 n 2 n3 n n1 n2 n3
(C) n = n1 + n 2 + n 3 (D) n = n1+ n2+ n3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
1 T
n1 =
2 1
1 T
n2 =
2 2
1 T
n3 =
2 3
1 T
n=
2
= 1 + 2 + 3
1 1 1 1
.
n n1 n2 n3
20. The number of possible oscillations of air column in a pipe closed at one end of length 85 cm whose
frequencies lies below 1250 Hz are: (velocity of sound = 340 ms–1 )
340 ms–1 1250 Hz 85 cm
(A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 7 (D) 6
Ans. (D)
V 340
Sol. Fundamental freuency of a closed organ pipe is f1 = = = 100 Hz
4 4 0. 85
The natural freuencies of the organ pipe will be f = 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 500 Hz, 700 Hz, 900 Hz, 1100 Hz
which are below 1250 Hz
V 340
Sol. f1 = = = 100 Hz
4 4 0 .85
1250 Hz f = 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 500 Hz, 700 Hz, 900
Hz, 1100 Hz,
1. (a) Deduce the expression for the torque acting on a dipole of dipole moment p in the presence of a
2Q S2
S1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(a) E P
(b) S1 S2 2Q 4Q
(i) (ii) S1
' r' S1
4Q
2Q S2
S1
Sol. (a) Dipole in uniform electric field : -
In this Fnet = 0
But Net torque net
= (q Esin a)
qa =P
net
= P E Sin
In vector P E
4Q
2Q
54
S1
for S1
Electric Flux
Q
1
= net
0
2Q
qnet =
0
2Q
1
=
0
For S2
Q
2
= net
0
Qnet = 4Q + 2Q = 6Q
6Q
Q2 =
0
1 2Q
= = 1/3
2 6Q
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2Q 4Q
S1
Gaussian surface
S2
For S1, electric flux remains unchanged even if dielectric medium is introduced in the space inside S1
as net charge still remains 2Q. [ Net charge due to polarisation is zero] .
S1, S1
2Q
2. A test charge 'q' is moved without acceleration from A to C along the path from A to B and then B to C
in electric field E as shown in the figure (i) Calculate the potential difference between A and C. (ii) At
which point (of the two) is the electric potential more and why?
E 'q' A B
B C 'q' A C (i) A C
(ii)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A, B and C are three points in a uniform electric field. The electric potential is :
A,B C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Particle 'A' moves with speed 10 m/s in a frictionless circular fixed horizontal pipe of radius 5 m and
strikes with 'B' of double mass that of A. Coefficient of restitution is 1/2 and particle 'A' starts its journey
at t = 0. The time at which second collision occurs is :
5 'A' 10
'B' e = 1/2 'A', t = 0
2 5
(A) s (B) s (C*) s (D) s
2 3 2
( 5)
Sol. For first collision v = 10 m/s. t1 = = /2 sec.
10
velocity of sep = e. velocity of opp.
1
v2 – v1 = (10)
2
v2 – v1 = 5 m/s
for second collision
2 (5 )
t2 = =2
5
total time t = t + t2 = /2 + 2
t = 2.5
3. A block of density 2000 kg/m3 and mass 10 kg is suspended by a spring of stiffness 100 N/m. The other
end of the spring is attached to a fixed support. The block is completely submerged in a liquid of density
1000 kg/m3 . If the block is in equilibrium position.
2000 kg/m3 10 kg 100 N/m
1000 kg/m3
:
(A) the elongation of the spring is 1 cm.
1cm
(B*) the magnitude of buoyant force acting on the block is 50 N.
50 N
(C*) the spring potential energy is 12.5 J.
12.5 J
(D) magnitude of spring force on the block is greater than the weight of the block.
Sol. Kx = V(2000) (10) – V (1000) (10)
10
= [ 1000 × 10]
2000
Kx = 50 N ... (b)
2
1 50 1 2500
Ustored = × (100) = = 12.5 J
2 100 2 100
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. The coeffcient of volume expansion of an ideal di-atomic gas for a reversible :
5 5
(A) adiabatic process is – (B*) adiabatic process is –
7T 2T
1 1
(C) isothermal process is (D*) isobaric process is
T T
5 5
(A) – (B*) –
7T 2T
1 1
(C) (D*)
T T
Sol. In adiabatic process TV -1 = constant
dT dV
1 0
T V
dV 1 dT
’ = coeff. of vol expansion
V 1 T
1 7
’ = adiabatic exponent r' r
(r 1)T 5
5
= –
2T
Isothermal process (T = Constant) =
V
Isobaric process const
T
dV dT
V T
dT
’dT =
T
1
’=
T
5. An infinite long line charge of charge per unit length is passing through one the edge.of a cube.
Length of edge of the cube is . Total flux linked with
H G
E
F
C
D
A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. Figure shows an ideal pulley block of mass m = 1 kg, resting on a rough ground with friction coefficient
µ = 1.5. Another block of mass M = 11 kg is hanging as shown. When system is released it is found that
the magnitude of acceleration of point P on string is a. Find value of 4a in m/s2. (Use g = 10 m/s2)
m = 1 kg µ = 1.5
M = 11
P a 4a m/s2 (g = 10 m/s2)
Ans. [13]
m = 1kg Q
P R
µ = 1.5 S P R
Sol.
M = 11kg
If the point P has an acceleration a upwards then the acceleration of point R will be a downwards.
R
M = 11kg
The point R has an acceleration a downwards
S P
so the block will also have an acceleration a downwards.
M = 11kg
The point P has an acceleration a upwards, the block has an acceleration a downwards so the
a aP
acceleration of S will be 3a downwards. (because s a block ).
2
The point Q will also have an acceleration 3a towards right.
a aP
( s a block ). 2T T
2
a
The F.B.D. of 11kg block
The F.B.D. of 1kg block 3a 110 N
T
15N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A 900 kg elevator hangs by a steel cable for which the allowable stress is 1.15 × 108 N/m2. What is the
minimum diameter required if the elevator accelerates upward at 1.5 m/s2. Take g = 10m/s2 and leave
your answer in terms of .
900 kg 1.15 × 108 N/m2.
1.5 m / sec2 g = 10 m./sec2
2
900(10 a ) 6 0. 06 6 10
Sol. 1.15 × 108 = d= cm = m= m
2
d 10 10 10
4
2
6 10
Ans. m
10
8. A 40 kg mass, hanging at the end of a rope of length , oscillates in a vertical plane with an angular
amplitude of 0. What is the tension in the rope, when it makes an angle with the vertical ? If the
breaking strength of the rope is 80 kg f, what is the maximum angular amplitude with which the mass
can oscillate without the rope breaking ?
40 kg 0
80 kg f ,
?
Sol. The situation is shown in figure.
(a) From figure h = (cos – cos 0
)
and 2
= 2gh
= 2g (cos – cos )
0
....... (1)
Again T – mg cos = m 2
/ ....... (2)
Substitting the value of 2
from eq. (1) in eq. (2)
we get
T – mg cos = m {2g (cos – cos 0
)/ } T
or T = mg cos + 2mg (cos – cos 0
) h
or T = mg (3 cos – 2 cos 0
)
or T = 40g (3 cos – 2 cos 0
) newton mg
(b) Let be the maximum amplitude. The maximum tension T will be at mean position where
0
= 0.
Tmax = 40 (3 – 2 cos 0)
But Tmax = 80
Solving we get 0 = 60° Ans. 0 = 60°
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. A solid sphere rolls without slipping on the inner surface of a cylinder of radius 2.5 m. The cylinder spins
around it’s axis (which is perpendicular to plane of the paper) with angular acceleration . What should
be if we wish for the centre of the ball to remains motionless (translatory) at an angle 30° up from the
bottom of cylinder (see figure)
2.5 m
30°()
Ans. c
=5
fr = mg sin c
= Angular acceleration of cylinder
f r
s
= r s
= Angular acceleration of sphere.
& R = sr
c
for no slipping
5gsin
c
= = 5 rad/s2
2R
COMPREHENSION
An ideal diatomic gas is taken along the cyclic process ABCA. Heat given by the system in the process
A to B 50 J and workdone on the gas is 50 J. In the process B to C volume doubles at constant pressure.
The process CA is isochoric.
ABCA A B
50 J 50 J B C
CA
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. UBC + UCA = 0
13. Initially springs are in natural length. On applying a variable force F on block towards right , elongation
in spring S1 is x1. If block moves slowly and floor is smooth then -
S1
x1
S1 S2
k1 k2 F
m
Smooth
1 K 1(K 1 K 2 )x12
(A) Work done by S2 on block (p)
2 K2
1 K 1(K 1 K 2 ) x12
(B) Work done by S2 on S1 (q)
2 K2
1
(C) Work done by F on block (r) K 1x12
2
(D) Work done by S1 on wall (s) zero
1 K 1(K 1 K 2 )x12
(A) S2 (p)
2 K2
1 K 1(K 1 K 2 ) x12
(B) S1 S2 (q)
2 K2
1
(C) F (r) K 1x12
2
(D) S1 (s)
Ans . (A) (q) ; (B) (r) ; (C) (p) ; (D) (s)
K 1K 2
Sol. K1x1 = K2x2 = Keqx0 here Keq =
K1 K 2
K 1x1 K1 K 2
x2 = & x0 = x1
K2 K2
1
Work done by F on block = K eqx 20
2
2
1 K 1K 2 K1 K 2 1 K 1(K 1 K 2 )x12
= x1=
2 K1 K 2 K2 2 K2
1 K 1(K 1 K 2 ) x12
Work done by S2 on block =
2 K2
1
Work done by S2 on S1 = K 1x12
2
Work done by S1 on wall = 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. When a large bubble rises from the bottom of a lake to the surface, its radius doubles. If atmospheric
pressure is equal to that of column of water height H, then the depth of lake is
H
(A)H (B)2H (C*)7H (D)8H
4 4
Sol. (c) P1V1= P2V2 (H + h) g × r3 = H × (2r)3
3 3
H + h = 8H h = 7H
2. Dependence of intensity of gravitational field (E) of earth with distance (r) from centre of earth is
correctly represented by :
(E) (r)
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
Ans. (A)
GM
Sol. E= r (if r < R )
R3
GM
E =– r (if r R)
r3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The displacement y (in cm) produced by a simple harmonic wave is given by :
10 x
y = sin 2000 t . The time period and maximum velocity of the particles in the medium will
17
respectively be:
10 x
y ( cm ) y = sin 2000 t
17
:
(A) 10–3s, 330 ms–1 (B) 10–4s, 20 ms–1 (C*) 10–3s, 200 ms–1 (D) 10–2s, 2000 ms–1
Sol. Comparing with y = A sin ( t – kx)
10
A cm, = 2000 s–1
2
T= = 10–3 s
10
maximum velocity = A = × 2000 = 200 ms–1.
100
5. Two particles moving parallel to the x-axis perform SHM with same amplitude (A) and frequency (f). At
A
a certain instant they are found at distance from the mean position on opposite sides such that
2
their velocties are in the same direction. Then the phase difference between their SHMs is :
x- (A) (f)
A
2
:
(A*) 90° (B) 120° (C) 180° (D) 270°
Sol. Phase difference = 2
= 2
1 A
= 2 cos
2
= 2 × 45 = 90º
6. A bob is attached to a long, light string. The string is deflected by 300 initially with respect to vertical.
The length of the string is 1 m. The value of at any time t after the bob has been released is
(Use g = 2) :
300
1 t (g = 2)
(A) 300 cos t (B) 300 sin t (C) 300 sin( t + 300) (D*) None of these
Sol. For large angle like this (30º), the bob's motion is oscillating and note simple harmonic. In options A, B,
C the equations written are of SHM. So the answer is D.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. Arc AB is half section of ellipse (with AB as the major axis). An ideal gas is taken from A to B as shown
in diagram. The work done by gas for A to B process is : [use = 22/7]
AB (AB ) A B
A B : [ = 22/7]
3
V(m )
5×10 –3
–3
3×10 A B
2
P(N/m )
0 2×103 9×103
Sol.
8. There is 16 gm of pure water in a container at temperature – 20ºC. A small piece of ice is added to start
crystallization. Amount of water in container when temperature reaches to 0ºC is(specific heat of water
below 0°C is 1 cal/g ºC)
16 gm – 20ºC (crystallization)
0ºC (0ºC
1 cal/g ºC)
(A) 8gm (B)10gm (C) 14gm (D*)12gm
Sol. Say y amount ice is formed finally
16 (1)20 = y × 80
16(1)20
y= = 4gm
80
Remaining water 12 gm
9. A police car moving at 22 m/s, chases a motorcyclist. The police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while
both of them move towards a stationary siren of frequency 165 Hz. Calculate the speed of the
motorcycle, if it is given that he does not observes any beats (speed of sound = 330 m/s.)
22 m/s 176 Hz
165 Hz
(= 330 m/s.)
Police Car Motorcycle
Stationary siren
22 m/s v (165 Hz)
(176 Hz)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. A point moves rectilinearly with deceleration whose modulus depends on the velocity v of the particle as
a k v where k is a constant, k 0 . At the initial moment the velocity of particle is v 0 Distance
travelled by the particle before coming to rest.
a k v
k k 0 v0
2 3 2 3 1 3 2 1
(A*) v0 2 (B) v0 2 (C) v0 2 (D) v0 2
3k k 3k 3k
dv dv dx
Solution:(A) k v k v
dt dx dt
0 x
dv
v k v v dv k.dx
dx v0 0
2 3/2 2 3/ 2
v0 kx or Distance x vo
3 3k
11. In the figure, a proton moves a distance d in a uniform E as shown in the figure. If W is work done by
the electric field and U is change in the electric potential energy of the proton then.
E d
W U
E
+
P
d
(A*) W < 0 and U > 0 (B) W > 0 and U < 0
(C) W > 0 and U > 0 (D) W < 0 and U < 0
(A*) W < 0 U > 0 (B) W > 0 U < 0
(C) W > 0 U > 0 (D) W < 0 U < 0
Sol. Change particle is moved anti parallel to electrostatic force, hence external aqent has to do work.
12. Consider a block of mass 'm' hanged by a series combination of springs have a spring constant K1, K2
and K3 as shown. Then :
'm' K1, K2
K3 :
K1
K2
K3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 1 1
(A*) Total extension in the combination of springs is mg
K1 K2 K3
mg
(B) Tension in all the springs will be
3
m
(C) Time period of small oscillations of the block will be T = 2
K1 K 2 K3
(D) Extension in each spring will be same.
1 1 1
(A*) mg
K1 K2 K3
mg
(B)
3
m
(C) T = 2
K1 K 2 K3
(D)
13. Two point charges 4q and – q are placed at some distance. What fraction of field lines originating
from 4q will terminate to –q.[Assume absence of any other charge in space]
4q – q 4q –q
[]
(A*) 1/4 (B)3/4 (C) 1 (D) ½
Sol. Flux emerging from 4q is 4q/
Flux terminating on –q is q/
so ¼ lines originating from 4q will terminate to –q.
14. Two point charges q and – 4q are placed at some distance. What fraction of field lines originating from
q will terminate to –4q. [Assume absence of any other charge in space]
q – 4q q – 4q
[]
(A) ¼ (B) 3/4 (C*) 1 (D)1/2
15. Find the ratio of maximum to minimum moment of inertia of a uniform solid sphere. Axis to be
considered through the material of sphere.
(A*)7/2 (B) 5/2 (C) 2/7 (D) 5/7
7
mR 2
5 7
Sol. =
2 2
mR 2
5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. A ring of radius 1 m is rolling without slipping over a rough horizontal surface with a velocity v0= 2 m/s.
Two points are located at A and B on the rim of the ring what is the speed of A w.r.t. B in m/s.
1 m v0= 2 m/s
A B A B m/s
(A) 2 m/s. (B) 1 m/s. (C*) 2 m/s. (D) 2 2 m/s.
Sol. vA v 0 î R 0 î 2 v 0 î
vB v 0 î R 0 î v 0 î v 0 ĵ
v AB v 0 î v 0 ĵ
v AB 2v 0 = 2 m/s.
17. A mango tree is at the bank of a river and one of the branch of tree extends over the river. A tortoise
lives in river. A mango falls just above the tortoise. The acceleration of the mango falling from tree
appearing to the tortoise is (Refractive index of water is 4/3 and the tortoise is stationary)
4/3
3g
(A) g (B)
4
4g
(C*) (D) None of these ()
3
x x rel
Sol. xrel = x
1
d 2 x rel d2 x
dt dt 2
arel = g
18. In a region the potential is represented by V(x, y, z) = 6x – 8xy –8y + 6yz, where V is in volts and x, y, z,
are in meters. The electric force experienced by a charge of 2 coulomb situated at point (1, 1,1) is :
V(x, y, z) = 6x – 8xy –8y + 6yz Vx, y, z,
(1, 1,1) 2 :
(A) 6 5 N (B) 30N (C) 24N (D*) 4 35 N
Ans. (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. V(x, y, z) = 6x – 8xy – 6y + 6yz
V
Ex = = – 6 + 8y
x
V
Ey = = 8 x + 8 – 6z
y
V
Ez = = – 6y
z
E = (–6 + 8y), î + (8x + 8 – 6z) ĵ – 6y k̂
E 2 î 10ˆj 6k̂
(1,1,1)
| E | = 2 35 NC–1
F = qE = 2 × 2 35 = 4 35 N
19. It the focal length of objective lens is increased then magnifying power of :
(A) microscope will increase but that of telescope decrease
(B) microscope and telescope both will increase
(C) microscope and telescope both will decrease
(D*) microscope will decrease but that of telescope will increase.
:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D*)
Ans. (D)
L D
Sol. M.P. of a microscope =
f0 fe
if f0 M.P. of the microscope will decrease
f
M.P. of telescope = 0
fe
if f0 M/O. of telescope will increase.
L D
. =
f0 fe
f0
f0
=
fe
f0
20. The angle of a prism is 'A'. One of its refracting surfaces is silvered. Light rays falling at an angle of
incidence 2A on the first surface returns back through the same path after suffering reflection at the
silvered surface. The refractive index , of the prism is :
1
(A) 2sin A (B*) 2 cos A (C) cos A (D) tan A
2
'A' ()
2A
:
1
(A) 2sin A (B*) 2 cos A (C) cos A (D) tan A
2
Ans. (B)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-26
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
To retrace its path light rays should fall normally on the reflecting surface. So
r2 = 0 r1 = A – r2 r1 = A
Now applying snell rule between incident ray and refracted ray.
(A) sin (2A) = n sin (A) 2 sin A cos A = n sin A
n = 2 cos A
.
r2 = 0 r1 = A – r2 r1 = A
(snell)
(A) sin (2A) = n sin (A) 2 sin A cos A = n sin A n = 2 cos A
2. Draw labeled diagram of Van de graaf generator and explain its working.
3. A comb run through one’s dry hair attracts small bits of paper. Why?
Ans. This is because the comb gets charged by friction. The molecules in the paper gets polarised by the charged
comb, resulting in a net force of attraction.
4. What happens if the hair is wet or if it is a rainy day? (Remember, a paper does not conduct electricity.)
Ans. If the hair is wet, or if it is rainy day, friction between hair and the comb reduces. The comb does not get
charged and thus it will not attract small bits of paper.
5. Ordinary rubber is an insulator. But special rubber tyres of aircraft are made slightly conducting. Why is this
necessary?
Ans. To enable them to conduct charge (produced by friction) to the ground; as too much of static electricity ,
accumulated may result in spark and result in fire.
6. Vehicles carrying inflammable materials usually have metallic ropes touching the ground during motion.
Why?
Ans. To enable them to conduct charge (produced by friction) to the ground; as too much of static electricity ,
accumulated may result in spark and result in fire.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-27
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
DPP No. : 30
Total Marks : 109 Max. Time : 115 min.
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 to Q.6 (3 marks 3 min.) [18, 18]
Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.7 to Q.13 (4 marks 4 min.) [28, 28]
Subjective Questions ('–1' negative marking) Q.14 to Q.15 (4 marks 5 min.) [8, 10]
Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.16 to Q.28 (3 marks 3 min.) [39, 39]
Match the Following (no negative marking) Q.32 to Q.33 (8 marks 10 min.) [16, 20]
M1 M2
S
7 14 15 16
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
8 16 16 15
Sol. P1 = P2
V1 V2 2
T1 = T2 =
n1 n2 n1 n2
M1(2 – ) = M2
2 M1 16
or = =
M1 M2 15
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A wave pulse is travelling along a string towards right. Figure shows shape of string at t = 0.
P
Which of the following graph is best representation of velocity of point P with time? (Upward direction is
taken as positive)
t = 0
P
P ? (
)
v v
(A*) t (B) t
v v
(C) t (D) t
y
Sol. Velocity of any point on string = –vwave ×
x
y
= –vwave ×
x
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. The figure shows at time t = 0 second, a two triangular pulse on a uniform wire are approaching each
other. speed of each pulse 2cm/sec , at t = 0 as shown in the figure. The resultant pulse at t = 1
second is :
t = 0 (pulse)
2cm/sec t = 1
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
Sol. At t = 1 second, the position of both pulses are separately given by figure; the superposition of both
pulses is given by figure (b)
t = 1 (b)
1
5. In the system shown, the wire connecting two masses has linear mass density of kg/m. A tuning
20
fork of 50 Hz is found to be in resonance with the horizontal part of wire between pulley and block A.
(Assuming nodes at block A and pulley). Now at t = 0, system is released from rest. The ratio of time
gap between successive resonance with the same tuning fork starting from t = 0. (take g = 10 m/s2)
1
kg/m A
20
50 Hz A
t = 0 t = 0
( g = 10 m/s2)
60cm
50Hz 4kg
A
B 4kg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (C)
4a = 4g – T
4a = T
T = 20 N
a=5
n 20
50 = n=3
2 0.6 1
20
1 2
0.2 = 5t t= 0.08
2
t1 = 0 t2 = 0.08 t3 = 0.16
6. A block of mass m = 10 kg is suspended with the help of a wire AB, whose linear mass density is
0.01 kg/m. There is a point C on wire such that AC = 1 m & BC = 2.5 m. A tuning fork is used to vibrate
the wire such that the point C is a node. Frequency of tuning fork can be -
m = 10 kg AB 0.01 kg/m
C AC = 1 m BC = 2.5 m
C
B
C
A
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. Figure shows variation of internal energy (U) with density( ) for a monoatomic ideal gas in a cyclic
process. AB is a part of rectangular hyperbola i.e. U × constant. Then
U
A
2U0
U0 B
C
0 2 0
U0
(A) Work done by the gas in process AB is –
3
2
(B*) Work done by the gas in process BC is + U0 n 2
3
(C) In one complete cycle gas absorbs net amount of heat
(D*) In one complete cycle gas exhausts net amount of heat
U0 B
C
0 2 0
U0
(A) AB–
3
2
(B*) BC + U0 n 2
3
(C)
(D*)
Sol. AB is an isobaric process
WAB = –nR (TA – TB)
2 3 3
= – U0 ( nRTA = 2U0 ; nRTA = U0)
3 2 2
WBC = nRTB n 2 (isothermal process)
2
=+ U0 n 2
3
2
Wcycle = U0 ( n 2 – 1) = -ve = Qcycle
3
AB
WAB = –nR (TA – TB)
2 3 3
= – U0 ( nRTA = 2U0 ; nRTA = U0)
3 2 2
2
WBC = nRTB n 2 () = + U0 n 2
3
2
Wcycle = U0 ( n 2 – 1) = -ve = Qcycle
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. Kinetic energy of a particle executing SHM changes with time according to following graph mass of the
particle is 2 kg. Then :
2 kg
9. A certain amount of ideal gas expands along the straight line path ABC on P-V diagram as shown in the
figure. The dotted curve represents the adiabatic for the same gas. Along the straight line path
P A
B
C
V
(A*) As a net in process A B, the gas absorbs heat
(B) As a net in process A B, the gas rejects heat
(C*) In process B C, as a net gas rejects heat
(D*) In process A B, the heat absorbed/rejected by gas is represented by shaded area in figure.
P-V ABC
P A
B
C
V
(A*) A B
(B) A B rejects
(C*) B C
(D*) A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Consider to paths from A to B. (AB )
P
A
2
1
B
V
U2 = U1
W2 > W1
Q2 > Q1 Q1 = 0 so Q2 > 0
Take the gas from A B along straight line and back B A along curve :
(A BB A)
U=0 Qcycle = Wcycle
QAB + 0 = Wcycle Shaded area (QAB + 0 = Wcycle )
Consider following cyclic process 1, 2, 3 for this cyclic process Qnet = –ve
(1, 2, 3 Qnet = –ve)
P
B 3
1 2
C
V
Q2 > 0
Q3 = 0
Q1 + Q2 + Q3 < 0 Q1 < 0
10. A wire of density 9 103 kg/m3 is stretched between two clamps 1 m apart and is stretched to an
extension of 4.9 10 -4 metre. Young's modulus of material is 9 1010 N/m2. Then
(A*) The lowest frequency of standing wave is 35 Hz
(B*) The frequency of 1st overtone is 70 Hz
(C) The frequency of 1st overtone is 105 Hz
(D) The stress in the wire is 4.41 × 107 N/m2
9 10 kg/m3 1 m 4.9 10 -4
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
T Y 1 Y
Sol. Speed of wave in wire = V = A =
A A
Maximum time period means minimum frequency ; that means fundamental mode.
T Y 1 Y
V = = A =
A A
V V
f= =
2
2 1
T= = 2 = second Ans.
V Y 35
(f = 35 Hz)
V
and; frequency of first overtone = = 70 Hz.
V
= = 70 Hz.
11. Two points on string are being observed as a traveling wave passes them. Then point are at x1 = 0 and
x2 = 1 m, the transverse motions of two points are found to be as follows.
y1 = A sin(3 t) and y2 = A sin 3 t t is in seconds and y in metre. Mark correct options.
8
(A) Frequency of wave is 3 Hz
(B*) Frequency of wave is 1.5 Hz
(C*) Wavelength may be 16 m
16
(D*) Wavelength may be m
17
x1 = 0 x2 = 1 m
y1 = A sin(3 t) y2 = A sin 3 t t y
8
(A) 3 Hz
(B*) 1.5 Hz
(C*) 16 m
16
(D*) m
17
2
Sol. 1=
8
= 16
2
= n2 +
8
2 16
= =
16n 1
2n
8
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. Acceleration versus time graph for oscillation cycle of a particle executing SHM is shown. Choose the
incorrect option (s)
13. Consider a narrow tube with a fixed source of sounds emitting sound of frequency f. A detector is
1
moving in circular path in tube with speed th of speed of sound as shown. When detector is
10
diametrically opposite to S.
f
1
S
10
S
D
(A) No Doppler will be observed by detector
(B*) The ratio of the two frequencies observed by the detector is 11 : 9
11 : 9
f
(C*) Beat frequency for detector is
5
f
5
(D*) Component of velocity of detector towards source is zero.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
v v
v v
10 11f 10 9f
Sol. f1 = f , f2 = f
v 10 v 10
14. The sound intensity level at a point 4m from the point source is 10dB and the sound level at a distance
2m from the same source is (x + 10)dB. Find the value of x. (log2 = 0.3)
4m 10dB 2m
(x + 10)dB x (log2 = 0.3)
Ans. 6
4
Sol. 1
= 10 log 2
= 10 log
0 0
2
– 1 = 10 log4
2
= 10 + 10 log4 = 10 + 6.
15. Two moles of a monatomic ideal gas is taken through a cyclic process shown on pressure (P) vs
temperature(T) diagram in figure. Process CA is represented as PT = constant. If efficiency of given
7x
cyclic process is 1 , then find x.]
12 n2 15
P-T CA, PT =
7x
1 , x
12 n2 15
P(N/m2)
A B
2×105
105 C
T
300 K 600 K
Ans. 3
Sol. For process AB TA = 300 K, TB = 600 K
W = nR T = nR (TB – TA) = 300 nR = 600 R.
5
Q = n Cp T = 2 × R (300) = 1500 R.
2
For process BC
vf p
W= nRT ln = nRT ln i = nRT ln 2 = 1200 R ln 2
vi pf
Q= W = 1200 R ln 2
For process CA
300 K 2nRT
W= P dV dT
600 T K
= – 2nR (300) = – 1200 R
Q= nCV T + W
= 2 × R (–300) – 1200R.
= –900R – 1200R = –2100R
600 R 1200 R ln 2 –1200 R 21
= = 1– x=3
1500 R 1200 R ln 2 12 ln 2 15
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
If the ends of a rod are rigidly clamped so as to prevent any actual expansion or contraction and then
the temperature of the rod is changed, the rod will develop tensile or compressive stress, also called
‘thermal stress’. These stresses could sometimes be adequate to cause permanent strain or could also
break the rod. Concrete highways are always left with gaps between the sections in order to provide for
the expansion or contraction of concrete. Similarly, if the temperature of an object kept under pressure
is increased but the object is not allowed to expand, the pressure will also increase. If an external force
tries to compress the rod then it develops compressive stress in it, while if external force tries to expand
the rod it develops tensile stress M it. Assuming a negative sign for a compressive stress and a positive
sign for tensile stress, answer the following questions.
16. Consider a rod rigidly clamped at its ends and not allowed to bend. As the temperature is increased :
(A) The rod develops a tensile stress
(B*) The rod develops a compressive stress
(C) The rod develops a tensile stress if the material of rod has a high value of (coefficient of linear
expansion) and a compressive stress if the material of rod has a low value of
(D) It cannot be predicated whether the rod will develop a compressive stress of a tensile stress
17. Now consider that the rod is not fixed at the ends so that it is free to expand or contract. The rod is kept
horizontally between two rigid supports A and B. Initially, the left end of the rod is at distance x1 from
the support ‘A’ and the right end at distance x2 from the support B. Temperature of the rod is now
increased by T so that the rod expands and its length increases. Let T be large enough so that
increase in length, if the supports A and B were not there, will be more than x1 + x2. However, the
presence of rigid supports A and B will prevent any increase in length beyond x1 + x2. Stress in the rod
can be expressed as :
A B A x1
B x2 T T
x1 + x2 A B A B
x1 + x2
A B
x1 x2
x1 x2 x1 x2 x1 x2
(A) Y T (B) AY T (C) Y (D*) Y T
L L L
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. Let us now consider an object that is kept under pressure and not allowed to expand on increasing the
temperature. If the temperature is increased by T, increases in the pressure will be (B is bulk modulus,
is density, is coefficient of cubical expansion and is coefficient of linear expansion):
T
(B , ,
)
(A*) B T (B) B T (C) B T (D) B T
COMPREHENSION-1
-1
When the expansion of a liquid in a vessel is measured to obtain the coefficient of volume expansion
( ), what is actually obtained is apparent coefficient of expansion. This is due to expansion of container.
The figure shown is an apparatus to find out correct coefficient of expansion without knowing coefficient
of expansion of the container.
It consist a U-shaped tube with long base and two limbs. Its two limbs are kept at 0°C and t°C with the
help of melting ice and water at t°C. A liquid of unknown is taken in U-tube. For the given steady state
there is no flow of liquid from one limb to other. Height of the liquid in two columns is h0 and ht
respectively.
( ) ,
U- t°C
0°C t°C U-
h0 ht
ht h0
Melting ice
Liquid of
water at t°C
unknown
t°C
19. The coefficient of volume expansion of liquid ( ) in the tube can be expressed as –
( )–
h0 (h t h 0 ) ht h0
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
(h t h0 ) (h 0 t ) h0 t ht t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
20. For a liquid at t = 20°C h0 and ht are measured to be 100 cm and 101 cm respectively. In this same
liquid in a vessel a solid cylinder is floating. If on increasing temperature of the system depth of
submergence of cylinder is unchanged thermal coefficient of linear expansion of the cylinder is
t = 20°C h0 ht 100 cm 101 cm
–4 –4
(A) 5 × 10 per °C (B) 1.67 × 10 per °C
(C*) 2.5 × 10–4 per °C (D) 10–3 per °C
0
Sol. t =
1 t
0 = t(1 + t)
Also for equilibrium , 0 gh0 = tght
ht 0
= =1+ t
h0 t
ht h0
=
h0 t
101 100
For the given liquid , = = 5 × 10–4 per °C
100 20
For floatation of cylinder ,
Buoyant = weight = constant
Ahg = constant
A = constant
cylinder = liquid
liquid
cylinder = = 2.5 × 10–4 per °C
2
COMPREHENSION-2
-2
Two plane progressive sound waves are traveling in space. The two waves are described by equations.
p1 = p0 sin(340 t – x)
p2 = p0 sin(340 t + x)
p1 = p0 sin(340 t – x)
p2 = p0 sin(340 t + x)
3
21. A detector is moving in x-y plane along straight line y = x with constant speed v. If 4 beats/sec are
4
detected by the detector, then speed v is :
3
x-y y = x v 4 /
4
v :
(A) 10 m/s (B*) 5 m/s (C) 15 m/s (D) 12 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2 2
Sol. = = = 2m
k
Distance between two nodal planes or anti-nodal planes is = 1 m
/2
Time between two consecutive maxima =
V0 cos
2V0 cos
( f) beat frequency =
2V0 4
4= V0 = 5 m/s
2 5
OR
V VO cos
f1 = f .
V
V VO cos
f2 = f
V
2 VO cos 2V0 cos
( f) beat frequency = f1 - f2 = f =
V
2 2
= = = 2m
k
(nodal)= 1 m
/2
=
V0 cos
2V0 cos
( f) =
2V0 4
4= V0 = 5 m/s
2 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
V VO cos
f1 = f
V
.
V VO cos
f2 = f
V
2VO cos 2V0 cos
( f) = f1 - f2 = f =
V
22. If t = 0 is moment when detector the particle is crossing origin, then the variation of intensity of sound
observed by detector is best represented by curve
t = 0
COMPREHENSION-3
-3
4 g of He gas is taken in a cyclic process as shown on the P-T diagram. The minimum temperature is
300 K and the maximum is 600 K. The pressures of the points are,
PA = 1 × 105 N/m2, PB = PD = 2 × 105 N/m2.
P-T 4g He 300 K
600 K PA = 1 × 105 N/m2, PB = PD = 2 × 105 N/m2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
23. The workdone in the process BC is W1 and in the process DA is W2 then
BC W1 DA W2
(A*) W1 = W2 (B) W1 = 0, W2 < 0 (C) W1 > W2 (D) W1 < W2
Sol. BC and DA are isochoric process. Hence workdone W1 and W2 both are zero.
BC DA W1 W2
COMPREHENSION-4
-4
Consider a rigid container with light movable piston. The piston separates two fluids X and Y of equal
volume V and with bulk modulus B1 and B2. Their thermal coefficient of volume expansion are 1 and 2
respectively. Initially both fluids are at same temperature. Now their temperature is increased by .
V
B1 B2 XY 1
2
Fluid-X Fluid-Y
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
28. If B1 & B2 are finite it is observed that piston remains at its position on increasing temperature.
B1 B2
2 2
(A*) 1B1 = 2B2 (B) 1B2 = 2B1 (C) 1B1 + 2B2 = 0 (D) 1 B1 = 2 B2
Sol. Equate volume stress in both fluids
29. Column-I contains a list of process involving expansion of an ideal gas. Match this with column–II
describing the thermodynamic change during this process. Indicate your answer by darking the
appropriate bubbles of the matrix given in the ORS.
Column–I Column–II
(A) An ideal monoatomic gas expands to twice (p) Temperature of the gas decreases.
its original volume such that its pressure P V2,
where V is its volume.
(B) An ideal monoatomic gas expands to twice its (q) Temperature of the gas increases
1
original volume such that its pressure P ,
V2
where V is the volume of the gas.
(C) An ideal monoatomic gas expands to twice its (r) Temperature of the gas remains
constant
1
original volume such that its pressure P 4/3
V
where V is its volume.
(D) An ideal monoatomic gas expands such that (s) The gas loses heat
its pressure P and volume V follows the behaviour
shown in the graph.
(t)
Ans. : A – q,t ; B – p,s ; C – p,t ; D – q,t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A) Volume increases therefore workdone is positive
T
= constant. volume increase therefore temperature increases,
V3
so U & W both are positive, therefore Q is positive (Q = U + W)
(B)
PV2 = , TV = V T
T
T T = –
2
T
n R
3 T 2 n R T
Q= U+W Q = nR + =– Q
2 2 2 1 4
T
= , T U (+) Q(+)
V3
(C)
PV 4 / 3 = TV1/3 = V T
T
Ti = T ; Tf = 1/ 3
(Tf < Ti dT )
2
Q= U+W
3 nR T 3
= nR T – =– nR T ( T , Q )
2 4 2
1
3
(D) Q
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
30. Regarding speed of sound in gas, match the statements in column-I with the results in column-II
I II
Column I Column II
(A) Temperature of gas is made 4 times and (p) speed becomes 2 2 times the initial value
pressure 2 times
(B) Only pressure is made 4 times without (q) speed becomes 2 times the initial value
change in temperature
(C) Only temperature is changed to 4 times (r) speed remains unchanged
(D) Only Molecular mass of the gas is made 4 times (s) speed becomes half the initial value
I II
(A) 4 (p)
2 2 2
(B) (q)
4 2
(C) 4 (r)
(D) 4 (s)
Sol. (A) q (B) r (C) q (D) s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A monatomic & a diatomic gas both at the N.T.P. having same no. of moles are compressed
adiabatically to half of initial volume :
(N.T.P.)
(A) Increase in temprature will be more for the diatomic gas
(B) Increase in Internal energy will be more for the diatomic gas
(C) Increase in temprature will be same for both the gases.
(D*) Increase in pressure will be more for the monatomic gas.
P Monoatomic
V
Sol. V0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1
2. A particle of mass 1 kg & charge C is projected towards a non conducting fixed spherical shell
3
1
having the same charge ( C) uniformly distributed on its surface initially the point charge is far away
3
from the sphere Impact parameter [Initial perpendicular distance of line of projection from centre of
sphere] is 0.5 mm. Find the minimum initial velocity of projection required if the particle just grazes the
shell.
u
2 2 2 2
(A) m/s (B*) 2 m/s (C) m/s (D) 4 m/s
3 3 3 3
(E) none of these
1
1 kg C
3
1
( C)
3
0.5 mm
u
2 2 2 2
(A) m/s (B*) 2 m/s (C) m/s (D) 4 m/s
3 3 3 3
(E)
v
Sol.
u
1 1 1 q2
1 ( u )2 mv 2
2 2 4 0 R
m × u × 0.5 = mv × 1 v = u/2
u2 1 1 10 6
u2 – = 9 × 109 × 2 × × ×
4 3 3 1 10 3
3u2 2
2 u= 2
4 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A uniform rope of length L and mass M is being pulled on a rough horizontal floor by a constant
horizontal force F = Mg. The force is acting at one end of the rope in the same direction as the length of
the rope. The coefficient of kinetic friction between rope and floor is 1/2. Then, the tension at the mid-
point of the rope is-
L M F = Mg
1/2 -
(A) Mg/4 (B) 2Mg/5 (C) Mg/8 (D*) Mg/2
(E) 2Mg/3
Sol. f = Mg
F
Mg/2
Mg
F– = Ma
2
g
a=
2
M/2
T
Mg/4
Mg M g
T– =
4 2 2
Mg
T=
2
4. Charge – Q and 2Q are distributed uniformly on surface of two concentric spherical shells of radii ‘R’
and ‘2R’ respectively as shown in the figure. Select correct alternative(s)
+2Q
–Q
2R R
Q2
(A*) the total electrostatic energy stored in the system is
8 0R
Q2
(B*) electrostatic energy in the space between two shells is
16 0R
Q2
(C) electrostatic energy stored outside the system is
2 0 R
(D) electrostatic energy in space between two shells is zero.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
– Q 2Q ‘R’ ‘2R’
+2Q
–Q
2R R
Q2
(A*)
8 0 R
Q2
(B*)
16 0R
Q2
(C)
2 0 R
Sol.
2R R
2
Q2 (2Q)2 1 Q2Q Q
Total energy of system ( ) = =
8 0 R 8 0 2R 4 0 2R 8 0R
2R 2
1 Q Q2
Energy between two shells () = 0 4 r.dr =
R
2 4 0
r3 16 0R
5. Block of mass 5kg is moving with velocity –5 k̂ (m/s) relative to the platform as shown in figure (block is
in contact with vertical surface also). Vertical and horizontal surfaces of large platform are having
1 1
friction coefficient and respectively. The platform is being moved with constant acceleration 5iˆ
2 4
(m/s2) select correct alternative/alternatives : (g = 10 m/s2)
5kg –5 k̂ (m/s)
1 1
2 4
5iˆ (m/s2) (g = 10 m/s2)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5
(A*) Block will stop after travelling m relative to platform
2
(B) Block will stop after travelling 5 m relative to platform
(C) Time after which the block will stop with respect to platform is 2 sec.
(D*) Time after which the block will stop with respect to platform is 1 sec
5
(A*) m
2
(B) 5 m
(C) 2 sec.
(D*) 1 sec.
1 1
25 50
fr fr ´ 2 4
Sol. a=
m m
5 5 2
= = 5 m/s
2 2
52 5
S= = m
10 2
5
t = = 1 sec.
5
1
6. Let there be a non conducting infinite large sheet of charge of surface charge density nC / m2 . An
36
uncharged conducting spherical shell of radius 20 cm is placed in front of sheet. A point charge 6mC is
placed at centre of the shell. Force on point charge due to shell is x mN. Find value of x.
1
nC / m 2 20 cm
36
6mC
x mN x
Ans. 3
Sol. Force due to sheet = 9
2 0
10 9 9 6
= 6 10 3 = 9 × 10 × × 10–3 × 10–9 = 3mN
72 0 18
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
The sketch below shows cross-sections of equi-potential surfaces between two charged conductors
that are shown in solid black. Some points on the equi-potential surfaces near the conductors are
marked as A,B,C,........ . The arrangement lies in air. (Take 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/N m2]
A,B,C, ........ .
( 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/N m2 ]
Large conducting
0.3m plate
( )
E
Solid
conducting A B C
D
sphere
( )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In the column-I, a system is described in each option and corresponding time period is given in the
column-II. Suitably match them.
-I -II
Column-I Column-II
2
(A) A simple pendulum of length ' ' oscillating (p) T = 2
3g
with small amplitude in a lift moving down
with retardation g/2.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
g 3g
Sol. (A) In frame of lift effective acceleration due to gravity is g downwards
2 2
g 3g
= g
2 2
2
T=2
3g
k g
(B) K = mg
m L
constant acceleration of lift has no effect in time period of oscillation.
m
T =2 =2
k g
m 2
I 3 2
(C) T = 2 = 2 2
mgd 3g
mg
2
m p / 2A
(D) T = 2 =2 =2
pAg pAg 2g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
2. An electron is revolving around a proton. The total work done in one revolution by electric force on the
electron will be zero if the trajectory of the electron is
(A) circular only (B) elliptical only
(C*) any closed curve (D) not possible
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Four charges are rigidly fixed along the Y axis as shown. A positive charge approaches the system
along the X axis with initial speed just enough to cross the origin. Then its total energy at the origin is
y–
x–
Sol.
There exists a point P on the x-axis (other than the origin), where net electric field is zero. Once the
charge Q reaches point P, attractive forces of the two –ve charge will dominate and automatically
cause the charge Q to cross the origin. Now if Q is projected with just enough velocity to reach P, its
K.E. at P is zero, But while being attracted towards origin it acquires K.E. & hence its net energy at the
origin is positive. (P.E. at origin = zero).
x– ( ) P Q P
–ve Q
Q P K.E.
K.E.
(PE = )
4. A dipole is placed at the centre of a non–conducting spherical shell of radius r. If the shell is uniformly
charged by a surface charge density then the interaction energy between the dipole and the shell is :
r
(A) (B) (C) 2
(D*) Zero
4 0 0 r 0 r
Sol. Since potential at all points inside a uniformly charged shell is same, the two equal & opposite charges
are to be brought from to same potential points.
5. Assume that gravitational lines of forces represent gravitational field just like electric lines of forces
represent electric field. Which of the following diagram correctly represents the gravitational field lines
for a pair of point masses shown in options below ?
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
The field lines show the direction of force on a small test mass. The gravitational force is attractive
hence for masses, gravitational field lines always point in towards the mass. Also at mid point of line
joining them (equal masses), gravitational field is zero. So there must be no field lines passing through
mid point.
6. A tunnel is dug along the diameter of the earth (Radius R & mass M). There is a particle of mass ' m ' at
the centre of the tunnel. Find the minimum velocity given to the particle so that it just reaches to the
surface of the earth :
R M 'm'
GM GM 2GM
(A*) (B) (C)
R 2R R
(D) it will reach with the help of negligible velocity.
( )
Sol. Let the minimum speed imparted to the particle of mass m so that it just reaches surface of earth is v.
Applying conservation of energy
m v
1 3 GM GM
mv2 + m m =+0
2 2 R R
GM
Solving we get v =
R
GM
v =
R
7. If g be the acceleration due to gravity of the earth's surface, the gain in the potential enegy of an object
of mass m raised from the surface of the earth to a height equal to the radius R of the earth is :
g m
R
(A*) (1/2) mgR (B) 2 mgR (C) mgR (D) (1/4) mgR
1 1 1
8. Electrical potential ' V ' in space as a function of co-ordinates is given by, V =. Then find the
x y z
electric field intensity at (1, 1, 1).
1 1 1
( V = (1, 1, 1)
x y z
ˆj 1
(A) î ĵ k̂ (B) î k̂ (C*) î ĵ k̂ (D) ( î ĵ k̂ )
2
1 1 1
Sol. V=
x y z
V V V 1 1 1
E E =– î – ĵ – k̂ = 2 î + 2 ĵ + 2 k̂
x y z x y z
E (1, 1, 1) = î + ĵ + k̂ Ans. î ĵ k̂
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. A telescope with objective of focal length 60 cm and eye piece of focal length 5 cm is focused on a far
distance object such that the parallel rays emerge from eye piece. If object subtends an angle 1o on
objective, then angular width of the image is :
60 cm 5 cm
1o
(A) 62o (B) 48o (C) 24o (D*) 12oC
Sol. Given : Focal length of the objective, = 60 cm
Focal length of the eye piece, = 5 cm
From the formula of magnification
f 0 60
M =12
fe 5
Hence, angular width of the image is given by
= .M =1× 12 = 12°
10 An object is placed at a distance of R/2 from the centre of earth. Knowing mass is distributed uniformly,
acceleration of that object due to gravity at that point is: (g = acceleration due to gravity on the surface
of earth and R is the radius of earth)
R/2
(g = R )
(A) g (B) 2 g
(C*) g/2 (D) none of these
Sol. The acceleration due to gravity at a distance x (x < R) from centre of earth (of radius R) is
(R ) x (x < R)
x R g
g(x) = g g =
R 2R 2
11. The ratio of diameters of two wires of same material is n : 1. The length of each wire is 4 m. On
applying the same load, the increases in the length of the thin wire will be (n > 1)
(A*) n2 times (B) n times (C) 2n times (D) (2n + 1) times
n : 1 4 m
(n > 1) :
(A*) n2 (B) n (C) 2n (D) (2n + 1)
F/a F
Sol. Y=
/ a
F 4 1 1 D12 n 2
or Y= or or
D 2
D 2
2 D 22 1
12. A nylon rope 2 cm is diameter has a breaking strength of 1.5 × 105 N. The breaking strength of a similar
rope 1 cm in diameter is :
2 cm 1.5 × 105 N 1 cm
:
(A*) 0.375 × 105 N (B) 2 × 105 N (C) 6 × 105 N (D) 9 × 104 N
2
D
Sol. Breaking strength = Breaking stress ×
4
Breaking stress is unchanged.
D is halved. So, breaking strength becomes one-fourth,
i.e.,
1
×1.5×105N or 0.375 × 105 N.
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. A spherical shell of radius R1 with uniform charge q is expanded to radius R2. The work performed by
the electric forces in this process i
R1 q R2
2
q 1 1 q2 1 1
(A*) (B)
8 0 R1 R2 4 0 R1 R2
2
q 1 1 q2 1 1
(C) (D)
2 0 R1 R2 8 0 R1 R2
14. A balloon is ascending vertically with an acceleration of 0.4 m/s 2. Two stones are dropped from it at an
interval of 2 sec. Find the distance between them 1.5 sec. after the second stone is released.
(g = 10 m/sec2)
0.4 m/s 2 2
1.5 sec (g = 10 m/sec2)
(A)10 m (B) 32 m (C*) 52 m (D) 5m
Sol. At position A balloon drops first particle
So, uA = 0, aA = – g, t = 3.5 sec.
1 2
SA =gt ...........(i)
2
Balloon is going upward from A to B in 2 sec.so distance travelled by balloon in 2 second.
1
SB aBt 2 ...........(ii) B
2
aB = 0.4 m/s2 , t = 2 sec. SB
15. The electrostatic force between two point charges q1 & q2 at separation r is given by
kq1q 2
F= . The constant k :
r2
kq1q 2
r q1, q2 F = k :
r2
(A) depends on the system of units only
(B) depends on the medium between the charges only
(C*) depends on both the system of units and the medium between the charges
(D) is independent of both the system of units and the medium between the charges.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. Three charges + 4q, -q and +4q are kept on a straight line at position (0, 0, 0), (a, 0, 0) and
(2a, 0, 0) respectively. Considering that they are free to move along the x-axis only
(A) all the charges are in stable equilibrium
(B*) all the charges are in unstable equilibrium
(C) only the middle charge is in stable equilibrium
(D) only middle charge is in unstable equilibrium
+ 4q, -q +4q (0, 0, 0), (a, 0, 0) (2a, 0, 0)
x-
(A) (B*)
(C) (D)
17. A simple pendulum of mass m and charge + q is suspended vertically by a massless thread of length .
At the point of suspension, a point charge + q is also fixed. If the pendulum is displaced slightly from
equilibrium position, its time period will be
m +q
+q
(A) T = 2 (B) T = 2 (C*) T = 2 (D) will be greater than 2
kq 2 g g
g
m 2
h h
principal axis
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
h h h h
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 2
h
Sol. = tan =
( u)
( for paraxial rays is very small)
( )
h h
or u = , similarly () v =
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A plank is held at an angle to the horizontal (Fig.) on two fixed supports A and B. The plank can slide
against the supports (without friction) because of its weight Mg. With what acceleration and in what
direction, a man of mass m should move so that the plank does not move.
) (fixed) A B Mg
m
m M
(A) g sin 1 down the incline (B*) g sin 1 down the incline
M m
m M
(C) g sin 1 up the incline (D) g sin 1 up the incline
M m
m M
(A) g sin 1 (B*) g sin 1
M m
m M
(C) g sin 1 (D) g sin 1
M m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. F.B.D. of man and plank are -
For plank be at rest, applying Newtons second law to plank along the incline
Mg sin = f ....................................(1)
and applying Newton’s second law to man along the incline.
mg sin + f = ma ....................................(2)
M
a = g sin 1 down the incline
m
Alternate Solution :
If the friction force is taken up the incline on man, then application of Newton’s second law to man and
plank along incline yields.
f + Mg sin = 0 ..........(1)
mg sin – f = ma ..........(2)
Solving (1) and (2) (1) (2)
M
a = g sin 1 down the incline
m
Alternate Solution :
Application of Newton’s seconds law to system of man + plank along the incline yields
+ -
mg sin + Mg sin = ma
M
a = g sin 1 down the incline
m
2. Two small electric dipoles each of dipole moment p are situated at (0, 0, 0) and (r, 0, 0). The electric
r 3r
potential at a point , ,0 is :
2 2
r 3r
p (0, 0, 0) (r, 0, 0) , ,0
2 2
P P P
(A) (B*) 0 (C) (D)
4 0 r2 2 0 r2 8 0 r2
Sol. As ON = MN = OM = r
r r 3
So it is equilateral triangle : N
,
2 2
,0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Time period of oscillation of the surface of a small drop of liquid depends on density , radius r and
surface tension s. The surface tension of a free liquid surface is defined as force per unit length. The
dependence of time period can be given by
, r s
1/ 2
r3 r s
(A*) T (B) T rs (C) T (D) T
s s r
Sol. Let T a
rb
s c
T = K a rb sc
[T] = [ML–3]a [L]b [MT–2]c
= [Ma + c L–3a + b T–2c ]
a + c = 0 ; – 3a + b = 0 , – 2c = 1
1/ 2
1 3 1 r3
a=+ ,b= ;c=– T
2 2 2 s
5. The potential energy (in joules) of a particle of mass 1kg moving in a plane is given by V = 3x + 4y, the
position coordinates of the point being x and y, measured in metres. If the particle is at rest at (6, 4) ;
then
1kg V = 3x + 4y
; x y (6, 4) ;
(A*) its acceleration is of magnitude 5m/s2
(B*) its speed when it crosses the y–axis is 10m/s
(C*) it crosses the y-axis (x = 0) at y = –4
(D) it moves in a striaght line passing through the origin (0, 0)
(A*) 5m/s2
(B*) y– 10m/s
(C*) y-(x = 0) y = –4
(D) (0, 0)
Sol. U = 3x + 4y
Fy ( U / x)
ay = = =–3
m m
Fy ( U / y)
ax = = =–4 a = 5 m/s2
m m
Let at time 't' particle crosses y-axis
1
then –6= (– 3) t2 t = 2 sec.
2
Along y-direction :
1
y= (– 4) (B)2 = – 8
2
particle crosses y-axis at y = – 4
At (6, 4) : U = 34 & KE = 0
At (0, – 4) : U = – 16 KE = 50
1
or, mv2 = 50 v = 10 m/s while crossing y-axis
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. In the given figure F=10N, R=1m mass of the body is 2kg and moment of inertia of the body about an
axis passing through O and perpendicular to plane of body is 4kgm2. O is the centre of mass of the
body.
F=10N, R=1m, 2kg O
4kgm2 O
F F
O
R
2R
10
(A*) The frictional force acting on the body if it performs pure rolling is N.
3
10
N
3
5
(B) The frictional force acting on the body if it performs pure rolling is N.
3
5
N
3
75
(C*) The kinetic energy of the body after 3 seconds will be J.
2
75
3 J
2
25
(D) The kinetic energy of the body after 3 seconds will be J.
2
25
3 J
2
F F
Sol. a
R 2R
f
f = ma ...(i)
F2R – FR – fR = I ...(ii)
a = Ra ...(iii)
a
FR – fR = I.
R
la
F – ma = 2
R
l
F= m a.
R2
F
a=
m l / R2
mF
f = ma =
m l / R2
mF
f=
m l / R2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
F F
10 a
f= N R 2R
3
f
F 5
a= =
l 3
m
R2
a 5
= =
2 6
5 5
v=0+ 3 =
6 2
5
= o + 3 =5 t=0+
3
1 1 2 1 1 5 5 25 75
KE = mv2 + l = 2 5 5 4 = 25 + = J
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
7. A small charged ball of mass m and charge q is suspended from the highest point of a ring of radius R
by means of and insulating cord of negligible mass. The ring is made of a rigid wire of negligible cross
section and line in a vertical plane. On the ring there is uniformly distributed charge Q of the same sign
as q. Determine the length of the cord so as the equilibrium position of the ball lies on the symmetry
axis perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
m q R
Q q
T
R
( qE
Sol. x
mg
Tsin = mg & Tcos = qE
mg
tan =
qE
1
R mg 3 kQqR 3
= =
x qkQx mg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION :
DIMENSION
All the physical quantities of interest can be derived from the base quantities, it is written as a product
of different powers of the base quantities The exponent of a base quantity that enters into the
expression is called the dimension of the quantity in that base. For example
Force = mass × acceleration
velocity
= mass × time
Length / time
= mass × time
= mass × length × (time)–2.
Thus, the dimensions of force are 1 in mass, 1 in length and –2 in time. Above equation may be written
as [force] = MLT-2 . Such an expression for a physical quantity in terms of the base quantities is called
the dimensional formula. Thus the dimensional formula of force is MLT–2.
Principle of homogeneity -- Two quantities can be added , subtracted or compared only if they
have same dimensional formula. Thus a velocity cannot be added to a force or an electric current
cannot be subtracted from the thermodynamic temperature. This simple principle is called the principle
of homogeneity of dimensions in an equation.
Conversion of Units-- Dimensions can be useful in finding the conversion factor for the unit of derived
physical quantity from one system to other. Consider an example. When SI units are used, the unit of
pressure is 1 pascal. Suppose we choose 1 cm as the unit of length, 1 g as the unit of mass and 1 s as
the unit of time (this system is still in wide use and is called CGS system). The unit of pressure will be
different in this system. Let us call it for the time being 1 CGS pressure. Now, how many CGS pressure
is equal to 1 pascal ?
Let us first write the dimensional formula of pressure.
F
We have P=
A
[F] MLT 2
Thus, [P] = = = ML–1 T–2
[ A] L2
so, 1 pascal = (1 kg) (1 m)–1 (1 s)–2
and 1 CGS pressure = (1 g) (1 cm)–1 (1 s)–2
–1 –2
1pascal 1 kg 1m 1s
Thus, =
1 CGS pressure 1g 1 cm 1s
= (103) (102)–1 = 10
or, 1 pascal = 10 CGS pressure.
:
= ×
= ×
= ×
= × × ()–2.
1, 1 –2
[] = MLT-2
MLT–2
(Principle of homogeneity) -
(Principle of homogeneity)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(Conversion of Units)-
SI
1 1 cm, 1 g
1 s CGS
1 CGS CGS 1 ?
F
P=
A
[F] MLT 2
, = [P] = = ML–1 T–2
[ A] L2
, 1 = (1 kg) (1 m)–1 (1 s)–2
1 CGS = (1 g) (1 cm)–1 (1 s)–2
–1 –2
1pascal 1 kg 1m 1s
, =
1 CGS pressure 1g 1 cm 1s
= (103) (102)–1 = 10
or, 1 = 10 CGS .
8. If unit of mass ,length, and time are doubled than unit of following quantity will remain unchanged
(A) Energy (B) Surface tension
(C*)Gravitational constant (D) Modulus of elasticity
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
a t2
9. p= :
bx
p = pressure
x = distance
t = time
a
find the dimensions of :
b
(A) [M2 L T–3] (B*) [M T–2] (C) [M L3 T–1] (D) [L T–3]
Sol. a = [T2]
[T 2 ]
[p] =
b[L ]
[T 2 ]
b=
2
MLT
[L ] 2
L
a ML2 T 2
= 2
= MT–2 .
b L
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. A cubical solid block is floating in a liquid as shown. Submerged length of block and height of liquid in
the container are a and b respectively
Column- Column-
(A) If the container is moved downwards with constant (p) Buoyant force on the block
acceleration less than g remains unchanged
(B) If temperature of the system is increased (assuming that (q) Buoyant force on the block
thermal expansion coefficient of blocks and container decreases
material is negligible compared to that of liquid and the block
still floats)
(C) If the liquid is replaced by another liquid of higher specific (r) a increases
gravity but same mass
(D) If the block is replaced by another block of same dimension (s) a decreases
but lesser density
(t) b decreases
a
b
- -
(A) g (p)
(B) (q)
(C) (r) a
(D) (s) a
(t) b
Ans. (A) q ; (B) p, r ; (C) p, s, t ; (D) q, s, t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A) B = mg
B = m(g – a)
(B) B = mg for floatation (same)
a block
Fraction submerged = =
liquid
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Work W is required to form a bubble of volume V from a given solution. What amount of work is
required to be done to form a bubble of volume 2V ?
V W 2 V
?
(A*) 41/3W (B) 2W (C) 21/3 W (D) W
4 4 4 4
Sol. V × 3 R3; 2V = 3 R 3; 2 × 3 R3 = 3 R 3;
R = 21/3 R
W = 2 × 4 [21/3 R]2 = 22/3 × 2 × 4 R2 = 41/3 W
Sol. Torque due to electrostatic force about point of suspension will be zero.
2. If a pendulum swings with the same period at the top of the mountain and at the bottom of the mine
then the ratio between height H of a mountain and the depth h of a mine is : .
H
h
1 1
(A*) (B) 1 (C) (D) 2
2 4
[ Ans.1/2]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The dimensional formula of electric flux is:
:
(A*) M L3 T 3 I 1 (B) M L2 T 3 I 1 (C) M 1 L2 T I (D) none of these
F F
Sol. = E ds . = q .ds = I.t . ds
[M1L1T 2 ][L2 ]
= [ I.T.] = [M1L3T–3 –1] Ans.
4. The earth is moving around the sun in an elliptical orbit. Point A is the closest and point B is the farthest
point in the orbit , as shown. In comparison to the situation when the earth passes through point B:
A B
B
Earth
A B
Sun
(A) total energy of the earth-sun system is greater when the earth passes through point A.
(B) gravitational potential energy of the earth-sun system is greater when the earth passes through
point A.
(C*) kinetic energy of the earth due to the motion around the sun is greater when it passes through the
point A.
(D) magnitude of angular momentum of the earth about the sun is greater when the earth passes
through point A.
(A) A
(B) A
(C*) A
(D) A
5. A satellite with mass 2000 kg and angular momentum magnitude 2 × 1012 kg.m2/s is moving in an
elliptical orbit around a planet. The rate at which area is being swept out by the satellite around the
planet, is equal to
2000 kg
2 × 1012 kg.m2/s
(A) 1 × 109 m2/s (B) 5 × 109 m2/s (C*) 5 × 108 m2/s (D) 4 × 1015 m2/s
dA L 2 1012
Sol. dt 2m = 2 2000 = 5 × 10 m /s
8 2
4gR
6. A particle is projected with a velocity 3 vertically upward from the surface of the earth, R being the
radius of the earth & g being the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth. The velocity of
the particle when it is at half the maximum height reached by it is
4gR
R g 3
gR gR 2gR
(A) 2 (B*) 3 (C) gR (D) 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A proton enters into the space of uniform electric field of finite width making an angle to the field
lines and leaves at an angle 30° to the field lines. The ratio of its kinetic energy while entering the
electric field to that while leave will be :
30°
:
1 3 2
(A*) 3 (B) 1 (C) 3 (D) 3
Sol.
1 1
K = mV 1 3
2
1
K = mV (1 + 3)
2
K1 1
K2 3
1
8. The air column in an open organ pipe vibrating in 5th overtone is in unison with a tuning fork. If 3 rd
length of the organ pipe is removed, then the remaining portion will be in unison with same tuning fork
while vibrating in
(A) 2nd overtone (B*) 3rd overtone (C) 4th overtone (D) 5th overtone
1
5 3 rd
nd rd th th
(A) 2 (B*) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
2
6 V
V 3 4V
Sol. v= 6
2 2 2
2
3
th rd
4 Harmonic/ 3 overtone
4th / 3rd
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. Position vector of a particle moving in space is given by :
r 3 sin t ˆi 3cos tjˆ 4tkˆ
Distance travelled by the particle in 2s is :
r 3 sin t ˆi 3cos tjˆ 4tkˆ
2s :
(A) 5m (B*) 10m (C) 20 m (D) 50 m
Sol. ˆ ˆ
v 3cos t i 3 sin tj 4kˆ
|v| 32 42
=5
Distance = 10m.
10. A particle P is projected with speed 20 m/s at angle 37º from horizontal as shown in figure. At the some
instant Q starts from same point and moves with uniform acceleration towards right. Path of the particle
P w.r.t. Q is straight line. Acceleration of Q is :
P 37° 20 m/s Q
Q P Q
:
20 40
(A) 40 m/s (B) 20 m/s (C) 3 m/s (D*) 3 m/s
Sol. Acceleration of P w.r.t. Q must be opposite velocity of P,
a P/ Q 10 ˆj a ˆi
10
tan37º = a
3 10 40
= a 3 m/s .
4
11. Water rises to a height of 2 cm in a capillary tube. If the tube is tilted 60° from the vertical, water will rise
in the tube to a length of
2 cm 60°
?
(A*) 4.0 cm (B) 2.0 cm (C) 1.0 cm (D) water will not rise at all
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Since water rises to height of 2 cm in a capillary
2 cm :
12. Figure shows variation of acceleration due to gravity with distance from centre of a uniform spherical
planet, Radius of planet is R. What is r2 – r1.
R
r2 – r1
g
g0
g0/4
r1 r2 r
R 7R 4R
(A) (B*) (C) 3 (D) 2R
4 4
Sol. Inside planet
g0 d
= g 1 R
4
3R
d=
4
outside planet
R2
g’ = g (R h)2
h=R
3R 7R
r – r = d + h = R + =
4 4
13. A convex lens forms image at a distance 60 cm from the lens for an object placed on its principal axis. If
one more convex lens is placed in contact with first one then image shifts closer to combination by
40 cm. Focal length of second lens in cm is :
60 cm
40 cm
cm :
(A) 20 (B*) 30 (C) 40 (D) 50
1 1 1
Sol. v u f
Image from by first lens will act as on object for second lens so u = 60
v = 20
1 1 1 6 2 4
f 20 60 120 120
f = 30 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. An infinite long line charge of charge per unit length is passing through one the edge. Length of edge
of the cube is . Total flux linked with BCGF is (see figure.)
BCGF ()
H G
E
F
C
D
A B
(A) 2 0
(B) 4 0
(C*) 8 0
(D) zero
15. A black hole is an object whose gravitational field is so strong that even light cannot escape from it. To
what approximate radius would earth (mass = 5.98×1024 kg) have to be compressed to be a black hole?
(A) 10–9 m (B) 10–6 m (C) 10–2 m (D) 100 m
5.98×1024 kg
(A) 10–9 m (B) 10–6 m (C*) 10–2 m (D) 100 m
Ans. (C)
Sol. Light is unable to escape so
Ve = C
2GM
R = 3 × 10
8
20
2 10 11 ( 6 10 24 )
3
R = 3× 108
get R 9 mm 10–2m
16. A mass m1 hanging at the end of the string, draws a mass m2 along the surface of a smooth table if the
m1
mass on the table be doubled the tension of string becomes. 1.5 times then m is-
2
m1 m2
m1
1.5 m 2
m2
m1
2
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
3 4 6 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
1 sin = 3 sin r
1 sin = 3 cos
tan = 3
=
3
19. The orbital velocity of an artificial satellite in a circular orbit just above the earth’s surface is V0. The
value of orbital velocity for another satellite orbiting at an altitude of half of earth’s radius is
V0
3 3 2 2
(A) V0 (B) V0 (C*) V0 (D) V0
2 2 3 3
20. Two concentric conducting spherical shells of radii b and a (b >a) are charged to potentials V1 and V2
respectively. Find the charge on the inner shell.
b a (b >a) V1 V2
( V1 V2 )ab V1 ab V2 ab ( V1 V2 )ab
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
(b a )k (b a)k (b a )k ( a b )k
1 1 ( V2 V1 )ab ( V1 V2 )ab
Sol. P.D. = kQ1 V2 V1 Q1 = =
a b (b a )k ( a b )k
Sol.
Work done for given closed path will not be zero, so such electric lines of forces are not possible
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Can we use gauss law to find electric field due to finite line charge ? If yes then derive expression of
electric field due to finite wire and if no then why ?
Sol. No, because angle between electric field and area vector will vary and magnitude of electric field will
also vary
3. Derive electric field near the surface of conductor and expression of electrostatic pressure. Consider a
charged conducting sphere of radius R. What is relation between electrostatic pressure at surface of it
and energy density near the surface of conductor.
R
Sol. Electrostatic pressure at surface of it and energy density near the surface of conductor are equal .
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. The elongation in a metallic rod hinged at one end and rotating in a horizontal plane becomes four
times of the initial value. The angular velocity of rotation becomes :
(elongation)
(A*) two times the initial value (B) half of initial value
(C) one third of initial value (D) four times the initial value.
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
0
m 2 m 2 x2
Sol. – T dx x T=
2
T 0
F F
Y= =
A Ay
2 2
m x
dx
2 m 2 2 p 2 3
= = =
AY 6A Y 6y
= 2
2
=2 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. In the figure shown, blocks P and Q are in contact but do not stick to each other. The lower face of P
behaves as a plane mirror. The springs are in their natural lengths. The system is released from rest.
Then the distance between P and Q when Q is at the lowest point first time will be
P Q P
3. Small blocks A and B are simultaneously released from apex of a smooth wedge as shown in figure,
select correct alterative(s) :
A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
2 2
g g 3
gresultant of B with respect to A is =
2 2
1 3
= g2 =g
4 4
By energy conservation,
1
For B mBgh = mvB2
2
1
For A mAgh = mA.VA2 .
2
2h
t= , so time taken is different.
gsin2
Sol.
2 2
g g 3
B A g =
2 2
1 3
= g2 =g
4 4
–
1
B mBgh = mvB2
2
1
A mAgh = mA.VA2 .
2
2h
t= ,
gsin2
4. Two particles P and Q are in motion under gravity. Then:
P Q
(A) their relative acceleration is constant but not zero
(B*) their relative velocity is constant
(C) their centre of mass has constant velocity
(D*) their centre of mass has constant acceleration.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Relative acceleration is zero
So, relative velocity is constant.
5. The figure shows the velocity as a function of the time for an object with mass 10 kg being pushed
along a frictionless horizontal surface by external horizontal force. At t = 3 s, the force stops pushing
and the object moves freely. It then collides head on and sticks to another object of mass 25 kg.
10 kg
t = 3 s
25 kg
Before collision
after collision
initial momentum of system
= m1u1 + m2u2 = 150 + 25 u2
final momentum of system
= (m1 + m2) v = 35 × 5 = 175
From conservationof momentum
150 + 25 u2 = 175
or u2 = + 1 m/s
speed of second particle just before collision is 1 m/s and before collision both blocks move in same
direction.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
t = 0 t = 3 sec
m1 = 10 kg
15 0
a= = 5 m/s2
3
t = 0 t = 3 sec m1 = 10 × 5 = 50 N
t = 4 sec
= m1u1 + m2u2 = 150 + 25 u2
= (m1 + m2) v = 35 × 5 = 175
150 + 25 u2 = 175 or u2 = + 1 m/s
1 m/s
6. A painter is applying force himself to raise him and the box with an acceleration of 5 m/s2 by a massless
rope and pulley arrangement as shown in figure. Mass of painter is 100 kg and that of box is 50 kg. If
g = 10 m/s2, then:
( 5 m/s2
100 kg 50 kg
(g = 10 m/s2 )
9. In above question, distance travelled by centre of mass of the wheel before it stops is -
-
2 2
v0 r2 v 02 v0 k2
1 1 2
(A) 2 g k2 (B*) 2 g (C) 2 g r (D) None of these
Sol. acm = – g
2
v0
02 = v02 – 2 gs S=2 g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Match the column :
Column–I Column–II
If 2
> 1
If 2
> 1
If 2
< 1
2
> 1
2
> 1
2
< 1
(t)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Ans. (A) – q,t; (B) – p,r,s ; (C) – p,r,s ; (D) – p,r,t
1 n 1 1
Sol. (A) 1
f ns R1 R 2
f = – ve
1
P = = –ve q,t
f
1 n 1 1
(B) 1
f ns R1 R2
f = +ve
1
P = = +ve p,r,s
f
1 n 1 1
(C) 1
f ns R1 R2
1
f=+, P= = +ve p,r,s
f
R
(D) f=
2
1
P = = –ve r,q,t
f
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A force F is applied to block (m = 6 kg) at rest on an inclined plane of inclination 30°. The force F is
horizontal and parallel to surface of inclined plane. Maximum value of F so that block remains at rest is
40N. The coefficient of friction of the surface is
F , 30° (m = 6 kg)
F F 40N
2 5 5 3
(A) 3 (B) 3 (C*) 3 3 (D)
2
Sol. Limiting friction
mg cos = F 2 (mg sin )2
3
m 60 = (40) 2 (30)2
2
F
30 3 =50
5
= 3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A capillary tube with inner cross-section in the form of a square of side a is dipped vertically in a liquid
of density and surface tension which wet the surface of capillary tube with angle of contact . The
approximate height to which liquid will be raised in the tube is : (Neglect the effect of surface tension at
the corners capillary tube)
'a'
()
2 cos 4 cos 8 cos
(A) a g (B*) a g (C) a g (D) None of these
Sol. Upward force by capillary tube on top surface of liquid is
fup= 4 a cos
If liquid is raised to a height h then we use
h
4 cos
4 a cos = ha2 g or h = a g Ans.
3. A space 2.5 cm wide between two large plane surfaces is filled with oil. Force required to drag a very
thin plate of area 0.5 m2 just midway the surfaces at a speed of 0.5 m/sec is 1N. The coefficient of
viscosity in kg–s/m2 is :
2.5 cm 0.5 m2
0.5 m/sec 1N kg–s/m2 :
(A) 5 × 10–2 (B*) 2.5 × 10–2 (C) 1 × 10–2 (D) 7.5 × 10–2
0 .5
2 .5
Sol. Velocity gradient = 10 2
2
as force on the plate due to viscocity is from upper as well as lower portion of the oil, equal from each
part,
dv 0 .5
Then, F = 2 A dz = 2× × (0.5) 1.25 10 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A glass beaker has diameter 4cm wide at the bottom. An observer observes the edge of bottom when
beaker is empty as shown in figure. When the beaker is completely filled with liquid of refractive index
n = 5 / 2 , he can just see the centre of bottom, then the height of glass beaker is :
4cm
n = 5 / 2
(just)
(A*) 4 cm (B) 5 / 2 cm
(C) 16 cm (D) None of these
Sol.
5
2 sin i = 1 sin e
5 2cm 4cm
2 2
2 4cm h =1× 16cm 2 h2
h = 4 cm
5. Two artificial satellites of the same mass are moving around the earth in circular orbits of different radii.
In comparison to the satellite with lesser orbital radius, the other satellite with higher orbital radius will
have :
(A) greater kinetic energy.
(B*) greater potential energy.
(C*) greater total energy
(D*) greater magnitude of angular momentum, about the centre of the circular orbit.
GMm GMm
Sol. K.E. = ; PE = –
2R R
GMm
T.E. = –
2R
Angular momentum () mvR = m GMR
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A thin ring of radius R metres is placed in x-y plane such that its centre lies on origin. The half ring in
region x< 0 carries uniform linear charge density + C/m and the remaining half ring in region x> 0
carries uniform linear charge density – C/m.
R x-y x< 0
+ C/m (x> 0 ) – C/m
y
x´ x
+ –
y´
R
(A*) Then the direction of electric field at point P whose coordinates are (0m, + m) is along positive x-
2
direction
R
P (0m, + m) x-
2
R
(B*) Then the electric potential (in volts) at point P whose coordinates are (0m, + m) is 0
2
R
P (0m, + m)
2
(C*) Then the dipole moment of the ring in C–m is (4R2 ) î
(4R2 ) î C–m
(D) Then the dipole moment of the ring in C–m is (2R2 ) î
(2R2 ) î C–m
Sol. Consider two small elements of ring having charges +dq and – dq symmetrically located about y-
axis.The potential due to this pair at any point on y-axis is zero. The sum of potential due to all such
R
possible pairs is zero at all points on y-axis. Hence potential at P(0, ) is zero.
2
+dq – dq y-
y- y-
R
P(0, )
2
y
+dq –dq
d d
x´ x
+ –
y´
Since all charge lies in x-y plane, hence direction of electric field at point P should be in x-y planeAlso y-
axis is an equipotential (zero potential) line. Hence direction of electric field at all point on y-axis should
be normal to y-axis.
The direction of electric field at P should be in x-y plane and normal to y-axis. Hence direction of
electric field is along positive-x direction.
x-y P x-y y-
y- y-
P x-y y-
x-
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Consider two small elements of ring having charge +dq and –dq as shown in figure.
The pair constitutes a dipole of dipole moment.
dp = dq 2R = ( Rd ) 2R y
+ –
/2 /2
2 +dq
= – ( dp cos ) î ( 2 R cos d ) î
y´
/2 /2
= – 4R2 î
7. An object is projected vertically up from the earth’s surface with velocity Rg where R is the radius of
the earth and ‘g’ is the acceleration due to earth on the surface of earth. Find the maximum height
reached by the object.
Rg R
‘g’
Sol. Let the object of mass m projected with speed u = Rg reach a height ‘h’ above surface of earth.
Then from conservation of energy
1 GMm GMm
mu2 – =–
2 R R h
GM
u2 = gR =
R
1 GMm GMm GMm
– =– or h = R
2 R R R h
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. A 40 cm long wire having a mass 3.2 gm and area of cross section 1 mm2 is stretched between the
support 40.05 cm apart. In its fundamental mode, it vibrates with a frequency 1000/64 Hz. Find the
young’s modulus of the wire in the form X × 108 N-m2 and fill value of X.
40 3.2 1mm 2 40.05
1000/64
X × 108 N-m2 X
3
3.2gm 3.2 10 3.2 32
Sol. µ = 40cm = 40 10 2 = 40 = 4000 kg/m
=
2
=2 ...........(1)
v 1 T
f= = 2
1000 1 T
64 = 2 40 10 2 32 / 4000
2
1000 2 32
2 40 10
64 4000 = T
1000 32 10
64 × 4000 = T T= 8 N
1018
10 6
.05 10 2 10 7 40
y = 40 10 2 = 8 (.05 ) = 109 N/m2. [ Ans. 1 109 N/m2 ]
COMPREHENSION
The Hohmann Transfer Orbit maneuver is used by spaceships to transfer from one circular orbit around
a planet to another, by temporarily entering an intermediate elliptical orbit. The spaceship starts on a
small circular orbit of radius r around a planet of mass M. At point A in the diagram below, it fires its
propellers to put itself onto an intermediate elliptical orbit. At point B, it fires its propellers again, and
ends on the larger circular orbit of radius 2r. You may assume that the propellers are so powerful that
the changes in velocity occur instantaneously at each point. Between point A and B space ship
experience only gravitational force from planet.
(Hohmann Transfer Orbit maneuver)
M r
A B
2r
A B
B
2r
A
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. Find VA (the amount by which the velocity needs to be changed at point A) needed to achieve this
travel path.
VA ( A )
:
GM 2 GM 4 GM 4 2GM 4
(A) 1 (B*) 1 (C) 1 (D) 1
r 3 r 3 r 3 r 3
Sol. First find the speed of the spaceship on each of the circular orbits. Then, separately find the speed of
the spaceship at each point of the elliptical orbit
Velocity in circular path
GM
V1 =
r
For elliptical path
K + U = TE
1 GMm GMm
mV22 – –
2 r 2r
4GM
V
3r
GM 4
VA V2 – V1 –1
r 3
GM 4
VA = 1
r 3
10. Time period of a satellite in inner orbit is 2 days then what is find taken by space ship to go from A to B.
2 A B
3/2 3 /2 3 /2
4 3 2
(A) (2)3/2 days (B) days (C*) days (D) days
3 2 3
T2 r3
Sol.
T12 3r
3
2
3/2
3
T1 = T
2
3 /2
T1 3
time to go from A to B = = days
2 2
3 /2
T1 3
A B = =
2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
Sol.
Conductivity
Resistivity and conductivity of a solid are related as;
1
resistivity =
conductivity
Hence the required graph is
1
=
2. In a wire of cross section radius r, free electrons travel with drift velocity V when a current I flows
through the wire. What is the current in another wire of half the radius and of the same material when
the drift velocity is 2 V ?
r V
r/2 2 V ?
(A) 2 I (B) (C*) /2 (D) /4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Through an electrolyte an electric current is due to drift of:
(A) free electrons (B*) positive and negative ions
(C) free electrons and holes (D) protons.
(A) (B*)
(C) (D)
4. An electric current passes through non uniform cross-section wire made of homogeneous and isotropic
material. If the jA and jB be the current densities and EA and EB be the electric field intensities at A and
B respectively, then
A B jA jB EA EB
b
a
A
B
(A*) jA > jB ; EA > EB (B) jA > jB ; EA < EB (C) jA < jB ; EA > EB (D) jA < jB ; EA < EB
E
Sol. j= and j =
A
jA > jB and EA > EB.
5. A body of mass m is lifted up from the surface of the earth to a height three times the radius of the
earth. The change in potential energy of the body is (where g is acceleration due to gravity at the
surface of earth.)
m
(g )
(A) 3mgR (B*) 3/4 mgR (C) 1/3 mgR (D) 2/3 mgR
6. A ring is cut from a platinum tube 8.5 cm internal and 8.7 cm external diameter. It is supported
horizontally from the pan of a balance, so that it comes in contact with the water in a glass vessel. If an
extra 3.103 gram weight is required to pull it away from water, the surface tension of water is
(g = 10m/s2) :
8.5 cm 8.7 cm
3.103 : (g = 10m/s2) :
(A) 72 dyne/cm (B*) 57.45 dyne/cm (C) 63.35 dyne/cm (D) 60 dyne/cm
7. A tube of length open at only one end is cut into two equal halves. The sixth overtone frequency of
piece closed at one end equals to sixth overtone frequency of piece open at both ends. The end
correction at one end of the pipe is
5 5
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
12 72 24 24
Sol. According to given condition,
13 v 7v
=
4 e 2 2e
2 2
e=
24
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. A satellite is moving around the earth in a circular orbit and in this orbit magnitude of its acceleration is
‘a1’. Now a rocket is fired in the direction of motion of satellite from the satellite due to which its speed
instantaneously becomes half of initial, just after the rocket is fired acceleration of satellite have
a
magnitude ‘a2’ . Then the ratio 1 is (Assume there is no external force other then the gravitational
a2
force of earth before and after the firing of rocket from the satellite)
‘a1’
a1
‘a2’ (
a2
1
(A*) 1 (B) (C) 4 (D) 2
4
Ans. 1
F GM
Sol. a1 = = 2
m r
It is same in both cases
a1
=1
a2
10. A 10 D lens is used as a magnifier. The distance where the object should be placed to obtain maximum
angular magnification for a normal eye (near point = 25 cm)?
10 D
((near point) = 25 cm)?
(A) 5.1 (B) 3.1 (C*) 7.1 (D) 9.1
Sol. Maximum angular magnification is achieved when the final image is formed at the near point. Thus,
1
v = – 25 cm. The focal length is f = m = 10 cm.
10
1 1 1
We have, – =
v u f
1 1 1
or, – – =
25 cm u 10 cm
1 1 1
or, =– –
u 25 cm 10 cm
50
ie. u=– cm = – 7.1 cm.
7
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. P is a point moving with constant speed 10 m/s such that its velocity vector always maintains an angle
60° with line OP as shown in figure (O is a fixed point in space). The initial distance between O and P is
100 m. After what time shall P reach O.
10 m/s P OP 60º
( O (fixed) ) O P 100 m
P, O
12. The initial velocity of a particle is 4 m/s towards north .The velocity changes to 3 m/s towards east in 5
seconds. The change in velocity is
4 m/s 5 3 m/s
(A) 5 m/s2 tan–13/4 South of East (B*) 5 m/s2 tan–13/4 East of South
(C) 5 m/s2 tan–14/3 North of East (D)5 m/s2 tan–13/4 South of west
(A) 5 m/s2 tan–13/4 (B*) 5 m/s2 tan–13/4
(C) 5 m/s2 tan–14/3 (D)5 m/s2 tan–13/4
Sol.
v v u = 3( ) – 4 ()
3
5 m/s tan–1 East of south
4
13. A body of density is dropped from rest from a height 'h' (from the surface of water) into a lake of
density of water ( > ). Neglecting all dissipative effects, the maximum depth the body sinks before
returning is:
h
(dissipative effect) :
h h h 2h
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. A man and a plank of same mass are moving with a velocity v along positive x axis. At same time man
jumps along negative x axis with a velocity v with respect to ground, then the speed of the plank is :
v x
v x
(A) v (B) 2 v
(C*) 3 v (D) none of these
16. From the uniform disc of radius 4 R two small discs of radius R are cut off (as shown). The centre of
mass of the new structure will be : (Centre of lower circular cavity lies on x-axis and centre of upper
circular cavity lies on y-axis )
4 R R
(cavity) x-(cavity) y-
R R R Rˆ R R 3R ˆj)
(A) î ĵ (B) î j (C) î ĵ (D*) ( î
5 5 5 5 5 5 14
Sol. Centre of mass of circular disc of radius 4R = (0, 0)
Centre of mass of upper disc = (0, 3R)
Centre of mass of lower disc = (3R, 0)
M
Let M be mass of complete disc and then the mass of cut out disc are
16
Hence, centre of mass of new structure is given by
4R = (0, 0)
= (0, 3R)
= (3R, 0)
M
M
16
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
M M
M (0 ) ( 0) (3R )
m1x1 m 2 x 2 m 3 x 3 16 16 3R
x = M M =
m1 m 2 m 3 M 14
16 16
similarly for y
3R
Position vector of C.M. = ( î ĵ )
14
3R ˆj)
= ( î
14
2
17. A particle is moving rectilinearly so that its acceleration is given as a = 3t + 1 m/s2.Its initial velocity is
zero.
2
a = 3t +1 m/s2
(A*) The velocity of the particle at t=1 sec will be 2m/s.
t=1sec 2m/s
(B) The displacement of the particle in 1 sec will be 2m.
1 sec 2m
(C) The velocity of the particle at t=1 sec will be 4m/s.
t=1sec 4m/s
(D) The particle will come back to its starting point after some time.
Sol. a = 3t2 + 1
v 1
dv
= 3 t2 + 1 dv (3 t 2 1) dt
dt
0 0
1
v = t3 t 0 = 2 m/s. v = t3 + t
s 1
1 1
ds (t 3 t )dt S= = 0.75
4 2
0 0
18. A particle is projected from ground with an initial velocity 20 m/sec making an angle 60° with horizontal.
If R1 and R2 are radius of curvatures of the particle at point of projection and highest point respectively,
R
then find the value of 1 .
R2
20 m/sec 60° R1 R2
R1
R2
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D*) 8
v 20
Sol. R1 =
g cos v0cos
v0
2 g
( v 0 cos )
R2 =
g
R1 1 g
= =8
R2 (cos ) 3
Ans. 8
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. The length and breadth of a field are measured as l = (120 ± 2) m and b = (100 ± 5) m, respectively.
What is the area of the field ?
l = (120 ± 2) m b = (100 ± 5) m ,
(A*) (1.2 ± 0.08) × 104 m2 (B) (1.2 ± 0.04) × 104 m2
(C) (1.2 ± 0.06) × 104 m2 (D) (1.2 ± 0.18) × 104 m2
Solution
A b 2 5
Here = 0.0667
A b 120 100
A = 0.0667 × A
Now A = l × b = 120 × 100 = 12000 m2
A = 0.0667 × 12000 = ± 800.4 = (1.2 ± 0.08) × 104 m2
20. In a binary star system one star has thrice the mass of other. The stars rotate about their common
centre of mass then :
(A) Both stars have same angular momentum about common centre of mass.
(B) Both stars have angular momentum of same magnitude about common centre of mass.
(C*) Both stars have same angular speeds.
(D) Both stars have same linear speeds.
:
(A) ()
(B) ()
(C*)
(D)
Sol. In a binary star system
1
= 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A weightless rod is acted on by upward parallel forces of 2 N and 4 N ends A and B respectively. The
total length of the rod AB = 3 m. To keep the rod in equilibrium a force of 6 N should act in the following
manner:
(A) Downwards at any point between A and B
(B) Downwards at mid point of AB
(C) Downwards at a point C such that AC = 1 m
(D*) Downwards at a point D such that BD = 1
AB AB = 3 m 2N 4N A B
6 N
(A) A B
(B) A B
(C) C AC = 1 m
(D*) D BD = 1 m
2. The length, tension, diameter and density of a wire B are double than the corresponding quantities for
another stretched wire A. Then (both are fixed at the ends)
B A
1
(A) Fundamental frequency of B is times that of A.
2 2
1
(B) The velocity of wave in B is times that of velocity in A.
2
(C*) The fundamental frequency of A is equal to the third overtone of B.
(D*) The velocity of wave in B is half that of velocity in A.
1
(A) B A
2 2
1
(B) B A
2
(C*) A B
(D*) B A
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. In the figure the light is incident at an angle (slightly greater than the critical angle). Now keeping the
incident ray fixed a parallel slab of refractive index n3 is placed on surface AB.(figure b)
()
AB n3 b)
(C)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
If n3 > n1
n2 sinC = n3sinr
n
sinr = 2 sinC
n3
n2 n1
=
n3 n2
n1
sinr = = sinC
n3
ray will be undergo TIR at CD.
CD TIR
4. Consider two uniform hollow spheres each of mass M (as shown in figure.), their centers are fixed at
C1(–3R, 0, 0) and C2(+3R, 0, 0). Which of the following option is true for the given system ?
y
M
M
2R
R/2 3R R
C1 2 O C2 x
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
M
C1(–3R, 0, 0) C2(+3R, 0, 0)
?
y
M
M
2R
R/2 3R R
C1 2 O C2 x
(D) yz
2GMmy
Sol. Force on a particle in yz plane at a distance y =
(9R 2 y 2 )3 / 2
2GMmy
yzy =
(9R 2 y 2 )3 / 2
For y = 4R
y = 4R
2GMm(4R)
F=
153R3
2GMm4R
m 24R =
125R3
5R3
T = 10
2GM
2Gmy
If y is small a =
27R 3
2Gmy
y a =
27R 3
2GM
Angular frequency =
27R 3
2GM
=
27R 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. Consider a uniform disk of mass m and radius R. If A, P, O are moment of inertia about axis passing
through A, P and O respectively and perpendicular to plane, then select correct alternative from
following.
m R A, P, O A, P O
,
A P B
(A*) A = O + m (AO)2 (B*) A = P + m (PB)2 (C*) P = O + m (OP)2 (D*) A = O + m (OB)2
2
Sol. A = O + m (AO)
2
P = O + M (OP)
2 2 2 2
A – P = m [(AO) – (OP) ] = m(AP) = m(BP)
6. A block of mass 60 kg is released from rest when compression in the spring is 2m (natural length of
spring is 8m). Surface AB is smooth while surface BC is rough. Block travels x distance before coming
to complete rest. Value of x is : [g = 10 m/s2]
60 kg 2m (
8m ) AB BC x
x [g = 10 m/s2]
Ans. x=3m
1 1
Sol. By Wnet = K.E = 0 k(x02 – x2) = mgx
2 2
1 1
× 200(22 – x2) = × 60 × 10x
2 2
x = 1m
Also at this moment f max > kx
7. A uniform smooth and solid sphere of mass m = 2 kg is in pure rolling motion on smooth surface as
shown velocity v of the centre is 0.7 m/s. Find maximum compression in spring in cm.
m = 2 kg v = 0.7 m/s
(cm )
v = 0.7 m/s
k = 200 N/m
Ans. 07
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 1 2
Sol. mv 2 kx
2 2
m 2 1
x= .v = 0.7 = 0.7m = 7 cm
k 200 10
COMPREHENSION -1
3
Consider a hot-air balloon (open to atmosphere) with volume VB = 1.1 m . The mass of the balloon-
envelope, whose volume is to be neglected in comparison to VB, is m = 0.187 kg. The balloon shall be
started, where the external air temperature is 1 = 20° C and the normal external air pressure is P0 =
5
1.013 × 10 Pa. Under these conditions the density of air is 1 = 1.2 kg/ m3.
VB = 1.1 m3 envelope) m = 0.187
kg VB 1= 20° C
P0 = 1.013 × 105 Pa 1 = 1.2 kg/ m3
8. What temperature 2 must the warmed air inside the balloon have to make the balloon just float?
2 ?
Sol. 1.
VB . g 2 + mg = VB . 1 g ( 2 is density at temperature 2 )
m
2 = 1 –
VB
Then the temperature may by obtained from
1 T2
,
2 T1
T2 = 341.53 K = 68.38°C
9. First the balloon is held fastened to the ground and the internal air is heated to steady-state
temperature of 3 = 110° C. The balloon is fastened with a rope. Find the tension in the rope.
3 = 110° C
Sol. The tension (FB) in the rope is the difference between the buoyant force FA and the weight force FG.
FB = VB 1 g – (VB 3 + m) g
It follows with 3 T3 = 1 T1
T1
FB = VB 1 g 1 – m g = 1.21N
T3
So, block will not move so total distance travelled = 2 + 1 = 3m.
= 2 + 1 = 3m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Consider a spherical shell rolling purely on a horizontal fixed surface. The velocity of the centre of shell
is v ˆi and acceleration of the centre of shell is a ˆi . Following representative points are chosen on the
0 0
surface of shell
,
v 0 ˆi a 0 ˆi
yS
Q
O x
R
P
P ( on z - axis)
Q and R ( on x - axis)
S ( on y - axis)
Following symbolic representation has been used
r = position vector of a point with respect to O (centre of the shell)
v = velocity vector of point with respect to ground
= angular velocity of the shell
= angular acceleration of the shell
a = acceleration of a point with respect to ground
Match the conditions given in column-I with points given in column-II that obey the given condition at
the instant shown.
P (z –)
Q R (x – )
S (y –)
r = O ()
v =
=
=
a =
-I -II
Column I Column II
(A) r·a = 0 (P) P
(B) r·v = 0 (Q) Q
(C) ·r = 0 (R) R
(D) ·r = 0 (S) S
Ans. (A) (P) ; (B) (P, S) ; (C) (Q, R, S) ; (D) (Q, R, S)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. For P velocity and acceleration vectors both are along x-axis.
For S velocity vector is towards x-axis and position vector is towards y-axis.
For Q and R velocity and acceleration vectors are in xy-plane
and of shell are along negative z-axis.
P x-
S x-y-
Q R xy-
, z-
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Consider a triangular surface whose vertices are three points having co-ordinate A (2a, 0, 0), B(0, a, 0),
C(0, 0, a). If there is a uniform electric field E 0 î 2E 0 ĵ 3E 0k̂ then flux linked to triangular surface ABC is-
2
7E0a 11E 0a 2
(A) (B) 3E0a2 (C*) (D) Zero
2 2
A (2a, 0, 0), B(0, a, 0), C(0, 0, a).
E0 î 2E 0 ĵ 3E0k̂ ABC
7E0a2 11E 0a 2
(A) (B) 3E0a2 (C*) (D) Zero
2 2
y
O x
Sol. A
C
z
=0
net
ABC= – AOB + BOC + COA ]
E0a 2 11
= + 2Ea2 + 3.E0a2 = E 0a2
2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Figure shows an inclined plane of inclination 37° whose coefficient of friction is function of
y coordinate. Small particles are arranged on y axis and they are released from rest at t = 0. At
t = 2s particles are observed to be on a parabola x = 3y2 .Variation of with y can be expressed
2
according to relation (Take g=10m/s )
37°y y
t = 0 t = 2s x = 3y2
y (g=10m/s2)
y o
2
x = 3y
x
o
37
3. A lift is moving upward with uniform acceleration a = g/2. A block attached with the spring system, as
shown in figure. All the spring are ideal and identical. There are two observer A & B as shown in figure.
For observer A block is at rest in equilibrium. Which of following options is/are correct for the given
system.
K K K
S1 S2 S3
g
a= S4 S 5
2
K K
A
m
m 2 g2
(A*) Potential energy stored in spring S1 is for observer A.
8K
m 2 g2
(B) Potential energy stored in spring S4 is for observer B.
8K
(C) Kinetic energy of block is same for observer A & observer B
15 m2 g2
(D*) Total elastic potential energy of spring system is
16 K
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
a = g/2
A B A
K K K
S1 S2 S3
g
a= S4 S 5
2
K K
A
m
m 2 g2
(A*) A S1
8K
m 2 g2
(B) B S4
8K
(C) AB
15 m 2 g2
(D*)
16 K
3mg
Sol. Say extension in S1 and S4 are x1 and x4 respectively 3kx1 = 2kx4 =
2
3mg
S1 S4 x1 x43kx1 = 2kx4 =
2
1 2 m2 g2
u1 = kx1 =
2 8k
2
3mg
F2 2 15 m2 g2
Total energy () = x2 = =
2k eq 6k 16 K
2
5
4. Two blocks of masses m and 2m are connected by a compressed spring with a string as shown in
figure. The spring has an initial compression of X = 1m. The spring constant is K = 6N/m. Whole
system is moving towards right with speed 1m/s. Now if the string is cut, then (Take m = 1kg and
neglect friction)
m 2m
X = 1m K = 6N/m 1 m/s
(m = 1kg )
(A) When m is having maximum speed, the energy stored in the spring will be 6 J.
m 6 J
(B*) The minimum speed attained by 2m is zero.
2m
(C) When m is having maximum speed, the energy stored in the spring will be 3 J.
m 3 J
(D*) The maximum speed attained by m is 3 m/s.
m 3 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. m will attain maximum speed when spring will be in its natural length.
m
mV1 + 2mV2 = 3m (1)
V1 + 2V2 = 3 .........(1)
from conservation of energy
1 1 1 1 2
(3m)(1)2 + k x2 = mV12 + 2mV2 .........(2)
2 2 2 2
2
3 6 V12 3 V1
+
2 2 2 2
9 V12 6V1
9 = V12 +
2
V12 – 2V1 – 3 = 0
V1 = 3 m/s
5. An external horizontal force 'F' is applied to a system of two blocks placed on a smooth surface as
shown :
'F'
9F
(A*) Acceleration of block A is
17m
9F
(B) Acceleration of block A is
20m
6F
(C*) Acceleration of block B is
17m
15F
(D) Relative acceleration of block A with respect to B is
17m
9F 9F
(A*)A (B) A
17m 20m
6F 15F
(C*)B (D) A B
17m 17m
Sol.
F – 2T = ma .........(i)
3T = 2mb .........(ii)
2a = 3b .........(iii)
By considered,
9F 6F
a= b= .
17m 17m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A point charge Q is placed at the centre of a hollow spherical neutral conductor of inner radius R1 and
outer radius R2. Then
R1 R2
Q
KQ
(A*) Potential of the inner surface of the conductor is
R2
KQ
R2
KQ
(B*) Potential of the outer surface of the conductor is
R2
KQ
R2
1 1
(C) Potential difference between inner and outer surface is KQ
R1 R2
1 1
KQ
R1 R2
KQ
(D) Potential of inner surface of the conductor is
R 2 R1
KQ
R 2 R1
Sol. The charges on different surfaces of the conductor are shown.
+Q
–Q
R2
R1
Q
A
B
KQ K( Q) KQ KQ
VA = + + =
R2 R1 R1 R2
KQ K( Q) KQ KQ
VB = + + =
R2 R2 R2 R2
VA – VB = 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. Choose the correct alternative (s) :
(A*) A conducting body with a total negative charge may have negative, zero or positive potential.
(B*) When a total charge is distributed on two isolated conducting spheres such that the total electrical
potential energy of system is minimum, no charge will flow when the two spheres are connected by a
conducting wire.
(C*) A ring contains non–uniformly distributed positive and negative charges. If sum of total charge is
zero then electric field at any point on the axis is either perpendicular to axis of ring or equal to zero.
(D) A positive charge always moves from higher potential to lower potential.
(A*)
(B*)
(C*)
(D)
8. Mass of plank shown is 102.5 kg. If plank remains horizontal and slipping does not take place at any
contact, Radius of uniform cylindrical rollers are 10 cm and 5 cm and masses 40 kg and 20 kg
respectively, then choose the correct options. Given that during the first second starting from rest plank
gets displaced by 10 cm.
102.5 kg
10 cm 5 cm 40 kg 20 kg
10
cm
(A*) Ratio of magnitude of acceleration of centre of mass of bigger and smaller rollers is 1
1
(B) Angular accelerations of the bigger and smaller roller are 2 rad/s2 & 1 rad/s2.
2 rad/s2 1 rad/s2
(C*) Magnitude of friction between plank and bigger roller is more than that between plank and smaller
roller
(D*) Magnitude of friction between bigger roller and ground is more that between smaller roller and
ground
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 2
Sol. S = ut + at
2
a = 0.2 m/s 2
a a
1
= , 2
=
2R 2r
=1= 2
a1 = a2 = 0.1
Solving f1 = 3N
f3 = 1N
f2 = 1.5 N
f4 = 0.5 N
COMPREHENSION
A block is tied within two springs, each having spring constant equal to k. Initially the springs are in their
natural length and horizontal as shown in the figure, the block is released from rest. The springs are
ideal, acceleration due to gravity is g downwards. Air resistance is to be neglect. The natural length of
spring is 0.
k
g 0
k k
g
9. If the decrease in height of the block till it reaches equilibrium is 3 0
then the mass of the block is
3 0
2k 0 2k 3k
(A) (B) 0
(C*) 0
(D) None of these
g g g
L0
3L0
L0+x 0
Sol.
tan = 3
= 60°
2 2
0 + x0 = 0 3 0 =2 0 x0 = 0
3K
m=
g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Maximum speed of the block in motion is –
4g
(A) zero (B*) 0
(C) 2 3 0g (D) None of these
3
1 1
Sol. 0 + 3 mg 0 + 0 = mv 2 + 0 + k( 0 ) 2 2
2 2
1 2
mv 2 = 3mg 0 –k 0
2
2k 20
v2 = 2 3g 0
m
2 20 g 2 6g 0 2g 0 4g 0
= 2 3g 0
= 2 3g 0
g 0
= =
3L0 3 3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A soap film is created in a small wire frame as shown in the figure. The sliding wire of mass m is given
a velocity u to the right and assume that u is small enough so that film does not break. Plane of the film
is horizontal and surface tension is T. Then time to regain the original position of wire is equal to :
m
u u
T
um T mu2
(A*) (B) (C)
T um T
(D) It will never regain original position
2T
Sol. a=
m
v = u + at 0 = u – at
u um
t= =
a 2T
um
Total time T = 2t = .
T
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A small object is placed at a distance of 3.6 cm from a magnifier of focal length 4.0 cm. The angular
magnification is :
4.0 cm3.6 cm
(A) 10 (B*) 7 (C) 5 (D) None of these
Sol. If the object is placed at a distance u0 from the lens, the angel subtended by the object on the lens is
h h
= where h is the height of the object. The maximum angle subtended on the unaided eye is = .
u0 D
Thus, the angular magnification is
D 25cm
m= = = = 7.0.
u0 3.6cm
3. A body of density is dropped from rest from a height 'h' (from the surface of water) into a lake of
density of water ( > ). Neglecting all dissipative effects, the maximum depth the body sinks before
returning is:
h ( > )
(dissipative effect)
:
h h h 2h
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
4. A ball is thrown upward at an angle of 45° with the horizontal and lands on the top edge of a building
that is 20 m away. The top edge is 10m above the throwing point. The initial speed of the ball in
metre/second is (take g = 10 m/s2) :
45° 20 m
10m
( g = 10 m/s2) :
(A) 10 m/s (B*) 20 m/s (C) 25 m/s (D) 30 m/s
y
gx 2 (20,10)
Sol. y = x tan – 2 2
2u cos u
10
45° x
20m
10 400
10 = 20 tan45° –
2u2 cos 2 45
u 20 m/s
5. A body of mass m and radius r is rotated with angular velocity as shown in the figure & kept on a
surface that has sufficient friction then the body will move:
m r
:
(A) backward first and then move forward (B) forward first and then move backward
(C*) will always move forward (D) none of these
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A body of mass m is moving in a circle of radius r with a constant speed v. The force on the body is
mv2/r and is directed towards the centre. What is the work done by the force in moving the body half the
circumference of the circle.
m r v mv2/r
m v2 1
(A) r (B) m v2 (C) m v2 (D*) zero
r 2
Sol. W = F . d S = 0 because F .d S = 0
7. A block of mass m is directly pulled up slowly on an smooth fixed inclined plane of height h and
inclination with the help of a string parallel to the incline. Which of the following statement(s) is/are
incorrect for the block when it moves up from the bottom to the top of the incline. [M.Bank_WPE_4.37]
h m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-26
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In figure 1 VB – VA = 12 V and in
In figure 2 VA – VB = 15
If same battery is used in both the circuits, then choose the correct option
1 VB – VA = 12 V
2 VA – VB = 15
15. Two bodies with moments of inertia 1 and 2 ( 1 > 2) have equal angular momentum. If their kinetic
energies of rotation are E1 and E2, respectively, then
1 2 ( 1 > 2)
E1 E2 :
(A) E1 = E2 (B*) E1 < E2 (C) E1 > E2 (D) E1 E2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-27
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 1 1
Sol. (B) E1 = = (I1 1) 1 = k 1
2 2 2
Now I1 1 = I2 2 = k (say)
1 1 1
E2 = = (I ) = k
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
I1 > I2 and 2 > 1 So, E2 > E1
16. A sphere is rolling upwards as shown . At an instant when the velocity of sphere is v, frictional force
acting on it is
v ,
:
.
2mg sin
(A) downwards and mg cos (B) downwards and
7
2mg sin
(C) upwards and mg cos (D*) upwards and
7
2mg sin
(A) mg cos (B)
7
2mg sin
(C) mg cos (D*)
7
Sol. (d) In case of rolling in the inclined plane, friction is static and acts in the upward direction and is given
by
mg sin
f= (i)
R2
1
k2
2
For sphere, k2 = R2 (ii)
5
2
Form Eqs. (i) and (ii), f = mg sin (upwards)
7
17. A uniform thin rod of length and mass m is hinged at a distance /4 from one of the end released from
horizontal postion as shown in Fig. . The angular velocity of the rod as it passes the vertical position is
m /4
5g 6g 3g g
(A) 2 (B*) 2 (C) (D) 2
7 7 7
2
1 m 2 1 2
Sol. (B) mg m
4 2 12 4
24 g 6g
2
7 7
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-28
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. A spool is pulled horizontally by two equal and opposite forces as shown in figure. Which of the
following statements are correct?
(spool)
F
F
Rough
(A) The centre of mass moves towards left
(B*) The centre of mass moves towards right
(C) The centre of mass remains stationary
(D) The net torque about the centre of mass of the spool is zero
(A)
(B*)
(C)
(D)
Sol. Friction force will act towards right.
19. In the figure shown: (All batteries are ideal)
15 30 5 55
5 =3A 10=3A 5 =1A 10=5.5A 12.5A
Ans.
25V
5 10 5 10
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-29
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. The figure shows two large, closely placed, parallel, nonconducting sheets with identical (positive)
uniform surface charge densities, and a sphere with a uniform (positive) volume charge density. Four
points marked as 1, 2, 3 and 4 are shown in the space in between. If E1, E2, E3 and E4 are magnitude of
net electric fields at these points respectively then :
1, 2, 3
4 E1, E2, E3 E4
Sol. 2 3 4
+
2Î 0 2Î 0
Electric field due to both the plates will be cancelled out for all the points. So the net electric field at the
points will be governed only by the sphere. Farther the point from the sphere, lesser the magnitude of
electric field.
Therefore E3 = E4 > E2 > E1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A particle of mass 5 kg is moving on rough fixed inclined plane (making an angle 30° with horizontal)
with constant velocity of 5 m/s as shown in the figure. Find the friction force acting on a body by the
inclined plane. ( take g = 10m/s2)
5 kg 30°
5 m/s ( g = 10m/s2)
3. The displacement time graphs of two bodies A and B are shown in figure. The ratio of velocity of A, v A
to velocity of B, vB is :
A B A, vA B, v B
1 1
(A) (B) 3 (C*) (D) 3
3 3
ds 1
Sol. For A, = VA =
dt 3
ds
For B, = VB = 3
dt
VA 1
= .
VB 3
4. A solid sphere of mass 10 kg is placed over two smooth inclined planes as shown in figure. The normal
reactions at 2 is (g = 10 m/s2)
10 kg 2
(g = 10 m/s2)
2 1
60° 30°
(A*) 50 (B) 30 (C) 20 (D) 70
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
N2 cos 60°
N1 cos 30°
N1 N2
30°60°
N 1 sin 30°
Sol. N2 sin 60°
2 1
60° 30°
N1 sin 30° = N2 sin 60°
N1 cos 30° + N2 cos 60° = mg
Solving above equation
mg 10 10
N2 = 50
2 2
5. A disc of mass ‘m’ and radius R is free to rotate in horizontal plane about a vertical smooth fixed axis
passing through its centre. There is a smooth groove along the diameter of the disc and two small balls
m
of mass each are placed in it on either side of the centre of the disc as shown in fig. The disc is
2
given initial angular velocity 0 and released. The angular speed of the disc when the balls reach the
end of disc is :
m R
m
2
0
0 0 2 0 0
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
2 3 3 4
Sol. Let the angular speed of disc when the balls reach the end be .
From conservation of angular momentum
1 1 m 2 m 2 0
mR2 0
= mR2 + R + R or =
2 2 2 2 3
6. Given that Y = a sin t + bt + ct2 cos t. The unit of abc is same as that of
Y = a sin t + bt + ct2 cos t abc :
(A) y (B) y/t (C) (y/t)2 (D*) (y/t)3
Sol. (D) y = a sin t + bt + ct2 cos t
Here a = y; b = y/t ; c = y/t2
a x b x c = y x y/t x y/t2 = (y/t)3
r 2R
7. The specific resistance of a circular wire of radius r, resistance, R and length is given by = .
Given: r = 0.24 ± 0.02 cm, R = 30 ± 1 , and = 4.80 ± 0.01 cm. The percentage error in is nearly
2
r R
r R =
.: r = 0.24 ± 0.02 cm, R = 30 ± 1 , = 4.80 ± 0.01 cm :
(A) 7% (B) 9% (C) 13% (D*) 20%
0.02 1 0.01
Sol. (D) Required percentage = 2 x x 100 + x 100+ x 100
0.24 30 4. 80
= 16.7 + 3.3 + 0.2 = 20%
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. Using mass (M), length (L), time (T), and electric current (A) as fundamental quantities, the dimensions
of permittivity will be
(M), (L), (T) (A) :
(A) [M LT-1 A-1] (B) [M LT-2 A-2] (C*) [M-1 L-3 T4 A2] (D) [M2 L-2 T-2 A]
1 q1q2
Sol. (C) By Coulomb’s laws , F =
4 0 r2
q1q 2
0
=
4 F r2
Taking dimensions
( AT ) ( AT )
0
= = [M-1 L-3 T4 A2]
ML1T 2 L2
2 3 1
(A) 2 (B*) (C) (D)
3 2 2
Sol. All resistances are parallel in between A and B.
A B
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
So,
R 6 3 6 3 6 3
1 3
=
R 2
2
R=
3
10. Three resistances 1 , 2 and 3 form a triangle ABC as shown. The equivalent resistances are
measured between A – B, B – C and C – A. The ratio of minimum to maximum measured resistances is
1 , 2 3 ABC A–B, B–C C–A
B
A C
5 8 5
(A*) (B) (C) (D) 1
9 9 8
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 3)(2 5
Sol. RAB = =
1 3)(2 6
2 3)(1
RBC = 1 3 = 8
2
6
3 (1 2)
9
RCA = 1 2 3 =
6
5
The required ratio =
9
11. A battery B1 is being charged by another battery B2 as shown in the fig. The e.m.f.'s of the two battery
are 10 volt & 20 volt respectively. They have equal internal resistance of 1 each then the current in
the circuit is:
B1 B2 10 20
1
12. What is power delivered by an ideal battery of emf when it is connected across terminal A and B as
shown in figure.
A B
2 2
2 2 4 2
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
R 2R R R
R
Sol. Req =
2
2
2 2
so P = =
(R / 2) R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. In a region of uniform electric field E E 0 î a semi cylinder is placed with it’s rectangular shaped plane
surface in y–z plane so that x-axis is normal to the plane surface. Given is length and r is radius of
cylinder, the flux with curved surface alone is
E E0 î y–z
x = r
Er
(A) Er (B) (C*) 2Er (D) Zero
2
Sol.
14. If the eye is kept very close to a converging lens (focal length = 10 cm) and at the optical centre of the
lens and an object is kept at distance 'd' then the minimum distance 'd' of the object from the lens so
that its image can be seen clearly by the defect free eye is :
(= 10 )
'd' 'd'
50 50
(A) 10 cm (B) 25 cm (C) cm (D*) cm
3 7
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1 1 1
Sol. Using , – = ;
v u F
1 1 1
=
d ( d' ) F
(where d' is the image of the object from the lens, which behaves as the object for the eye)
d'
1 1 1
d F d'
For minimum d, d' should be minimum which is equal to 25 cm for eye.
d d'25 cm
Substituting ;
1 1 1 10 25 7
= + = = .
d 25 10 250 50
50
d= Ans.
7
15. If the eye is kept very close to a converging lens (focal length = 10 cm) and at the optical centre of the
lens and an object is kept at distance 'd' then the maximum distance 'd' of the object from the lens so
that its image can be seen clearly by the defect free eye is :
(= 10 )
'd' 'd'
50 50
(A*) 10 cm (B) 25 cm (C) cm (D) cm
3 7
Sol. Similarly as in the previous problem
1 1 1
d F d'
For maximum 'd', d' should be maximum i.e. d' =
'd' , d' d' =
1 1 1
Substituting ;
d F
d = f = 10 cm. Ans.
16. Under similar conditions of temperature and pressure, In which of the following gases the velocity of
sound will be largest.
H2 H2
M
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. An ammeter A of finite resistance and a resistor R are joined in series to an ideal cell C. A
potentiometer P is joined in parallel to R. The ammeter reading is I0 & the potentiometer reading is V0.
P is now replaced by a voltmeter of finite resistance. The ammeter reading now is I and the voltmeter
reading is V.
C A R P
R 0 V0 P
V
(A) I > I0, V > V0 (B*) I > I0, V < V0 (C) I = I0, V < V0 (D) I < I0, V = V0.
18. Figure shows a solid metal sphere of radius a surrounded by a concentric thin metal shell of radius 2a.
Initially both are having charges Q each. When the two are connected by a conducting wire as shown in
the figure, then amount of heat produced in this process will be :
2a a
Q
Q
Q
a
2a
KQ 2 KQ 2 KQ 2 KQ 2
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
2a 4a 6a 8a
KQ 2 KQ 2 KQ KQ 2 KQ 2 5KQ 2
Sol. Ei = .Q = =
2a 4a 2a a 4a 4a
K ( 2Q) 2 KQ 2
Ef = =
4a a
KQ 2
Ei – Ef = H =
4a
19. A ring of mass m and radius R has three particle attached to the ring and it is rolling on the surface as
shown in the figure. The ratio of kinetic energy of the system to the kinetic energy of the particle of
mass 2m will be (speed of centre of ring is V0 and slipping is absent) :
m R
2m ( V0
) :
2 1 3 2
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
5 2 1 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
1 1 1 1
K.E.system = × 2 mR2 2
0 + m(2R)2 0
2 + m(R)2 r2 + 2m(R)2 0
2
2 2 2 2
= 6 mv02
1
K.E.2m = × 2m ( 2 R)2 2 = 2mv02 .
2
20. A 75 cm string fixed at both ends produces resonant frequencies 384 Hz and 288 Hz without there
being any other resonant frequency between these two. Wave speed for the string is :
75 384 Hz 288 Hz
(A*) 144 m/s (B) 216 m/s (C) 108 m/s (D) 72 m/s
(A*) 144 (B) 216 (C) 108 (D) 72
Sol. = 384 – 288 = 96
Thus 288 and 384 (96 × 3; 96 × 4) are third and fourth harmonics.
For fundamental mode:
288 384 (96 × 3; 96 × 4)
= 0.75
2
= 1.5 m
= 96
v = 96 × 1.5 = 144 m/s.
NCERT QUESTIONS
3.1 to 3.8, 3.11, 3.13, 3.14, 3.15, 3.16
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. The equation of displacement due to a sound wave is s = s0 sin2 ( t k x). If the bulk modulus of the
medium is B, then the equation of pressure variation due to that sound is
s = s0 sin2 ( t k x)
(bulk modulus)B
(A*) B k s0 sin (2 t 2 k x) (B) B k s0 sin (2 t 2 k x)
(C) B k s0 cos2 ( t k x) (D) B k s0 cos2 ( t k x)
Sol. The equation of pressure variation due to sound is
ds d
p=–B =–B [s0 sin2 ( t – kx)] = B ks0 sin (2 t – 2kx)
dx dx
2. In the circuit shown, the galvanometer shows zero current. The value of resistance R is :
R :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
If pot. drop between A and B is also 2V, then no currrent will pass through the gelvanomter.
A B 2V ,
12
Pot. drop across R = R=2
R 5
12 R = 2R + 10
R=1
3. A rigid body is made of three identical thin rods fastened together in the form of letter H. The body is
free to rotate about a fixed horizontal axis AB that passes through one of the legs of the H. The body is
allowed to fall from rest from a position in which the plane of H is horizontal. What is the angular speed
of the body when the plane of H is vertical. Top View of the figure in the initial position.
H H
AB H
H
B
A
L
z
Sol. Decrease in PE = Gain in rotational K.E.
=
L
Mg + MgL = R 3 R1 R 2
2
1 4 ML2
. ML2. 2 = ML2
2 3 3
3 2 4ML2 9g 9g
MgL = .ML2 . 2
= = 2
=
2 3 3 4L 4L
9g
[ Ans.: = ]
4L
4. A man holding a flag is running in North-East direction with speed 10 m/s. Wind is blowing in east
direction with speed 5 2 m/s. Find the direction in which flag will flutter.
10 m/s 5 2 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
COMPREHENSION
A thin uniform rod having mass m and length 4 is free to rotate about horizontal axis passing through a
point distant from one of its end, as shown in figure. It is released, from the horizontal position as
shown:
m 4
:
x
5. What will be acceleration of centre of mass at this instant
3g 2g 3g 2g
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
7 7 5 5
Sol. Torque equation
Hinge = Hinge
m( 4 ) 2 2
mg = m
12
3g
=
7
3g
Tangential acceleration = =
7
Radial acceleration = 2 =0
3g
Ans.
7
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. What will be normal reaction due to hinge at the instant of release :
mg 4 mg 2 mg
(A) mg (B) (C*) (D)
2 7 7
3g
Sol. mg – N1 = m
7
4mg
N1 =
7
N2 = 0
E2 E1
P
Q1
+
Q2
a
b
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Expand above integration in terms of E1 and E2 and interpret following terms and match the columns :
E1 E2 :
1 KQ 22
(A) 0 E 12 dV (p)
2 2b
All space
1 KQ 12
(B) 0 E 22 dV (q)
2 2a
All space
KQ 12 KQ 22 KQ 1 Q 2
(C) 0 E 1 . E 2 dV (r) + +
2a 2b r
All space
1 KQ 1 Q 2
(D) 0 E . E dV (s)
2 r
All space
1 KQ 22
0 E 22 dV = Self energy of second shell =
2 2b
All space
0 E 1 . E 2 dV = Total energy of system – Total self energy of both the shells = Interaction energy
All space
KQ 1 Q 2
between two shells =
r
KQ 1 Q 2
r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. The two pipes are submerged in sea water, arranged as shown in figure. Pipe A with length LA = 1.5 m
and one open end, contains a small sound source that sets up the standing wave with the second
lowest resonant frequency of that pipe. Sound from pipe A sets up resonance in pipe B, which has both
ends open. The resonance is at the second lowest resonant frequency of pipe B. The length of the pipe
B is :
'A' LA = 1.5
'A' 'B'
B B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A body of density is dropped from rest from a height 'h' (from the surface of water) into a lake of
density of water ( > ). Neglecting all dissipative effects, the acceleration of body while it is in the
lake is:
h
(dissipative effect)
3. A projectile of range R bursts at its highest point in two fragments. Both pieces at the time of bursts
have the velocity in the horizontal direction. The heavier is double the mass of the lighter. Lighter
R
fragment falls at horizontal distance from the point of projection in the opposite side of projection.
2
The distance, where other part falls, from point of projection.
R
R
2
7R 5R 8R 6R
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
4 4 4 4
Sol. At highest point
2m m
mu = v – 2u
3 3
2u 2 5u
mu + = v v=
3 3 2
5 R R 7R
total horizontal distance = + =
22 2 4
4. In a practical wheat stone bridge circuit as shown, when one more resistance of 100 is connected in
parallel with unknown resistance ' x ', then ratio 1/ 2 become ' 2 '. 1 is balance length. AB is a uniform
wire. Then value of ' x ' must be:
100 ' x '
1/ 2 ' 2 ' 1 AB
' x'
copper strips
( )
100 x
G
A B copper strips
()
1 2
E r
100
x
100 x
100
So = 100 x
1 2
1 2
1
=2 x = 100
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. In figure point O is maintained zero volt and A, B, C and D are maintained at V volt. If all resistors have
same resistance R, then current through branch
O A, B, C D V
R ,
A P B
S Q
O
D R C
2V V V
(A*) OP is (B*) PQ is zero (C) QR is (D*) SD is
3R 3R 3R
2V V V
(A*) OP (B*) PQ (C) QR (D*) SD
3R 3R 3R
Sol. Since VP = VQ = VR = VS so equivalent circuit can be drawn as
VP = VQ = VR = VS
(O) (P, Q, R, S) (A, B, C, D)
R/4 R/8
Current through PQ and similar branch is zero
PQ
R R 3R
Req = + =
4 8 8
8V
I=
2R
2V
IOP =
3R
V
ISD =
3R
6. Consider a horizontal surface moving vertically upward (positive y-axis) with velocity 2 m/s. A small
1
block of mass 2 kg is moving with velocity 2iˆ 2 ˆj (in m/s). If coefficient of restitution is and friction
2
1
coefficient is then find horizontal component (component along x-axis) of velocity (in m/s) of block
3
after collision.
( y-) 2 m/s 2 kg
1 1
2iˆ 2 ˆj (m/s ) e = =
2 3
(m/s ) (x-)
y
O x
2 m/s
Ans. 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Lets say velocity after collision is v v1ˆi v 2 ˆj
v v1ˆi v 2 ˆj
v sepration
e=
v approach
1 v1 v 2
v 2 4m / s
2 4
–1
Impulse along y-axis y = m (v2 + 2) = 6 ms
y- y = m (v2 + 2) = 6 ms–1
–1
Impulse along x-axis x = – y = – 2 ms
–1
x- x = – y = – 2 ms
–1
m (v f - 2) = – 2 ms
vf = 0
7. Consider the circuit shown in the figure. An ideal voltmeter reads 10V across X. If an ideal ammeter is
connected across X it reads 5A. Find the value of X in .
X 10V
X 5A X
E r=1
X r=5
Ans. 3
EX
Sol. 10
X 6
E
5
6
E = 30 3X = X + 6 X=3
COMPREHENSION
AB is a uniform wire of meter bridge, across which an ideal 20 volt cell is connected as shown. Two
resistor of 1 and X are inserted in slots of metre bridge. A cell of emf E volts and internal resistance
r and a galvanometer is connected to jockey J as shown.
AB 20 1 X
E r
J
1 X
E,r
J
A B
P
20V
8. If E = 16 volts, r = 4 and distance of balance point P from end A is 90 cm, then the value of X is :
E = 16 , r = 4 A P 90 cm X
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C*) 9 (D) 12
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Let reference potential of B be zero. No current shall flow through galvanometer.
If VC – Vp = 16 volts. 1 X C
Now Vp = 2 volts.
Vc should be 18 volts. 20V 0V
VA Vc Vc VB A B
Now = P
1 x
Solving X = 9 .
Sol. B
VC – Vp = 16 volts.
1 C X
Vp = 2 volts.
Vc , 18
20V 0V
VA Vc Vc VB A B
= P
1 x
X = 9 .
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. In the Column-I some arrangements are given and in Column-II some changes in some parameters are
given for short duration of time. Then match Column-I with Column-II.
Column-I Column-II
-I -II
-I -II
-I -II
‘O’
a
‘d’
‘m’
(B) (q) ‘d’
‘d’ ‘m’
(C) (r) ‘m’ will increase
m =
d =
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(D) (s) ‘m’
PV2 =
‘d’
‘m’
()
Ans. (A) – s ; (B) – q,r ; (C) – p ; (D) – q,s
Sol. (A) As distance between object and mirror is not chaning, distance between image and mirror will note
change. Hence, magnitude of magnification will also not change.
(B) Friction will act in left direction on sphere. So, will increase and momentum will decrease.
(C) There will be no effect of motion of dielectric between plates on C. So, current will remain zero in
circuit.
(D) PV2 = constant
nRT 2
.V = constant nRT.V = constant
V
So, as volume increases, T will decrease
Rotational kinetic energy of mono atomic gas is zero always.
(A)
(B)
(C) C
(D) PV2 =
nRT 2
.V = nRT.V =
V
T
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website: www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A block of mass 20 kg is acted upon by a force F = 30 N at an angle 53° with the horizontal in
downward direction as shown. The coefficient of friction between the block and the horizontal surface is
0.2. The friction force acting on the block by the ground is (g = 10 m/s2)
20 kg F = 30 N 53°
0.2
(g = 10 m/s2)
F
53°
Sol. Fcos53°
N 53°
mg F
Fsin53°
(Easy) Max. frictional force
fmax = N
= (mg + F sin53°)
4
= 0.2 (20 × 10 + 30 × ) = 44.8 N
5
As applied horizontal force is Fcos53°
= 18N < fmax, friction force will also be 18 N.
Fcos 53°
= 18N < fmax, 18 N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. The wire of the potentiometer has resistance 4 ohms and length 1 m. It is connected to a cell of e.m.f.
2 volts and internal resistance 1 ohm. If a cell of e.m.f. 1.2 volts is balanced by it, the balancing length
will be:
1 4 2 1
1.2
(A) 90 cm (B) 60 cm (C) 50 cm (D*) 75 cm
Sol. Potential gradient = 1.6 v/m
E.M.F. = potential gradient × balancing length
1.2 = 1.6 ×
1 .2 3
= = = 0.75 m = 75cm
1 .6 4
3. If the apparent weight of the bodies at the equator is to be zero, then the earth should rotate with
angular velocity
g 2g g 3g
(A*) rad/sec (B) rad/sec (C) rad/sec (D) rad/sec
R R 2R 2R
g
Sol. mg = m 2
R, =
R
4. A particle ‘A’ is rotating in a circle of radius R with centre at O. Another particle B in the same plane is
resting at point Q which is at a distance d from O. The path of B as seen from A is :
A R O Q B O d
A B
5. In the circuit shown, cells are of equal emf E but of different internal resistances r1 = 6 and r2 = 4 .
Reading of the ideal voltmeter connected across cell 1 is zero. Value of the external resistance R in
ohm is equal to -
E r1 = 6
r2 = 4 1 R -
V
E r1 E
r2
Cell1 Cell2
(A*) 2 (B) 2.4 (C) 10 (D) 24
E 2E
Sol. E – ir1 = 0 i= and i =
r1 r1 r2 R
Therefore R = r1 – r2 = 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. The velocity of the particle is given by the expression v = 2t + 3t2 (where v is in ms–1 and t is in
seconds). find out the distance travelled by the particle from t = 2 to t = 3 seconds.
v = 2t + 3t2 (v ms–1 t )t = 2 t = 3
(A) 9 (B*) 24 (C) 27 (D) 36
7. The force between two electric dipoles separated by a distance 'r' and kept coaxially is directly
proportional to :
'r'
(A) r2 (B) r4 (C) r–2 (D*) r–4
Sol. For two electric dipoles.
1 dU 1
U 3 F= –
r dr r 4
8. In the following circuit diagram, the current flowing through resistor of 1/4 is
1/4
30
= = 30 A.
1
9. A bulb rated 200 W, 200 V is used at 100 V. Then the number of electrons passed through bulb in one
second is
200 W, 200 V 100 V
(A) 3.125 × 1017 (B) Zero (C*) 3.125 × 1018 (D) 6.25 × 1018
V2
Sol. W=V =
R
( 200 ) 2
200 = R = 200
R
V 100
When used at100V = = 0.5 A
R 200
100V
Q = × t = 0.5 C
0 .5
number of electron =
1. 6 10 –19
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In the given circuit R1 > R2 . Find which of the following statement is correct.
R1 > R2
V2 V2
P1 = and P2 = R1 > R2
R1 R2
P1 < P2
11. In the given circuit the power generated in 5 resistance will be maximum for ' x ' equal to:
(5 'x' )
(A) 1 (B) 7
(C) 2/3 (D*) 0
i=
7 x
Power generated in 5 (5
2 2
= ×5=5
7 x 7 x
Power will be max when 7 + x is minimum
7 + x
i.e., for x = 0
x = 0
12. ' n' identical light bulbs, each designed to draw power of P watts from a certain voltage supply are
joined in series and that combination is connected across that supply. The power consumed by one
bulb (in watts) will be
' n' P
(A) n P (B) P (C) P/n (D*) P/n2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Voltage across each bulb will be
V
Vi - iR = R (V/n)
nR
V V V2
so power developed by each bulb = iV1 = . = 2
nR n n R
P
so power consumed by one bulb =
n2
V
Vi - iR = . R (V/n)
nR
V V V2
= iV1 = . = 2
nR n n R
P
=
n2
13. Current through 5V battery is: (Battery is ideal)
4 : ()
()
5 5 2 10
(A) A (B) A (C) A (D*) A
3 6 3 3
6 2 3 5 2 10
Sol. Req = i A
8 2 3 3
10 9
14. A shell, made of material of electrical conductivity ( -m)–1, has thickness t = 2 mm and radius R =
10 cm. In an arrangement, its inside surface is kept at a lower potential than its outside surface. The
resistance offered by the shell is equal to -
10 9
( )–1 t = 2 mmR = 10
+
-
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. A wire is connected to a power supply (see figure) some cold water is poured on left half of the wire.
The rate of heat generated in right half :
Ans. 75
50 1
Sol. The minimum current that can be passed through any resistor is = = A.
200 2
50 1
= = A.
200 2
1 1
To keep all resistors safe < A and also < <1A
2 2 2
1 1
< A < < 1 A
2 2 2
1
This means < A.
2
1
(VA – VB)max = × 300 = 150 V Ans.
2
(150 ) 2
P= = 75 W Ans.
300
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A wire AB (of length 1m , area of cross section m2) is used in potentiometer experiment to calculate
emf and internal resistance (r) of battery.
The emf and internal resistance of driving battery are 15 V and 3 respectively. The resistivity of wire
AB varies as = 0x (where x is distance from A in meters and 0 = 24 )
AB ( 1m , m )
2
(r)
15 V 3 AB = 0x
(x, A 0 = 24 )
15V
A B
E G
r
S
2 1
The distance of null point from A is obtained at m when switch 'S' is open and at m when
3 2
switch is closed.
2 1
A m 'S' m
3 2
()
17. The resistance of whole wire AB is -
AB
(A) 6 (B*) 12 (C) 18 (D) 24
C (AC = x)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2
2 24
0xx 0x 3
RAC = = = =8
2 A 2A 2
EMF E = 1 × 8 = 8 V
when switch closed null point at D (AD = x)
, D (AD = x)
2
2 24
x x x 3 =6
RAD = 0 = 0 =
2 A 2A 2
V battery = 6 × 1
V = 6 × 1
8
8– r =6
r 3
r=1
NCERT Questions
3.9, 3.10, 3.12, 3.17 to 3.24
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. The work done by the external forces on a system equals the change in
(A*) total energy (B) kinetic energy (C) potential energy (D) none of these
-
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2. A satellite of mass 5M orbits the earth in a circular orbit. At one point in its orbit, the satellite explodes
into two pieces, one of mass M and the other of mass 4M. After the explosion the mass M moves in the
same circular orbit, but in opposite direction. After explosion the mass 4M is in
5M
M 4M M
4M
(A) bound orbit (bound)
(B*) unbound orbit (unbound)
(C) partially bound orbit (partially bound)
(D) data is insufficient to determine the nature of the orbit.
3. AB is a potentiometer wire of length L, which is connected to an accumulator. The potential gradient in
AB can be decreased by:
L AB AB
,r
B
(A*) increasing the radius of AB (B) decreasing the radius of AB
(C*) increasing a resistance in series with AB (D*) increasing the length of wire AB.
(A*) AB (B) AB
(C*) AB (D*) AB .
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
1
4. In the figure shown, coefficient of restitution between A and B is e = , then :
2
1
A B e = , :
2
v
(A) velocity of B after collision is
2
3
(B*) impulse on one of the balls during collision is mv
4
3
(C*) loss of kinetic energy in the collision is mv2
16
1
(D) loss of kinetic energy in the collision is mv2
4
V 3
(A) B (B*) mv
2 4
3 1
(C*) mv2 (D) mv2
16 4
Sol. after collision
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. Two potentiometer wires w1 and w2 of equal length connected to a battery of emf P and internal
resistance ' r ' as shown through two switches s1 and s2. A battery of emf is balanced on these
potentiometer wires. If potentiometer wire w1 is of resistance 2r and balancing length on w1 is /2 when
only s1 is closed and s2 is open. On closing s2 and opening s1 the balancing length on w2 is found to be,
2
then find the resistance of potentiometer wire w2.
3
w1 w2 ( ) P ' r '
s1 s2
w1 2r s1 s2 ) w1 /2 s2 s1
2
w2 , w2
3
Ans. [r]
Sol. When S1 is closed S1
2r
= . . =
r 2r 2 3
2rx 2 4 x
= . . = .
2rx 2r x 3 3 2r x 2x
r
2r x
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
GMm
6. Assuming that the law of gravitation is of the form F = and attractive. A body of mass m revolves
r3
2
in a circular path of radius r around a fixed body of mass M. If square of time period of revolution (T is
n
proportional to r ) then find the value of n
GMm
F = 3 m r
r
2 n
M T , r
n
Ans. 04
Sol. As gravitational force provides centripetal force
mv 2 GMm
3
r = r
GM
i.e., v2 =
r2
2 r r2
So that T= = 2 r
v GM
T2 r4
Ans. 4
COMPREHENSION
Two conducting spheres of radius R and 3R carry charges Q and –2Q. Between these spheres a
neutral conducting sphere of radius 2R is connected. The separation between the sphere is
considerably large. Charge flows through conducting wire due to potential difference.
R 3R Q –2Q 2R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.(7 to 9)
10. Match the Column if deviation in the Column–II is the magnitude of total deviation (between incident ray
and finally refracted or reflected ray) to lie between 0º and 180º. Here n represents refractive index of
medium.
–II
0º 180º n
Column–I Column–II
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
–I –II
-III
-I
.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A current passes through a resistor. Let K1 and K2 represent the average kinetic energy of the
conduction electrons and the metal ions respectively.
(A) K1 < K2 (B) K1 = K2 (C*) K1 > K2 (D) Any of these three may occur
K1
K2 -
(A) K1 < K2 (B) K1 = K2 (C*) K1 > K2
(D)
2. A cubical block of mass M and edge a slides down a rough inclined plane of inclination with a uniform
velocity. The torque of the normal force on the block about its centre has a magnitude -
M a
-
1
(A) zero (B) Mga (C) Mga sin (D*) Mga sin
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A uniform disc of mass m and radius R is free to rotate about its fixed horizontal axis without friction.
There is sufficient friction between the inextensible light string and disc to prevent slipping of string over
3mg
disc. At the shown instant extension in light spring is the block is released, where m is mass of
K
block, g is acceleration due to gravity and K is spring constant.
m R
3mg
m g K
K
m,R
m
K
4g
(A*) Acceleration of block just after it is released is
3
(B) Tension in the string continuously increases till extension in the spring reaches maximum value.
6m
(C) maximum speed of block is g
K
(D*) After some time string will slack
4g
(A*)
3
(B)
6m
(C) g
K
(D*)
Sol. For disc, from torque equation
mR 2
3 mg R – TR = .... (1)
2
By application of Newton's second law on block we get,
M,R
T – mg = ma .... (2) T
a
T
F=3mg mg
where () a = R ..... (3)
4g
solving () a =
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A plank of mass 4m is placed on a smooth horizontal surface and a spring of force constant k is
attached to the plank, whose other end is fixed on a block of mass m placed over the plank. All surfaces
are smooth. A bullet of mass m moving with horizontal velocity u strikes the block and gets embeded in
it. Choose the correct option for subsequent motion :
4m k
m u
m
u
(A*) velocity of plank when spring gets compressed to maximum is
6
m
(B*) the maximum compression in the spring is u
3k
(C) the bullet will have velocity relative to plank at the instant of maximum compression
mu 2
(D) the force exerted by spring on plank will reach a maximum of
6k
u
(A)
6
m
(B) u
3k
(C)
mu 2
(D)
6k
Sol. mu = 6mV
u
V= ,
6
1 1 1 m
2m(u/2)2 = (m + m + 4m)V2 + kx2 x= u.
2 2 2 3K
5. A 10 m long potentiometer wire has a resistance of 20 ohm. It is connected in series with a battery of
emf 3V and a resistance of 10 . The internal resistance of cell is negligible. If the length can be read
accurately up to 1 mm, the potentiometer can read voltage.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3
Sol. Current in wire = = 0.1 A
30
V= R=2V
maximum voltage can read = 2V
V 2
= = 0.2 mV/mm
10 10 3
least account of scale = 1 mm
accuracy = 0.2 mV.
6. Two steel ball of equal diameter are connected by a rigid bar of negligible weight as shown and are
dropped in the horizontal position from height h above the heavy steel and brass base plates. If the
coefficient of restitution between the ball and steel base is 0.6 and that between the other ball and the
brass base is 0.4. The angular velocity of the bar immediately after rebound is _______. Assume the
two impacts are simultaneous. (g = 10 m/s2)
h 0.6
0.4
Sol. If V is the velocity by which balls strike the bases then thier velocities after collision are .6 V & .4 V as
shown ‘u’ is velocity of COM just after collision & in angular velocity acquired by the rod.
V 6 V .4 V ‘u’
7. The resistance of a moving coil of the galvanometer G is the meter defect full scale with a current
of 10 mA. Find the magnitudes of the resistance R1, R2 and R3 required to convert the galvanometer to
a multi-range ammeter deflecting full scale with current of 10A, 1A and 0.1A
G 10 mA R1, R2
R3 10 A, 1A 0.1A
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A galvanometer measures current which passes through it. A galvanometer can measure typically
current of order of mA. To be able to measure currents of the order of amperes of main current, a shunt
resistance 'S' is connected in parallel with the galvanometer.
mA
'S'
8. The resistance of the shunt 'S' and resistance 'G' of the galvanometer should have the following
relation.
'S' 'G'
(A) S = G (B) S >> G (C*) S << G (D) S < G
1
Sol. The current through the galvanometer is ~ of total current, the S << G.
1000
1
~ S << G.
1000
9. If resistance of galvanometer is 10 and maximum current ig is 10mA then the shunt resistance
required so that the main current ' ' can be upto 1A is (in )
10 ig = 10mA 1A
( )
99 10 99
(A) (B*) (C) 990 (D)
10 99 1000
Sol. Potential difference across galvanometer = Potential difference across S.
= S
ig . G = ( – ig) . S
1
10 10
10 × 10–3 10 = (1 – 10 × 10–3) S RS = 2
=
1 10 99
10. A U shaped tube of mass 2m is placed on a horizontal surface. Two identical spheres each of diameter
d(just less then the inner diameter of tube) and mass m enter into the tube with velocity v as shown in
the figure taking all collisions to be elastic and all surfaces smooth.
U 2m d(
) m, v
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Column–I Column–II
(A) The speed of the tube. (p) V
when spheres are just about to collide inside the tube.
(B) The speed of spheres when spheres are just about to collide. (q) 0
3
(C) The speed of the spheres when they come out of the tube. (r) V
2
(D) The speed of the tube when spheres come out (s) v/2
–I –II
(A) (p) V
(B) (q) 0
3
(C) (r) V
2
(D) (s) v/2
Ans. (A) – s ; (B) – r ; (C) – q ; (D) – p
Sol. (A) Apply momentum conservation in the direction of initial velocity of balls.
mv + mv = mv + mv + 2mv
2v v
v =
4 2
(B ) For speed apply energy conservation
1 1 1 1
mv2 + mv2 = 2mv 2 + 2 mv b2
2 2 2 2
mv2 = mv 2 + mvb2
v2 3v 2 3
v2 – = vb2 = vb2 vb = V
4 4 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
2. An object of mass 5kg falls from rest through a vertical distance of 20 m and reaches a velocity of 10 m/s.
How much work is done by the push of the air on the object? (g = 10 m/s2) -
5kg 20 m 10 m/s
(g = 10 m/s2) -
(A) –350 J (B*) –750 J (C) –200 J (D) –300 J
Sol. Using work energy theorem
Wg + WF = KF – Kini
1000 + WF = 250
WF = – 750 J
3. The principle of conservation of energy implies that -
(A) the total mechanical energy is conserved (B) the total kinetic energy is conserved
(C) the total potential energy is conserved (D*) sum of all types of energies is conserved
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
Sol. sum of all types of energies is conserved
4. The centre of mass of a non uniform rod of length L whose mass per unit length varies as x2
where k is a constant & x is the distance of any point on rod from left end A is (from the same end)
L x2 k
xA
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3L
(A) at the centre of the rod (B*) is at x =
4
4L 5L
(C) is at x = (D) is at x =
5 6
3L
(A) (B*) x =
4
4L 5L
(C) x = (D) x =
5 6
Sol.
L L
K 2 x4
x dx.x
L 4 3
0 0
xcm = L
= L
= L
K 2 x3 4
x dx
L 3
0 0
5. A ball kept in a closed box moves in the box making collisions with the walls. The box is kept on a
smooth surface. The velocity of centre of mass :
(A) of the box remains constant (B*) of the box plus the ball system remains constant
(C) of the ball remains constant (D) of the ball relative to the box remains constant
(A) (B*)
(C) (D)
Sol. Net external force on box plus ball system is zero.
6. Two blocks A and B are connected by a massless string (shown in figure) A force of 50 N is applied on
block B and a force of 20N is applied on block A as shown. The distance travelled by centre of mass in
2s starting from rest is :
A B 50 N B 20N
A 2s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. P1 P2 0 P1 P2 P1 P2
8. A shell is fired from a cannon with a velocity v at an angle with the horizontal direction. At the highest
point in its path, it explodes into two equal pieces, one retraces its path to the cannon and the speed of
the other piece immediately after the explosion is :
v
3 3
(A*) 3 cos (B) 2 cos (C) cos (D) cos
2 2
Sol. P1 = Pf
m m
mV cos = (–V cos + V)
2 2
V = 3V cos
9. In the figure given the position-time graph of a particle of mass 0.1 kg is shown. The impulse at t = 2 s
is:
0.1 kg t = 2 s :
(A) 0.2 kg m s–1 (B*) – 0.2 kg m s–1 (C) 0.1 kg m s–1 (D) – 0.4 kg m s–1
Sol. impulse = change in momentum = 0.1 × 2 = 0.2 kg m s–1
= = 0.1 × 2 = 0.2 kg m s–1
10. A body of mass m moving with velocity V makes a head-on elastic collision with another body of mass
2m which is initially at rest. The ratio of kinetic energies of colliding body before and after collision will
be -
m v 2m
(A*) 9 : 1 (B) 1 : 1 (C) 4 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Using moment of conservation
mv + 2m(0) = mv1 + 2mv2
v1 + 2v2 = v ...(i)
v2 v1
and e = 1 =
v 0
v2 – v1 = v ...(ii)
from eq. (i) and (ii) (i) (ii)
1
mv 2
v K ini 2 9
v1 = = 2
3 K final 1 v 1
m
2 3
11. A particle of mass m moving with velocity u1 collides elastically with another particle of same mass
moving with velocity u2 in the same direction. After collision their velocities are v 1 and v2 respectively in
the same direction, then -
(i) u1 + v1 = v2 + u2 (ii) u1 – v1 = v2 + u2
m u1
u2 v 1 v2
(i) u1 + v1 = v2 + u2 (ii) u1 – v1 = v2 + u2
(A) Both the equations (i) and (ii) are correct
(i) (ii)
(B) Both the equations (i) and (ii) are incorrect
(i) (ii)
(C*) Equation (i) is correct but not (ii)
(i) (ii)
(D) Equation (ii) is correct but not (i)
(ii) (i)
Sol. Equation A is correct but not B A B
v2 v1
e= 1 (u2 – u1) = –(v2 – v1) u2 + v2 = u1 + v1
u2 u1
12. A body of mass 1kg strikes elastically with another body at rest and continues to move in the same
direction with one fourth the in initial velocity. The mass of the other body is -
1kg
(A*) 0.6 kg (B) 2.4 kg (C) 3 kg (D) 4 kg
Sol. before collision momentum Pinitial = 1 × v
v
just after collision momentum Pfinal = m × v’ + 1 ×
4
3v
From momentum conservation mv’ =
4
v
v'
Collision is elastic so e = 1 = 4
v
5v
v’ = So m = 0.6 kg
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. Two rods of same length and areas of cross section A1 and A2 have same temperature difference
across their ends. If K1 and K2 are their thermal conductivities, C1 and C2 their specific heats and 1 and
2
are their densities, then the condition that rate of flow of heat is same in both the rods is
A1 A2
K1 K2 C1 C2 1 2
(A) A1/A2 = K1/K2 (B) A1/A2 = K1C1 1/K2C2 2
(C) A1/A2 = K2C1 1/K1C2 2
(D*) A1/A2 = K2/K1
–6 2
14. A thin rod of negligible mass and area of cross-section 2 × 10 m , suspended vertically from one end,
has a length of 0.5 m at 200°C. The rod is cooled to 0°C, but prevented from contracting by attaching a
11 2
mass at the lower end. The value of this mass is : (Young's modulus = 10 N/m , Coefficient of linear
–5 –1
expansion 10 K and g = 10 m/s2) :
–6
2 × 10 m2,
200°C 0.5 0°
11
: ( =10
2 –5 –1 2
/ , 10 g = 10 / ) :
(A) 20 kg (B) 30 kg (C*) 40 kg (D) 50 kg
Sol. Strain ( ) = = T = (10–5) (200) = 2 × 10–3
Stress = Y (strain)
Stress = 1011 × 2 × 10–3 = 2 × 108 N/m2
Required force = stress × Area = (2 × 108) (2 × 10–6) = 4 × 102 = 400 N
400
Mass to be attached = = 40 kg Ans.
g
= Y ()
= 1011 × 2 × 10–3 = 2 × 108 N/m2
= × = (2 × 108) (2 × 10–6) = 4 × 102 = 400 N
400
= = 40 kg
g
15. A solid sphere of mass m is situated on a horizontal surface and a tangential force acts at the top of the
sphere. If the sphere rolls without slipping then the acceleration of the centre of the sphere would be
m F
5 F 3F 10F 10F
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
3m 5m 7m 7m
Sol. F – f = ma (i)
2
(F + f) × R = mR 2 (ii)
5
From eq. (i) and (ii)
(i) (ii)
10F
a=
7m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. A disc rolls on a table. The ratio of its K.E. of rotation to the total K.E. is
(A) 2/5 (B*) 1/3 (C) 5/6 . (D) 2/3
1 2
KE R 2
Sol. = 1/3
KE 1 2 1
mv 2
2 2
17. Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is sent from one city to another city through copper wires.
The fall of potential per km is 8 volt and the average resistance per km is 0.5 The power loss in the wire
is:
150 km
8 0.5
(A) 19.2 W (B*) 19.2 kW (C) 19.2 J (D) 12.2 kW
Ans. (B)
Sol. Total voltage drop = 150 × 8 = V
total resistance of wire R = 0.5 × 150
V 2 (150 8) 2
Power loss = = 19.2 KW
R 0 .5 150
= 150 × 8 = V
R = 0.5 × 150
V2 (150 8) 2
= = 19.2 KW
R 0 .5 150
18. The resistance in the two arms of the meter bridge are 5 and R , respectively. Null point is obtained
1 distance away from A. When the resistance R is shunted with an equal resistance, the new balance
A B
100 – 1
1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. A potentiometer circuit has been set up for finding the internal resistance of a given cell. The main
battery, used across the potentiometer wire, has an emf of 2.0 V and a negligible internal resistance.
The potentiometer wire itself is 4 m long. When the resistance, R, connected acrose the given cell, has
values of .
(i) infinity (ii) 9.5
The 'balancing lengths, on the potentiometer wire are found to be 3m and 2.85 m, respectively.
The value of internal resistance of the cell is :
4m
(EMF) 2.0 V
4 mR
(i) (ii) 9.5
3m 2.85 m
(A) 0.25 (B) 0.95 (C*) 0.5 (D) 0.75
Ans. (C)
Sol. Internal resistance of the unknown cell is
1 3
r –1 R – 1 (9.5 ) = 0.5
2 2 .85
1 3
r –1 R – 1 (9.5 ) = 0.5
2 2 .85
20. In an ammeter 0.2% of main current passes through the galvanometer. If resistance of galvanometer is
G, the resistance of ammeter will be :
1 499 1 500
(A) G (B) G (C*) G (D) G
499 500 500 499
0.2% G
:
1 499 1 500
(A) G (B) G (C*) G (D) G
499 500 500 499
Ans. (C)
Sol.
i 499
as (G) and the shunt are in parallel combination ig Rg = is Rs (G ) i (Si)
500 500
i 499
(G) ig Rg = is Rs (G ) i (Si)
500 500
G
S=
499
Equivalent resitance of the ammeter
1 1 1 G
Req =
R eq G G 500
499
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Circuit for the measurement of resistance by potentiometer is shown. The galvanometer is first
connected at point A and zero deflection is observed at length PJ = 10 cm. In second case it is
connected at point C and zero deflection is observed at a length 30 cm from P. Then the unknown
resistance X is
A
PJ = 10 cm C
P 30 cm x
P J Q
G
A C
R X
R R
(A*) 2R (B) (C) (D) 3R
2 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. In potentiometer wire potential difference is directly proportional to length
2. All the rods have same conductance ‘K’ and same area of cross section ‘A’. If ends A and C are
maintained at temperature 2T0 and T0 respectively then which of the following is/are correct:
(A) Rate of heat flow through ABC, AOC and ADC is same
(B) Rate of heat flow through BO and OD is not same
3 K A T0
(C) Total Rate of heat flow from A to C is
2a
(D*) Temperature at junctions B, O and D are same
‘K’ ‘A’ A C 2T0
T0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The upper end of the string of a simple pendulum is fixed to a vertical z - axis and set in motion such
that the bob moves along a horizontal circular path of radius 2 m, parallel to the x y plane, 5 m above the
origin. The bob has a speed of 3 m/s. The string breaks when the bob is vertically above the x - axis,
and it lands on the xy plane at a point (x, y)
( z - 5 m
x y 2 m 3 m/s
x - xy (x, y)
4. A heated body emits radiation which has maximum intensity near the frequency 0
. The emissivity of
the material is 0.5. If the absolute temperature of the body is doubled
(A*) the maximum intensity of radition will be near the frequency 2 0
(B) the maximum intensity of radiation will be near the frequency 0/2
(C*) the total energy emitted will increase by a factor of 16
(D) the total energy emitted will increase by a factor of 8
0
0.5 -
(A*) 2 0
(B) 0/ 2
(C*) 16
(D) 8
5. An uncharged conducting sphere of radius R is placed near a uniformly charge ring of radius R. Total
charge on ring is Q. The centre of sphere lies on axis of ring and distance of centre of sphere form
centre of ring is R.
R R
Q R
R
KQ
(A) Potential at centre of ring is
R
KQ
(B*) Potential at centre of ring is
2R
(C) Potential at centre of ring due to conducting sphere is zero
KQ
(D*) Potential at centre of conducting sphere is
2R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
KQ
(A)
R
KQ
(B*)
2R
(C)
KQ
(D*)
2R
Comprehension
A thin uniform rod of length and mass m is freely pivoted about its end. The rod is initially held
horizontally and released from rest. When the rod is vertical, an impulse J is applied to bring it to rest
(this is in addition to any impulse provided by the pivot)
m
J
6. What is the angular velocity of the rod at the moment it reaches the vertical position?
6g 3g 3g
(A) (B) 2 (C*) (D) None of these
9. The distance from the pivot at which impulse, must be applied, if there is to be no horizontal force at the
pivot
2
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A) By applying COME
1
mg I 2=
22
1 m 2 2
mg =
2 2 3
=
3g J
+ –
Z
Column–I Column–II
(A) If X is a resistance (p) current will flow clockwise
(B) If X is a battery (q) current will flow anticlockwise
(C) If Y is a resistance (r) Z will act like a load
(D) If Y is a battery (s) It is not possible to decide
whether Z is a battery or resistor
–I –II
(A) X (p)
(B) X (q)
(C) Y (r) Z
(D) Y (s) Z
Ans. (A) – (p) ; (B) – (s) ; (C) – (q, r,s) ; (D) – (s)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
3R 3R 4R 5R
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
4 2 3 3
Sol. Apply = about bottom most point
=
3
F×h= = mR2
2
2 Fh
R=
3 mR
For translatory motion
F 3R
a= R= h=
m 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Circuit shown in figure is a simple ohm meter, in which G is galvanometer, R0 is known resistance and
R is the resistance which is to be measured
If A and B is short circuited by a resistance less wire, Galvanometer gives full scale deflection, then to
read the resistance R directely from galvanometer,its scale would look like (Resistance of galvanometer
is negligible):
G R0 R
A B
R
:
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
E
Sol. For full deflection I0 =
R0
0
R = R0 = Half deflection
2
0
R = 3R0 = One fourth deflection
4
3. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of the same material and of equal radii are heated to the same
temperature.
(A*) Both will emit equal amount of radiation per unit time in the beginning
(B*) Both will absorb equal amount of radiation from the surrounding in the beginning
(C) The initial rate of cooling will be the same for the two spheres
(D) The two spheres will have equal temperatures at any instant.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
dQ
Sol. Since for emitting = eAT 4
dt e
dQ
And for absorption ; = eATs4
dt
Therefore, Both with emit & absorb equal amount of radiation in the beginning.
dT eA 4
For cooling = T
dt ms
All the terms on RHS are same for both spheres except mass "m". ( Solid and hollow)
RHS "m" . ()
dT
Hence is different for both.
dt
Hence (C) and (D) are wrong .
4. If you fail to find any balanced point, as we slide the jocky along A B in given figure. What may be the
reason.
A B A B
5. In the previous question, if VAB is less than Vxy then null point can be obtained if we
VAB Vxy
(A*) Increase E (B*) Reduce Rh (C) Decrease E (D) Increase Rh
(A*) E (B*) Rh (C) E (D) Rh
Sol. Any change can be done which assures p.d. across R or X less then or equal to V
R X V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. In the circuit shown, the reading of the ammeter (ideal) is the same with both switches open as with
both closed. Find the value of resistance R in ohm.
()
R
100
A
R
50
E
+ –
300 1.5V
Ans. 600
R1
A
Sol.
R
R3
R2 E
E
=
R R1
R2
R R1
Current through the ammeter
R RE E
A = = =
R R1 (R R1 ) R 2 R R1 R 2R 1
R1 R 2
R
As A = A
R1 R 2 100 300
R= = = 600
R3 50
7. A brick is projected from ground with speed v at angle from horizontal. The longer face of brick is
parallel to ground. The brick slides along ground through some distance after hitting ground and then
stops. The collision is perfectly inelastic. The coefficient of friction is ( cot The angle is chosen
such that brick travels the maximum horizontal distance before coming to rest. Find this distance in
meters :
v
( cot
:
2
v 2 (1 )
Ans.
2 g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
v 2 sin 2
Sol. Range =
g
Impulse along vertical after collision x = mv sin
Horizontal impulse y = – mv sin
So horizontal velocity after impact = v cos – v sin
So total distance along horizontal
v 2 2 sincos v2
D= + (sin – cos )2
g 2 g
v 2 (4 sin cos (sin cos )2 v 2 (sin cos )2
= =
2 g 2 g
2
v 2 (1 )
Dmax =
2 g
Comprehension :
A strange cat with a mass mc is sitting at rest on the left sled of a pair of identical sleds. The sleds have
mass ms and sit on frictionless ice. Suddenly, the cat leaps to the right sled, traveling with a horizontal
speed vcg measured with respect to the ground. The instant the cat reaches the right sled, it turns
around and leaps back to the left sled. The horizontal component of the cat’s speed is again v cg
measured with respect to the ground.
mc sledge)
ms vcg
vcg
Vcg
8. What is the final speed of Left sled in terms of the masses of the cat and sleds and the cat’s leaping
speed? (The cat remains on the left sled after its return).
(
).
2m c v cg 2m s v cg 2m c v cg m c v cg
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
ms mc m s mc ms ms
2mc v cg 2mc v cg
Answer, v left cled and v right cled
ms mc ms
Solution: Let mc be the mass of the cat, and ms be the mass of the sled. Since the ice is assumed to be
frictionless, there is no external force acting on the cat-sled system, and so momentum is conserved at each
“jump”.
mc ms
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Four identical rods, each of mass m and length are joined to form a rigid square frame. The frame lies
in the X-Y plane, with its centre at the origin and the sides parallel to the x and y axis. it’s moment of
inertia about :-
m
X-Y x y
y
Column I Column II
(A) An axis parallel to z-axis (p) 5/3 m 2
and passing through a corner
(B) One side (q) 2/3 m 2
I II
(A) z- (p) 5/3 m 2
(B) (q) 2/3 m 2
Ans. A – s , B – p, C – q , D – r
Sol. (A) (Sol. made by AJ Sir)
Axes passing through O and perpendicular to plane
O
2
2
2m m 2 5
= 2 m
3 12 2
10 2
= m
3
(B)
2
2m 2 5 2
= m = m
3 3
2
2m 2
(C) = 2m
12 2
2 2
= m
3
2
m 2 4 2
(D) = 4 m = m
12 2 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Moment of inertia of an ellipse shaped wire of mass ‘m’, semimajor axis ‘a’ about an axis passing
through the centre and perpendicular to the plane of wire can be:
‘m’ 'a'
(A) ma2 (B) 1.2 ma2 (C) 1.4 ma2 (D*) 0.6 ma2
Ans.
Moment of inertia of the ellipse should be less than that of a circular ring of radius ‘a’.
a
Hence : (D) is the suitable option.
2. A rod of mass m is supported by string AB and friction due to wall. Then friction force on rod due to wall
is : (g = acceleration due to gravity).
m AB
(g = )
mg
(A) mg upward (B) mg downward (C*) upward (D) Data insufficient
2
mg
(A) mg (B) mg (C*) (D)
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
mg –f =0
2
mg
F= .
2
3. A rod of length 1m is sliding in a corner as shown. At an instant when the rod makes an angle of 60º
with the horizontal plane, the velocity of point A on the rod is 1m/s. The angular velocity of the rod at
this instant is :
1m 60º
A 1m/s
(A*) 2 rad/s (B) 1.5 rad/s (C) 0.5 rad/s (D) 0.75 rad/s
Sol.
1 = (1 cos60º)
= 2 rad/s
4. A light rod of length 2m is suspended from the ceiling horizontally by means of two vertical wires of
equal length tied to its end. One of the wires is made of steel and is of cross-section 0.1 cm2. The other
wire is of brass of cross-section 0.2 cm2. A weight is suspended from a certain point of the rod such that
equal stresses are produced in both the wires. The rod remains horizontal in this case also. Find out the
position of the load from the steel wire.
2
0.1 2
0.2 2
(A*) 4/3 m (B) 2/3 m (C) 1 m (D) 3/2 m
Sol.
T T1 T2 T1 1
Stress = = =
A A1 A2 T2 2
& for equilibrium ,
3T2
mg = T1 + T2 = (After balance)
2
3T2 4
& mgx – T2.(2) = 0 (Target balance) x – 2T2 = 0 x= m
2 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. An open tank 10m long and 2m deep is filled up to 1.5 m height of oil of specific gravity 0.82. The tank
is uniformly accelerated along its length from rest to a speed of 20 m/sec horizontally. The shortest time
in which the speed may be attained without spilling any oil is : [g = 10 m/sec2]
10m 2m 1.5 m 0.82
20 m/sec
() : [g = 10 m/sec2]
(A*) 20 sec. (B) 18 sec. (C) 10 sec. (D) 5 sec.
Sol.
v
v = u + axt , ax =
t
ax v 0 .5
tan = = = (in triangle ABC) (ABC )
g tg 5
10 20
t= = 20 sec.
10
6. An ideal fluid is flowing through the given tubes which is placed on a horizontal surface. If the liquid has
velocities VA and VB, and pressures PA and PB at points A and B respectively, then the correct relation is
(A and B are at same height from ground level, the figure shown is as if the system is seen from the
top) :
A B VA
VB PA PB A B
(A) VA > VB, PA < PB (B) VA < VB, PA > PB (C*) VA = VB, PA = PB (D) VA > VB, PA = PB
Sol. Applying continuity equation :
V1A1 = V2A2
A1 = A2 so V1 = V2
Applying bernaulli’s equation : P 1 + gh1 + 1/2 v 12 = P 2 + gh2 + 1/2 v22
Since v1 = v2 ; and h1= h2 P1 = P2 .
7. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density moves with a horizontal acceleration a, as shown in the
figure. The difference in pressure between the points A and B is:
a A B
:
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. A container filled with viscous liquid is moving vertically downwards with constant speed 3v 0. At the
instant shown, a sphere of radius r is moving vertically downwards (in liquid) has speed v0. The
coefficient of viscosity is . There is no relative motion between the liquid and the container. Then at the
shown instant, the magnitude of viscous force acting on sphere is
3v0 r
() v 0
q2 3q2 q2 q2
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
8 0 a 8 0 a 4 0 a 8 0 a
kq2 1
Sol. Ui = 1 ( 1)
a 2
kq2 1 kq2
Uf = 1 1 , Uf – Ui =
a 2 a
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. Figure above shows a closed Gaussian surface in the shape of a cube of edge length 3.0 m. There
exists an electric field given by E = [(2.0x + 4.0)i + 8.0 j + 3.0 k] N/C, where x is in metres, in the region
in which it lies. The net charge in coulombs enclosed by the cube is equal to
3.0
E = [(2.0x + 4.0)i + 8.0 j + 3.0 k] N/C x
(A) – 54 0
(B) 6 0
(C) –6 0
(D*) 54 0
2
z 3(3)
2 (2(-3)+4)(3)
2
Sol. 8(3)
2 2
8(3) 2(0)+4(3)
y
2
3(3)
x
= E . ds
Direction of field at x = – 3m is along negative x axis. Area vector is also along same direction.
x = – 3 x
Q
=6×9=
Q = 54 0
Components of electric field which are constant,
do not contribute in net flux in or out.
qin
= 54 qin = 54 0
0
12. Maximum height reached by a rocket fired with a speed equal to 50% of the escape velocity from
earth's surface is :
50% fire
(A) R/2 (B) 16R/9 (C*) R/3 (D) R/8
50 1 2GM
Sol. v= V =
100 e 2 R
Applying energy conservation,
GMm 1 GMm
m v2 =
R 2 (R h)
2GM 2GM 1 2GM 1 1 1 h
v2 = . = 2GM
R R h 4 R R R h 4R R(R h)
R + h = 4h h = R/3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. Potential difference between points A and B (i.e. VA - VB) is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .
A B (VA - VB) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
14. In the shown wire frame, each side of a square (the smallest square) has a resistance R. The
equivalent resistance of the circuit between the points A and B is :
R A B
A B
15. A constant force is applied on a block as shown in the figure initially spring is relaxed and block is at
rest, maximum speed of the block in consequent motion is V. If spring is replaced by another spring of
spring constant 4k then maximum speed a block will be :
V 4k
:
x1
F = kx1 = (4k)x2 x2 =
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Substituting in (2) :
2
Fx 1 1 x1
– (4k)
4 2 4
1 1 1
[Fx1 – kx12] = mv'2 (3)
4 2 2
Dividing (3)/(1) ; we get :
1 v' 2 v
= 2 v'= .
4 v 2
Hence (C).
16. The amount of heat supplied to decrease the volume of an ice water mixture by 1 cm3 without any
change in temperature, is equal to : ( ice = 0.9, water = 80 cal/gm)
1 cm3
: ( ice = 0.9, water = 80 cal/gm)
(A) 360 cal (B) 500 cal (C*) 720 cal (D) None
Sol. x gm ice convert into x gm water
x gm x gm
x 0.9
–x=1 x= =9
0.9 0.1
Q = 9 × 80 = 720 cal
17. An ideal monoatomic gas is initially in state 1 with pressure p1 = 20 atm and volume v1 = 1500 cm3. It is
then taken to state 2 with pressure p2 = 1.5 p1 and volume v2 = 2v1. The change in internal energy from
state 1 to state 2 is equal to
p1 = 20 atm v1 = 1500 cm3 .
p2 = 1.5 p1 v2 = 2v1 .
-
(A) 2000 J (B) 3000 J (C) 6000 J (D*) 9000 J
Ans. (D)
Sol. p1 = 20 × 105 N/m2 ; v1 = 1500 × 10–6 m3
p2 = 30 × 105 N/m2 ; v2 = 300 × 10–6 m3
pv p v
T1 = 1 1 and T2 = 2 2
nR nR
3
dU = nCvdT = n . R . (T2 – T1)
2
3 (p 2 v 2 – p1v 1)
=n. R.
2 nR
3
= (p 2 v 2 – p1v1 ) = 9000 J
2
18. Two identical long, solid cylinders are used to conduct heat from temp T1 to temp T2. Originally the
cylinder are connected in series and the rate of heat transfer is H. If the cylinders are connected in
parallel then the rate of heat transfer would be :
T1 T2
H
(A) H /4 (B) 2H (C*) 4H (D) 8H
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
R
Sol. (B) Initially effective resistance = 2R. In parallel effective resistance = . It has reduced by a factor of
2
1/4 so rate of heat transfer would be increased by a factor of 4, keeping other parameters same.
R
= 2R. = . 1/4
2
4
19. Force F is given in terms of time t and distance x by
F = A sin (C t) + B cos (D x)
A C
Then the dimensions of and are given respectively by
B D
F t x
F = A sin (C t) + B cos (D x)
A C
B D
(A) MLT–2, M0L0T–1 (B) MLT–2, M0L–1T0 (C*) M0L0T0, M0L1T–1 (D) M0L1T–1, M0L0T0
Sol. All the terms in the equation must have the dimension of force
[A sin (C t)] MLT–2 and [B cos Dx] MLT–2
Since sin Ct and cos Dx are dimensionless
[A] = MLT–2
[B] = MLT–2
A
= Mº Lº Tº
B
Since Ct and Dx are dimensionless
So,
[C] = M0 L0 T–1
[D] = M0 L–1 T0
C
= M0 LT–1
D
Sol.
[A sin (C t)] MLT–2 [B cos Dx] MLT–2
sin Ct cos Dx
[A] = MLT–2
[B] = MLT–2
A
= Mº Lº Tº
B
Ct Dx
[C] = M0 L0 T–1
[D] = M0 L–1 T0
C
= M0 LT–1
D
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
20. An isolated and charged spherical soap bubble has a radius ‘ r ‘ and the pressure inside is atmospheric.
If ‘ T ‘ is the surface tension of soap solution, then charge on drop is:
‘ r ‘
‘ T ‘
2r T 2r T
(A) 2 (B*) 8 r 2r T 0 (C) 8 r rT 0 (D) 8 r
0 0
4T
Sol. (B) Inside pressure must be greater than outside pressure in bubble. This excess pressure is
r
provided by charge on bubble.
4T
r
2
4T
=
r 2 0
4T Q2 Q
= 2 4
.......
r 16 r 2 0 4 r2
Q = 8 r 2rT 0
NCERT Questions
2.5 to 2.11, 2.23 to 2.27
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A rod of length and cross section area A has a variable thermal conductivity given by k = T, where
is a positive constant and T is temperature in kelvin. Two ends of the rod are maintained at
temperatures T1 and T2 (T1 > T2). Heat current flowing through the rod will be
A k = T,
T T1 T2 (T1 > T2)
A ( T12 T22 ) A ( T12 T22 ) A ( T12 T22 ) A ( T12 T22 )
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
3 2
dT
Sol. Heat current : i = – k A
dx
idx = – kA dT
T2
i dx = – A T dT
0 T1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A bomb of mass 3m is kept inside a smooth closed box of mass 3m and length 4L at it's centre. It
explodes in two parts of mass m & 2m. The two parts move in opposite direction and stick to the
opposite side of the walls of box.
3m 3m 4L
m 2m
4L
What is the distance moved by the box during this time interval.
L L L
(A) 0 (B) (C) (D*)
6 12 3
Sol. Say displacement of box is x
x
m1d1 + m2d2 + m3d3 = 0
d1 = – (2L – x), d2 = (2L + x) & d3 = x
– 2m (2L – x) + m (2L + x) + 3mx = 0
– 4 mL + 2mx + 2mL + mx + 3mx = 0
6mx = 2mL Þ x = L/3
3. The wires A and B shown in the figure are made of the same material and have radii rA and rB
respectively. The block between them has a mass m. When the force F is mg/3, one of the wires
breaks.
A B rA rB
m F mg/3 ,
(A*) A breaks if rA = rB
(B*) A breaks if rA < 2rB
(C*) Either A or B may break if rA = 2rB
(D) The lengths of A and B must be known to predict which wire will break
(A*) A rA = rB (B*) A rA < 2rB
(C*) A B rA = 2rB
(D) A B
mg
mg
3 4mg
Sol. Stress in wire A = 2
=
rA 3 rA2
mg
3 mg
Stress in wire B = =
rB2 3 rB2
Wire A will break if stress in A is more than B
A A B
4mg mg
2
> 2rB > rA
3 rA 3 rB2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A light ray is incident on lower medium boundary at an angle 30° with the normal. Which of following
statement is/are true?
30°
3 =2
B
2
A
1 =4 30°
(A*) If 2 > 2 then total deviation is 60° (B) If 2 < 2 then total deviation is 60°
(C) If 2 > 2 then total deviation is 120° (D*) If 2 < 2 then total deviation is 120°
(A*) 2 > 2 60° (B) 2 < 2 60°
(C) 2 > 2 120° (D*) 2 < 2 120°
Sol. For refraction 1sin 30° = 2 sin = 3 sin e
1 sin 30° = 2 sin = 3 sin e
2 = 2 sin = 2 sin e
For emergence through B
sin < 1
2 < 2, e = 90°
D = 90° – 30° = 60°
If 2 < 2 ray will suffer TIR on A
2 < 2 A
D = 180° – 2 × 30° = 120°
COMPREHENSION
A high tension wire is at a high potential with respect to a wire which is well grounded called ‘Earth
wire’. You must have seen such wires stretched parallel to roads. There is a high tension wire between
two points A and B, 1 km apart. The distance between HT wire and earth wire is 1 m. The resistance of
the HT (and also the earth wire) is 1 / m. This wire is at a potential of 11 KV at point A w.r. to earth
wire., and its is carrying 1A current which returns back to the generator by through the earth wire. This
wire is quite a thick wire. There is a sign board at a pole over which this wire is stretched reading
‘DANGER, 11 KV’. You might think what would happen if one touched this wire. Will one feel a shock or
not. Well ! it depends on whether the current through our body exceeds a particular value, which we
may call CRITICAL CURRENT.
1km A B,
HT 1 km HT () 1
/ m A 11 KV 1A
‘DANGER, 11 KV’
5. Why is H.T. wire thick wire. Select the most appropriate option
H.T.
(A) so that more current may flow
(B*) so that resistance may be less thereby reducing power loss in the transmission line.
(C) so that it may bear high tension & therefore sag less.
(D) so that when in future population increases, the existing wire may serve the purpose.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. Consider a bird having effective resistance 10 between its feet sitting on this high tension wire. The
distance between its feet is 10 cm. Find the potential difference between the feet of the bird is
approximately.
10 HT
10 cm
(A*) 0.1 V (B) 1 V (C) 10 V (D) 0.05 V
8. If the potential difference between H.T. and earth wire is 11 kV at point A, find p.d. between these wires
at point B.
(H.T.) (Earth wire) A 11 kV
B
(A) 1 KV (B) 2 KV (C*) 9 KV (D) 10 KV
9. If the ‘Critical Current’ for the bird is 0.1 A, find the maximum power at 11 KV can be transmitted at
point A so that the bird may not get shock. Assume that the distance between the feet is 10 cm.
0.1 A, 11 KV A
( 10 cm
(shock)
AB
(A*) 111 KW (B) 11 KW (C) 101 KW (D) 110011 KW
10. Consider incompressible and non–viscous liquid in a container. Density of liquid is and acceleration
due to gravity is g and h represents the vertical separation between two points. All points considered in
column I are inside the liquid. Match the statements given in column-I with corresponding all possible
conditions given in column-II.
g h
-I -I
II
Column–I Column–II
(A) Pressure difference between two distinct (p) container is stationary.
points is gh where two points are at same
vertical line at a separation h.
(B) Pressure difference between any pair of (q) container is accelerating is horizontal direction
two distinct points on same horizontal level
is zero.
(C) Pressure difference between any pair (r) container is falling freely.
of two distinct points on same horizontal level
is non–zero.
(D) Pressure difference between any two (s) container is accelerating up in vertical direction
distinct with points on same vertical line an acceleration < g.
is zero.
(t) container is rotating about a vertical axis passing
through its symemtry.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
–I –II
(A) gh (p)
h
(B) (q)
(C) (r)
(D) (s) < g
(t)
Ans. (A) – p,q,t ; (B) – p,r,s ; (C) – q,t ; (D) r
Sol. (p) (i) two points in same horizontal level will have same pressure.
(ii) p = gh
(q) (i) p = a 0 along vertical
(ii) p = gh 0 along vertical.
(r) pressure at every point is zero
(s) (i) p = gh + ah gh along vertical
(ii) p = 0 along horizontal
(t) (i) p = gh along vertical
1 22
(ii) p = r along horizontal.
2
Sol. (p) (i)
(ii) p = gh
(q) (i) p = a 0
(ii) p = gh 0
(r)
(s) (i) p = gh + ah gh
(ii) p = 0
(t) (i) p = gh
1 22
(ii) p = r
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Two identical plates with thermal conductivities K and 3K are joined together to form a single plate of
double thickness. The equivalent thermal conductivity of one composite plate so formed for the flow of
heat through its thickness is:
K 3K
(A) K (B*) 1.5 K (C) 2.5K (D) 3K
2. Two like parallel forces P and 3 P are 40 cm apart. If the direction of P is reversed, then the point of
application of their resultant shifts through a distance of :
P 3P, 40 P
(A*) 30 cm (B) 40 cm (C) 50 cm (D) 60 cm
3. A solid sphere moves at a terminal velocity of 20 m/s in air at a place where g = 9.8 m/s2. The sphere is
taken in a gravity free hall having air at the same pressure and pushed down at a speed of 20 m/s.
(A) its initial acceleration will be 9.8 m/s2 downward
(B*) its initial acceleration will 9.8 m/s2 upward
(C*) the magnitude of acceleration will decrease as the time passes
(D*) it will eventually stop
g = 9.8 m/s2 20 m/s
20 m/s
(A) 9.8 m/s2
2
(B*) 9.8 m/s
(C*)
(D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. The fundamental frequency of a vibrating organ pipe is 200 Hz.
(A) The first overtone is 400 Hz. (B*) The first overtone may be 400 Hz.
(C*) The first overtone may be 600 Hz (D*) 600 Hz is an overtone
200
(A) 400 (B*) 400
(C*) 600 (D*) 600
6. ln a balanced wheat stone bridge, current in the galvanometer is zero. It remains zero when:
(A*) battery emf is increased
(B) all resistances are increased by 10 ohms
(C*) all resistances are made five times
(D*) the battery and the galvanometer are interchanged
:
(A*)
(B) 10
(C*)
(D*)
7. With two fingers, you hold a cone motionless upside down, as shown in figure. The mass of the cone is
(m = 2kg), and the coefficient of static friction between you fingers and the cone is ( = 1). What is the
minimum normal force (in Newton) you must apply with each finger in order to hold up the cone ?
(m = 2kg) ( = 1)
() ?
Finger Finger
4cm
6cm
Ans. 50N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
f f
37°
53°
Sol. N N
mg
mg + 2N cos53° =2 N cos37°
3 4
mg + 2N = 2 N
5 5
8 6
mg = N
5 5
N = 50 newton
COMPREHENSION
A uniform bar of length 6 a & mass 8 m lies on a smooth horizontal table. Two point masses m & 2 m
moving in the same horizontal plane with speeds 2 v and v respectively strike the bar as shown & stick
to the bar after collision.
6 a 8 mm 2m
2v v
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A uniform cubical block of mass M is attached to a pulley. One end of a string, passing over the pulley
is fixed to a light pole which is fixed on the bigger block and its another end is attached to a block of
mass m as shown in figure. The maximum value of the mass m so that the block does not topple is :
(string and pulley are ideal)
M
m m
()
M 1 2M 1 M 1 M 1 2
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
When the block is about to topple, contact force will pass through A and net torque about A will be zero.
mg( 2 – 1)=Mg 1/2
A A
mg( 2 – 1)=Mg 1/2
M 1
or m=
2 2 1
27
2. A cone made of a material of relative density d and height 4 m floats with its apex downward in
64
a big container having water. Calculate the submerged height (in meter) of cone in water.
27
d 4 m
64
A
d = Relative
d density
dw h H
1/ 3
27
h = H (d)1/3 = 4 h=3m
64
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A U-tube of uniform cross-section as shown in figure is partially filled with a liquid . Another liquid
which does not mix with liquid is poured into one side. It is found that the liquid levels of the two sides
of the tube are the same, while the level of liquid has risen by 2 cm. If the specific gravity of liquid is
1.1, the specific gravity of liquid must be
U-
2 cm I 1.1 ,
Sol.
4. A wedge (inclination = 30° from horizotnal) is moving with an acceleration a = 4m/s2 vertically up as
shown in figure. What is acceleration of block of mass 1 kg w.r.t. wedge & normal reaction by wedge on
block respectively. All surfaces are smooth. Choose correct pair : (g = 10 m/s2)
a = 4m/s2
1 kg
(g = 10 m/s2)
= 30°
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. A flexible chain of weight W hangs between two fixed points A and B at the same level. The inclination
of the chain with the horizontal at the two points of support is = 60° . What is the tension of the chain
at the point P where inclination of chain with horizontal is = 30°.
W A B
60° P = 30º
:
2W W W
(A) (B) (C) W (D*)
3 2 3
Sol.
2T sin = W
W
T= cosec
2
6. The coefficient of friction between the block A of mass m and block B of mass 2m is . There is no
friction between block B and the inclined plane. If the system of blocks A and B are released from rest
and there is no slipping between A and B, then
m A 2m B B
A B A B
A
B
(A) 2 cos (2 )
–1
(B) 2 sin (2 )
–1
(C*) tan ( )
–1
(D) 2 tan–1 ( /2)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. For no relative motion between A and B, both move down the incline with acceleration g sin .
A B , g sin
From free body diagram of A
A
60°
L
9. A uniform electric field exists in space parallel to xy-plane. z-compoent of electric field is zero.The
potential of points A (2,2), B(–2, 2) and C(2, 4) are 4V, 16V, 12V, respectively. The electric field is
xy z- A (2,2), B(–2, 2) C(2, 4)
4V, 16V 12V
(A) (4 î 5ˆj)V / m (B) (3 î 4ˆj)V / m (C) – (3 î 4 ĵ )V / m (D*) (3 î – 4 ĵ )V / m
Sol. E E x î E y ĵ , V = –Ex x – Ey y
for A and B (A B )
16 – 4 = – Ex (– 2 – 2) – Ey (2 – 2)
Ex = 3 V/m
for B and C (B C )
12 – 16 = –Ex {2– (– 2)} – Ey (4 – 2)
Ey = –4 V/m.
E (3 î – 4 ĵ )V / m
10. AB and CD are two large non parallel metallic plates connected to a battery as shown. If A and B be
charge densities at points A and B respectively then :
AB CD A B
A B
11. A thin uniform wire AB of length 1 m, an unknown resistance X and a resistance of 12 are connected
by thick conducting strips, as shown in the figure. A battery and a galvanometer (with a sliding jockey
connected to it) are also available. To obtain the value of X appropriate connections are made. Which
one represents the correct combination if no deflection takes place in galvanometer.
AB, X 12
X
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A) (B)
(C) (D*)
12. If the radius of the earth be increased by a factor of 5, by what factor its density be changed to keep the
value of g the same?
5, g
(A) 1/25 (B*) 1/5 (C) 1/ 5 (D) 5
13. An artificial satellite moving in a circular orbit around the earth has a total (kinetic + potential) energy E0.
Its potential energy is (for infinite seperation potential energy is taken to be zero.)
( + ) E0
()
(A) E0 (B) 1.5E0 (C*) 2E0 (D) E0
14. Two light strings, each of length , are fixed at points A and B on a fixed horizontal rod xy. A small bob
is tied by both strings and in equilibrium, the strings are making angle 45° with the rod. If the bob is
slightly displaced normal to the plane of the strings and released then period of the resulting small
oscillation will be :
xy A B
45°
x A B y
45° 45°
2 2 2
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D*) 2
g g g 2g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Resulting torque on the bob = mg sin
2
m 2
MI of bob about axis xy =
2
For small angle
= mg sin
2
m 2
xy =
2
2g
= . `
I
mg
2g
T . 2
2g
15. Consider a collection of a large number of particles each with speed v. The direction of velocity is
randomly distributed in the collection. Find the magnitude of the relative velocity between a pair of
particles averaged over all the pairs in the collection.
v
4v 2v v
(A*) (B) (C) zero (D)
2
Sol. Let us take 2 particles
The magnitude of their relative velocity is
2
sin d
2 4v
0
vrel = 2vsin ; <vrel> = 2
2
d
2
16. In a quasistatic process the pressure of a gas is inversely proportional to the square of the volume. If
temperature of the gas increases, then work done by the gas:
(A) is positive (B*) is negative (C) is zero (D) may be positive
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
1 k
Sol. P 2
P= PV2 = k
V V2
PV. V = k nRTV = k TV = k1
Since temperature increases therefore volume decrease.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. The dimensional formula of capacitance is: (where Q is charge)
: ( Q )
(A) M 1 L 1 T Q (B) M1 L1 T 2 Q2 (C*) M 1 L 2 T2 Q2 (D) M 1 L 3 T2 Q2
(ch arg e) 2
Sol. Energy =
2 capaci tan ce
(ch arg e) 2
Capacitance =
( 2) Energy
Q2
Dimensional formula = 1 2 2
= m–1 L–2 T2 Q2
m L T
18. A circuit has a section AB shown in the figure. The emf of the source equals = 10V, the capacitance
as of the capacitors are equal to C1 = 1.0 F and C2 = 2.0 F, the potential difference A B
= 5.0V.
The voltage across capacitor C1 & C2 is respectively :
AB = 10V, C1 = 1.0 F C2 =
2.0 F, A B
= 5.0V C1 C2 :
(A*) 10/3 V, 5/3 V (B) 10/3 V, 10/3 V (C) 5/3 V, 5/3 V (D) 0 V,0 V
19. Find charge on capacitors C, if a battery of e.m.f. E is connected across face diagonal of a cube as
shown in figure. Resistance of each branch (except the branch which contains capacitor) of cube = R.
E
C R
CE
(A) CE (B) 2CE (C) (D*) zero
2
Sol. Due to symmetry of circuit, no current will flow in branches having capacitors. So charges on capacitors
zero.
20. An ideal ammeter is connected in a circuit as shown in circuit diagram. What will be the reading of
ammeter (in S.I. units).
(S.I. )
6V
A
10V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. From diagram
2A 6V
5A
A
10V
5A
Current through ammeter = (2 + 5) = 7A
NCERT Questions
2.28 to 2.37
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A uniform thin ring of mass m and radius R rolls on a horizontal rough surface without slipping due to an
applied force ‘F’. The friction force acting on ring is : –
m R F
F 2F F
(A) (B) (C) (D*) Zero
3 3 4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (D) F + f = ma .... (1)
a
Also ; FR – fR = R
F – f = ma .... (2) [ = mR2 ]
From (1) & (2)
f = 0.
2. In the figure shown the plates of a parallel plate capacitor have unequal charges. Its capacitance is 'C'.
P is a point outside the capacitor and close to the plate of charge –Q. The distance between the plates
is 'd'.
'C' P
–Q 'd'
(A*) A point charge at point 'P' will experience electric force due to capacitor
P
3Q
(B*) The potential difference between the plates will be
2C
3Q
2C
(C*) The energy stored in the electric field in the region between the plates is
9Q 2 9Q 2
8C 8C
Q2
(D) The force on one plate due to the other plate is
2 0 d2
Q2
2 0 d2
2Q Q Q
Sol. E0 = =
2 0A 2 0A 2 0A
2Q Q 3Q
Ein = Ein =
2A 2A 2A
3 Q 3Q
Ein = Eind = =V
2 Cd 2C
(ii) F = EQ
2Q Q2
F= × (– Q) =
2A A
Q2
F=
A
2
1 1 3Q 9 Q2
(iii) Energy = 0
E2 Ad = 0 Ad =
2 2 2C d 8 C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. AB is part of a circuit as shown, that absorbs energy at a rate of 50 W. E is an emf device that has no
internal resistance.
AB 50 W E
i = 1A
A B
2.0 E
(A) Potential difference across AB is 48 V. AB 48 V .
4. Two blocks of masses 5 kg and 3kg are placed in contact over an inclined surface of angle 37°, as
shown. µ1 is friction coefficient between 5kg block and the surface of the incline and similarly, µ2 is
friction coefficient between the 3kg block and the surface of the incline. After the release of the blocks
from the inclined surface,
5 3 37°
5 µ1 3 µ2
3kg
5kg µ2
µ1
37°
(A*) if µ1 = 0.5 and µ2 = 0.3 then 5 kg block exerts 3N force on the 3 kg block
(B) if µ1 = 0.5 and µ2 = 0.3 then 5 kg block exters 8 N force on the 3 kg block
(C) if µ1 = 0.3 and µ2 = 0.5 then 5 kg block exerts 1 N force on the 3kg block.
(D*) if µ1 = 0.3 and µ2 = 0.5 then 5 kg block exerts no force on the 3kg block.
(A*) µ1 = 0.5 µ2 = 0.3 5 3 3N
(B) µ1 = 0.5 µ2 = 0.3 5 3 8 N
(C) µ1 = 0.3 µ2 = 0.5 5 3 1 N
(D*) µ1 = 0.3 µ2 = 0.5 5 3
Ans. A,D
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Case-I : µ1 = 0.5, µ2 = 0.3
Along the incline, acceleration of 5 kg block will be less than acceleration of 3 kg block provided they
move alone on the incline. The reason is greater friction coefficient of 5 kg block, as acceleration along
the incline is
g sin – µg cos
One to the contain, both blocks will move together. In this case FBDs of both are shown.
-I : µ1 = 0.5, µ2 = 0.3
5 3
5
g sin – µg cos
N
5. A cylindrical wooden float whose base area S and the height H drifts on the water surface. Density of
wood d and density of water is . What minimum work must be performed to take the float out of the
water?
S H d
Sol. Applying Newton’s law vertical direction
dH
mg = FB dSH × g = Sh × g
w
h=
= mg dx Sg xdx
2
Sgh 2 Sgh 2 Sgh 2 Sg dH
W = mgh – = ( Sh) gh – = = = Ans.
2 2 2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A block of mass m = 20 kg is kept at a distance R = 1m from central axis of rotation of a round turn
table (A table whose surface can rotate about central axis). Table starts from rest and rotates with
constant angular acceleration, = 3 rad/sec2. The friction coefficient between block and table is =
x
0.5. At time t = from starting of motion (i.e. t = 0) the block is just about to slip. Find the value of
30
x.(g = 10 m/s2)
( ) R = 1m
m = 20 kg = 3 rad/sec2
x
= 0.5 (t = 0) t =
30
x (g = 10 m/s2)
Ans. 20
Sol.
(i) Table starts rotation from rest
initial =0
= 0
= Angular velocity at time t t
= initial × t
= × t
= 0 + 3 × t = 3t
(ii) Force diagram for block as seen from above is :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
Consider the system shown below, with two equal masses m and a spring with spring constant K. The
coefficient of friction between the left mass and horizontal table is , and the pulley is frictionless. The
string connecting both the blocks is massless and inelastic. The system is held with the spring at its
unstretched length and then released.
m K
7. The extension in spring when the masses come to momentary rest for the first time is (take = 1/4)
(extension)( = 1/4)
3mg mg mg 2mg
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2K 2K K K
Sol. From work energy theorem, the masses stop when-total work done on them is zero.
1 2
W = mgx – kx – mgx = 0
2
2mg 3mg
(1 – ) =
k 2k
8. The minimum value of for which the system remains at rest once it has stopped for the first time is
1 1 1 1
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
3 3 2 2
Sol. When the masses are stopped at this value of x, the forces on left mass for it to remain at rest is zero
x
kx = mg + f
2mg
k (1 – ) < mg + mg
k
> 1/3 least value of is 1/3. ( 1/3 )
9. If the string connecting both the masses is cut just at the instant both masses came to momentary rest for
the first time in the first question paragraph, then maximum compression of spring during resulting motion
is (Take = 1/4)
(compression) ( = 1/4
)
2mg mg mg 1mg
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
3k 2k k 3k
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. At the instant string is cut, let the extension in spring be x0. The maximum compression x will occur for
spring when left block comes to rest first time after the string is cut
From work energy Theorem W = 0
(extension)x0
x
W = 0
1 1
kx 2 – kx2 – mg (x + x0) = 0
2 0 2
3mg 1
x0 = and () =
2k 4
mg
solving we get () x =
k
10. Column-I gives certain situations in which capacitance of a capacitor is changed by different means.
Column-II gives resulting effect under different conditions. Match the statements in column-I with the
corresponding statements in column-II
-I -II
-I -II
Column-I Column-II
(A) The plates of a plane parallel plate (p) Increases if the capacitor is
capacitor are slowly pulled apart. maintained at constant charge.
Then the magnitude of electric field
intensity inside the capacitor
(B) The plates of a plane parallel plate (q) Decreases if the capacitor
capacitor are slowly pulled apart. Then is maintained at constant
the potential energy stored in the capacitor charge.
(C) The capacitance of an air filled plane (r) Increases if the capacitor is
parallel plate capacitor on insertion of maintained at constant potential
dielectric. difference.
(D) A dielectric slab is inserted inside an air (s) Decreases if the capacitor is
filled plane parallel plate capacitor. The maintained at constant potential
potential energy stored in the capacitor. difference.
Column-I Column-II
(A) (p)
(B) (q)
(C) (r)
(D) (s)
Ans. (A) – s, ; (B) – p, s ; (C) – p, r ; (D) – q, r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Q V
Sol. (A) E or E
A 0 d
for Q = const.
E = const.
If V = const. and d increases.
V = d
E decreases (s, t)
Q2 1
(B) U or U CV 2
2C 2
If the plates are pulled apart, C decreases.
C
Q = const.
U increases
for V = const.
U decreases. (p, s)
(C) On insertion of a dielectric, the capacitance of a capacitor always increases. (p, r)
(p, r)
Q2 1
(D) U or U CV 2
2C 2
for Q = const.
U = decreases
for V = const.
U increases. (q, r)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
2
remarkable that the result obtained is independent of 1
.]
1. Figure consists two squares made of uniform wire of resistance per unit length . Find out equivalent
resistance between A and B. Side of large square is a.
A B
a
( 2 1) a a 2 a
(A) (B*) (C) (D) 2 a
2 2 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Where
a
R
2
a a
RAB = 2R = 2 =
2 2
2. The system is released from rest with spring initially in its natural length. If mass of the block m = 10 kg,
and spring constant k = 100 N/m, then maximum extension in spring is :
m = 10 kg , k = 100 N/m , :
m
1
(A*) 1m (B) m (C) 2 m (D) 2.5 m
2
x
Sol. Let maximum elongation in spring be X, then block descends through
2
x
X ,
2
kx
x
2
mg
By WET,
x 1 2 mg 10 10
mg kx =0 X 1m
2 2 k 100
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is C0 when the plates has air between them. This region is
now filled with a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K and capacitor is connected with battery of EMF E
and zero internal resistance. Now slab is taken out, then during the removal of slab :
C0 K
E
(A*) charge EC0(K – 1) flows through the cell
(B*) energy E2C0(K – 1) is absorbed by the cell
(C) the energy stored in the capacitor is reduced by E2C0(K – 1)
(D) the external agent has to do E2C0(K – 1) amount of work to take out the slab
(A*) EC0(K – 1)
(B*) E2C0(K – 1)
(C) E2C0(K – 1)
(D) E2C0(K – 1)
Sol. Initial charge on capacitor = KCoE
Charge after removing slab = CoE
Amount of charge flows through the cell = KCoE – CoE = CoE (K – 1)
Energy absorbed by cell = C0E (K – 1). E0 = C0E2 (K – 1)
Initial energy stored in capacitor = 1/2 kC0 E2
Final energy stored in capacitor = 1/2 C0 E2
Energy reduces in capacitor by = 1/2 C0 E2 (k – 1)
1
Work done by external agent E 2 C 0 (K 1)
2
= KCoE
= CoE
= KCoE – CoE = CoE (K – 1)
= C0E (K – 1). E0 = C0E2 (K – 1)
= 1/2 kC0 E2
= 1/2 C0 E2
= 1/2 C0 E2 (k – 1)
1
E 2 C 0 (K 1)
2
4. The spherical planets have the same mass but densities in the ratio 1: 8. For these planets, the :
1: 8
(A) acceleration due to gravity will be in the ratio 4 : 1
4 : 1
(B*) acceleration due to gravity will be in the ratio 1 : 4
1 : 4
(C) escape velocities from their surfaces will be in the ratio 2 : 1
2 : 1
(D*) escape velocities from their surfaces will be in the ratio 1 : 2
1 : 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. A light cylindrical tube ‘T’ of length and radius ‘r’ containing air is inverted in water (density d). One
end of the tube is open and the other is closed. A block ‘B’ of density 2d is kept on the tube as shown
in the figure. The tube stays in equilibrium in the position shown. (Assume the atmospheric pressure is
to be P0.). Assume that density of air is very small than density of block and water. Pick up the correct
statement(s).
r ‘T’ d
2d B,
( P0. )
r2 r2
(A*) the volume of block B is B
3 3
2 r2 2 r2
(B) the volume of block B is B
3 3
P0 + d g h
3
2
(D) the pressure of air trapped in the tube is P0 + d g h
3
2
P0 + d g h
3
Sol. The free body diagram of block + tube inclusive of water is as
shown below
Since the block + tube system shown in figure is in equilibrium
Net weight of system = buoyant force
2
2d Vg + r2 dg = (V + r2 ) dg
3
r2 d
where V is the volume of block B (2d – d) V =
3
r2
or V=
3
The pressure of the air trapped inside the tube is same as pressure at point A in the water as shown
in figure.
P = P0 + h dg Ans. Pa = P0 + dg h
3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. + () free body diagram
block + tube
Net =
2
2d Vg + r2 dg = (V + r2 ) dg
3
r2 d r2
V, block B (2d – d) V = or V=
3 3
tube A
P = P0 + h dg Ans. Pa = P0 + dg h
3 3
6. What amount of heat will be generated in the circuit shown in the figure, after the switch Sw is shifted
from position 1 to position 2?
Sw 1 2
?
1
[ Ans: Q = C 22. It is remarkable that the result obtained is independent of 1
.]
2
Sol. When S is at position (1)
By kVL
C
– +
1 2
q
1
– 2
– =0 q=( 1– 2
)C ..............(1)
C
1 q2
Energy stored =
C( 1 – 2
)2 =
2 2C
When switch 'S' in at position (2)
–(q + Q) q+Q
– +
C
1 Q
By kVL ;
q Q
1
= Put q from (1)
C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
( 1 – 2 )C Q
1
=
C
Q= 2
C ................(2)
2
q)(Q
Energy stored =
2C
Work done by battery 1
W = 1Q = 1 2C
Heat produced ;
H=W– U
H = 1 2C – (Uf – Ui)
( Q q) 2 q 2
H= 1 2
C– –
2C 2C
Put Q and q from (1) & (2)
1
H = C 22
2
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows a clamped metal string of length 30 cm and linear mass density 0.1 kg/m. which is taut at
a tension of 40 N. A small rider (piece of paper) is placed on string at point P as shown. An external
vibrating tuning fork is brought near this string and oscillations of rider are carefully observed.
30 cm 0.1 kg/m 40
N (rider) ( ) P
7. At which of the following frequencies of turning fork, rider will not vibrate at all :
100
(A) Hz (B) 50 Hz (C*) 200 Hz (D) None of these
3
8. At which of the following frequencies the point P on string will have maximum oscillation amplitude
among all points on string :
P
200
(A) Hz (B) 100 Hz (C) 200 Hz (D*) None of these
3
9. Now if the tension in the string is made 160 N, at which of the following frequencies of turning fork, rider
will not vibrate at all
160 N
100
(A) Hz (B) 50 Hz (C*) 200 Hz (D) None of these
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
T 40
Sol. Wave velocity in string is v= = = 20 m/s
0.1
Fundamental frequency of string oscillations is
v 20 100
n0 = = = Hz
2e 0.6 3
Thus string will be in resonance with a turning fork of frequency.
100 200 400
nf = Hz, Hz, 100 Hz, Hz, … .
3 3 3
Here rider will not oscillate at all only if it is at a node of stationary wave in all other cases of resonance
and non-resonance it will vibrate at the frequency of tuning fork. At a distance from one end node
3
will appear at 3rd, 6th, 9th or similar higher Harmonics i.e. at frequencies 100 Hz, 200 Hz, … .
If string is divided in odd no. of segments, these segments can never resonate simultaneously hence at
the location of rider, antinode is never obtained at any frequency.
T 40
Sol. v= = = 20 m/s
0.1
(Fundamental frequency)
v 20 100
n0 = = = Hz
2e 0.6 3
100 200 400
nf = Hz, Hz, 100 Hz, Hz, ….
3 3 3
(rider)
3
3rd, 6th, 9th 100 Hz, 200 Hz, ….
(rider)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In column-I, some situations are given, and in column-II, their result are given. Assume the batteries
and voltmeters used are ideal. Aslo assume that the resistance of bulb doesn't change due to heating.
Match the situations given in column-I according to proper results in column-II.
-I -II
-I
-II
Bulb
A
B Rh
V
(A) (p) The brightness of the bulb will increase
If the resistance of rehostate between A and B is
increased, then :
A B
, :
If resistance of the bulb is gradually
increased from 10 to 50 , then :
10 50 , :
Switch is on at t = 0. From t = 0
to the steady state
t = 0 t = 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(D) (s) The reading of the voltmeter will decrease.
The system has achieved steady state. Now
the distance between the plates of the
capacitor is suddenly halved. After that,
as the time passes :
Ans. (A – q,r) ; (B – p,r) ; (C – q, r) ; (D – q, r)
Sol. (A) when resistance of rehostate is increased then current in circuit is decreased. so brightness will
decrease.
(B) when resistance of bulb is increased then potential difference is increased across it. so brightness
will increase.
(C) from t=0 to steady state, q will increase on capacitor so potential difference will increase across it
and current will decrease so brightness will decrease.
(D) same as C.
(A)
(B)
(C) t = 0 q
(D) C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
2. A disc is rotated about its axis with a certain angular velocity and lowered gently on an inclined plane as
shown in Figure, then
(A*) It will rotate at the position where it was placed and then will move downwards
(B) It will go downwards just after it is lowered
(C) It will go downwards first and then climb up
(D) It will climb upwards and then move downwards
(A*)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A) Here kinetic friction force will balance will balance the force of gravity. So it will rotate at its intial
position and will not move up or down. As its angular velocity becomes zero (friction also becomes
zero), it will move downwrds.
3. A 1 µF capacitor is connected in the circuit shown below. The e.m.f. of the cell is 3 volts and internal
resistance is 0.5 ohms. The resistors R1 and R2 have values 4 ohms and 1 ohm respectively. The
charge on the capacitor in steady state must be :
1 µF 3
0.5 R1 R2 4 1
4. In the circuit shown the capacitor of capacitance C is initially uncharged. Now the capacitor is
connected in the circuit as shown. The charge passed through an imaginary circular loop parallel to the
plates (also circular) and having the area equal to half of the area of the plates, in one time constant is:
C
1 C 1 C
(A) C 1 (B) 1 (C) (D*) zero ()
e 2 e 4
Sol. In the given cross-section which lies inside the capacaitor plates , no charge flows. hence the required
charge is 0.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. As shown in the given figure the ball is given sufficient velocity at the lowest point to complete the circle.
Length of string is 1m. Find the tension in the string, when it is at 60° with vertical position.
(Mass of ball = 5kg )
1m 60° 5kg
6. A smooth sphere is moving on a horizontal surface with velocity vector 3 î ĵ immediately before it hits a
vertical wall. The wall is perpendicular to î and the coefficient of restitution between the wall and the
sphere is 1/3. The velocity vector of the sphere after it hits the wall is :
3 î ĵ î
1/3
1 1ˆ
(A) 3 î ĵ (B) î ĵ (C) î ĵ (D*) î j
3 3
When a potentiometer is connected between X and Y it balances for 300 cm length against 1. On
connecting the same potentiometer between X and Z it balances for 100 cm length against 1 and 2.
2
Then the ratio is :
1
X Y 1 300 cm X Z
2
1 2 100 cm :
1
1 3 1 2
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
3 4 4 3
Sol. 1
= 300 ..........(i)
– 2 + 1 = 100 ..........(ii)
where, is the potential gradient
,
2 2
= .
1 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. An electric dipole is placed in a uniform electric field of magnitude 40 N/C. Graph shows the magnitude
of the torque on the dipole versus the angle between the field and the dipole moment . The
magnitude of dipole moment is equal to :
40 N/C
50
25
O
(A*) 1.25 × 10–28 C-m (B) 2.0 × 10–25 C-m (C) 2.5 × 10–28 C-m (D) 5.0 × 10–28 C-m
Sol. p E
max
= pE 50 × 10–28 = p.40 p = 1.25 × 10 –28 C-m
9. In the figure two concentric conducting shells of radius R & 2 R are shown. The outer shell is charged
with Q and the inner shell is uncharged. The amount of energy dissipated when the shells are
connected by a conducting wire is:
R 2R Q
k Q2 k Q2 3k Q 2
(A*) 0 (B) (C) (D)
2 R 8 R 4
10. Two radio frequency point sources S1 and S2, separated by distance 2.5 m are emitting in phase waves
of wavelength 1 m. A detector moves in a large circular path around the two sources in a plane
containing them. The number of maxima that will be detected by it over the complete circular path, are
2.5m S1 S2 1m
(A) 16 (B) 12 (C*) 10 (D) 8
Sol. At point A, the path diference is 2.5 and at B, path difference is zero. While moving from A to B, path
difference changes from 2.5 to zero, making two maxima corresponding to 2 and (excluding B). B is
common for both upper quarter circles hence there are five maxima in one half circle, making 10 in total
circular movement.
A 2.5 B A B A B
2.5 2 (B ) B
10
B
2.5m
A
S1 S2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. A 25 kg uniform solid sphere with a 20 cm radius is suspended by a vertical wire such that the point of
suspension is vertically above the centre of the sphere. A torque of 0.10 N-m is required to rotate the
sphere through an angle of 1.0 rad and then maintain the orientation. If the sphere is then released, its
time period of the oscillation will be :
25 20
1.0
0.10
(A) second (B) 2 second (C) 2 second (D*) 4 second
(A) (B) 2 (C) 2 (D*) 4
Sol. (D) = – k
0.1 = – k(1.0), where k is torsional constant of the wire.
1
k=
10
2
25 (.2 )2
1 5
T=2 =2 = 2 10 2 .2 10 = 4 second Ans.
k 1/ 10
12. A car is moving on a plane inclined at 30º to the horizontal with an acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 parallel to
the plane upward. A bob is suspended by a string from the roof. The angle in degrees which the string
makes with the vertical is : (Assume that the bob does not move relative to car) [g = 9.8 m/s2]
30º 9.8 m/s2
(bob)
( (bob)[g = 9.8 m/s2]
(A) 20º (B*) 30º (C) 45º (D) 60º
Sol. From frame of car, the effective acceleration (geff) due to gravity shall be measured as shown in figure.
Hence geff makes an angle 30° with vertical direction (down wards). Since the string aligns with
direction of geff in equilibrium, the required angle is = 30°.
(geff) geff
30° geff
= 30°
13. A hot black body emits the energy at the rate of 16 J m–2 s–1 and its most intense radiation corresponds
to 20,000 Å. When the temperature of this body is further increased and its most intense radiation
corresponds to 10,000 Å, then the energy radiated in Jm–2 s–1 will be :
16 –2 –1
20,000 Å
10,000 Å –2 –1
(A) 4 (B) 1 (C) 64 (D*) 256
Sol. Wein's displacement law is :
m
.T = b
1
i.e. T
m
Here, m becomes half.
Temperature doubles.
Also e = T4
4 4
e1 T1 T1
e2 = .e1 = (2)4 . 16 = 16.16 = 256 J m–2 s–1 Ans.
e2 T2 T2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. The wall of a house is made of two different materials of same thickness. The temperature of the outer
wall is T2 and that of inner wall is T1 < T2. The temperature variation inside the wall as shown in the
figure. Then :
T2
T1 < T2 :
Sol. We have
mg' = mg – m 2 R cos2
for weightlessness Net
0 = mg – m 2 Rcos2
g 1
= ×
R cos
g 1
= =
R 4/5
5 g
=
4 R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. An infinite number of masses, each of one kg are placed on the +ve X axis at 1m, 2m, 4m,.................
from the origin. The magnitude of the gravitational field at origin due to this distribution of masses is:
x- 1m, 2m,
4m,.................
4G 3G
(A) 2G (B*) (C) (D)
3 4
17. Two planets A and B travel counter clockwise in circular orbits around a fixed star. The radii of their
orbits are in the ratio 1 : 4. At some time, they are aligned as shown in the figure, making a straight line
with the star. After a certain time, planet A comes back to its initial position, completing one full circle
about the star. In the same time, angular displacement of the planet B is : M.Ban
A B (fixed)
1 : 4 A
B :
A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. A turning fork having frequency of 340 Hz is vibrated just above a cylindrical tube closed at lower end.
The height of the tube is 130 cm. Water is slowly poured into it. The minimum height of water required
for resonance is : (V = 340 m/s) (Neglect end correction)
340 Hz
130 cm
(V = 340 m/s) ()
(A*) 5 cm (B) 25 cm (C) 45 cm (D) 120 cm
Sol. As the turning fork is in resonance with air column in the pipe closed at one end.
nv
f= with n = 1 ; 3 ; 5 ......
4L
So length of air column in the pipe
nv
h= 25 n cm.
4f
i.e. L = 25 cm ; 75 cm ; 125 cm.....
So L = h = 130 cm
h = 130 – L
hmin = 130 – Lmax = 130 – 125 = 5 cm.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Initially the block of mass m is in equilibrium in vertical plane as shown and dielectric slab of some
mass. When it is slightly displaced from mean position (pulleys are ideal and spring is massless):
m
():
K K
m m
fixed
capacito r's ks ks
plate
m
(A) Dielectric will perform SHM having time period 2
ks
m
(B*) Dielectric will perform SHM having time period more than 2
ks
m
(C) Dielectric will perform SHM having time period less than 2
ks
(D) Dielectric will not perform periodic motion.
m
(A) 2
ks
m
(B*) 2
ks
m
(C) 2
ks
(D)
m MDielectric
Sol. T=2
K
3. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas of cross-section A1 and A2. A liquid of density
fills both the sections, up to a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric pressure.
A1 A2
h
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. Two point charges +q and –q are fixed on diametrically opposite point on the uniform ring, such that
–q is at bottom and is in contact with a perfect insulator incline plane. Total mass is equal to m. It
remains in equilibrium on the rough inclined plane in the presence of uniform vertical electric field .
Then
+q –q –q
m
+q
E
–q
(A*) the value of friction force is mg sin . (B) the value of friction force is less than mg sin .
mg mg tan
(C*) the value of electric field is . (D) the value of electric field is
2q 2q
(A*) mg sin (B) mg sin
mg mg tan
(C*) (D)
2q 2q
Sol. f = mg sin and
PE sin = mg sin . R
q 2R E sin = mg sin R
mg
E= Ans. (A) & (C)
2q
5. Consider the circuit shown, capacitor is uncharged initially. Switch is closed at t = 0, then select correct
alternative/s :
t = 0 ,
:
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3t
2CV –
(A*) charge on the capacitor as function of time is q 1 – e 2RC
3
3t
2CV –
q 1 – e 2RC
3
3t
V –
(B*) current in the resistance 2R on function of time will be i 1 – e 2RC
3R
3t
V –
2R i 1 – e 2RC
3R
3t
V –
(C) current in the resistance 2R on function of time will be i 1 – e 2RC
3R
3t
V –
2R i 1 – e 2RC
3R
t
2CV –
(D) charge on the capacitor on function of time will be q 1 – e 2RC
3
t
2CV –
q 1 – e 2RC
3
t / R QC
Sol. q C Q (1 – e )
V 0
R 2R 2V
Q =
1 1 3
R 2R
1 2R
Req = =
1 1 3
R 2R
6. Figure shows a cubical block of side 10 cm and relative density 1.5 suspended by a wire of cross
sectional area 10–6 m2. The breaking stress of the wire is 7 × 106 N/m2. The block is placed in a beaker
of base area 200 cm2 and initially i.e. at t = 0, the top surface of water & the block coincide. There is a
pump at the bottom corner which ejects 2 cm3 of water per sec. Find the time at which the wire will
break.
10 cm 1.5 10–6 m2
7 × 106 N/m2 200 cm2
t = 0 ,
2 cm3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Breaking force = Breaking stress × area of wire
= 7 × 106 × 10–6 = 7N
weight of block = vol × density × g
= 10–3 × (1.5 × 103) × 10
= 15 N.
The upthrust when the liquid level has descended by × cm.
= 100 (10 – x) . 10–6 . 103 . 10
= 10 – x Newton.
Net downward force on the block = 15 – (10 – x) = 5 + x = Tension T
The wire will break when 5 + x = 7.
i.e. when x = 2cm
Let the level descends by 2 cm in t time
then 2t = (200 – 100).2
t = 100 sec. ......Ans.
COMPREHENSION
A glass tube has three different cross sectional areas with the values indicated in the figure. A piston at
the left end of the tube exerts pressure so that the mercury within the tube flows from the right end with
a speed of 8.0 m/s. Three points within the tube are labeled A, B and C. The atmospheric pressure is
1.01 × 105 N/m2; and the density of mercury is 1.36 × 104 kg/m3. (use g = 10 m/s2)
8.0 /
A, B C 1.01 × 105 /2
1.36 × 104 /3 (g = 10 /2)
Vacuum
2 h
12cm
A B
Piston C
5.6 cm 2
6cm 2
7. At what speed is mercury flowing past the point A ?
A ?
(A) 2.0 m/s (B*) 4.0 m/s (C) 8.0 m/s (D) 12 m/s
Sol. Using equation of continuity A1v1 = A2v2
A1v1 = A2v2
(12 cm2)vA = (6 cm2) (8.0 m/s)
vA = 4.0 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. By applying Bernoulli's equation between point B and C and using equation of continuity
B C
vB = 8.57 m/s
3 .70 10 4
and pB = 3.70 × 104 Pascal gh = 3.70 × 104 h= = 272 mm
10 13,600
10. A small hook of mass m passes through a smooth wire bent in the form of horizontal circle (fixed) of
radius R. The hook is connected to a spring whose other end is fixed at point A on the circular wire as
mg
shown in diagram. The natural length of the spring is R and spring constant is . Initially the hook is
R
slightly displaced from rest from position B which is diametrically opposite to point A. The hook moves
along the circular arc from position B to C. [N = normal reaction between circular wire and hook and V =
speed of hook]
m (hook) R
mg
A R
R
B A
B C [N = V =
]
List- List-
- -
(P) N = mg (1) At position B
B
(Q) N = zero (2) At position C
C
(R) Total acceleration is zero (3) Some where between B and C
B C
(S) V = gR (4) Never between B and C
B C
Codes :
P Q R S
(A*) 3 4 1 2
(B) 3 2 1 4
(C) 4 2 1 3
(D) 4 1 2 3
Ans. (A)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (P) 3 ; (Q) 4 ; (R) 1 ; (S) 2
At point B.
B
kx = N
mg
R=N
R
mg = N (Horizontal)
NB = N2 (mg) 2 = 2 mg
KEC + PEC = KEB + PEB
1 1
mVC2 = K(R)2
2 2
VC = gR
At point C
C
2
mVC
(horizontal) N =
R
N = mg
NC = N2 (mg) 2 = 2 mg
N (horizontal) changes direction from B to C, at B N (horizontal) on the hook is directed radially outward
and at C directed radially inward, hence it becomes zero some where between B and C. N vertical is
equal to mg therefore some where in between B & C net normal reaction is mg.
At point B, ac = 0 because velocity is zero & at = 0, since no force in tangential direction.
N () B C , B N N
B C N, mg
N, mg B, ac = 0 at = 0 ,
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. The above circuit reduces to
Using KVL, R = 21.5 .
2. A meter bridge is used to predict the value of unknown resistance X, it is observed that current is
flowing from A to B initially (when jockey is fixed at a point B). If the temperature of X is increased, then
select possible option/s :
X ,
A B ( B ) X
:
d K
– 1 – 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A*) The electric field have the same value inside the dielectric as in the free space between the plates.
1 2 1 2
(B*) The ratio is equal to .
2 1 2 1
3 0 A 3 0 A
(C*) The new capacitance is
2d 2d
2 2
(D*) The new potential difference is V V
3 3
Sol. Potential for each plate remain same over whole area. If potential difference between them is, say V'
then V' = Ed
i.e. E is also same inside the plates.
To keep E same, free charge density is changed i.e. charge redistributes itself.
To find new capacitance, two capacitors can be taken as connected in parallel. Then
K. 0 .A / 2 0 .A / 2 3 0 .A
= =
d d 2d
2
By Q = CV, as Q remains unchanged V is changed to V.
3
4. A block is attached with an ideal spring and string, and is in equilibrium as shown in Figure. The
acceleration of the block just after breaking the string is a1 and just after breaking the spring is a2. Then
a1 a2
53° 53°
5g 3g g
(A*) a1 = (B*) a2 = (C) a1 = (D) a2 = g
8 5 2
Kx = T
4
2Kx = mg
5
5
Kx = mg
8
5mg / 8
If string break a1 =
m
5mg / 8
a1 =
m
= 5 g/8
If spring break. a2 = g cos 53° = 3 g/5
a2 = g cos 53° = 3 g/5
Ans. (A,B)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. A sphere P(emissivity=1) of radius 2R and and another sphere Q(emissivity =1/2) of radius R are
placed in vacuum at some distance.There are no other objects. The temperature of the sphere Q is
maintained at 200K by the means of a heater. A fraction 1/32 of the power emitted by the sphere Q
falls on the sphere P. If the equilibrium temperature of the sphere P is 10 T, find the value of T.
2R P ( =1) R Q( =1/2)
Q 200K
Q 1/32 P P 10 T , T
Ans. 5
Sol. In equilibrium, power released= power absorbed
1 1
or 4 (2R)2 (1) T4 = 4 (R ) 2 200 4
32 2
6. Two opposite forces F1 = 120N and F2 = 80N act on an heavy elastic plank of modulus of elasticity
y = 2×1011 N/m2 and length L = 1m placed over a smooth horizontal surface. The cross-sectional area
of plank is A = 0.5m2. If the change in the length of plank is x × 10–9m, then find x ?
F1 = 120N F2 = 80N y =
2×1011 N/m2 L = 1m
A = 0.5m2 x × 10–9m x
F2 F1
Ans. 1
x
Sol. F2
T T
F1
T dx
dL =
A y
x
T = F1 – (F1 – F2)
L
L
(F1 F2 )L
dl = 1×10–9 m
2Ay
0
COMPREHENSION
In the circuit shown in the figure the capacitor is initially uncharged.
7. S1 and S2 are simultaneously closed at t = 0. Power dissipated in the resistor R1 is 0.2 W and initial
current through R2 is 10 mA. Choose the correct option :
t = 0 S1 S2 R1 0.2 W R2
10 mA
(A) R1 = 50k , R2 = 10 M (B*) R1 = 50k , R2 = 10 k
(C) R1 = R2 = 50k (D) R1 = 10k , R2 = 50 k
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. When the capacitor gets fully charging switch S2 is opened. It is observed that after 5 sec, the current in
R1 is 0.74 mA. [ n(2.25) = 0.812]. Choose the correct option :
S2 5 sec
R1 0.74 mA [ n(2.25) = 0.812]
(A*) C = 100 F approximately
(B) C = 50 F approximately
(C) The charge on the capacitor at the instant mentioned in the question is aproximately equal to 2 mC
(D) Both (A) and (C) are correct
(A*) C = 100 F
(B) C = 50 F
(C) 2 mC
(D) (A) (C)
9. At the instant mentioned in the previous question S1 is opened and S2 is closed simultaneously. Taking
this instant is t = 0, the charge on the capacitor as a function of time is best represented by :
S1 S2 t = 0
(A) q = (4.4 e–t)mC (B) q = (10 + 5.6 e–t)mC
(C*) q = (10 – 5.6 e–t)mC (D) q = (5.6 e–t – 1.2)mC
E2 E
Sol.(7 to 9) = 0.2, = 10–2
R1 R2
R1 = 50 k
R2 = 10 k
When capacitor gets fulley charged
q0 = CE = 100ºC
S2 is opened S2
t
q = q0e
q0 t/
i= e
= (R1 + R2)C
1 –t/60000
10–3 × 0.74 = e C
600
5
= n(2.25) = 0.812
60000
C = 100 F
q = 4.44 × 10–3 C = 4.44 C
q
+ iR2 =
C
q dq
– = R2
C dt
q dq t 1
=
qi c q 0 R 2C
q = (10 – 5.6 e–t)mC.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. A particle of mass m = 1 kg executes SHM about mean position O with angular frequency = 1.0 rad/s
and total energy 2J. x is positive if measured towards right from O. At t = 0, particle is at O and moves
towards right. Match the condition in column-I with the position of the particle in column-II and indicate
your answer by darkening appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the OMR.
m = 1 kg O = 1.0 / 2
x, O t = 0 O -I
-II OMR
Column-I Column-II
(A) speed of particle is 2 m/s at (p) x = + 1m
(B) Kinetic energy of the particle is 1J at (q) x = – 1m
(C) At t = /6 sec. particle is at (r) x = + 2 m
(D) Kinetic energy is 1.5 J at (s) x = – 2 m
-I -II
(A) 2 m/s (p) x = + 1m
(B) 1 (q) x = – 1m
(C) t = /6 sec. (r) x = + 2 m
(D) 1.5 (s) x = – 2 m
Ans. (A) r,s (B) r, s (C) p (D) p,q
1 2 2
Sol. KEmax = mv 2max = TE v max = = 2 m/s
2 1
v
amplitude A = max = 2m.
x = A sin t = 2 sint
v = 2 cost = 4 – x2
(A) v = 2 m/s x = ± 2 m.
1 1
(B) KE = mv2 1 = × 1 × v2 v = 2 m/s.
2 2
x = ± 2 m.
(C) at t = /6 s, x = 2 sin /6 = 1m.
3 1
(D) KE = 1.5 = × mv2 v= 3 x = ± 1m.
2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
3. In the figure shown P1 and P2 are two conducting plates having charges of equal magnitude and
opposite sign. Two dielectrics of dielectric constant K1 and K2 fill the space between the plates as
shown in the figure. The ratio of electrical energy in 1st dielectric to that in the 2nd dielectric is
P1 P2 K1 K2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Let be the charge density of conducting plate and V be the volume of either dielectric
V
2
1 2
k1 0 E1 V
U1 2 k1 k1 0 k2
= = 2
=
U2 1 2 k2 k1
k2 0 E2 V
2 k2 0
5. A car of mass m starts from rest and accelerates so that the instantaneous power delivered to the car
has a constant magnitude P0. The instantaneous velocity of this car is proportional to :
m
P0 :
t
(A) t2P0 (B*) t1/2 (C) t–1/2 (D)
m
Ans. (B)
Sol. Constant power of car P0 = F.V. = ma.v
dv
P0 = m .v
dt
P0 dt = mvdv
mv 2
P0.t =
2
2P0 t
v=
m
v t
6. A ball rise with constant velocity, to the surface of a liquid whose density is four times that of the ball.
The ratio of the frictional force to weight of the ball is
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C*) 3 (D) 4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
v0 t)
7. The position of a particle at time t , is given by the relation , x (t) = (1 e ,
8. When a capillary tube of radius r is immersed in a liquid, the liquid rises in it to a height h. If another
tube of radius r/2 is immersed in the same liquid, then the capillary rise will be
r h
r/2
(A) h (B*) 2h (C) h/2 (D) 4h
9. A string passes over fixed pulley. Two boys P and Q of same mass hang at the same height at each
end. Both start to climb upwards at the same times to reach the pulley. The velocity of P relative to the
string is v and that of Q is 3v, then the time taken by P to reach the pulley is equal to
P Q
P v Q 3v P
(A) 1/3rd of the time taken by Q (B) 3 times the time taken by Q
(C*) the time taken by Q (D) twice the time taken by Q
(A) Q (B) Q
(C*) Q (D) Q
10. A cork floats on the water surface. A wave given by y = 0.1 sin 2 (0.1 x 2t) passes over the water
surface. Due to passage of the wave, the cork moves up and down. The maximum velocity of the cork,
in m/s, is
y = 0.1 sin 2 (0.1 x 2t)
(A) 0.1 (B) 0.1 (C*) 0.4 (D) .
11. A ball moving with speed v hits another identical ball at rest. The two balls stick together after collision.
If specific heat of the material of the balls is, S the temperature rise resulting from the collision is
v
S
(A*) v2/8S (B) v2/4S (C) v2/2S (D)v2/S
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. Two cylinders contain ideal diatomic gas. As shown in figure Same amount of heat is given to the two
cylinders. If temperature rise in cylinder B is T0 then temperature rise in cylinder A will be
B T0 A
piston is piston is
movable not movable
A B
A B
Heat Heat
7 3 5
(A) T0 (B) 2T0 (C) T0 (D*) T0
5 5 7
13. A bar is subjected to axial forces as shown. Find the total elongation in the bar. (E is the modulus of
elasticity of the bar and A is its area of cross-section)
(E A
)
3F F
2F
l l
Fl 2Fl 3Fl 4Fl
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
AE AE AE AE
14. Consider earth as a uniform solid sphere and difference between acceleration due to gravity at poles
and at equator as d. If the earth starts rotating with double the angular speed, the difference becomes
d
(A) 2d (B) 3d (C*) 4d (D) 9d
15. Magnitude of angular momentum of a wheel changes from 2L to 3L in 5 sec. by a constant torque
acting opposite to initial direction of rotation. What is the magnitude of the torque?
5 2L 3L
L 2L 3L
(A) (B*) L (C) (D)
5 5 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. From a uniform square plate the shaded portions are removed as shown in figure. The coordinates of
centre of mass of the remaining plate are x, y. Axes and origin are shown in figure.
()
X, Y
a a a a
(A) x < ,y< (B*) x > ,y<
2 2 2 2
a a a a
(C) x < , y > (D) x > , y >
2 2 2 2
17. A cricket ball of mass 150 g is moving with a velocity of 12 m/sec and is hit by a bat so that the ball is
turned back with a velocity of 20 m/sec. The force of blow acts for 0.01 s on the ball. Find the average
force exerted by the bat on the ball.
150 12 20
0.01
(A) 320 N (B*) 480 N (C) 160 N (D) 240 N
Hint. Initial momentum of the ball = (150/1000) x 12 = 1.8 kg m/sec
Final momentum of the ball = –(150/1000) x 20 = – 3.0 kg m/sec
Change in momentum = 4.8 kg m/sec.
Average force exerted = impulse/time = (4.8 kg m/sec) / 0.01 s
Sol. | V | = 32 m/s
| v| 150 32
|F| m = = 480 N.
t 1000 0 .01
18. A point charge is moving in clockwise direction in a circle with constant speed. Consider the magnetic
field produced by the charge at a point P (not centre of the circle) on the axis of the circle.
P (
)
(A*) it is constant in magnitude only
(B) it is constant in direction only
(C) it is constant in direction and magnitude both
(D) it is not constant in magnitude and direction both.
0 0
19 has the unit : :
0 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
20. The direction of the field B at P is : P B :
NCERT Questions
4.1 to 4.13
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. The circuit was in the shown state for a long time. Now if the switch S is closed then the net charge that
flows through the switch S, will be
S S
50V
4 F 2 F
S
2 F 4 F
400 100
(A) C (B) 100 C (C) C (D*) 50 C
3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
50V
qi=200/3 C
q f=100 C 2 F
4 F q1=100/3 C
1
S
Sol. 2 q2=50/3 C
2 F
qi=200/3 C q f=50 C 4 F
50V
qi=200/3 C
q f=100 C 2 F
4 F q1=100/3 C
1
Sol. S
2 q2=50/3 C
2 F
qi=200/3 C q f=50 C 4 F
2. A cyclic process ABCD is shown on V-T diagram. The P-T and P-V diagram for this cyclic process is
shown in the figure(given below). Select the correct choices.
ABCD V-T P-T P-V
3. The figure shows the tungsten filament of a bulb with constant diameter except a piece of it which has
half the diameter of the rest of the wire. Assume that the temperature is constant within each part and
changes suddenly between the parts. If the temperature of thick part is 2000 K, the temperature of the
thin part of the filament is [3]
2000 K
4. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections. The lower part is a rectangular vessel with area of
cross-section A and height h. The upper part is a conical vessel of height h with base area ‘A’ and top
area ‘a’ and the walls of the vessel are inclined at an angle 30° with the vertical. A liquid of density
fills both the sections upto a height 2h. Neglecting atmospheric pressure.
A h A h
a 30° 2h
(A*) The force F exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel is 2h gA
(B*) the pressure P at the base of the vessel is 2h g
(C) the weight of the liquid W is greater than the force exerted by the liquid on the base
(D*) the walls of the vessel exert a downward force (F–W) on the liquid.
(A*) F = 2h gA
(B*) P = 2h g
(C) W,
(D*) (F–W)
5. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in water as shown in figure. The distances l and h
are shown there. After some time the coin falls into the water. Then
l h
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. An electron is at P at t = 0.It is circulating in anticlockwise direction with a constant angular speed
along the shown circular path.Magnetic field at Q(CQ = 2R,where R is radius of the circle) will be
recorded as zero at times:
t = 0 P
Q ( CQ = 2R, R )
C P Q
5 7 8
(A*) (B*) (C*) (D)
3 3 3 3
Sol. Zero magnetic field will be recorded at Q when particle is at A and B such that AQ and
BQ are tangent to circle.
Q A B AQ BQ
Comprehension
Two thin similar spherical glass pieces are joined together front to front with rear portion of one piece
silvered and the combination of glass pieces is placed at a distance 60 cm from a screen. A point object
is placed on the optical axis of the combination at the mid point of the line joining this combination and
screen. Initially there is air between glass pieces as well as between combination and screen.
(silverd)
60 cm O
7. If image of the object is formed on the screen, then the radius of curvature of the either glass piece is :
(A) 60 cm (B*) 40 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 15 cm
4
8. If air between the glass pieces is replaced by water , the new system (combination of glass
3
pieces and water) behaves like :
4
3
:
(A) Convex mirror of focal length 12 cm (B) Convex mirror of focal length 24 cm
(C*) Concave mirror of focal length 12 cm (D) Concave mirror of focal length 24 cm
(A) 12 cm (B) 24 cm
(C*) 12 cm (D) 24 cm
9. In the previous question, the distance through which the object must be displaced so that the sharp
image is again formed on screen is :
(A) 20 cm towards the combination (B) 20 cm away from the combination
(C*) 15 cm towards the combination (D) 15 cm away from the combination
(A) 20 cm (B) 20 cm
(C*) 15 cm (D) 15 cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.(7 to 9)
u = 30
v = – 60
r
f = – = – 20 r = 40 cm
2
1 1 2
–
F fM fL
Gives F = – 12 cm
From F = – 12 cm
& V = – 60 cm
u = – 15 cm
So, shift = 15 cm towards mirrors. (, = 15 cm )
10. A uniform solid cylinder of mass m and radius R is placed on a rough horizontal surface where friction is
sufficient to provide pure rolling. A horizontal force of magnitude F is applied on cylinder at different
positions with respect to its centre O in each of four situations of column-I, due to which magnitude of
acceleration of centre of mass of cylinder is a. Match the appropriate results in column-II for conditions
of column-I.
m R
F -I
a -I -II
Column-I Column-II
F
(A) R (p) Friction force on cylinder will not be zero.
O
(p)
F
R F
(B) 2 O (q) a =
m
F O F
(C) (r) a
m
O
(D) R (s) the direction of friction force acting on
2
F
cylinder is towards left
Ans. (A) p,r (B) q (C) p,r,s (D) p,r,s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
A B
10V
S
(A) The potential difference across the plates of A is 4V and across the plates of B is 6V
(B*) The potential difference across the plates of A is 6V and across the plates of B is 4V
(C) The ratio of electric energies stored in A and B is 2 : 3
(D) The ratio of charges on A and B is 3 : 2
(A) A 4V B 6V
(B) A 6V B 4V
(C) A B 2 : 3
(D) A B 3 : 2
2 3
Sol. In serues qA = qB = q = 10 × × 10–6 = 12 C
5
q q
VA = = 6V VB= =4V
CA CB
1 UA CB 3
In series U
C UB CA 2
2. Imagine a short dipole is at the centre of a spherical surface. If magnitude of electric field at a certain
point on the surface of sphere is 10 N/C, then which of the following cannot be the magnitude of electric
field anywhere on the surface of sphere
10 N/C ,
[ES/ED]
(A*) 4 N/C (B) 8 N/C (C) 16 N/C (D) 20 N/C
(E) 15 N/C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. If Eaxial = 10 N/C
then Eeq = 5 N/C
If Eeq = 10 N/C
then Eaxial = 20 N/C
So magnitude of electric field at any point
5N/C E 20 N/C
3. Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals ‘A’ and ‘B’. The letters have their usual meaning.
A B
6 0 A 13 0 A 10 0 A 5 0 A
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
5 d 10 d 7 d 7 d
Sol.
0 A /2 A/2 4 0A 13 0A 13 0 A
C1 = , C2 = 0 = C = C1 + C2 = Ans.
d d/2 d 5d 10 d 10 d
k 2
x
4. A light ray enters into a medium whose refractive index varies along the x-axis as n(x) n0 1
4
where n0 = 1. The medium is bounded by the planes x = 0, x = 1 & y = 0. If the ray enters at the origin
at an angle 30º with x–axis.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
x
x- n(x) n0 1
4
n0 = 1 x = 0, x = 1 y = 0 x–
30º
(a)
1
sin i =
2n
1
tan i =
4n 2 1
dy 1
=
dx x 3
y x
1/ 2
dy (x 3) dx
0 0
y= 2 x 3 3
5. Four point masses each of mass m are placed on vertices of a regular tetrahedron. Distance between
any two masses is r.
(A*) Gravitation field at centre is zero
4Gm
(B) Gravitation potential at centre is
r
6Gm2
(C*) Gravitation potential energy of system in
r
6Gm2
(D*) Gravitation force on one of the point mass is
r2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
m
r
(A*)
4Gm
(B)
r
6Gm2
(C*)
r
6Gm2
(D*)
r2
Sol. Eg = 0 By symmetry
6Gm2
Potential energy of system =
r
Gm2
Force between two masses F = 2
r
Angle between any two force is 60°
F F1 F2 F3
2
Fnet = F12 F22 F22 + 2F1 F2 + 2F2 F3 + 2F3 F1
2
Fnet = 3F2 + 3F2
Fnet = 6F
Eg = 0
6Gm2
=
r
Gm2
F = 2
r
60°
F F1 F2 F3
2 2 2
F =F
net 1 F2 F22 + 2F1 F2 + 2F2 F3 + 2F3 F1
2
Fnet = 3F2 + 3F2
Fnet = 6F
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A ball of mass m is connected by a light inextensible cord and is rotated in a circle of radius R on a
smooth fixed horizontal table. Initially the angular velocity of the ball was 0 and pulling force applied
R
was T1. Now the pulling force is increased to T2, until the radius of rotation of the ball becomes . Then
4
T2
ratio is:
T1
m R
0 T1 T2
R T2
:
4 T1
Ans. 64
Sol. No external torque is acting on the ball. So applying angular momentum conservation about point O.
O
1 1
m( r) (r) = constant So = 16 times
r2 (1/ 4)2
1
T = m 2r = (16)2 × = 64 times
4
'H' 'A'
A
3
H
2
V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. The speed of water flowing out of the orifice before the cylinder kept inside the tank
gh gh
(A*) gH (B) 1.414 gH (C) (D)
2 2
P0
H H
Sol. 2 V= 2gh 2g gH
2
V P0
8. The speed of water flowing out of orifice after the cylinder is kept inside it (height of water in tank was
H
just before inserting cyllinder).
2
H
2
3gH gH
(A) 3gH (B) 2gH (C*) (D)
2 2
A/3
Sol.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Match the coluumn :
Column–I Column–II
V V
m1 m2
m2
u m2
m1
m2
4
5
m2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(C) (r)
A B () B C ()
P–V ABC Q
(D) (s)
(D) Figure shows the forces acting on the two blocks . As we are looking for the maximum value of M /
m, the equilibrium is limiting . Hence , the frictional forces are equal to times the corresponding normal
forces.
(D) M / m
( )
or, M/m =
sin – cos
If tan < , (sin – cos ) < 0 and the system will not slide for any value of M/m.
tan < (sin – cos ) < 0 M/m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
(i) (ii)
(iii) (iv)
(A*) Fig. (i) (B) Fig. (iii) (C) Fig. (ii) (D) Fig. (iv)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks in series, One of the blocks has thickness d1
and dielectric constant k1 and the other has thickness d2 and dielectric constant k2 as shown in fig.. This
arrangement can be thought as a dielectric slab of thickness d (= d1 + d2) and effective dielectric
constant k. The k is :
d1 k1 d2 k2
d (= d1 + d2) k k
K1
K2
(A*) The equivalent emf eq of the two cells is between 1 and 2, i.e. 1
< eq
< 2
.
emf , 1 2 , 1 < < 2 .
(B) The equivalent emf eq
is smaller than 1
emf , 1
(C) The eq
is given by eq = 1
+ 2
always
= 1
+ 2
(D) eq
is independent of internal resistance r1 and r2.
r1 r2
5. Two cells of emf’s approximately 5V and 10V are to be accurately compared using a potentiometer of
length 400 cm.
5V 10V emf 400 cm
(A) The battery that runs the potentiometer should have voltage of 8V.
8V
(B*) The battery of potentiometer can have a voltage of 15V and R adjusted so that the potential drop
across the wire slightly exceeds 10V.
15V R
10V
(C) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself should have a potential drop of 10V
50 cm 10V
(D) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing resistances and not voltages.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. An electron is projected with uniform velocity along the axis of a current carrying long solenoid. Which
of the following is true ?
(A) The electron will be accelerated along the axis
(B) The electron path will be circular about the axis
(C) The electron will experience a force at 45º to the axis and hence execute a helical path
45º
(D*) The electron will continue to move with uniform velocity along the axis of the solenoid.
7. Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons (velocity v) produce a magnetic field B such that
v B
(A*) B v
(B) B || v
(C) it obeys inverse cube law
(D) it is along the line joining the electron and point of observation
8. A ray of light incident at an angle on a refracting face of a prism emerges from the other face
normally. If the angle of the prism is 5° and the prism is made of a material of refractive index 1.5, the
angle of incidence is:
5° 1.5 ,
:
(A*) 7.5 (B) 5° (C) 15° (D) 2.5°
9. A short pulse of white light is incident from air to a glass slab at normal incidence. After travelling
through the slab, the first colour to emerge is :
(A) blue (B) green (C) violet (D*) red
:
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10. Which of the following pairs of physical quantities does not have same dimensional formula?
(A) Work and torque (B) Angular momentum and Planck’s constant.
(C*) Tension and surface tension. (D) Impulse and linear momentum.
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
11. You measure two quantities as A = 1.0 m ± 0.2 m, B = 2.0 m ± 0.2 m. We should report correct value
for AB as:
A = 1.0 m ± 0.2 m, B = 2.0 m ± 0.2 m AB
(A) 1.4 m ± 0.4 m (B) 1.41m ± 0.15 m (C) 1.4m ± 0.3 m (D*) 1.4m ± 0.2 m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. A lift is coming from 8th floor and is just about to stop on 4th floor. Taking ground floor as origin and
positive direction upwards for all quantities, which one of the following is correct? Here x- position,
v - velocity, a -acceleration.
x- ,
v -, a -
(A) x < 0, v < 0, a > 0 (B) x > 0, v < 0, a < 0 (C*) x > 0, v < 0, a > 0 (D) x > 0, v > 0, a < 0
13. A body of mass 2kg travels according to the law x(t) = pt + qt2 + rt3 where p = 3ms–1 , q = 4ms–2 and
r = 5 ms–3 .
The force acting on the body at t = 2 seconds is
(A*) 136 N (B) 134 N (C) 158 N (D) 68 N
–2
2kg x(t) = pt + qt2 + rt3 p = 3ms–1, q = 4ms
r = 5ms–3
t =2s
(A) 136 N (B) 134 N (C) 158 N (D) 68 N
14. A body with mass 5 kg is acted upon by a force F ( 3 î 4 ĵ )N . If its initial velocity at t = 0 is
v 6 î 12 ĵ ms–1, the time at which it will just have a velocity along the y-axis is :
(A) never (B*) 10 s (C) 2 s (D) 15 s
5kg F ( 3 î 4 ĵ )N t = 0
v 6 î 12 ĵ ms–1
y
(A) (B) 10s (C) 2 s (D)15 s
15. A bicyclist comes to a skidding stop in 10 m. During this process, the force on the bicycle due to the
road is 200N and is directly opposed to the motion. The work done by the cycle on the road is
10m
200 N
(A) + 2000J (B) – 200J (C*) zero (D) – 20,000J
1 2
16. The potential energy function for a particle executing linear SHM is given by V ( x ) kx where k is the
2
force constant of the oscillator (Fig). For k = 0.5N/m, the graph of V(x) versus x is shown in the figure. A
particle of total energy E turns back when it reaches x = ± xm . If V and K indicate the P.E. and K.E.,
respectively of the particle at x = +xm, then which of the following is correct?
1 2
(SHM) V( x ) kx k
2
k = 0.5N/m, V(x) x E x = ± xm
x = +xm, V K (P.E) (K.E)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. The density of a non-uniform rod of length 1m is given by (x) = a(1+bx2)
where a and b are constants and o x 1 .
The centre of mass of the rod will be at
1m (x) = a(1+bx2)
a b o x = 1 .
3( 2 b ) 4( 2 b ) 3(3 b) 4( 3 b)
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
4(3 b ) 3( 3 b ) 3( 2 b) 3( 2 b)
Sol. When b 0, the density becomes uniform and hence the centre of mass is at x = 0.5. Only option (A)
tends to 0.5 as b 0
b 0, x = 0.5 b 0
(A)
18. A Merry-go-round, made of a ring-like platform of radius R and mass M, is revolving with angular speed
? A person of mass M is standing on it. At one instant, the person jumps off the round,radially away
from the centre of the round (as seen from the round). The speed of the round afterwards is
R M
M
(A) 2 (B*) (C) (D) 0
2
19. Two identical long conducting wires AOB and COD are placed at right angle to each other, with one
above other such that 'O' is their common point for the two. The wires carry 1 and 2 currents,
respectively. Point P is lying at distance 'd' from 'O' along a direction perpendicular to the plane
containing the wires. The magnetic field at the point 'P' will be :
() AOB COD 'O'
1 2 'O' 'd'
'P' :
0 1 0 0 2 2 0 2 2 1/ 2
(A) (B) ( 1 2) (C) ( 1 2) (D*) ( 1 2)
2 d 2 2 d 2 d 2 d
Ans. (D)
Sol.
0 i1
B due to wire (A) B1 = î
2 d
0 i1
(A) = B1 = î
2 d
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
20. A capacitor of 7 F is connected as shown in the circuit (Fig.) The internal resistance of the battery is
0.5 . The amount of charge on the capacitor plates will be :
7 F 0.5
NCERT Questions
4.14 to 4.28
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
1. Three particles each of mass m can slide on fixed frictionless horizontal circular tracks in the same
horizontal plane as shown in the figure. The coefficient of restitution being e = 0.5. Assuming that m2
and m3 are at rest initially and lie along a radial line before impact and the spring is initially unstretched,
then maximum extension in spring in subsequent motion.
m
e = 0.5 m2 m3
3 m 3 m 3 2m 3 m
(A) V0 (B*) V0 (C) V0 (D) V0
4 k 4 5 k 4 5 k 5 k
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Velocity just after collision
V0 = V1 + V2 ....(A)
1 V1 V2
=
2 V0
V
–V1 + V2 = 0 ....(B)
2
from (A) & (B)
(A) (B)
V0 3V0
V1 = & V2 =
4 4
When maximum extension occur’s then angular speed with respect to centre for mass m2 & m3 are
same. Using angular momentum conservation about centre of circle.
m2 m3
3
m V0 (2R) + 0 = mR2 + m (2R)2
4
3 V0
=
10 R
3
So velcoity of m2 = V
5 0
3
m2 = V0
5
3
& velcoity of m3 = V
10 0
3
m3 = V
10 0
When extension is maximum using energy conservation.
2 2 2
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 2 3 m
m V0 = m V0 + m V0 + kxmax. xmax = V
2 4 2 5 2 10 2 4 0 5 k
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Figure shows the roller coaster track. Each car will start from rest at point A and will roll with negligible
friction. It is important that there should be at least some small positive normal force exerted by the
track on the car at all points, otherwise the car would leave the track. With the above fact, the minimum
safe value for the radius of curvature at point B is (g = 10 m/s2) :
() A
B (g = 10 m/s2) :
3. Three point masses A,B,C each of mass m are moving on the same circular path and are always
equidistant from each other. The radius of circle is R and the speed of each mass is same and equal to
V. The only force acting on each mass is the graviational force because of the other two masses.
Choose the correct statement.
m A,B,C
R V
(A*) power of the graviational force by A on B is non-zero
(B) power of the graviational force by A on B is zero
(C*) power of net force on A in the frame of B is zero
(D*) the ratio of magnitude of relative velocity of A with respect B and A with respect to C is 1 : 1
(A*) A B
(B) A B
(C*) B A
(D*) B A C A 1 : 1
4. A smooth track is in the form of a quarter circle of radius 10 m lies in the vertical plane. A bead moves
from A to B along the circular track under the action of forces F1 , F2 and F3 . Force F1 acts always
towards point B and is always 20N in magnitude. Force F2 always acts horizontally and is always 25 N
in magnitude. Force F3 always acts tangentially to the track and is of constant magnitude 10 N. Select
the correct answer.
10 m A B
F1 , F2 F3 F1 B
20N F2 25 N
F3 10 N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A) Work done by F1 is 750 J on the bead F1 750 J
(B*) Work done by F2 is 250 J on the bead F2 250 J
(C*) Work done by F3 is 50 J on the bead F3 50 J
(D) Work done by F3 is 100 2 J on the bead F3 100 2 J
Sol. Work done by F1 = 20 × 10 2 = 200 2 J
F1 = 20 × 10 2 = 200 2 J
Work done F2 = 25 × 10 = 250 J
F2 = 25 × 10 = 250 J
2 R
Work done by F3 = 10 × = 50 J.
4
2 R
F3 = 10 × = 50 J.
4
5. A point moves in the plane so that its tangential acceleration wt = a & its normal acceleration wn = bt4,
where a & b are positive constants & t is time. At the moment
t = 0 the point was at rest. Find how the curvature radius R of the point's trajectory & the total
acceleration w depend on the distance covered s.
wt = a wn = bt4 , a b
t t = 0 s
R W
2
a3 4bs2
[ Ans: R = , =a 1 ]
2bs a3
COMPREHENSION
One mole of a diatomic gas is heated under a "Kibolinsky Process" in which gas pressure is
4
temperature controlled according to law P= CT3/2. Where C is Kibolinsky constant. In this process,
5
gas is heated by 300 K temperature. Answer the following questions.
(Kibolinsky Process)
4
P = CT3/2 C
5
300 K
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4
Sol. For P CT3/2
=
5
We have PV3 = Constant
Thus molar specific heat of gas is
R R 5R
C = CV + = CV – = 2 R [as CV = ]
1 3 2 2
Heat supplied to gas in temperature increment by T = 300 K in this process is
Q = nC T = n (2R) (300) = 600 R
Charge in internal energy of gas in this process is
5R
U = nCV T = × 300 = 750 R.
2
Thus work done by the gas is
W = Q – U = – 150 R.
4
or P = CT3/2
5
PV3 =
R R 5R
C = CV + = CV – = 2 R [CV = ]
1 3 2 2
T = 300 K
Q = nC T = n (2R) (300) = 600 R
5R
U = nCV T = × 300 = 750 R.
2
W = Q – U = – 150 R.
9. Three wires are carrying same constant current i in different directions. Four loops enclosing the wires
in different manners are shown. The direction of d is shown in the figure :
i d
Loop-1
i i
Loop-2
i
Loop-3
Loop-4
Column I Column II
(A) Along closed Loop-1 (p) B .d = µ0 i
1
(B) Along closed Loop-2 (q) B .d = –µ0 i
2
(C) Along closed Loop-3 (r) B .d =0
3
(D) Along closed Loop-4 (s) net work done by the magnetic force to move a unit charge
along the loop is zero.
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Ans. (A) q,s (B) p,s (C) q,s (D) p,s
Sol. Work done by magnetic force on a charge = 0 in any part of its motion.
'S' is matching for all parts (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)
For loop 1 in
= –i +i–i =–i B.d = 0( i)
For loop 2 in
=i –i +i =i B.d = 0 (i)
For loop 3 in
= –i – i +i = –i B.d = 0( i)
For loop 4 in
= + i + i – i = +i B.d = 0 (i)
(Note : That current will be taken as positive which produces lines of magnetic field in the same sense
in which d is taken)
Sol. = 0
'S' (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)
1 in
= –i +i –i =–i B.d = 0( i)
2 in
=i –i +i =i B.d = 0 (i)
3 in
= –i – i +i = –i B.d = 0( i)
4 in
= + i + i – i = +i B.d = 0 (i)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
2. A mercury drop of water has potential 'V' on its surface. 1000 such drops combine to form a new drop.
Find the potential on the surface of the new drop.
V 1000
(A) V (B) 10V (C*) 100V (D) 1000V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. If the switch is closed then current will flow :
(A) from A to B (A B)
(B*) from B to A (B A)
(C) 0
(D) cannot say unless resistance of galvanometer is given.
4. All straight wires are very long. Both AB and CD are arcs of the same circle, both subtending right
angles at the centre O. Then the magnetic field at O is :
AB CD O
O
0i 0i 0i 0i
(A) (B) 2 (C*) (D) ( 1)
4 R 4 R 2 R 2 R
0i
Sol. field due to AA' =
4 R
= field due to BB'
field due to CC' = field due to DD' = 0
i
field due to BA = 0
8R
– 0i i
field due to CD = net field at O = 0 .
8R 2 R
i
AA' = 0
4 R
= BB'
CC' = DD' = 0
i
BA = 0
8R
– 0i i
CD = O = 0
8R 2 R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. If a charged particle goes unaccelerated in a region containing electric and magnetic fields :
(A) E must be parallel to B (B*) v must be perpendicular to Electric field
(C) v must be perpendicular to B (D) E must be equal to vB.
_
(A) E , B (B*) v
(C) v , B (D) E, vB .
Sol. qE = – (V B)
E = – (V B) E V and E B
6. The maximum load a wire can withstand without breaking, when its length is reduced to half of its
original length, will
(A) be double. (B) be half.
(C) be four times. (D*) remain same.
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
7. A mild steel wire of length 2L and cross-sectional area A is stretched, well within elastic limit,
horizontally between two pillars (Fig.). A mass m is suspended from the mid point of the wire. Strain in
the wire is :
2L A
m
x2 x x2 x2
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2L2 L L 2L
8. A rectangular frame is to be suspended symmetrically by two strings of equal length on two supports
(Fig.). It can be done in one of the following three ways;
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. An ideal fluid flows through a pipe of circular cross-section made of two sections with diameters 2.5 cm
and 3.75 cm. The ratio of the velocities in the two sections is
2.5
cm 3.75 cm
(A*) 9:4 (B) 3:2 (C) 3: 2 (D) 2: 3
10. The angle of contact at the interface of water-glass is 0°, Ethylalcohol-glass is 0°, Mercury-glass is 140°
and Methyliodide-glass is 30°. A glass capillary is put in a trough containing one of these four liquids. It
is observed that the meniscus is convex. The liquid in the trough is
(A) water (B) ethylalcohol (C*) mercury (D) methyliodide.
0°, 0°,
140° 30°
(A) (B) (C) (D)
11. A uniform metallic rod rotates about its perpendicular bisector with constant angular speed. If it is
heated uniformly to raise its temperature slightly
(A) its speed of rotation increases.
(B*) its speed of rotation decreases.
(C) its speed of rotation remains same.
(D) its speed increases because its moment of inertia increases.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
12. The graph between two temperature scales A and B is shown in Fig. Between upper fixed point and
lower fixed point there are 150 equal division on scale A and 100 on scale B. The relationship for
conversion between the two scales is given by :
A B A B
150 100
tA 180 tB t A 30 tB tB 180 tA t B 40 tA
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
100 150 150 100 150 100 100 180
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. The radius of a metal sphere at room temperature T is R, and the coefficient of linear expansion of the
metal is . The sphere is heated a little by a temperature T so that its new temperature is T + T . The
increase in the volume of the sphere is approximately
T R
T T+ T
(A) 2 R T (B) R2 T (C) 4 R3 T/3 (D*) 4 R3 T
4
Sol. original volume Vo = R3
3
Coeff of linear expansion =
Coeff of volume expansion = 3
1 dV
3
V dT
dV = 3V dT 4 R3 T
14. A sphere, a cube and a thin circular plate, all of same material and same mass are initially heated to
same high temperature.
(A) Plate will cool fastest and cube the slowest
(B) Sphere will cool fastest and cube the slowest
(C*) Plate will cool fastest and sphere the slowest
(D) Cube will cool fastest and plate the slowest.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
15. If an average person jogs, hse produces 14.5 × 103 cal/min. This is removed by the evaporation of
sweat. The amount of sweat evaporated per minute (assuming 1 kg requires 580 × 103 cal for
evaparation) is:
14.5 × 103 cal/min
1 kg 580 × 103 cal )
:
(A*) 0.25 kg (B) 2.25 kg (C) 0.05 kg (D) 0.20 kg
16. The displacement of a particle is represented by the equation y = 3 cos 2 t .
4
The motion of the particle is :
(A) simple harmonic with period 2 / . (B*) simple harmonic with period /
(C) periodic but not simple harmonic. (D) non-periodic.
y = 3 cos 2 t .
4
:
(A) 2 / . (B*) /
(C) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. Four pendulums A, B, C and D are suspended from the same elastic support as shown in Fig.. A and C
are of the same length, while B is smaller than A and D is larger than A. If A is given a transverse
displacement (perpendicular to the plane of the paper),
B
C A
D
B
C A
D
18. A particle executing S.H.M. has a maximum speed of 30 cm/s and a maximum acceleration of 60 cm/s2.
The period of oscillation is
30 cm/s 60 cm/s2
:
(A*) s. (B) s (C) 2 s (D) s
2 t
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. When a mass m is connected individually to two springs S1 and S2, the oscillation frequencies are 1
and 2. If the same mass is attached to the two springs as shown in Fig. the oscillation frequency would
be
m S1 S2
1
2
:
1
2 2 1 1 2 2
(A) 1
+ 2
(B*) 1 2 (C) (D) 1 2
1 2
x
20. Equation of a plane progressive wave is given by y = 0.6sin2 . On reflection from a denser
t
2
medium its amplitude becomes 2/3 of the amplitude of the incident wave.
The equation of the reflected wave is
x
y = 0.6sin2 t
2
2/3 :
x x
(A) y = 0.6sin2 t (B*) y = –0.4sin2 t
2 2
x x
(C) y = 0.4sin2 t (D) y = –0.4sin2 t
2 2
NCERT Questions
5.1 to 5.15
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
O
4 4 2
(A*) (B) (C) (D) zero
3 9 3
Sol.
i1 = 4A
i2 = 6A i3 = –3A.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A very thin plano convex lens of refractive index = 3/2 and radius of curvature 15 cm kept fixed as
shown :
= 3/2 15 cm
4cm/s P
1cm
36 cm
A point object P starts moving with constant speed 4 cm/s parallel to optical axis from the shown
position at t = 0. The average speed of image of object from t = 0 to t = 6 sec is
t = 0 P 4 cm/s
t = 0 t = 6 sec
(A) 20 cm/s (B*) greater than 20 cm/s
(C) less than 20 cm/s (D) can’t say
(A) 20 cm/s (B*) 20 cm/s
(C) 20 cm/s (D)
Pf Pi
180 cm
Sol. 1cm
t = 6 sec t=0 36 cm 60 cm 5 cm
60 cm Ii
1 3 1
–1
f 2 15
f = 30 cm.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–
v 36 30 v 30 36 180
v = 180 cm
Ans. (B)
3. An isolated smooth ring of mass M = 2m with two small beads each of mass m is as shown in the
figure. Initially both the beads are at diametrically opposite points and have velocity v0 (for each) in
same direction. The speed of the beads just before they collide for the first time is (complete system is
placed on a smooth horizontal surface and assume each point of ring is touching the surface)
M = 2m m
v0
(
)
2 v0 3
(A) v0 (B) v0 (C) (D*) v0
3 2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
4. In the figure shown radius of curvature of either surface of equi convex half lens is 40 cm and refractive
index 1.5. Its one side is silvered. A plane mirror is also placed. A small object O is placed such that
there is no parallax between final image formed by lens and mirror. If transverse length of final image
formed by silvered lens system is twice that formed by mirror. Choose the correct options :
40 cm 1.5
O (parallax)
(silvered)(transverse length)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2(a b) a
Sol. 2
a
a + 2b = 2a 2b = a
1 2
(1.5 1) f2 = 40
f2 40
fm = –20
1 1 2
f = –10 cm
F fm f2
1 1 1
a=5
V u F
1 1 1
b = 2.5
2a a 10
5. A particle of mass m is attached to an end of a uniform rod of mass M=2m and length , which is
suspended through its mid point by an inextensible string as shown.Initially the rod is in horizontal
position and at rest. The system is released from this position.Just after the release
m M = 2m
6g
(A*) The angular acceleration of the system is
5
2g
(B) The angular acceleration of the system is
5
12
(C*) The Tension in the string is mg
5
2
(D) The Tension in the string is mg
5
6g 2g
(A*) (B)
5 5
12 2
(C*) mg (D) mg
5 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
mg 2m 2 m 2
Sol. =
2 12 4
6g
=
5
g
acm = =
6 5
3mg
3mg – T =
5
12mg
T=
5
N
Alternate : mg
The FBD of the rod and the ball are shown. Applying = about the C.M of the rod, we have,
FBD =
M 2
N =
2 12
Writing newtons IInd law in the vertical direction on the CM of the rod we have
T– N – 2mg = 0
and writing newtons II law in the vertical direction on the ball we have
m g – N= m
2
Solve these equations.
6. There is a circuit diagram in which capacitors, resistors & battery are given. Then choose the correct
option (s) (Assume initally all the capacitors are uncharged)
()
Sol.
x2
7. A rod of uniform cross–section but non–uniform thermal conductivity which vary as k = k0 (1 x L)
L2
(as shown in figure) is kept between fixed temperature difference for a long time. Select the correct
option(s) :
x2
k = k0 (1 x
L2
L)
Ans. (A,D)
T x
k0 x 2 dT iL2 dx
Sol. i= A dT
L 2 dx
TH
k0 A
1
x2
x
iL2 1
T – TH =
k0A x 1
Comprehension
An elastic string of unit cross–sectional area and natural length (a + b) where a > b and modulii of
elasticity Y has a particle of mass m attached to it at a distance a from one end , which is fixed to a
point A of a smooth horizontal plane. The other end of the string is fixed to a point B so that string is just
unstretched. If particle is displaced towards right by distance x0 and then released,
(a + b) a > b Y
m aA
B
x0
O
A B
a b
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. The time period of the oscillation will be :
(a b)m m (a b)m m
(A) 2 (B) 2 ( a b) (C) (D*) ( a b)
Y Y Y Y
a b a b
(A) a + b (B) 2 a (C*) x0 (D) x0
a b
O
A a b
Sol.
from tB 0
x
T=y
a
d2 x y
2
x
dt am
am
tB 0
2 y
bm
simply tB 0 other ext. =
2 y
bm
tB 0 =
2 y
m
Time period = ( a b)
y
Energy conservation
y x 02 y c2
2a 2b
b
c = x0
a
Distance (ext. to ext.) ()
b a
x0 + c = x0
a
10. A beam consisting of four types of ions A, B, C and D enters a region that contains a uniform magnetic
field as shown. The field is perpendicular to the plane of the paper, but its precise direction is not given.
All ions in the beam travel with the same speed. The table below gives the masses and charges of the
ions.
Region containing
Magnetic field
1, 2, 3 4
Column I Column II
(a) A (P) 1
(b) B (Q) 2
(c) C (R) 3
(d) D (S) 4
Ans. (a) R (b) S (c) Q (d) P
mV
Sol. r=
qB
2mV
rA =
eB
4mV
rB =
eB
2mV mV
rC = rD =
eB eB
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
v 12 v 22
Sol. v= = 25.5 m/s
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A block of mass m1 = 2 kg on a smooth inclined plane at angle 30° is connected to a second block of
mass m2 = 3 kg by a cord passing over a frictionless pulley as shown in fig. The acceleration of each
2
block is- (assume g = 10 m/sec )
30° m1 = 2 m2 = 3
(g = 10 2)
m2
30°
2 2 2 2
(A) 2 m/sec (B*) 4 m/sec (C) 6 m/sec (D) 8 m/sec
m g m1gsin 30
Sol. a= 2
m1 m2
2 2
a= g = 4 m/s
5
5. A particle of mass 100 g is thrown vertically upwards with a speed of 5 m/s. The work done by the force
of gravity during the time the particle goes up is :
100 g 5 m/s
(A) – 0.5 J (B*) – 1.25 J (C) 1.25 J (D) 0.5 J
Sol. The height (h) tranversed by particle while going up is :
(h)
u2 25
h= =
2g 2 9.8
Work done by gravity force = mg.h
= mg.h
25
= 0.1 × g × cos180
2 9.8
(Angle between force and displacement is 180°)
(180° )
25
W = – 0.1 × = – 1.25 J
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A particle of mass m is executing a uniform motion along a circular path of radius r. If the magnitude of its
linear momentum is p, the radial force acting on the particle will be.
m r
P
(A) pmr (B) rm/p (C) mp2/r (D*) p2/mr
mv 2
Sol. F = = p2/mr
r
7. A shell is fired from a cannon with a velocity v at an angle with the horizontal direction. At the highest
point in its path, it explodes into two equal pieces, one retraces its path to the cannon and the speed of
the other piece immediately after the explosion is :
v
3 3
(A*) 3 cos (B) 2 cos (C) cos (D) cos
2 2
Sol. P1 = Pf
m m
mV cos = (–V cos + V) [DPP (JA) 2013-2014]
2 2
V = 3V cos
8. A 1.0kg ball drops vertically into a floor from a height of 25 cm. It rebounds to a height of 4cm. The
coefficient of restitution for the collision is -
1.0kg 25 cm 4cm
(A) 0.16 (B) 0.32 (C*) 0.40 (D) 0.56
Sol. Velocity just before collision = u = 2gh = 5 m/s
9. If the radius of the earth is suddenly contracts to half of its present value, then the duration of day will
be of
(A*) 6 hours (B) 12 hours (C) 18 hours (D) 24 hours
(A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 24
Sol. Using energy conservation
1
= 2
R1 T2
R2 T1
T2 = 6 hours
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. A solid sphere and a solid cylinder having the same mass and radius, roll down the same incline. The
ratio of their acceleration will be
(A*) 15 : 14 (B) 14 : 15 (C) 5 : 3 (D) 3 : 5
gsin
Sol. a=
1
MR 2
1
1
a1 2 = 15 : 14
a2 2
1
5
11. Two simple pendulums of lengths 1 meter and 16 meteres respectively are both given small
displacements in the same direction at the same instant. They will again be in phase at same position
after the shorter pendulum has completed n oscillations where n is
1 16
n
n
1 4
(A) (B) (C) 5 (D*) 4
4 3
n1 2
Sol.
n2 1
n1 16
4
n2 1
n=4
12. If you set up the seventh harmonic on a string fixed at both ends, how many nodes and antinodes are
set up in it -
(A*) 8, 7 (B) 7, 7 (C) 8, 9 (D) 9, 8
Sol. 8, 7
13. Two identical flutes produce fundamental notes of frequency 300 Hz at 27°C. If the temperature of air in
one flute is increased to 31°C, the number of the beats heard per second will be
27°C 300 Hz
31°C,
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
f 1
Sol. =
f 2
f=2
14. The gases carbon-monoxide (CO) and nitrogen at the same temperature have kinetic energies E1 and
E2 respectively. Then :
(A*) E1 = E2 (B) E1 > E2
(C) E1 < E2 (D) E1 and E2 cannot be compared
(CO) N2 E1 E2
(A*) E1 = E2 (B) E1 > E2
(C) E1 < E2 (D) E1 E2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. The gases carbon-monoxide (CO) and nitrogen (N2) are diatomic, so both have equal kinetic energy
5
KT , i.e. E1 = E2.
2
(CO) (N2)
5
KT , E1 = E2.
2
5
(CO) (N2) KT E1 = E2.
2
15. For a black body at temperature 727°C, its net radiating power is 60 watt and temperature of
surrounding is 227°C. If temperature of black body is changed to 1227°C then its net radiating power
will be-
(A) 304 W (B*) 320 W (C) 240 W (D) 120 W
727°C 60
227°C 1227°C
(A) 304 (B*) 320 (C) 240 (D) 120
4 4
Sol. 60 = K(1000 – 500 ) ...(i)
E = K(15004 – 5004) ...(ii)
E 15004 500 4
from (i) and (ii) E = 320
60 1000 4 500 4
E 15004 500 4
(i) (ii) E = 320
60 1000 4 500 4
16. A body takes 10 minutes to cool down from 62°C to 50°C. If the temperature of surrounding is 26°C
then in the next 10 minutes temperature of the body will be :
26°C 62°C 50°C 10
10 :
(A) 38°C (B) 40°C (C*) 42°C (D) 44°C
Sol. From Newton's cooling law
1 2 1 2
K 26
t 2
12
Case (): = K × 30
10
12 1
K= =
10 30 25
50 2 50 2 50 2 1 2 2
Case : K 26
10 2 10 25 2
250 – 5 2 = 2 – 2 6 2
= 252
252
2
= = 42°C
6
17. A current loop consists of two identical semicircular parts each of radius R, one lying in the x-y plane
and the other in x-z plane. If the current in the loop is i. The resultant magnetic field due to the two
semicircular parts at their common centre is
R x-
y x-z i
0i 0i 0i 0i
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 2R 2R 4R 2R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. The loop mentioned in the question must look like one as shown in the figure.
1 0i
Magnetic field at the centre due to semicircular loop lying in x-y plane, B xy negative z
2 2R
direction
1 0i
Similarly field due to loop in x–z plane, Bxz = in negative y direction.
2 2R
Magnitude of resultant magnetic field,
2 2
0i 0i
B = B 2xy B 2xz
4R 4R
0i 0i
= 2
4R 2 2R
Sol.
1 0i
x-y B xy , z
2 2R
1 0i
x–z , Bxz = y
2 2R
2 2
0i 0i
B = B 2xy B 2xz
4R 4R
0i 0i
= 2
4R 2 2R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Directin of force along +y direction . so partical passes through the+y axis at a distance 2r form origin.
+y y 2r
2mv 2 v 0
y = 2r = =
qB B0
20. Two identical capacitors A and B shown in the given circuit are joined in series with a battery. If a
dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is slipped between the plates of capacitor B and battery remains
connected, then the energy of capacitor A will-
A B K
B A
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. The spectra of a black body at temperatures 273°C and 546°C are shown in the figure. If A1 and A2 be
A2
the areas under the two curves respectively, the value of is
A1
546°C
E
273°C
81 16 27 16
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
16 1 8 81
2. The time constant of the circuit shown in the figure is
R
C
R
R
R
3RC 5RC 2RC
(A) (B) RC (C*) (D)
2 3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. In a arrangement, 3n cells of emf and internal resistance r are connected in series. Out of 3n cells,
polarity of n cells is reversed. Current in the circuit is
r 3n 3n
n
r r
2 2
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
r 3r 3r r
4. A block of mass m = 1 kg is placed on a smooth surface and is connected with a spring of spring
constant k = 100 N/m and another end of spring is connected to a fixed wall as shown. The block is
pulled by a distance A = 0.10 m from its natural length and released at t = 0.
m = 1kg (smooth) k = 100 N/m
A = 0.10 m t = 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
K
Sol. = = 10 rad/s
m
2 2
T= s
10
2
T/4 = = s.
10 4 20
T
0.1 m s
20 4
1 T 2 2 2
× 0.1m = s
2 4 3 10 4 3 30
5. A long, straight wire carries a current along the Z-axis. One can find two points in the X-Y plane such
that
(A) the magnetic fields are equal
(B*) the directions of the magnetic fields are the same
(C*) the magnitudes of the magnetic fields are equal
(D*) the field at one point is opposite to that at the other point
Z- x - y
-
(A)
(B*)
(C*)
(D*)
6. A particle starts moving from the origin & moves along positive x-direction. Its rate of change of kinetic
energy with time shown on y-axis varies with time t as shown in the graph. If position, velocity,
acceleration & kinetic energy of the particle at any time t are x, v, a & k respectively then which of the
option (s) may be correct ?
x-t
y- t
x, v, a k
(A*) (B*)
(C) (D*)
x
dk
Sol. t
dt
k t2 ...........(i)
v t .............(ii) v vs t : st. line
x t2 ...........(iii) x vs t : parabola
(i) & (iii) k x ...........(iv) k vs x : st. line
(ii) a = constant
(ii) & (iii) v2 x..............(v) v2 vs x : st. line
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
dk
. t
dt
k t2 ...........(i)
v t .............(ii) v t :
x t ...........(iii)
2
x t :
(i) (iii) k x ...........(iv) k x :
(ii) a =
(ii) (iii) v2 x..............(v) v2 x :
Comprehension
Water is filled to a height h in a fixed vertical cylinder placed on horizontal surface. At time t=0 a small
hole is drilled at a height h/4 from bottom of cylinder as shown. The cross section area of hole is a and
the cross-section area of cylinder is A such that A > > a.
h t = 0 h/4
a
A A > > a.
h/4 h/4
x x
Horizontal surface
7. Let the value of horizontal distance of point where the water fall on horizontal surface from bottom of
cylinder be x as shown.Then from time t = 0 till water comes out of hole, pick the correct statement:
x t = 0
(A) x increases with time.
(B*) x decreases with time.
(C*) After coming out from hole water falls in parabolic path
(D) Velocity of efflux increases with time
(A) x
(B*) x
(C)
(D)
8. As long as water comes out of hole, the time taken by a water particle starting from hole to reach the
horizontal surface:
(A) increases (B) decreases
(C*) remains constant (D) increases and then decreases
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
9. The duration of time for which water flows out of hole is:
A 3h a 3h A 2h
(A*) (B) (C) (D) None of these
a 2g A 2g a 3g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
h
Sol. The initial velocity of water coming out of hole is horizontal and hole is at a height from ground.
4
2(h / 4 )
Hence time taken by water to reach ground is t = which remains constant.
g
x = vt where v is velocity of effux....
Since v decreases wth time x will decrease.
y v
v
y v
v
v
x y
dy av a 2gy
– = =
dt A A
0 dy t a A 3h
dt t=
3h / 4 2gy 0 A a 2g
10. Match the statements in Column with the results in Column and indicate your answer
Column – I Column – II
(a) A thin uniform spherical shell of surface area 'S' has an (P) is independent of 'S'
initial temperature more than its surrounding atmosphere.
Then magnitude of rate of change of its temperature with
time (assuming density of material remains constant)
(b) A soap bubble initially in equilibrium is given a charge Q, (Q) depends on 'S'
which distributes uniformly over its surface. The centre of
the bubble is always fixed. For the duration the bubble
having surface area 'S' expands, the magnitude of electric
potential at a fixed point always lying outside the bubble
(c) A container with open top and filled with ideal liquid is (R) remains constant
placed at rest on a smooth horizontal table. A small hole
of area 'S' is drilled at the bottom of a side wall of container.
The magnitude of force exerted by escaping liquid on the container
(d) An infinitely long straight current carrying wire lies along the (S) decreases with time
axis of a closed cylindrical surface of total surface area 'S' in
space. As the magnitude of current in the wire is continuously
increased, the magnitude of the magnetic flux through the
surface of this cylinder
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
– I – II
(A) 'S' (p) 'S'
()
(B) (q) 'S'
Q
(fixed)
S
(fixed)
(C) (r)
(side wall) (bottom) 'S'
()
(D) (closed) 'S' (s)
(space)
Ans. (a) P,S (B) P,R (C) Q,S (D) P,R
Sol. (a) The rate of change of heat energy of thin shell of mass m, specific heat C, radius R and width dR is
given by
dT
mC = sA (T4 – T04)
dt
dT
or (r 4pR2 dR) C = s (4 p R2) (T4 – T04)
dt
dT (T 4 T04 )
Hence the magnitude of rate of change of temperature
dt C
is independent of S = 4 pR2 and decreases with time as temperature of shell T decreases with time.
(B) The potential outside bubble can be found by simply concentrating net charge on bubble at its
centre. Hence potential at fixed point outside is constant and independent of S.
(C) The magnitude of force exerted by liquid of density r escaping with speed v is rSv2. Hence this force
depends on S and decreases with time as amount of liquid in container decreases resulting in
continuous decrease of v.
(D) The magnitude flux through surface S of closed cylinder is zero. Hence it is constant and
independent of S.
(A) m , C , R dR
dT
mC = sA (T4 – T04)
dt
dT
(r 4pR2 dR) C = s (4 p R2) (T4 – T04)
dt
dT ( T 4 T04 )
dt C
S = 4 px2
(B)
S
(C) v r r S v2 S
v
(D) S S
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. In the figure shown, a small ball of mass 'm' can move without sliding in a fixed semicircular track of
radius R in vertical plane. It is released from the top. The resultant force on the ball at the lowest point
of the track is
'm' R
10mg 17 mg 3 mg
(A*) (B) (C) (D) zero
7 7 7
Sol. From conservation of energy, the kinetic energy of ball at lowest portion is (vc = speed of centre of ball)
(vc = )
1 1 2
mv c2 + mv c2 = mgR
2 2 5
7
or mv c2 = mgR
10
Since net tangential force on sphere at lowest point is zero, net force on sphere at lowest position is
mv 2c 10
mg = upwards.
R 7
3. An elastic rod will change its length, if
(A*) the rod is suspended at one end
(B) The rod is allowed to fall freely under gravity
(C*) the rod is rotated about one end on a frictionless horizontal table
(D*) the rod is given a horizontal acceleration by a force applied at one end
(A*)
(B)
(C*)
(D*)
4. Figure shows a solid resistance wire of uniform material but non–uniform cross–section area. A,B and
C are the three sections. Current flowing is i, electric field at a section is E, potential is V and flux of
electric field cut by a cross–section is then,
A,B C
i, E V
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A)
Current will be same for each section
(B) E a Vd, so EB > EA > EC
1
J E E
A
J
(C) = E.A .A
So, = i
as 'i' is same for each section, so is also same
'i'
(D) current flows from high potential to low potential so VA > VB > VC .
(D) VA > VB > VC .
5. Two identical balls each of mass m moving on straight track approaching towards each other with same
speed. Final kinetic energy of the two ball system is equal to the total energy loss during collision. E is
the total kinetic energy of the balls before collision and E' is after collision and coefficient of restitution is
e. Then choose the correct options
m
E E' e
E 1 1 E
(A*) 2 (B) e = (C*) e = (D) 2
E' 2 2 E'
Sol. m u u m
E = mu2
1 m
E= (2u)2 (1 – e2) = mu2(1 – e2)
2 2
E' = E – E = mu2(1 – 1+ e2) = mu2e2
since E' = E
mu2e2 = mu2(1 – e2)
1 1
e2 = 1 – e 2 e2 = e
2 2
E 1
and 2
E' e2
6. Figure shows a branch/portion of circuit. The electric potential at the junction is found to be 2x volts.
Find x.
2x x
Ans. 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
Applying KCl
2x 10 2x 10 2x 10
=0
5 5 1 5 2
84x + 70x + 60x = 420 + 350 + 300
1070
x=
214
x=5
COMPREHENSION
A uniform and constant magnetic field B (20 ˆi 30 ˆj 50k)
ˆ Tesla exists in space. A charged particle
3
q 10
with charge to mass ratio C/kg enters this region at time t = 0 with a velocity
m 19
V (20 ˆi 50 ˆj 30k)
ˆ m/s. Assume that the charged particle always remains in space having the given
q 103
C/kg V (20 ˆi 50ˆj 30k)
ˆ m/s
m 19
t = 0
( 2 = 1.4 )
7. During the further motion of the particle in the magnetic field B ,
B
(A*) the angle between the magnetic field B and velocity of the particle remains constant
(B) the angle between the magnetic field B and velocity of the particle increases
(C*) Radius of curvature remain constant
(D*) the angle between the acceleration and velocity of the particle does not depend on mass of the particle.
(A*) B
(B) B
(C*)
(D*)
Sol. The component of velocity of charged particle along the magnetic field does not change. The
component of velocity of charged particle normal to magnetic field only changes in direction but always
remains normal to magnetic field. Hence angle between velocity and magnetic field remains same.
8. The frequency of the revolution of the particle in cycles per second will be
(cycle per second)
103 10 4 104 104
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
19 38 19 2 19
3 4
qB 10 3800 10
Sol. f= = =
2 m 19 2 38
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. The pitch of the helical path of the motion of the particle will be
(helical)
(A) m (B) m (C) m (D*) m
100 125 215 250
Sol. Pitch = T.V||
= T.V||
1 V.B 38.400 4
= . 4
= m = m
f |B | 10 . 3800 103 250
10. A circular loop of conducting wire, carrying a current I in anticlockwise sense, lies in x-y plane as shown
in figure. In each statement of column-I, a external constant magnetic field is given, which exist in
space containing the loop. The term Bo given in column-I is positive constant. With the given magnetic
field in each situation of column-I, match the results given in column-II.
I x-y -I
-I Bo
-I -II
Column-I Column-II
(A) B B 0 î (p) Resultant magnetic force due to external magnetic
field on the loop is zero
(B) B B 0 ˆj (q) Magnitude of torque due to external magnetic field
on loop is non zero
(C) B B 0 k̂ (r) Magnetic potential energy of current carrying loop
in presence of external magnetic field is nonnegative.
(D) B B 0 ( î ĵ ) (s) Magnetic force on the loop has tendency to expand
the loop
-I -II
(A) B B 0 î (p)
(B) B B 0 ˆj (q)
(C) B B 0 k̂ (r)
(non negative)
(D) B B 0 ( î ĵ ) (s) (expand)
Ans. (A) p,q,r (B) p,q,r, (C) p,s (D) p,q,r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (A), (B) and (D): In all these three cases, uniform and constant magnetic field is in plane of the loop,
Hence angle between magnetic field and dipole moment of loop is 90o. Therefore magnetic potential
energy is zero, that is, nonnegative. Torque is maximum in magnitude. Force on a current carrying loop
in uniform magnetic field is always zero. The magnetic field only causes the the loop to rotate, as it
acts at each point on the loop in direction perpendicular to plane of the loop. Hence magnetic force on
the loop has no tendency to expand the loop.
(C) In this option, dipole moment of loop and external magnetic field are in same direction, hence
magnetic potential energy is negative and net torque on loop is zero. Magnetic field exert zero net zero
force on loop in such a way that, on each point on loop magnetic force is radially outwards leading to
tendency of expansion of loop.
(A), (B) (D):
90o
(C)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. A rectangular loop of sides of length and b is placed in x y plane. A uniform but time varying magnetic
field of strength B = 20 t î + 10 t2 ĵ + 50 k̂ where t is time elapsed. The magnitude of induced e.m.f. at
time t is:
b x y
B = 20 t î + 10 t2 ĵ + 50 k̂ t t
(A) 20 + 20 t (B) 20 (C) 20 t (D*) zero
Sol. The area vector of loop A = ± b k̂
& B = 20t î + 10 t2 ĵ + 50k̂
Magnetic flux is = B . A = ± 50 lb
d
emf = =0
dt
3. A circular coil of radius R and a current , which can rotate about a fixed axis passing through its
diameter is initially placed such that its plane lies along magnetic field B. Kinetic energy of loop when it
rotates through an angle 90° is : (Assume that remains constant)
R ,
B
90° : (I )
R 2B 3
(A*) R2B (B) (C) 2 R2B (D) R2
2 2
Sol Loss in potential energy = gain kinetic energy
(–MB cos900) – (–MBcos00) = KE
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A semi–circular current carrying wire having radius R is placed in x–y plane with its centre at origin O.
B 0x
There is a position x dependent non–uniform magnetic field B k̂ (here B0 is positive constant)
2R
existing in the region. The force due to magnetic field acting on the semi–circular wire will be along :
R x–y O
B0x
x B k̂ ( B0 )
2R
(A*) negative x-axis (B) positive x-axis (C) negative y-axis (D) positive y-axis
(A*) x- (B) x- (C) y- (D) y-
Sol. The direction of forces on the two elements taken symmetrical on two sides of the y–axis are shown.
Clearly the net force will be on negative x-axis.
y– x-
5. A spring of spring constant ‘K’ is fixed at one end has a small block of mass m and charge q is attached
at the other end. The block rests over a smooth horizontal surface. A uniform and constant magnetic
field B exists normal to the plane of paper as shown in figure. An electric field E = E0 î (E0 is a positive
constant) is switched on at t = 0 sec. The block moves on horizontal surface without ever lifting off the
surface. Then the normal reaction acting on the block is :
‘K’ m q
B t = 0 E = E0 î (E0 )
:
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. The velocity is maximum at mean position. Hence the magnetic force on block is maximum, at its mean
position. The magnetic force on the block while it crosses the mean position towards right and left is as
shown
block
block
qVmaxB
N1
N2
Vmax Vmax
mg+qVmax B mg
Case - 1 Case - 2
Hence normal reaction is maximum in case 1 & minimum in case 2.
case : 1 case 2
6. An air capacitor is completely charged upto the energy U and removed from battery.Now distance
between plates is increased slowly by an external agent. If work done by external agent is 3U then ratio
of final sepration between the plates to the intial sepration :
U
3U
:
(A) 5 (B*) 4 (C) 3 (D) 1.5
2 2
q q
Sol. Initially, U = = ............(i)
2C 2KC 0
q2
When di–electric is pulled out, then U + 3U =
2C 0
q2
U + 3U =
2C 0
q2
4U = ............(ii)
2C 0
Then, (ii) & (i) K = 4.
7. A capacitor of capacitance C carrying charge Q is connected to a source of emf E. Finally the charge
on capacitor would be:
C Q E
(A) Q (B) Q + CE (C*) CE (D) none
8. The galvanometer shown in the figure reads 3A, while the ideal voltmeter reads 24volt.The value of
R = 7 The galvanometer resistance is:
3A 24
R = 7 :
10. Figure shows a hemisphere of charge Q and radius R and a sphere of charge 2Q and radius R. The
total potential energy of hemisphere is UH and that of the sphere is US. Then.
R Q R 2Q
UH US
11. A block of silver of mass 4 kg hanging from a string is immersed in a liquid of relative density 0.72. If
relative density of silver is 10, then tension in the string will be:[ take g = 10 m/s2 ]
4 kg 0.72
10 , :[ take g = 10 m/s2 ]
(A*) 37.12 N (B) 42 N (C) 73 N (D) 21 N
Sol. Let S, L be the density of silver and liquid. Also m and V be the mass and volume of silver block.
Tension in string = mg – bouyant force
(A) S, L m V
= mg –
T=Vg – S L
Vg = ( S
– ) Vg
L
m
Also V =
s
S s (10 0. 72) 10 3
T= mg = × 4 × 10 = 37.12 N.
s 10 10 3
12. A small solid ball is dropped from a height above the free surface of a liquid. It strikes the surface of
the liquid at t = 0. The density of the material of the ball is 500 kg/m3 and that of liquid is 1000 kg/m3. If
the ball comes momentarily at rest at t = 2 sec then initial height of the ball from surface of liquid was
(neglect viscosity) :
t = 0
500kg / m3 1000 kg/m3 t = 2 sec.
(A*) 20 m (B) 10 m (C) 15 m (D) 25 m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
1000 gV 500 gV
a= ; where V is the volume of the ball.
500 V
a = 10 m/sec2
apply v = u + at 0= 2gh – 10t
2gh = 10 × (2)
2 × 10 × h = 400 h = 20 m Ans
13. The displacement x of a particle as a function of time t is shown in following figure. The figure indicates:
t x
(A*) the particle starts with a certain velocity, but the motion is retarded and finally particle stops
(B) the velocity of particle is constant throughout
(C) the acceleration of the particle is constant throughout
(D) the particle starts with a constant velocity, the motion is accelerated.
(A*)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Sol. From the graph ; we observe that slope is non–zero positive at t = 0 & slope is continuously decreasing
with time and finally becomes zero. Hence we can say that the particle starts with a certain velocity, but
the motion is retarded (decreasing velocity)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. A hollow cubical box P is moving on a smooth horizontal surface in the x–y plane with constant
acceleration of a 3 î 4 ĵ m/s2 . A block Q of mass 2kg is at rest inside the cubical box as shown in
figure. lf the coefficient of fricition between the surface of the cube P and the block Q is 0.6. Then the
force of fricition between P and Q is :
P, a 3 î 4ˆj m/s2 x–y
2kg Q P
Q 0.6 P Q :
Z
X
(A) 5 N (B) 8 N (C) 12 N (D*) 10 N
Sol. (D)
a 32 4 2 =5 m/s
fricition force f = m a
= 2×5 = 10 N
15. Three waves of amplitude 10 m, 4 m and 7 m arrive at a point with successive phase difference of
/ 2. The amplitude of the resultant wave is
10 m, 4 m 7 m / 2
(A) 2 m (B) 7 m (C*) 5 m (D) 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. Magnetisation (M) of a material depends on magnetising field (H) according to following graph :
(M), (H)
M
If same variation is studied at higher temperature then slope of the above graph will:
(A*) Remain same (B) increases
(C) Decreases (D) may increase or decrease
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
18. Magnetisation (M) of a material depends on magnetising field (H) according to following graph :
(M), (H)
M
If same variation is studied at higher temperature then slope of the above graph will:
(A) Remain same (B) increases
(C*) Decreases (D) may increase or decrease
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
19. Two magnetic bars are suspended in horizontal plane and oscillates in earth magnetic field. Their time
period of oscillations are T1 and T2. The ratio of their magnetic dipole moments is :
T1 T2
:
2 2
T1 T2 T1 T2
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
T2 T1 T2 T1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
20. A body initially at rest starts moving in x–direction. Its acceleration a is plotted against x as shown in
figure. Find the maximum velocity (in m/s) of the body ?
x–a x
(m/s )
2. Prove that a concave mirror cannot form virtual image for virtual object.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
6. (A,B,D) 7. 2 8. (A,C,D) 9. (B) 10. A(p, r), B(p, q, s, t), C(p, r),
g
D(p)
1. A particle P collides with 15 ms–1 at an angle 60° from vertical on a smooth horizontal surface. The
1
coefficient of restitution (e) is . The range R, as shown in diagram will be : [Take g = 10 m/s2]
3
P 60° 15 m/sec (e)
1
R [g = 10 m/s2]
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.(C)]
x
1
Given e
3
1
tan tan
e
3
tan 3 sin =
10
Along horizontal, m 15 sin 60° = m v sin
, m 15 sin 60° = m v sin
15 5 10
v =13.7 ms–1
2 3
v 2 sin 2
x= 2 v 2 sin 2
g g
2 3
(13.7 ) 2
= 10 = 11.25 m
10
2. A cubical block (side ) is in equilibrium at the interface of two liquids A and B. The spring balance
reads W Newton. If the block is weighted in air, the reading of the spring balance will be :
A B
W :
1 3 1 3
(A*) W + ( 1 2 )g (B) W + ( 2 1 )g
2 2
(C) W + ( 1 + 2)g 3 (D) W
Sol. W + FB – mg = 0
mg = W + FB
FB = Net buoyant force
3
= 1 ( )2 2
2
g ( 1 2) g
2 2 2
1
mg = W + ( 1
+ 2
)g 3 = weight in air
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. The displacement of a particle of mass 100 g from its mean position is given by :
100 g
x = 5 cm sin 4 [(5s–1)t + 0.4]
(A*) the period of motion is 0.1 s
(B*) the maximum acceleration of the particle is 20 2 m/s2
(C*) the energy of the particle is 0.05 2J
(D*) the force acting on the particle is 0.4 2N where displacement is 1 cm from mean position
(A*) 0.1 s
(B*) 20 2 m/s2
(C*) 0.05 2J
(D*) 0.4 2N 1 cm
5. A U tube contains water so that air column in each tube 2.20 m. A tuning fork of frequency 345 Hz
Vibrate above one of the limbs, say limb A. An immiscible liquid C of specific gravity 0.6 is now slowly
poured into the other limb B till air column in limb A resonates. Speed of sound in air = 345 ms–1, then at
this position, (Neglect the end correction)
(A*) Air column in limb B will not resonate with the same tuning fork
(B) Air column in limb B will resonate with the same tuning fork, in 2nd overtone.
(C*) The difference between water levels in the two limbs is 0.6 m
(D*) The height of liquid column C is 1.5 m
U 2.20 m 345 Hz
A C
0.6 B A
345 ms–1 (
(A*) B
(B) B
(C*) 0.6 m
(D*) C 1.5 m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. For 345 Hz, = v/f = 1m, initially column is not resonance, since 9 × /4 = 9 × 0.25 = 2.25 m and
7 × 0.25 = 1.75 m. When resonance takes place. ( odd multiples of /4, i.e., 7 × 0.25)
B A A
A
220 1.75
x
0.45
0.45
x × 0.6 = (0.90) × 1
x = 1.5 m d is correct
Air column in B is 2.20 + 0.45 – 1.50 = 1.15 m
Difference in level is 0.6 C is correct
Will not resonate with 345 Hz, since for 2nd overtone. Air column required is 0.25 × 5 = 1.25 m
6. A conducting rod of length is moved at constant velocity ‘v 0’ on two parallel, conducting, smooth, fixed
rails, that are placed in a uniform constant magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane of the rails as
shown in figure. A resistance R is connected between the two ends of the rail. Then which of the
following is/are correct :
‘v0’
B
R :
R X B V0
X
x
(A*) The thermal power dissipated in the resistor is equal to rate of work done by external person
pulling the rod.
(B*) If applied external force is doubled than a part of external power increases the velocity of rod.
(C) Lenz’s Law is not satisfied if the rod is accelerated by external force
(D*) If resistance R is doubled then power required to maintain the constant velocity v0 becomes
half.
(A*)
(B*)
(C)
(D*) R v0
Sol. Rate of work done by external agent is :
dw B L.dx
= = B Lv & thermal power dissipated in the resistor = e = (BvL)
dt dt
clearly both are equal, hence (A) .
If applied external force is doubled, the rod will experience a net force and hence acceleration. As a
result velocity increases, hence (B)
e
Since ; =
R
On doubling ‘R’, current and hence required power becomes half.
Since, P = B Lv
Hence (D).
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A wire is bend at an angle . A rod of mass m can slide along the bended wire without friction as shown
in figure. If a soap film is maintained in the frame and frame is kept in a vertical position and rod is in
equilibrium. If rod is displaced slightly in vertical direction. Find the time period of oscillation.
m
:
m
Ans. 2
g
Sol.
2T 2 tan mg ,
2
if x be the displacement in vertical direction of the rod from equilibrium position
4T tan
Fres = – 2x tan T 2 , a = 2 x,
2 m
m m
T= 2 2 2
mg g
4 T tan 4
2 4
COMPREHENSION
A horizontal thin tube of length 2L completely filled with a liquid of density rotates about a vertical axis
passing through one of its end and along the diameter of its side face with an constant angular velocity
. Two vertical thin long tubes are fitted with the horizontal tube to measure the pressure difference
between points A and B which are at same horizontal level as shown. Neglect viscous forces and
surface tension of liquid.
2L
A B
A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
dP
8. The correct variation of the pressure gradient at a distance x from the axis of rotation with
dx
various quantities:
dP
x :
dx
(A*) (B)
(C*) (D*)
9. The difference in the heights (h) of the liquid column in the two vertical thin tubes is :
:
2 2 2 2 2 2
L 3 L 5 L
(A) (B*) (C) (D) None of these
2g 2g 2g
Sol.
dm = Adx
dPA = ( Adx)a
dP
= 2x
dx
The difference in heights
2
( 2L ) 2 2 2
L 3 2 2
L
h = y2 – y1 = =
2g 2g 2g
10. Column I lists the field in a region and Column II lists the path of a charge q and mass m on which the
particle can move. Match the appropriate entries of Column II with entries of Column I. [Consider all
fields to be uniform]
Column I Column II
(A) Only electric field E is present (p) The particle can move on a straight line
(B) Only magnetic field B is present (q) The particle can move on a circle
(C) Only gravitational field g is present (r) The particle can move on parabolic path
(D) Both electric field E and magnetic field (s) The particle can remain in rest
B are present
(t) The particle can move in a helical path of
constant pitch
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
I II q m
I II []
Column I Column II
(A) E (p)
(B) B (q)
(C) g (r)
(D) E B (s)
(t)
Ans. A(p, r), B(p, q, s, t), C(p, r), D(p)
+ q
E
2. State the working principle of a potentiometer. With the help of the circuit diagram, explain how a
potentiometer is used to compare the emf’s of two primary cells. Obtain the required expression used
for comparing the emfs.
3. Write two possible causes for one sided deflection in a potentiometer experiment.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. Two bodies A and B have emissivities 0.5 and 0.8 respectively. At some temperatures the two bodies
have maximum spectral emissive powers at wavelength 8000 Å and 4000 Å respectively. The ratio of
their emissive powers at these temperatures is:
A B 0.5 0.8
8000 Å 4000 Å
5
(A*) (B) 10
128
5
(C) (D) None of these
16
Sol. Let the body have temperatures T1 and T2 respectively at wavelength 1 = 8000Å and 2= 4000Å.
From Wien’s displacement law
T = constant
1T1 = 2T2 or 8000 × T1 = 4000T2
T1 1
or =
T2 2
Emissive power = e AT4
Ratio of emissive powers at these temperature is
4
e1T14 0 .5 1 5
= = × =
e 2 T24 0 .8 2 128
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A cylinder of mass m and radius R is spined to a clockwise angular velocity o
and then gently placed
on an inclined plane for which coefficient of friction = tan is the angle of inclined plane with
horizontal. The centre of mass of the cylinder will remain stationary for time:
m R o = tan
(A) o
R/gsin (B) 2 R/3gsin
o
(C) 2 o
R/5gsin (D*) o
R/2gsin
3. A particle of mass 10 gm is placed in a potential field given by V = (50 x2 + 100) J/kg. The frequency of
oscillation in cycle/sec is :
10 V = (50 x2 + 100)
:
10 5 100 50
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
Sol. Potential energy U = mV
U = (50x2 + 100) 10–2
dU
F = dx = – (100x) 10–2
m 2x = – (100 × 10–2 ) x
10 × 10–3 2
x = 100 × 10–2 x
2
= 100, = 10
10 5
f= = =
2 2
4. A coil of radius R carries a current . Another concentric coil of radius r (r << R) carries current .
2
Initially planes of the two coils are mutually perpendicular and both the coils are free to rotate about
common diameter. They are released from rest from this position. The masses of the coils are M and m
respectively (m < M). During the subsequent motion let K1 and K2 be the maximum kinetic energies of
the two coils respectively and let U be the maximum magnitude of potential energy of magnetic
interaction of the system of the coils. Choose the correct options.
R
r (r << R)
2
M m (m < M) K1
K2 U
2
K1 M R Umr 2 UMR 2
(A) = (B*) K1 = 2 2
K2 =
K2 m r mr MR mr 2 MR 2
2
0 r2
(C*) U = (D*) K2 >> K1
4R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. 1
= 2
dt
1 2 1
K.E. =
2
mr 2
K1
= 22
K2 MR
2
2
K1 m r
=
K2 M R
K1 + K2 = U
2
m r
K2 K2 = U
M R
UMR 2
K2 =
mr 2 MR 2
Umr 2
K1 =
mr 2 MR 2
2
r2
U= r2 0
= 0
2 2R 4R
5. An electric dipole is placed in an electric field generated by an infinitely long wire having uniform charge
density.
(A) The net electric force on the dipole must be zero
(B*) The net electric force on the dipole may be zero
(C) The torque on the dipole due to the field must be zero
(D*) The torque on the dipole due to the field may be zero
.
(A)
(B*)
(C)
(D*)
6. A particle of mass m and charge q is fastened to one end of a light string of length l . The other end of
the string is fixed to the point O. The whole system lies on a frictionless horizontal plane. Initially, the
mass is at rest at A. A uniform electric field in the direction shown is switched on. Then :
m q l O
() A
:
A
E
l
60°
O B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2qE
(A) the speed of the particle when it reaches B is
m
qE
(B*) the speed of the particle when it reaches B is
m
(C*) the tension in the string when particles reaches at B is 2qE
(D) the tension in the string when the particle reaches at B is zero
2qE
(A) B
m
qE
(B*) B
m
(C*) B 2qE
(D) B
Sol. Work done by tension = 0
Work done by Electric field = qE × l (1–cos60°)
qE 1 qE
(B) mV 2 V
2 2 m
mV 2
(C) T qE T 2qE
COMPREHENSION
A current I amperes flows through a loop abcdefgha along the edge of a cube of width metres as
shown in figure. One corner 'a' of the loop lies at origin.
I abcdefgha
'a'
y
h c
g d
a b x
f e
I
z
7. This current path (abcdefgha) can be treated as a superposition of three square loops carrying current
. Choose the correct option?
(abcdefgha) ( )
(A*) fghaf, fabef, ebcde (B) fghaf, fabef, fgdef
(C) fghaf, abcha, ebcde (D) fgdef, fabef, ebcde
8. The unit vector in the direction of magnetic field at the the centre of cube abcdefgh of width
abcdefgh
(A) due to wire bcde is given by î (B*) due to complete loop is given by ĵ
(C*) due to ab and ef is given by ĵ (D) due to ab and ef is given by k̂
(A) bcde î (B*) ĵ
(C*) ab ef ĵ (D) ab ef k̂
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. Now if a uniform external magnetic field is B = Bo ĵ is switched on, then the unit vector in the direction
of torque due to external magnetic field ( B ) acting on the current carrying loop (abcdefgha) is
B = Bo ĵ (abcdefgha)
( B )
(A) k̂ (B) î
2iˆ ˆj
(C) (D*) none of these
5
Sol. 7-8-9.
Sol. 7 [Easy]The current path abcdefgha can be treated as superposition of three loops fghaf, fabef and
ebcde , each carrying current I.
abcdefgha fghaf, fabef ebcde ,
I
Sol. 8 [Moderate] The magnetic field at centre of cube cancels due to two square loops fghaf and ebcde
each carrying current I.Tthe magnetic field at centre of cube is only due to loop fabef. Hence the
magnetic field at centre of cube is in negative y-direction.
fghaf ebcde I
fabef y
Sol. 9 [Moderate] The current path abcdefgha can be treated as superposition of three loops fghaf, fabef and
ebcde each carrying current I. The dipole moment two square loops fghaf and ebcde each carrying
current I cancels out. Hence the dipole moment is only due to to loop fabef. Now the dipole moment of
loop is in negative y-direction and direction of external magnetic field is in positive y-direction. Therefore
torque on loop is zero.
abcdefgha fghaf, fabef ebcde I
fghaf ebcde
fabef y
y
Sol.
dw B L.dx
= = B Lv & = e = (BvL)
dt dt
(A)
(B)
e
=
R
‘R’,
, P = B Lv
(D).
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In column-1 a system is shown and a quantity called x is defined for that system. In column-2 value of x
is given. Match the proper entries from column-2 to column-1 using the codes given below the columns.
2
2 h
(P) x= (1) x=4
g
9 h 2
(Q) x= (2) x=2
4 g
2
R2
(R) x= (3) x=3
gh
Ideal liquid is filled in a cylindrical container upto (3/4)th height. Now the liquid is being rotated about
vertical axis passing through its axis of symmetry with constant angular velocity , such that liquid is on
the verge of falling out of the container
2
3 h
(S) x= (4) x=1
2g
A U tube of uniform cross section is rotated with respect to one of its limb with constant angular velocity
, such that it is half filled.
(P) (Q) (R) (S)
(A*) 2 3 4 1
(B) 3 2 1 4
(C) 3 1 4 2
(D) 2 4 1 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
-1 x 2 x
12
2
2 h
(P) x= (1) x=4
g
9 h 2
(Q) x= (2) x=2
4 g
2
R2
(R) x= (3) x=3
gh
(3/4)th
,
2
3 h
(S) x= (4) x=1
2g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (P) Restoring force = Ayg = Ah y
2
2
2 h
2
pg
(Q) Ay = 3Ay’
y
y’ =
3
4
Restoring force = Agy = Ah 2y
3
2
9 h
3
4pg
2
R2 h 2
R2 2
R2
(R) y= = =1
2g 2 2g gh
1
(S) P2 = P1 + 2
( r22 r12 )
2
1 h2 3 2
h
P2 – P1 = gh = 2
h2 =4
2 4 2g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. A diatomic ideal gas is used in a Carnot engine as the working substance. If during the adiabatic
expansion part of the cycle the volume of the gas increases from V to 32 V, the efficiency of the engine
is :
V 32 V
(A) 0.5 (B*) 0.75 (C) 0.99 (D) 0.25
Sol. TV – 1 = constant
7 7
1 1
T1 V 5 = T2 (32 V ) 5
T2 1 1 T2 1 3
= =1– =1–
T1 (32) 2 / 5 4 T1 4 4
2. A solid cylinder of mass M and radius R rolls without slipping down an inclined plane of length L and
height h. What is the speed of its centre of mass when the cylinder reaches its bottom
M R L h
3 4
(A) gh (B*) gh (C) 4 gh (D) 2gh
4 3
1 2 1
Sol. Mgh = mv 2
2 2
1 3
Mgh = mv 2
2 2
4
v= gh
3
3. A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of length L which lies at rest on a frictionless horizontal
surface . The man walks to the other end of the plank. If the mass of the plank is M/3, the distance that
the man moves relative to the ground is
L M
M/3
(A) 3 L/4 (B) 4 L/5 (C*) L/4 (D) none of these
L
Ans.
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
M
Mx + (x + L) = 0
3
4M ML
x=–
3 3
L
x=–
4
4. Two identical long, solid cylinders are used to conduct heat from temp T1 to temp T2. Originally the
cylinder are connected in series and the rate of heat transfer is H. If the cylinders are connected in
parallel then the rate of heat transfer would be :
T1 T2
H
(A) H /4 (B) 2H (C*) 4H (D) 8H
R
Sol. (B) Initially effective resistance = 2R. In parallel effective resistance = . It has reduced by a factor of
2
1/4 so rate of heat transfer would be increased by a factor of 4, keeping other parameters same.
5. In a metre bridge experiment null point is obtained at 20 cm from one end of the wire when resistance X
is balanced against another resistance Y. If X < Y, then where will be the new position of the null point
from the same end, if one decides to balance a resistance of 4X against Y ?
20 cm X,
Y X < Y
4XY
(A*) 50 cm (B) 80 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 70 cm
6. A ferromagnetic material is placed in an external magnetic field. The magnetic domains
(A) increase in size (B) decrease in size
(C*) may increase or decrease is size (D) have no relation with the field
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
7. A long, straight wire carries a current i. The magnetizing field intensity H is measured at a point P close
to the wire. A long, cylindrical iron rod is brought close to the wire so that the point P is at the centre of
the rod. The value of H at P will
(A) increase many times (B) decrease many times
(C*) remain almost constant (D) become zero
i P H
P PH
(A) (B)
(C*) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. The desirable properties for making permanent magnets are
(A*) high retentivity and high coercive force (B) high retentivity and low coercive force
(C) low retentivity and high coercive force (D) low retentivity and low coercive force
(A*) (retentivity) (coercive force)
(B) (retentivity) (coercive force)
(C) (retentivity) (coercive force)
(D) (retentivity) (coercive force)
10. The coercive force for a certain permanent magnet is 4.0 × 10 A/m. This magnet is placed inside a long
solenoid of 40 turns/cm and a current is passed in the solenoid to demagnetise it completely. Find the
current .
(A) 20A (B) 12 A (C) 5A (D*) 10 A
(coercive force) 4.0 × 10 A/m 40 /
(A) 20A (B) 12 A (C) 5A (D*) 10 A
11. A compass needls which is allowed to move in a horizontal plane is taken to a gemoagnetic pole. It
(A) will stay in north-south direction only (B) will stay in east-west direction only
(C) will become rigid showing no movement (D*) will stay in any position.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D*)
12. A semicircular wire of radius R is rotated with constant angular velocity about an axis passing through
one end and perpendicular to the plane of the wire. There is a uniform magnetic field of strength B. The
induced e.m.f. between the ends is :
'R'
B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. We connect a conducting wire from A to C and complete the semicircular loop.
A C
The loop emf in the semicircular loop is zero because its magnetic flux does not change.
emf of section APC + emf of section CQA = 0
or emf of section APC = emf of section AQC = 2Ba2
APC + CQA = 0
APC = AQC = 2Ba2
Ans. 2B a2
13. A particle moves so that its position as a function of time in MKS unit is r = î 4t 2 ĵ tk̂ . The trajectory
of the particle is -
(A*) A parabola (B) An ellipse (C) A circle (D) None
Sol. x = ct and y = 4t2
4
y = 2 x2
c
Hence parabola
MKS r = î 4 t 2 ĵ tk̂
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. x = ct and y = 4t2
4
y = 2 x2
c
Hence parabola
14. Two solid spheres A and B of equal volumes but of different densities dA and dB are connected by a
string. They are fully immersed in a fluid of density dF. They get arranged into an equilibrium state as
shown in the figure with a tension in the string. The arrangement is possible only if
A B)dA dB
dF
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. A uniform rope of length lies on a table. If the coefficient of friction is then the maximum length 1
of
the part of this rope which can overhang from the edge of the table without sliding down is
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
1 1 1
µ
1
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
1 1 1
Sol. The length of the rope which can overhang from the edge of the table without sliding down is given by
1
=
1
16. The ratio of magnetic inductions at the centre of a circular coil of radius a and on its axis at a distance
equal to its radius, will be -
a
1 2 1 2 2
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
2 1 2 2 1
0i
Sol. Bc =
2a
2
0 ia 0i
BR = 2 2 3 /2
=
2(a a ) 4 2a
BC 2 2
=
BR 1
17. A metallic rod completes its circuit as shown in the figure. The circuit is normal to a magnetic field of B
= 0.15 tesla. If the resistances of the rod is 3 the force required to move the rod with a constant
velocity of 2 m/sec is -
B = 0.15 tesla
3 2 m/sec
v=2m/s
50cm
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. The amplitude of a particle due to superposition of following S.H.Ms. Along the same line is
X1 = 2 sin 50 t; X2 = 10 sin (50 t + 37º)
X3 = 4 sin 50 t ; X4 = 12 cos 50 t
(A) 4 2 (B) 4 (C*) 6 2 (D) none of these
Hint : Amplitude phasor diagram :
resultant amplitude = 6 2
19. A uniform rod AB of mass m and length at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. An impulse P is
applied to the end B. The time taken by the rod to turn through a right angle is:
m A B B
P
2 m m m 2 m
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
P 3P 12 P 3P
Sol. (C) Impulse = change in momentum
=
m 2
P. = . (about centre of AB) (AB)
2 12
6P
=
m
m
For = ; = t t= =
2 2 2 2 6p
m
t= Ans. .
12p
20. At 450 to the magnetic meridian, the apparent dip is 300. Find the true dip.
450 300 .
Sol. At 450 to the magnetic meridian, the effective horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field is
1
B’H = BH cos 450 = BH. The apparent dip is given by
2
B 2B
tan ' 2 tan
B' H BH
where is the true dip. Thus,
tan 300 = 2 tan
or, tan 1 1/ 6
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Board Questions
1. A carbon resistance is coded with following colours of four rings :
Red, Brown, Yellow, Golden [1 Marks]
:
, , ,
Ans. 21 × 104 ± 5%
4. Why does radial magnetic field is used in moving coil galvanometer. [2 Marks]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. There exists a uniform magnetic and electric field of magnitude 1 T and 1 V/m respectively along
positive y-axis. A charged particle of mass 1 kg and of charge 1 C is having velocity 1 m/sec along x-
axis and is at origin at t = 0. Then the co-ordinates of particle at time seconds will be:
y- 1 1 1 kg
1 C x- 1 t = 0
(A) (0, 1, 2) (B) (0, 2/2, 2) (C) (2, 2/2, 2) (D*) (0, 2/2, 2)
Sol. The particle will move in a non-uniform helical path with increasing pitch as shown below:
After -seconds the particle will be at point 'P', hence x coordinate will be 0
P x 0
For linear motion along y-direction.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
y-
1 Eq
y( ) = 0( ) ( )2
2 m
2 2
y( ) = and OP = 2 Hence the coordinate 0, ,2 .
2 2
2 2
y( ) = OP = 2 0, ,2
2 2
2. Consider a non viscous & incompressible liquid filled in a tank upto a height h. A narrow pipe is
attached to the bottom of the tank as shown. The cross sectional area A1 at the point 1 is very large as
compared to the areas at the points 2 and 3. The relation between cross sectional areas is A2 = 2A3. If
P1, P2, P3 are the pressures at cross-section 1, 2 & 3 respectively and P0 is atmospheric pressure then
choose the correct options.
h
1 A1, 2 3
A2 = 2A3 P1, P2, P3 1, 2 3
P0
3 gh
(A*) V3 2gh (B*) P2 = P0 + gh (C) P2 = P0 + (D) V2 2gh
4 2
Ans. (A) & (B)
Sol. By Equation of continuity
A1v1 = A2v2 = A3v3
Since A1 >> A2, A3, so v1 0
A
A3 = 2 v3 = 2v2
2
By Bernoulli theorem at 1 and 3
1 3
1 2 2gh
P0 + gh = P0 + V3 v3 = 2gh , v2 =
2 2
At 1 and 2 ; 1 2
P0 + gh = P2 + v 22
2
3
P2 = P0 + gh
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Figure shows a LCR 'circuit connected with a dc battery of emf ‘ ’ and internal resistance ‘R’. After a
long time (initially the capacitor was uncharged):
' ' 'R' dc LCR '
: ():
4. A metallic V shaped rod OAC is rotated with respect to one of its end in uniform magnetic field, such
that axis of rotation is parallel to the direction of magnetic field. Length of each arm of rod is L and angle
between the arms is 60º. P is the mid–point of section AC. Magnitude of magnetic field is B. Then
choose the correct relations.
V OAC
L 60º P
AC B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
OA = OC = L
3L
OP =
2
BL2
VA – V0 = VA – VC = 0
L
BL2 B 3L2 3 BL2
VC – V0 = VP – V0 = =
2 2 4 8
5. In the shown figure a conducting ring of mass m = 2kg and radius R = 0.5 m. lies on a smooth
1
horizontal plane with its plane vertical. The ring carries a current of = A . A horizontal uniform
magnetic field of B = 12T is switched on at t = 0. The initial angular acceleration in rad./sec2 of the
ring will be 4x if x is :
m = 2kg R = 0.5 m
1
= A B = 12T t
Ans. 3
Sol. y-axis
= Iy-axis
(I. r2) B = 1/2 mr2
= 12 rad/sec2
X=3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2 2
6. A current carrying ring, carrying a constant current Amp., radius 1m, mass kg and having 10
3
windings is free to rotate about its tangential vertical axis. A uniform magnetic field of 1 tesla is applied
perpendicular to its plane. How much minimum angular velocity (in rad/sec.) should be given to the ring
in the direction shown, so that it can rotate 270º in that direction. Write your answer in nearest single
digit in rad/sec.
2 2
Amp., 1m, kg 10
3
1
(rad/sec. ) 270º
Ans. 9
Sol.
to reach = 270º, it has to cross the potential energy barrier at = 180º and to cross = 180º angular
velocity at = 180º should be 0+
= 270º, = 180º = 180º
= 180º 0+
ki + Ui = kf + Uy
1 3
MR 2 2
+ (–Mi AB cos 0º) = 0 + (–NiAB cos180º)
2 2
= 80 9 rad/sec.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Comprehension
Two fixed and horizontal cylinders A and B having pistons (both massless) of cross sectional area 100
cm2 and 200 cm2 respectively, are connected by massless rod. The piston can move freely without
friction. The cylinder A contains 100 gms of an ideal gas ( = 1.5) at pressure 105N/m2 and temperature
T0. The cylinder B contains identical gas at same temperature T0 but has different mass. The piston are
held at the state such that volume of gas in cylinder A and cylinder B are same and is equal to 10–2m3.
The walls and piston of cylinder A are thermally insulated where as gas in cylinder B is maintained at
constant temperature T0. The whole system is in vacuum. Now the pistons are slowly released and they
move towards left and mechanical equilibrium is reached at the state when the volume of gas in
cylinder A becomes 25 × 10–4 m3.
A B ()100 cm2
200 cm2 , A
T0 105N/m2 100 gms ( = 1.5) B T0
A B
10–2m3 A B
T0
A 25 × 10–4 m3
A B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Let the initial temperature, pressure and volume of gas in ‘A’ be T0, P0, V0 and the area of the position A
and B be a, 2a.
Now gas in chamber ‘A’ undergoes adiabatic compression whereas gas in chamber ‘B’ undergoes
isothermal expansion.
Now solving for gas in ‘A’
P1A V1A P2 A V2 A P0 V0 = P2A (0.25V0) P2A = 8P0
Solving for gas is chambers ‘B’
P1BV1B = P2BV2B P1BV0 = P2B x 2.5V0 P2B = 0.4 P1B
Also
(P2A x a) = (P2B x 2a) for gas in ‘B’
8P0a = P2 x 2a P2 = 4P0
0.4 P1 = 4P0 P1 = 10P0
Now comparing the moles of gas in A and B
PV 10P0 V0
nA = 0 0 , nB = 10nA
RT0 RT0
mB 10 mA = 10 x 100gm = 1kg.
Again for gas is A, Q = U + W
0= U+ W
V0
P0 V0 8P0
0= U+ 4
( 1)
U = 2P0V0
= 2 x 105 x 10 2 = 2000J
F = 8P0a = 8 x 105 x 10 2 = 8000 N
Sol. ‘A’ T0, P0, V0 A B a, 2a
‘A’ ‘B’
‘A’
P1A V1A P2 A V2 A P0 V0 = P2A (0.25V0) P2A = 8P0
‘B’
P1BV1B = P2BV2B P1BV0 = P2B x 2.5V0 P2B = 0.4 P1B
(P2A x a) = (P2B x 2a) ‘B’
8P0a = P2 x 2a P2 = 4P0
0.4 P1 = 4P0 P1 = 10P0
A B
PV 10P0 V0
nA = 0 0 , nB = 10nA
RT0 RT0
mB 10 mA = 10 x 100gm = 1kg.
A , Q = U + W
0= U+ W
V0
P0 V0 8P0
0= U+ 4
( 1)
U = 2P0V0
= 2 x 105 x 10 2 = 2000J
F = 8P0a = 8 x 105 x 10 2 = 8000 N
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. Figure shows snap shot of a progressive wave and standing wave along a string. Match the column I
and II.
(snap shot)
-I -II
Progressive wave
y
A D
x
B
C
Standing wave
y
E H
F
x
G
Column-I Column-II
-I -II
(A) Particles in same phase (P) A & D
(B) Particles with same amplitude (Q) E & F
of oscillations
(R) B & C
(C) Particles always having same speed (S) G & H
Ans. A P, Q ; B P, R, S ; C P, S
1. How can we place a dipole near an infinite long line charge such that net force of dipole is zero ?
Explain with diagram. [2 Marks]
2. What is balanced wheatstone bridge derive condition for balanced wheatstone bridge.
[3 Marks]
3. Draw a ray diagram of telescope for normal adjustment. What is magnifying power of telescope in this
arrangement. [5 Marks]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
(A) 12 sec (B) 5 sec (C*) 8 sec (D) none of these
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A particle of positive charge q and mass m enters with velocity V ĵ at the origin in a magnetic field
B( k̂ ) which is present in the whole space. The charge makes a perfectly inelastic collision with free
identical particle at rest at its maximum y-coordinate. After collision the combined charge will move on
mV
trajectory :(where r )
qB
m q V ĵ B( k̂ )
y- : (
mV
r )
qB
mv
(A) y = ( î ) (B*) (x + r)2 + (y – r/2)2 = r2/4
qB
(C) (x – r)2 + (y – r)2 = r2 (D) (x – r)2 + (y + r/2)2 = r2/4
4. When a person throws a meter stick it is found that the centre of the stick is moving with speed 10 m/s
and left end of stick with speed 20m/s. Both points move vertically upwards at that moment. Then
angular speed of the stick is:
10 m/s
20 m/s :
(A*) 20 rad/ sec (B) 10 rad/sec (C) 30 rad/sec (D) none of these
20 10
Sol. Angular velocity () w = = 20 rad/sec.
0 .5
5. A car fitted with a device which transmits sound 60 times per minute. There is no wind and speed of
sound in still air is 345 m/s. If you hear the sound 68 times per minute when you are moving towards
the car with a speed of 12 m/s, the speed of the car must be nearly.
60
345 m/s 12 m/s
68 :
(A) 20.0 m/s towards you (B*) 30.0 m/s towards you
(C) 10.0 m/s away from you (D) 10.0 m/s towards you
(A) 20.0 m/s (B*) 30.0 m/s
(C) 10.0 m/s (D) 10.0 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (B)
C = 345 m/s fob = 68 time/1min
C 12
f’ = f
C V2 0
68 345 12
=
60 345 V2
60
345 – V2 = 357 ×
68
357 60
V2 = 345 – = 345 – 315 = 30 m/s
68
6. An electron orbiting around a nucleus has angular momentum L. The magnetic field produced by the
electron at the centre of the orbit can be expressed as :
L
:
(A) B ( 0e / 8 mr 3 ) L (B*) B ( 0e / 4 mr 3 ) L
(C) B ( 0e / mr 3 ) L (D) B (e / 4 0 mr
3
)L
Sol. (B)
eV
B 2
= 0 r L=mVr
L 4 mVr
B eV 1 L 0 eL
= 0 2 B= 0
=
L 4 r mVr 4 r 4 mr 3
7. A particle of mass 0.2 kg moves along a path given by the relation : r 2 cos t î 3 sin t ĵ . Then the
torque on the particle about the origin is :
0.2 kg : r 2 cos t î 3 sin t ĵ
:
2 3
(A) 13 k̂ Nm (B) k̂ Nm (C) k̂ Nm (D*) 0 k̂
3 2
Sol. (D)
L=mr V
V= 2 sin t î 3 cos t ĵ
î ĵ k̂
2 cos t 3 sin t 0 R̂ 6 cos 2 t 6 sin 2 t
2 sin t 3 cos t 0 6 k̂ cons tan t
L=0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. Two equal masses are connected by a spring satisfying Hooke's law and are placed on a frictionless
table. The spring is elongated a little and allowed to go. Let the angular frequency of oscillations be .
Now one of the masses is stopped. The square of the new angular frequency is :
:
2 2
(A) 2
(B*) (C) (D) 2 2
2 3
Sol.
k
=
m1m 2
=
m1 m 2
2k
=
m
k
2
=
m
2
k
2
2
= = . Ans. (B)
m 2
9. In a steel factory it is found that to maintain M kg of iron in the molten state at its melting point an input
power P watt is required. When the power source is turned off, the sample completely solidifies in time t
second. The latent heat of fusion of iron is
M kg
P t
2Pt Pt Pt PM
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
M 2M M t
Sol. (c)
Pt
Pt = ML L=
M
10. The Schrodinger equation for a free electron of mass m and energy E written in terms of the
d2 8 2mE
wavefunction is 0 . The dimensions of the coefficient of in the second term must
dx 2 h2
be:
m E
d2 8 2
mE
2
0 . :
dx h2
(A) [M1 L1] (B) [L2] (C*) [L–2] (D) [M1 L–1 T1]
E
Sol. (C) h =
C
mEC 2 mEC 2 M1(L1T 1 )2 L2 T 2
= = = = L–2
(E )2 E2 2
M1L2 T 2L2 L2 T 2L2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. Let r be the distance of a point on the axis of a short bar magnet from its centre. The magnetic field at
such point is proportional to
r
1 1 1
(A) (B) 2
(C*) (D) none of these
r r r3
12. A paramagnetic material is kept in a magnetic field. The field is increased till the magnetization
becomes constant. If the temperature is now decreased, the magnetization
(A) will increase (B) decrease (C*) ramain constant (D) may increase of decrease
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
13. A very long bar magnet is placed along the axis of a circular loop carrying an electric current i. The
north pole of bar magnet is concilding with the centre of the circular loop. The magnetic field due to the
magnet at a point on the periphery of the wire is B. The radius of the loop is a. The force on the wire is
i
B a :
(A*) very nearly 2 aiB perpendicular to the plane of the wire (B) 2 aiB in the plane of the wire
(D) aiB along the magnet (D) zero
(A*) 2 aiB (B) 2 aiB
(D) aiB (D)
15. S1 and S2 are two coherent sources of sound of frequency 110Hz each. They have no initial phase
difference. The intensity at a point P due to S1 is 0 and due to S2 is 4 0. If the velocity of sound is 330
m/s then the resultant intensity at P is
S1 S2 110Hz P S1
0 S2 4 0 330 m/s P
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
330
Sol. The wavelength of sound source = = 3 metre.
110
The phase difference betwen interfering waves at P is
2 2 2
= = (S2P – S1P) = (5 – 4) =
3 3
2
Resultant intensity at P = I0 + 4I0 + 2 0 4 0 cos = 3 I0
3
330
= = 3 metre.
110
P
2 2 2
= = (S2P – S1P) = (5 – 4) =
3 3
2
P = I0 + 4I0 + 2 0 4 0 cos = 3 I0
3
16. A ball of mass m moving with velocity v, collide at the centre of the fixed frictionless wall of height d
elastically as shown in figure. After the collision the change in angular momentum of the ball about point
P is -
v m d
P -
3
(A*) mvd (B) mvd (C) 3 mvd (D) None of these
2
Sol.
d d mvd 3
Change in Angular momentum, L = ( P) = 2mv cos 30 =
2 2 2
17. A man of 80 kg attempts to jump from the small boat of mass 40 kg on to the shore. He can generate a
relative velocity of 6 m/s between him and boat. His velocity towards shore is:
80 kg 40 kg
6 /
(A) 4 m/s (B) 8 m/s (C*) 2 m/s (D) 3 m/s
18. The vernier constant of a vernier callipers is 0.1 mm. There are 10 divisions on Vernier scale. These 10
divisions coincides with N-divisions of main scale. Then N should be :
0.1 mm. 10 10
N-N
(A) 11 (B*) 9 (C) 19 (D) 10
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. 19-divisions on the main scale of a vernier callipers coincide with 20 divisions on the vernier scale. If
each division on the main scale is of 1 mm units, determine the least count of the instrument.
19 20
1mm
Ans. 0.05
Sol. (N + 1) divisions on the vernier scale = N divisions on main scale
N
1 division on vernier scale = divisions on main scale
N 1
Each division on the main scale is of a units.
N
1 division on vernier scale = a units = a’ (say)
N 1
Least count = 1 main scale division – 1 vernier scale division
N a
= a – a’ = a – a=
N 1 N 1
Put a = 1 mm and N = 19
20. In screw gauge screw moves 5 mm on main scale in 50 revolutions what is pitch of screw gauge.
50 5 mm
Ans. 0.1 mm
BOARD PROBLEMS
1. Define the term ‘magnetic declination’.
Ans. Magnetic declination : The small angle between magnetic axis and geographic axis at a place is
called the magnetic declination. It is denoted by .
2. Two charges +Q and –Q are kep tat (–x2, 0) and (x1, 0) respectively in the x – y plane. Find the
magnitude and direction of the net electric field at the origin (0, 0)
+Q –Q (–x2, 0) (x 1, 0) x – y (0, 0)
Ans. Total charge, q = Q + (–Q) = 0
They form an electric dipole.
KQ KQ
E E1 E 2 î î
x 22 x 12
3. Draw the shapes of the suitable Gaussian surfaces, while applying Gaus’s law to calculate the electric
field due to :
(a) a uniformly charged long straight wire,
(b) a uniformly charged infinite plane sheet.
:
(a)
(b)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
(A) 60 ± 0.15 (B) 135 ± 0.56 (C*) 60 ± 0.25 (D) 135 ± 0.23
Ans. (C)
Sol. For balanced meter bridge
X
=
R (100 )
X 90
= X = 60
40 60
X=R
(100 )
X 0 .1 0.1
X 100 40 60
X= 0.25
so X = (60 + 0.25)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A source emit sound waves of frequency 1000 Hz. The source moves to the right with a speed of 32
m/s relative to ground. On the right a reflecting surface moves towards left with a speed of 64 m/s
relative to ground. The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s :
1000 Hz 32 m/s
64 m/s
332 m/s
(A*) wavelength of sound in ahead of source is 0.3 m
(B*) number of waves arriving per second which meets the reflected surface is 1320
(C) speed of reflected wave is 268 m/s
(D*) wavelength of reflected waves is nearly 0.2 m
(A*) 0.3 m
(B*) 1320
(C) 268 m/s
(D*) 0.2 m
V Vs 332 32
Sol. '= = = 0.3 m
f 1000
( V V0 ) 332 64
f' = f = 1000 × = 1320 Hz
V Vs 332 32
V V0
'' = = 0.2 m.
f'
3. A real 1 mm long object is kept perpendicular to the principal axis of a concave mirror. The size of the
image formed is 1/4 mm. Now the mirror starts moving, away from the object with a velocity
2 cm/s along the principal axis.
1 mm
1/4 mm 2 cm/s
17
(A*) the velocity of the image along the principle axis at the given instant will be cm/s towards the
8
mirror.
17
cm/s,
8
(B*) the length of the image will decrease as the mirror moves
(C*) the speed of the image will always be more than 2 cm/s.
2 cm/s
(D) the rate with which the length of the image will change is a constant
1 1
Sol. Lateral magnification m = m =
4 4
With respect to mirror :
velocity of object = 2 cm/s towards left
= 2 cm/s
2
1
velocity of image = 2cm s towards right
4
2
1 2 1
= 2cm s
4 16 8
With respect to the ground
1 cm
Velocity of image = 2 towardsright
8 s
1 cm 17 cm
= 2 = towards right
8 s 8 s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. Let y > 0 be the region of space with a uniform and constant magnetic field Bkˆ . A particle with charge q
and mass m travels along the y-axis and enters in magnetic field at origin with speed v 0. In region the
particle is subjected to an additional friction force F kv . Assume that particle remains in region y > 0
at all times. The coordinates of the particle where it will finally stop are (x, y) then.
Bkˆ , y > 0 q
m y- v0
F kv y > 0
(x, y)
kmv0 qBmv 0 kmv 0 qBmv 0
(A) x = 2 2
(B*) x 2 2
(C*) y 2 2
(D) y 2
k (qB) k (qB) k (qB) k (qB)2
Sol. F ma = k(v x ˆi v y j) + q(v x i v y j) × Bkˆ
ˆ ˆ ˆ
max = – kv x + qv yB
may = – kv y – qvxB
At t = 0, vx = 0 vy = v0 x = 0 y = 0
finally vx = 0 vy = 0 x = x1 y = y1
mxo = – kx1 + qy1B
–mv0 = – ky1 – qx1B
qBmv 0
x1 = 2
k (qB)2
kmv0
y1 = 2
k (qB)2
5. Durring Searle’s experiment, zero of the Vernier scale lies between 3.20 × 10–2 m and 3.25 × 10–2 m of
the main scale. The 20th division of the Vernier scale exactly coincides with one of the main scale
divisions. When an additional load of 2 kg is applied to the wire, the zero of the Vernier scale still lies
between 3.20 × 10–2 m and 3.25 × 10–2 m of the main scale but now the 45th division of Vernier scale
coincides with one of the main scale divisions. The length of the thin metallic wire is 2m. and its cross-
sectional area is 8 × 10–7 m2. The least count of the Vernier scale is 1.0 × 10–5 m. The maximum
percentage error in the Young’s modulus of the wire is
3.20 × 10–2 m 3.25 × 10–2 m
(20th division) 2 kg
3.20 × 10–2 m 3.25 × 10–2 m
(45th division)
2m 8 × 10–7 m2
(least count)1.0 × 10–5 m (Young’s modulus)
Ans. 8
Sol. Observation – 1
Let weight used is W1, extension 1
W1 1
W1 / A yA 1
y= W1 = = 3.2×10–2 + 20×10–5
1/L
1
L
Observation – 2
Let weight used is W2 extension 2
W2 2
W2 / A yA 2
y= / L W1 =
2 L
1
= 3.2×10 –2
+ 45×10–5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
yA W 2 W1 / L
W2–W1 = ( 2 1) y = yA (
L 2 1)
y 5
2 1 2 10
y = = 5
max 2 1 25 10
y 2
y × 100% = × 100% = 8%
max 25
6. A particle P is moving on a circle under the action of only one force, which always acts towards a fixed
2
d2 d
point O lying on the circumference. Find ratio of to at the moment when = 45º. (C is
dt 2 dt
centre of circle)
P O
2
d2 d
= 45º (C
dt 2 dt
)
P
F
O
C
Ans. 2
F
Sol. at = sin
m
Rd 2 ( 2 ) F
2
= sin
dt m
d2 F sin
2
= ...(1)
dt 2mR
F
ac = cos
m
2
d F
R (2 ) cos ...(ii)
dt m
d2
dt 2
2
= 2 tan =2
d
dt
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A thin superconducting (zero resistance) ring is held above a vertical long solenoid, as shown in the
figure. The axis of symmetry of the ring is same to that of the solenoid. The cylindrically symmetric
magnetic field around the ring can be described approximately in terms of the vertical and radial
component of the magnetic field vector as Bz = B0(1 – z) and Br = B0 r, where B0, and are positive
constants, and z & r are vertical and radial position coordinates, respectively. Initially plane of the ring is
horizontal, has no current flowing in it. When released, it starts to move downwards with its axis still
vertical. Initial coordinates of the centre of the ring ‘O’ is z = 0 and r = 0.
In the given diagram point O is on the axis and slightly above the solenoid having vertical and radial
position coordinates as (0, 0). Ring has mass m, radius r0 and self inductance L. Assume the
acceleration due to gravity as g.
()
Bz = B0(1 – z) Br = B0 r
, B0, z r
‘O’ z = 0 r = 0
O ‘O’
(0, 0) m, r0 L g
z
B O B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. To create uniform electric field, a capacitor containing two infinitely large plates are used. Particles in
column-I are projected horizontally from the middle with same kinetic energy. Neglect force acting
between the particle and also neglect gravity. Match the column.
-I
Column- Column-
(A) -particle (p) Particles which will move along path–(1)
(B) 23Na+1 (q) Particles which will move along path–(2)
(C) 6Li+1 (r) Particles which will strike the negative plate in
minimum time
(D) 2D+1 (s) Particles which will strike the negative plate in
maximum time
(t) Particles which will strike the plate with
maximum kinetic energy
- -
(A) – (p) –(1)
(B) 23Na+1 (q) –(2)
(C) 6Li+1 (r)
(D) 2D+1 (s)
(t)
Ans. (A) – p, r, t ; (B) – q, s ; (C) – q ; (D) – q, r
1 qE 2
Sol. x = ut, y = t
2 m
2
1 qE x
y=
2 m u
KE = same for all y q
So particle with greater q, will have greater y.
q y
So -particles will move along path 1 to strike the plate.
-1
(for R,S) (R,S )
d 1 qE 2 d m
t t=
2 2 m E q
m
Particle having more will strike later.
q
m
q
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
BOARD PROBLEMS
1. Two concentric circular coils, one of small radius r1 and the other of large radius r2, such that r1 <<n r2
are placed coaxially with centres coinciding. Obtain the mutual inductance of the arrangement.
r1 r2
r1 <<n r2
2. A bar magnet falls from a height ‘h’ through a metal ring. Will its acceleration be equal to g ? Give
reason for your answer.
‘h’ g ?
3. If the number of turns in the solenoid is doubled, keeping other factors constant, how does the self-
inductance of the coil change ?
?
4. Which physical quantity has the unit Wb/m2. Is it a scalar or a vector quantity ?
Wb/m2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
E S T IN F OR M A T IO
1. The moment of inertia of an equilateral triangular plate about the axis passing through its centre of
mass and lying in the plane is . The moment of inertia of a hexagonal plate of side 'a' and made of
same material and same thickness, about an axis passing through the centre of mass and lying in its
plane will be :
'a'
a
a a
a
a
16
2a
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Two identical bricks of length L are piled one on top of the other on a table as shown in the figure. The
maximum distance S the top brick can overhang the table with the system still balanced is:
L
S
L
S
1 2 3 7
(A) L (B) L (C*) L (D) L
2 3 4 8
Sol. For maximum S center of mass of upper plank should be vertically above P and center of mass of
system of both the planks should be vertically above Q.
S P
Q
L
P
Q
S
3. A long plank of mass M is initially at rest on a frictionless surface. A small block with mass m and initial
speed u0 slides on top of the larger plank. The coefficient of friction between the block and plank is .
m u0
M
L
Net work done by friction on system if the top block falls off the plank after sliding over its length L is
M m M
(A*) – mgL (B) gL (C) gL (D) – MgL
M M m
Mm u0
m u0
M
L
L
M m M
(A*) – mgL (B) gL (C) gL (D) – MgL
M M m
Sol. Net work done by kinetic friction on system does not depend on frame of reference.
Work done by kinetic friction with respect to M = – mgL
M = – mgL
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A conical flask of mass 10 kg and base area 103 cm2 is floating in liquid of specific gravity 1.2 as shown
in the figure. The force that liquid exerts on curved surface of conical flask is (neglect the atmospheric
pressure and g = 10 m/s2)
10 cm
10 cm
5. In a continuous printing process, paper is drawn into the process at a constant speed V, shown in figure
where r is radius of paper on the roll at any given time & b is thickness of the paper. The angular
acceleration of the roll as function of r is -
V r t
(Paper roll) b r
-
v
b
V 2b
(A)
2 2r 3
(B) zero, because V is constant V
V 2b
(C*)
2 r3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Suppose total length of paper is . r1 is inner radius of spool
r1 (spool)
then r2 – r12 = × b ........(1)
and at this moment
v
b
r1
r
v=r ........(2)
Differient equation (1) w.r.t. time
(1)
dr d
× 2r. –0= .b
dt dt
dr v.b
= ........(3)
dt 2 r
diff equation (2) wrt time
(2)
v=r
dv d dr
=r +
dt dt dt
dr dr
0=r + is ve
dt dt
dr r
=
dt
dr
= ..........(4)
r dt
vb. v 2b
using (3) & (4) = =
2 r2 2 r3
vb. v2b
(3) (4) = 2
=
2 r 2 r3
6. The time period of small oscillation of a uniform ring inside a large fixed cylinder of radius R is, if radius
of ring is r, and cylinder is sufficiently rough to prevent any kind of sliding.
R
r,
2(R r) 3(R r) 2(R r)
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C*) 2
3g 2g g
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Torque about point of contact
(I.A.O.R)
d2
–mgsin r = (mr2 + mr2)
dt2
d2 mgsin r
=
dt 2 2mr 2
r
For small sin = =
(R r)
r
sin = =
(R r)
d2 g r
=
dt 2 2r (R r)
d2 g
=
dt 2 2(R r)
2(R r)
T= 2 .
g
7. A small ring of mass m is connected with a particle of same mass by an ideal string & the whole
system is released as shown in figure. Coefficient of friction between ring A and wire is 3/5, ring A will
starts sliding when connecting string will make an angle with the vertical, then will be : (particle is
free to move and ring can slide only)
m
A 3/5 A
: (
)
T = 3mg cos
3mg cos sin = [mg + 3mg cos2 ]
= 45º
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. A lamina is made by removing a small disc of diameter 2R from a bigger disc of uniform mass density
and radius 2R, as shown in figure. A second similar disc is made but instead of hole a disc of triple the
density as of first it filled in the hole. Centre of mass is calculated in both the cases and was found at a
2r
distance r & r from centre O respectively. Find the ratio 2 .
1 2
r1
2R 2R
2r2
O r r
1 2
r1
9. Two identical disks are positioned on a vertical axis as shown in the fig. The bottom disk is rotating at
an angular velocity 0 and has rotational kinetic energy k0. The top disk is initially at rest. It allowed to
fall and sticks to the bottom disk. The change in the rotational kinetic energy of the system after the
collision is:
0
k0
3k 0 k0 k0
(A) (B*) (C) (D) zero
4 2 4
Sol. By conservation of angular momentum
1 1 + 2 2 = ( 1 + 2)
1 1 2 2
=
1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2
K= 1 1 2 2 ( 1 2)
2 2 2
1 = 2 =
1 = 0
2 = 0
0
=
2
1 2
K= 0
4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. In the fig. shown a cart moves on a smooth horizontal surface due to an external constant force of
magnitude F. The initial mass of the cart is M0 and velocity is zero. Sand falls on to the cart with
negligible velocity at constant rate kg/s and sticks to the cart. The velocity of the cart at time t is:
F
M0 kg/s
t
Ft F m0 t Ft Ft
(A*) (B) n (C) (D) e t
M0 t m0 M0 M0 t
Sol. Impulse = Pf – Pi
F × t = (M0 + t)v – 0
Ft
v=
M0 t
11. Three forces are acting on a ring placed in the x – y plane as shown. Taking P as the point of
application of resultant force the value of shown in figure is rad. Find the value of x.
x
x – y P
x
x
y
F
F
P
45º
F 2
Sol. F
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. A cubical block of side 10 10 cm is connected to a smooth and uniform disc of mass 20 g through an
ideal string as shown. The block is placed on a thin liquid layer of thickness 0.2 mm. If center of the disc
move downward with constant speed of 2 cm/sec after the system is released. The coefficient of
viscosity of liquid is (Take g = 10 m/s2)
Block
Thin liquid layer
Fixed surface
Disc
mg
10 10 cm 20 g
0.2 mm
2 cm/sec
(g = 10 m/s2)
mg
(A) 2 × 10-3 Pa-sec (B) 5 × 10-3 Pa-sec (C) 3 × 10-3 Pa-sec (D*) 6 × 10-3 Pa-sec
Sol. By constraint relation, velocity of block is 2V. As acceleration for Block and disc is zero, for disc 2T =
mg
2V 2T = mg
a=0
2V
T
F
T T
V
a=0
mg
mg
T=
2
and for block T = f (T = f)
mg 2V
= A
2 d
mgd
=
4AV
20 10 3 10 0.2 10 3
=
4 10 3 10 4 2 10 2
= 5 × 10–3 NSm–2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. A girl throws a ball with an initial velocity v at an angle of 45º. The ball strikes a smooth vertical wall at a
horizontal distance d from the girl and after rebound returns to her hands. What is the coefficient of
restitution between wall and ball ? (v2 > dg)
v 45º d
(v2 > dg)
v 2 gd gd gd v2
(A) (B*) 2
(C) (D)
gd v gd v2 gd
Sol.
sin 45º
t1 + t2 = 2v
g
d d 2v sin 45º gd
= e= 2
v cos 45º ev cos 45º g v gd
14. A stream of water of density , cross-sectional area A, and speed u strikes a wall that is perpendicular
to the direction of the stream, as shown in the figure below. The water then flows sideways across the
wall. The force exerted by the stream on the wall is
, A u
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. Consider a planet moving in an elliptical orbit round the sun. The work done on the planet by the
gravitational force of the sun
(A) is zero in any small part of the orbit (B*) is zero in some parts of the orbit
(C*) is zero in one complete revolution (D) is zero in no part of the motion
(A) (B*)
(C*) (D)
2. The x-coordinate of a particle moving on x-axis is given by x = 3 sin 100t + 8 cos2 50t, where x is in cm
and t is time in seconds. Which of the following is/are correct about this motion.
x- x– x = 3 sin 100t + 8 cos2 50t
x cm t
(A) the motion of the particle is not S.H.M. ()
(B*) the amplitude of the S.H.M. of the particle is 5 cm
5
(C) the amplitude of the resultant S.H. M. is 73 cm
73
(D*) the maximum displacement of the particle from the origin is 9 cm.
9
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. x = 3 sin 100 t + 8 cos2 50 t
8[1 cos 100 t ]
= 3 sin 100 t +
2
4
x = 4 + 3 sin 100 t + 4 cos 100 t tan
3
(x – 4) = 5 sin (100t + )
Amplitude = 5 units
Maximum displacement = 9 units.
= 5 = 9
3. 'Identical dielectric slabs are inserted into two identical capacitors A and B. These capacitors and a
battery are connected as shown in figure. Now the slab of capacitor B is pulled out with battery
remaining connected :
A B
B
A B
+ –
a b
(A*) During the process positive charge flows from a to b.
(B) Finally charge on capacitor B will be less than that on capacitor A.
(C) During the process, a work is done by the external force F, which completely appears as heat in the
circuit.
(D*) During the process, internal energy of the battery increases.
(A*) a b
(B) B A
(C) F
(D*)
Sol. (A) Charge on capacitor B decreases as dielectric slab is taken out. Charge from positive plate of B
flows towards battery.
Charge on A and B can not be different, as being connected in series.
During the process, battery is being charged.
4. A car moves uniformly along a horizontal sine curve y = a sin (x/ ), where a and are certain
constants. The coefficient of friction between the wheels and the road is equal to . At what maximum
velocity will the car ride without sliding?
y = a sin (x/ ) , a
.
?
[Ans : v = g/ a
5. A wooden cube (density 0.5 gm/cc) of side 10 cm is floating in water kept in a cylindrical beaker of base
area 1500 cm2. When a mass m is kept on the wooden block the level of water rises in the beaker by
2mm. Find the mass m.
( 0.5 gm/cc) 10 cm
1500 cm2 m
2mm m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Let the cube dips further by y cm and water level rises by 2 mm.
Then equating the volumes (/// volume = \\\ volume in figure) volume of water raised
= volume of extra depth of wood
2 2
100 y = (1500 – 100) = 1400 × = 280
10 10
y = 2.8 cm
Extra upthrust
water
× (2.8 + 0.2) × 100 g = mg m = 300 gm.
m = 300 gm. ....Ans.
COMPREHENSION
There are two blocks A and B placed on a smooth surface. Block A has mass 10 kg and it is moving
with velocity 0.8 m/s towards stationary B of unknown mass. At the time of collision, their velocities are
given by the following graph :
A B A 10 kg 0.8 m/s
B
1
0.8
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. (6 to 8)
mA × 0.8 = mA × 0.2 + mB × 1.0
mA × 0.6 mB × 1.0 mB = 0.6 mA
1 – 0 .2
e= = 1 = 1.5
0 .8
d
= 6 × 0.5 – 6 × 0 = 3N – 5 = 10 × {0.8 – 0.5} = 10 × 0.3 = 3 NS
1 1
U= × 10 × (0.8)2 – × 16 × (0.5)2 = 5 × 0.64 8 × 0.25 = 3.2 – 2.0 = 1.2 J
2 2
8. Match the statements in Column with the results in Column
Column – I Column – II
(A) A variable resistor is connected across a non-ideal cell . (p) first increases for
As the resistance of the variable resistor is continuously some time and then
increased from zero to a very large value, the electric decreases.
power consumed by the variable resistor
(B) A circular ring lies in space having uniform and constant (q) first decreases for
magnetic field. Initially the direction of magnetic field is some time and then
parallel to plane of the ring. Keeping the centre of ring fixed, increases.
the ring is rotated by 1800 about one of its diameter with
constant angular speed. For the duration the ring rotates,
the magnitude of induced emf in the ring
(C) A thin rod of length 1 cm lies along principal axis of a (r) is always constant
convex lens of focal length 5 cm. One end of rod is at a
distance 10 cm from optical centre of the lens. The convex
lens is moved (without rotation) perpendicular to initial
principal axis by 5 mm and brought back to its initial
position.The length of the image of the rod
(D) A bulb (of negligible inductance) and a capacitor in series (s) increases or may
are connected across an ideal ac source of constant peak increase over
voltage and variable frequency. As frequency of ac source is some time interval
continuously increased, the brightness of bulb
– I – II
(A) (p)
(B) (q)
180°
(C) 1 cm 5 cm (r)
10 cm
5 mm
(D) () (s)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Ans. (A) p,s (B) q,s (C) p,s (D) s
Sol. (A) The plot of power P consumed by variable resistor of resistance R w.r.t. R when connected across
a non-ideal cell is given by
(B) At the instant ring has rotated by q = wt (w = angular speed) in uniform and constant magnetic field
B, the magnetic flux through the ring is
f = BA sinwt
d
or emf = = Baw coswt
dt
Hence for first half cycle, magnitude of emf first decreases and then increases.
(C) As the lens is moved up, the projection of length of image on principal axis remains same, but its
slant with principal axis increases. This increase is due to the fact that lateral magnification of each
point of image of rod is different. Hence as lens moves up the size of image increases and when it
moves down the size of image decreases.
(D) As frequency of ac source increases, reactance of capacitor decreases. Therefore the bulb glows
more brighter.
(A) R R P R
x
x x x
x x x A
x x x
Statement – 1 : Work done by induced electric field in moving a point charge from A to B is different for
two paths Shown
Statement – 2 : Induced electric field is a non conservative electric field
– 1 : A B
– 2 :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True;Statement-2 is NOT a correct explanation for Statement-1
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False
(D*) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
(A) -1 , -2 ; -2, -1
(B) -1 , -2 ;-2, -1
(C) -1 , -2 ,
(D*) -1 ,, -2
Solution :
By faraday law B
d x
– E.d = – x
dt x x
O
d x x x A
q E.d =q
dt
x x x
d
F.d =q
dt
d
WAB + WAO + WOB = q
dt
WAO = WOB = 0 (Since electrici field and d
are perpendicular)
d
WAB = q
dt
is same for both closed path.
BOARD PROBLEMS
1. Two circular coils, one of radius r and the other of radius R are placed co-axially with their centres
coinciding. For R >> r, obtain an expression for the mutual inductance of the arrangement.
r R
R >> r
2. Explain with the help of diagram the terms magnetic declination at a given place.
3. A beam of -particles, projected along (+) X-axis, experiences a force due to a magnetic field along the
(+) Y axis.
(a)What is the direction of the magnetic field?
-(+) X-, (+) Y
?
(a) ?
(b) In place of -particle, if the beam is of electrons; then what will be the direction of the magnetic field?
(b) - ?
x
v
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. Figure shows an arrangement of three point charges. The total potential energy of this arrangement is
q
zero. The ratio is :
Q
q
:
Q
-Q
+q +q
r
2r
(A*) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 1 : 1 (D) : 1
Sol. (A)
1 qQ ( q)( q) Q( q)
Usys = =0
4 0 r 2r r
q q q 4
–Q+ –Q=0 or 2Q = or = .
2 2 Q 1
2. Four point charges +q, +q, –q and –q are placed at the corners of a square having side 2 a as shown
in figure.
+q, +q, –q –q 2 a
+q • •+q
•O
–q • 2a
• –q
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Which one of the following equation is correct for the circuit shown. The currents in each branch of
circuit are indicated and all three cells are ideal.
(A) 2 – I1 – 2I2 = 0 (B) 2 – 2I1 – 2I2 – 4I3 = 0(C) 4 – I1 + 4I3 = 0 (D*) –2 – I1 – 2I2 = 0
Sol. Applying Kirchoff voltage law in left loop.
– 2 + I1 + 4 + 2I2 = 0 \ 2 + I1 + 2I2 = 0
4. Suppose a smooth tunnel is dug along a straight line joining two points on the surface of the earth and
a particle is dropped from rest at its one end. Assume that mass of earth is uniformly distributed over its
Volume. Then
GMe
(A) the particle will emerge from the other end with velocity where Me and Re are earth’s mass
2Re
and radius respectively,
(B) the particle will come to rest at centre of the tunnel because at this position, particle is closest
to earth centre.
(C) potential energy of the particle will be equal to zero at centre of tunnel if it is along a diametre.
(D*)acceleration of the particle will be proportional to its distance from midpoint of the tunnel.
GMe
(A) Me Re
2Re
(B)
(C)
(D*)(proportional)
5. A bead of mass m is located on a parabolic wire with its axis vertical and vertex at the origin as shown
in figure and whose equation is x2 = 8ay. The wire frame is fixed and the bead can slide on it without
friction. The bead is released from the point y = 2a on the wire frame from rest. Then the magnitude of
acceleration of the bead at y = 2a (that is, just after the release of bead is) :
x2 = 8ay
m
y = 2a y = 2a
:
g 3g g g
(A) (B) (C*) (D)
2 2 2 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
x2 = 8ay
Differentiating w.r.t. y, we get
y
dy x
=
dx 4a
At (4a, 2a), = 1 hence = 45°
the component of weight along tangential direction is mg sin .
mg sin .
6. A particle starts moving from rest along a straight line at t = 0. Its acceleration-time graph is shown.
Correct relation between magnitudes of displacements between time durations t = 2s to t = 3s and t =
8s to t = 9s represented by S23 and S89 respectively is :
t = 0
t = 2s t =3s t = 8s t = 9s S23 S89
7. Consider the circuit consisting of two capacitors having capacitances 3 F and 6 F and an ideal battery
of emf e = 4 volts as shown. The switch S is open for a long time and then closed. After the switch is
closed, the work done by the battery is :
3 F 6 F e = 4 S
3 F 6 F
=4v
(A) 16 m J (B) 32 m J (C*) 64 m J (D) 128 m J
3 6
Sol. Initial charge on 6 mF capacitor = 4 = 8 mC
3 6
final charge on 6 mF capacitor = 6 × 4 = 24 mC
\ charge passing through cell (in direction aided by cell) = qf – qi = Dq = 24 – 8 = 16 mC
\ work done by cell = Dq e = 16 × 4 = 64 mJ
3 6
6 mF = 4 = 8 mC
3 6
6 mF = 6 × 4 = 24 mC
\ ( ) = qf – qi = Dq = 24 – 8 = 16 mC
\ = Dq e = 16 × 4 = 64 mJ
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. Six identical uniform conducting rods are fixed to make a regular hexagon as shown. The ends A and C
are maintained at constant temperature 2T0 and 6T0. After the steady state is reached, pick up the
correct relation between temperatures TB, TD, TE and TF of ends B, D, E and F respectively.
A C
2T0 6T0 B, D, E F TB,
TD, TE TF
2T0
A B
F C 6T0
E D
(A*) TD > TE = TB > TF (B) TD = TB > TE > TF (C) TD > TE > TF = TB (D) TB > TF = TE > TD
2T0 4T0
A B
E D
4T0 5T0
At steady temperature of ends B, D, E and F are
TB = 4T0, TD = 5T0 , TE = 4T0 and TF = 3T0.
TD > TE = TB > TF
9. The loop shown is placed in uniform constant magnetic field B. A condcuting loop PQR has current I
and length of side PQ is L. The direction and magnitude of the magetic force on the loop PQR is :
B PQR I
PQ L PQR :
Q
L 60º
I
B
P R
(A*) zero (B) ILB out of the page
1
(C) ILB into the page (D) ILB into the page
2
(A*) (B) ILB
1
(C) ILB (D) ILB
2
Sol. Vector sum PQ + QR + RP = 0
Thus force on PQR = 0.
Sol. PQ + QR + RP = 0
PQR = 0 .
10. A thin circular ring of mass 2 kg and radius 1 m is rotating about its axis (without friction) with a constant
angular velocity 12 rad/s. Two objects each of mass 0.5 kg, are attached gently to the opposite ends of
a diameter of the ring. The ring now rotates with an angular velocity :
2 kg 1 m 12 Rad/s
0.5 kg
(A) 9.6 rad/s (B*) 8 rad/s (C) 12 rad/s (D) 21 rad/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. A long plank of mass M is initially at rest on a frictionless surface. A small block with mass m and initial
speed u0 slides on top of the larger plank. The coefficient of friction between the block and plank is .
M m
u0 .
m u0
M
L
Net work done by friction if the top block falls off the plank after sliding over its length L is
L
M m M
(A*) – mgL (B) gL (C) gL (D) – MgL
M M m
12. The figure below shows the forces that three charged particles exert on each other. Which of the four
situations shown can be correct.
(A) all of the above (B) none of the above (C*) II, III (D) II, III & IV
(A) (B) (C*) II, III (D) II, III & IV
13. A slender rod of mass M and length L is hinged about an end to swing freely in a vertical plane.
However, its density is nonuniform and varies linearly from hinged end to the free end, doubling its
value. The moment of inertia of the rod, about the rotation axis passing through the hinge point is:
M L
2 ML2 3 ML2 7 ML2
(A) (B) (C*) (D) None
9 16 18
14. The secondary coil of an ideal step down transformer is delivering 500 watt power at 12.5 A current. If
the ratio of turns in the primary to the secondary is 5 : 1, then the current flowing in the primary coil will
be :
(stepdown) 12.5 500
5 : 1
(A) 62.5 A (B*) 2.5 A (C) 6 A (D) 0.4 A
Sol. P=V
For secondary :
P 500
V2 = 2 = = 40 volts
2 12.5
For an ideal transformer (100% efficient)
Pinput = Poutput
V1 1 = V2 2
V2 2 40(12 .5 )
1 = = = 2.5 A
V1 40 5
n1 V1 5 V1
[ ]
n2 V2 1 40
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. In an LR series circuit with ac source the average power from the souce gets halved if the frequency of
the source is changed from f to 2f. The power factor of the circuit at frequency f is:
LR f 2f
f :
1 1
( A) 1 (B) (C*) (D) 0
2 2
1
Sol. P = Vrms rms Cos
Z2
P will be halved if Z2 is doubled.Since frequency is doubled XL will also be doubled.
R2 + 4XL2 = 2(R2 + XL2) R = XL
1
cos
2
1
P = Vrms rms Cos x
Z2
P Z2 XL
R2 + 4XL2 = 2(R2 + XL2) R = XL
1
cos
2
1 1
16. An inductor L H , a capacitor C F and a resistance (3 ) is connected in series with
100 500
an AC voltage source as shown in the figure. The voltage of the AC source is given as V = 10 cos(100
t) volt. What will be the potential difference between A and B ?
1 1
L H , C F (3 )
100 500
V = 10 cos(100 t) A B ?
17.. Consider a L – R circuit shown in figure. There is no current in circuit. Switch S is closed at t = 0, time
instant when current in inductor is equal to current in resistor 2R will be :
L – R t = 0 S
, 2R :
L 2L L L
(A*) n2 (B) n2 (C) n2 (D)
R R 2R 2R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
V
ii = (1 – e–t/ )
R
V
i2 =
2R
i2 = i2
V V
(1 – e–t/ ) =
R 2R
1 1
1 – e–t/ = e–t/ =
2 2
t L
e =2
t/
= n2 t= n2 = n2
R
18. Consider a L – C oscillation circuit. Circuit elements has zero resistance. Initially at t = 0 all the energy
is stored in the form of electric field and plate-1 is having positive charge :
L–C t = 0
-1
at time t = t1 plate-2 attains half of the maximum +ve change for the first time. Value of t1 is :
t = t1 -2 t1 –
2 4
(A*) LC (B) LC (C) LC (D) LC
3 3 3
Sol.
q1 = q0 sin ( t + /2)
q
at t = t1 q1 = – 0
2
t1 = 3 =2 =
2
LC
3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. The diameter of a cylinder is measured using a vernier callipers with no zero error. It is found that the
zero of the vernier scale lies between 5.10 cm and 5.15 cm of the main scale. The vernier scale has 50
division equivalent to 2.45 cm. The 24th division of the vernier scale exactly coincides with one of the
main scale divisions. The diameter of the cylinder is :
5.10 cm 5.15 cm 50 2.45 cm
(24th)
(A) 5.112 cm (B*) 5.124 cm (C) 5.136 cm (D) 5.148 cm
Ans. (B)
Sol. 50 VSD = 2.45 cm
2.45
1 VSD = cm = 0.049 cm
50
Least count of vernier = 1MSD – 1 VSD
= 0.05 cm – 0.049 cm = 0.001 cm
Thickness of the object = Main scale reading + vernier scale reading × least count
= 5.10 + (24) (0.001) = 5.124 cm.
Hindi. 50 VSD = 2.45 cm
2 .45
1 VSD = cm = 0.049 cm
50
= 1MSD – 1 VSD
= 0.05 cm – 0.049 cm
= 0.001 cm
= + ×
= 5.10 + (24) (0.001) = 5.124 cm.
20. Two identical stars of mass M each orbit around their centre of mass which is at rest. Each orbit is
circular and has radius R, so that the two stars are always on opposite sides on a diameter.Find the
minimum energy that would be required to separate the two stars to infinity.
M
R
GM2
Ans U =
4R
Sol. The necessary centripetal force to both stars is provided by grativational attraction.
Mv 2 GMM
.... (A)
R 4R2
From equation (A)
GM
orbital speed of each star is v = Ans.
4R
Also from equation (A)
M
R O R M
2
v2 GM 2 GM R3
2 3 3
or, time period T = 4 Ans.
R 4R T 4R GM
(b) Net energy of two star system = kinetic energy + gravitational potential energy.
1 1 GMM GM2 GM2 GM2
= Mv2 + Mv2 – = =
2 2 2R 4R 2R 4R
GM2
Hence the minimum energy to dismantle the system = – (Net energy) =
4R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
M
Sol. R R M
O
Mv 2 GMM
.... (A)
R 4R2
(A)
GM
v = Ans.
4R
(A)
v2 GM
2
R 4R3
2
2 GM
T 4R3
R3
T = 4 Ans.
GM
(b) =
1 1 GMM GM2 GM2 GM2
= Mv2 + Mv2 – = =
2 2 2R 4R 2R 4R
GM2
= – () = .
4R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. A moving particle is acted upon by several forces F1, F2, F3,..... etc. One of the force is chosen, say F2,
then which of the following statement about F2 will be true.
F1, F2, F3,..... F2 ,
F2
(A) Work done by F2 will be negative if speed of the particle decreases.
(B) Work done by F2 will be positive if speed of the particle increases
(C) Work done by F2 will be equal to the work done by other forces if speed of the particle does not change
(D*) If F2 is a conservative force, then work done by all other forces will be equal to change in potential
energy due to force F2 when speed remains constant.
(A) F2
(B) F2
(C) F2
(D*) F2 , , F2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. by Work energy theorem
WF2 + Wother = K
WF2 = K – Wother So A & B are wrong
If speed do not change K = 0
then WF2 = –Wother ...(1)
So WF2 Wother
if F2 is conservative force then
U = –WF2 = Wother (from) (1)
2. Inside a horizontally moving box, an experimenter (who is stationary relative to box) finds that when an
object is placed on a smooth horizontal table and is released, it moves with an acceleration of 10 m/s2.
In this box if 1 kg body is suspended with a light string, the tension in the string in equilibrium position.
(w.r.t. experimenter) will be. (Take g = 10 m/s2)
10 /2 1
( g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 10 N (B*) 10 2 N (C) 20 N (D) zero
Sol.
3. A trolley is being pulled up an incline plane by a man inside the trolley. He applied a force of 500 N. If
the mass of the man is 50 kg and trolley is 150 kg, then the acceleration of the trolley will be :
(g = 10 m/s2)
500 N
50kg 150 kg (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 5 m/s2 (B) 1 m/s2 (C) 1.5 m/s2 (D*) 2.5 m/s2
1
Sol. 3T – 200 × 10 × = 200 a
2
3 × 500 – 1000 = 200a
a = 2.5 m/s2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A motor is fixed inside a box which is moving upwards with velocity 5 m/s. String is winding at the rate 3
m/s. Then the velocity of block A will be:
5 m/s 3
m/s A :
Sol.
3T
(A) the force is zero at time (B*) the velocity is maximum at time T/2
4
(C) the acceleration is maximum at time T (D) the P.E. = total energy at time T/2
3T
(A) (B) T/2
4
(C) T (D) = T/2
Sol. the velocity is maximum at time T/2
T/2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. Two blocks of masses 6kg and 3kg are attached to the two ends of a massless spring of spring
constant 2 2 N/m. If spring is compressed and released on a smooth horizontal surface then find the
time period (in seconds) of each block.
6kg 3kg 2 2 N/m
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
6 3
Sol. T= 2 , = = 2kg
k 6 3
7. An orbital electron in the ground state of hydrogen has an angular momentum L1, and an orbital
electron in the first orbit in the ground state of lithium (double ionised positively) has an angular
momentum L2 .Then :
L1 (
) L2
(A*) L1 = L2 (B) L1 = 3L2 (C) L2 = 3L1 (D) L2 = 9L1
Sol. Doubly ionised positively lithium ion is a hydrogen like atom :
n h
hence : L = m v r = for both
2
which depends only on the value of n.
Also for both n = 1.
h
Hence; L1 = L2 = ; Hence (1).
2
8. The frequencies of x-rays, rays and ultra-violet rays are respectively f1, f 2 , f3 then correct inequilities
are ;
x- f1, f2 , f3
(A*) f1 < f2, f2 > f 3 (B) f1 > f2, f2 > f3 (C) f1 > f2, f2 < f 3 (D) f 1 < f2, f2 < f3
9. A person with a defective sight is using a lens having a power of +2D. The lens he is using is
+2D
(A) concave lens with f = 0.5 m (B) convex lens with f = 2.0 m
(C) concave lens with f = 0.2 m (D*) convex lens with f = 0.5 m
(A) f = 0.5 m (B) f = 2.0 m
(C) f = 0.2 m (D*) f = 0.5 m
1 1
Sol. f= metre
p 2
f = 0.5 m this is positive so lense is convex lense.
f = 0.5 m
10. Two charges q1 and q2 are placed 30 cm apart, as shown in the figure. A third charge q3 is moved along
the arc of a circle of radius 40 cm from C to D. The change in the potential energy of the system
q
is 3 k, where k is :
4 0
q1 q2, 30 cm q3 , 40 cm C D
q3
k k
4 0
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. The change in potential energy of the system is UD – UC as discussed under.
UD – UC
When charge q3 is at C, then its potential energy is
q3 C,
1 q1 q3 q2 q3
UC =
4 0 0.4 0.1
When charge q3 is at D, then
1 q1 q3 q2 q3
DUD =
4 0 0.4 0.1
Hence, change in potential energy
1 q2 q3 q2 q3
U = UD – UC =
4 0 0.1 0.5
q3 1 q2 q3 q2 q3
but U = k=
4 0 4 0 0.1 0.5
q3 1 q2 q3 q2 q3
= k = q2 (10 – 2) = 8q2
4 0 4 0 0.1 0.5
11. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water ( w = 103 kg/m3) and a liquid
( L = 13.5 × 103) with (1/5)th portion by volume in the liquid and remaining in water. The density of the
metal is :
( w = 103 kg/m3 ,
L
= 13.5 × 103) (1/5)th
(A) 4.5 × 103 kg/m3 (B) 4.0 × 103 kg/m3 (C*) 3.5 × 103 kg/m3 (D) 1.9 × 103 kg/m3
4 1
Sol. 103 × + 13.5 × 103 × = ×1
5 5
or = 3.5 × 103 kg/m3
A
12. A particle is projected along a horizontal field whose coefficient of friction varies as =
where r is
r2
the distance from the origin in meters and A is a positive constant. The initial distance of the particle is 1
m from the origin and its velocity is radially outwards. The minimum initial velocity at this point so that
particle never stops is :
A
= 2
r
r A 1
(A) (B) 2 gA (C*) 2gA (D) 4 gA
Sol. (C) Work done against friction must equal the initial kinetic energy.
1 v2 1 v2 1
mv 2 = mgdx ; = Ag 2 dx ; = Ag
2 2 x 2 x 1
1 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. A particle of mass m = 2 kg executes SHM in xy-plane between points A and B under action of force
F Fx î Fy ĵ . Minimum time taken by particle to move from A to B is 1 sec. At t = 0 the particle is at x =
2 and y = 2. Then Fx as function of time t is
m = 2 kg xy- A B F Fx î Fy ĵ
A B 1 sec t = 0 x = 2 y = 2 t
Fx :
(A) – 4 2
sin t (B*) – 4 2
cos t (C) 4 2
cos t (D)None of these
Sol. Let the line joining AB represents axis ‘r’. By the conditions given ‘r’ coordinate of the particle at time t is
AB, 'r' 'r'
r = 2 2 cos t
2 2
= = =
T 2
r = 2 2 cos t
r
x = r cos 45° = = 2 cos t
2
ax = – 2 x = – 2 2 cos t
Fx = max = – 4 2 cos t
14. A ring of mass m, radius r having charge q uniformly distributed over it and free to rotate about its own
axis is placed in a region having a magnetic field B parallel to its axis. If the magnetic field is suddenly
switched off, the angular velocity acquired by the ring is
m r q
B
qB 2qB qB
(A) (B) (C*) (D) None of these
m m 2m
d dB dB
Sol. Ed = = r2 ; N=R Ed = – R r2
dt dt dt
Ndt = – R r2 dB =R r2 B =
q qB
r 2B = mr2 =
2 r 2m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. A particle of charge = 1 C and mass m = 1 gm starts moving from origin at t = 0 under an electric field
of 103 N/C along x-axis and magnetic field of 10 tesla along the same axis with the velocity of
v 20 ĵ m/sec as shown, the speed of the particle at the time of 20 3 sec will be :
1 C m = 1 gm t = 0 x- 103 N/C
10 v 20 ĵ m/sec
20 3 sec
16. A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential difference V0 and is then discharged through a
resistance R. The discharge current gradually decreases, with a straight line 1 corresponding to this
process, as shown in figure where time is along x axis and the logarithm of the current on y-axis. Later
on, one of the three parameters V0, R or C, is changed (keeping the other two unchanged) in such a
manner than the n v/s t dependence is represented by the straight line 2. Which option correctly
represents the change ?
C V0 R
1
x–y-V0, R C,
( ) n t 2
log
1
2
O t
(A) V0 is decreased (B) R is decreased (C) R is increased (D*) C is decreased.
(A) V0 (B) R (C) R (D*) C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
V0 t / RC
Sol. I= e
R
V0 t
n n
R RC
V0 V
In both cases log of initial curent is same that means is constant. To keep 0 constant, both V0
R R
and R have to be changed whereas it is stated that only one parameter out of V0, R and C is changed.
Therefroe only C has been changed and to match the straight line in the graph, it is decreased.
17. A planet is revolving around a star with a time period of 2 days, if radius of star trippled keeping mass
same. Planet will revolve with these changed parameters. Select correct option(s) :
2
:
(A) with time period of 6 days
1
(B) with rd orbital speed of initial orbital speed
3
1
(C) with potential energy times of its initial potential energy
3
(D*) None of these
(A) 6
1
(B)
3
1
(C)
3
(D*)
18. A concave mirror of focal length f produces a real image n times the size of the object. The distance of
the object from the mirror is :
f n :
(A) (n – 1)f (B) (n + 1)f (C*) (n + 1)f / n (D) (n – 1) f / n
f
Sol. (C) –n= (u coordinate)
f u
(n 1)f
|u| =
n
19. Consider three charges q,–q, q (in SI units) at the vertices of an equilateral triangle with side length b.
The magnitude of electric field at the centroid of the triangle is :
b q,–q, q (SI )
:
3q 3q q
(A*) 2
(B) 2
(C) (D) 0
2 0b 4 0b 2 0b 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
–q
b E 60° 60° E b
Sol. (A)
q b q
Kq 3Kq
E= 2
b b2
3
6Kq 3q
Enet = 2E= 2
= 2
b 2 0b
20. A monochromatic beam of light of wavelength and frequency goes from vacuum to a medium of
refractive index n. How do the wavelength and frequency of light change ?
(A) wavelength becomes and frequency nv
n
(B) wavelength becomes n and frequency becomes
n
(C) wavelength and frequency do not change
(D*) wavelength becomes and frequency does not change
n
n
?
(A) n (B) n
n n
(C) (D)
n
Sol. (D) Frequency does not change
n=
m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. Two blocks, of masses M and 2M, are connected to a light spring of spring constant K that has one end
fixed, as shown in figure. The horizontal surface and the pulley are frictionless. The blocks are released
from rest when the spring is non deformed. The string is light.
M 2M K
K
M
2M
4Mg
(A*) Maximum extension in the spring is .
K
4Mg
K
2 M2 g2
(B*) Maximum kinetic energy of the system is
K
2 M2 g2
K
(C*) Maximum energy stored in the spring is four times that of maximum kinetic energy of the system.
4 M2 g2
(D) When kinetic energy of the system is maximum, energy stored in the spring is
K
4 M2 g2
K
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. Maximum extension will be at the moment when both masses stop momentarily after going down.
Applying W-E theorem from starting to that instant.
kf – ki = Wgr. + Wsp + Wten.
1 2
0 – 0 = 2 M.g.x + Kx +0
2
4 Mg
x=
K
System will have maximum KE when net force on the system becomes zero. Therefore
2 Mg = T and T = kx
2 Mg
x=
K
2 Mg
Hence KE will be maximum when 2M mass has gone down by .
K
2 Mg
2M
K
Applying W/E theorem ()
2 Mg 1 4 M2 g2
kf – 0 = 2Mg. – K.
K 2 K2
2 M2 g2
kf =
K2
2
1 4 Mg 8 M2 g2
Maximum energy of spring = K . =
2 K K
2
1 4 Mg 8 M2 g2
= K . =
2 K K
Therefore Maximum spring energy = 4 × maximum K.E.
= 4 ×
2 Mg
When K.E. is maximum x = .
K
2 Mg
x = .
K
1 4 M2 g2 2 M2 g2
Spring energy ( ) = . K . =
2 K2 K2
i.e. (D) is wrong.
(D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. A bob of mass 2 kg is suspended from point O of a cone with an inextensible string of length 3 m. It is
moving in horizontal circle over the surface of cone as shown in the figure. Then : (g = 10 m/s2)
2 kg O 3 m
(g = 10 m/s2)
(A*) bob looses contact with cone if v 5 m/s (B) normal force on bob is 19 N when v = 2 m/s
38 17
(C*) tension in string is N when v = 2 m/s (D) normal force on bob is N when v = 2m/s
3 3
(A*) v 5 m/s
(B) 19 N v = 2 m/s
38
(C*) N v = 2 m/s
3
17
(D) N v = 2m/s
3
Sol.
T cos30º + N sin30º = mg
3 T + N = 2 mg ..............(i)
2
mv
T sin30º – N cos30º =
( 3 / 2)
T sin30º – 3N = 4mv2
3T – 3N = 4mv2 ..............(ii)
2
2mg 4mv 6mg 4mv 2
by (i),)(ii) N= ; T=
4 4 3
for N > 0 v< 5 m/s
38
at v = 2 T= N; N = 2N.
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Switch S1 is closed for a long time while S2 remains open. Now at t = 0 S2 is closed while S1 is opened.
All the batteries are ideal and connecting wires are resistanceless.The capacitor 'C' is initially
uncharged.
S1 (closed) S2 (open) t = 0 S2 S1
'C'
i=
5R
equation of charge of capacitor
q = c e–t/
q = ce–t/5RC
c
at t = 5 RC n 2 q=
2
Change in energy of capacitor
1 1 3
= c 2– c 2 = c 2
2 8 8
3 3 9
Heat in 3R (3R ) = c 2 × = c 2
8 5 40
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A closed tube in the form of an equilateral triangle of side contains equal volumes of three liquids
which do not mix and is placed vertically with its lowest side horizontal. Find 'x' in the figure if the
densities of the liquids are in A.P.
'x'
(A.P.)
Ans. x=
3
Sol.
x=
3
5. Two infinitely long rods carry equal linear density each. They are perpendicular to each other and
they are in different planes and separated by a distance d. Find the electrostatic force on one rod due to
the other
d
2
[Ans: /2 0]
COMPREHENSION
loudspeaker
Components of loudspeaker :
A loudspeaker consists of permanent magnets, basket, voice coil, flexible suspension ring & rigid
speaker cone as shown in figure :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Loudspeaker principle
A light voice coil is mounted so that it can move freely inside the magnetic field of a strong permanent
magnet. The paper cone is attached to the voice coil and attached with a flexible mounting to the outer
ring of the speaker support. Because there is a definite equilibrium position for the speaker cone and
there is elasticity of the mounting structure, there is inevitably a free cone resonant frequency like that
of a mass on a spring. The frequency can be determined by adjusting the mass and stiffness of the
cone and voice coil.
Working :
The radio drives a rapidly changing current through the coil. The current follows the vibrations of
speech and the electromagnetic force follows the current changes, pushing the paper cone. Finally the
air in front of the loudspeaker is set into vibration following the cone’s motion, and sound waves are
transmitted to the listener.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A voice coil in a loudspeaker has 40 turns of wire and loop-diameter 1 cm and the current in the coil is 1
A. Assume that the magnetic field at each of the wire of the coil has constant magnitude 0.2 T and is
directed at an angle 60° from the normal to the plane of the coil as shown in figure. The magnitude and
direction of magnetic force on the coil is :
40 1 1
0.2
60°
3
= 40.1.2 (0.5 × 10–2) (0.2) =4 3 × 10–2 N
2
Clearly, the force is along – y direction.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. With reference to the figure of Q. 7 when the current in the coil is given by = c cos (2000 t) where t is
in seconds, the coil will experience magnetic force in the positive y-direction in the time intervals of :
[Take the initial direction of current shown in figure to be positive]
7 = c cos (2000 t) t
y- [
]
(A) 0 to 5 × 10–4 sec (B) 2.5 × 10–4 to 5 × 10–4 sec
(C) 0 to 2.5 × 10 sec –4
(D*) 2.5 × 10–4 to 7.5 × 10–4 sec
Sol. Force will be in +y direction when current is in –ve direction.
i.e., when ; cos (2000 t) < 0
3
i.e., when ( 2000 t )
2 2
i.e. when 2.5 × 10–4 < t < 7.5 × 10–4
9. If the diameter of the cylindrical magnet, number of turns of the coil and cross section area of the wire
of the coil are all doubled, then the magnetic force on the coil assuming the same potential difference,
is (assume that value of magnetic field also gets doubled.)
(A) same (B) doubled (C) becomes 8 times (D*) becomes four times
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
Sol. F = NI B 2 rsin600
Initial resistance :
N(2 r )
Ri =
A A
New resistance :
(2 N). 2 (2 r ) N . (2 r )
R = = 2 = 2Ri
A 2A A
V I
'=
R2
I
F' = 2.N . . 2B . 2 (2r) sin 60°
2
= 4F
Hence become 4 times
10. If the voice coil is wound loosely and there is an approachable gap between two consecutive turns;
when the current is passed through coil :
(A*) It tries to contract.
(B) It tries to expand.
(C) Current has no effect on coil.
(D) Coil will get contracted without current due to fixed magnets in loudspeaker.
(A*) It tries to contract
(B) It tries to expand.
(C) Current has no effect on coil.
(D) Coil will get contracted without current due to fixed magnets in loudspeaker.
Sol. As current in the loops is flowing in the same direction, they will attract each other.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. A small spherical ball of mass m is projected from lowest point (point P) in the space between two fixed,
concentric spheres A and B (see figure). The smaller sphere A has a radius R and the space between
the two spheres has a width d. The ball has a diameter very slightly less than d. All surfaces are
frictionless. Speed of ball at lowest point is v. NA and NB represent magnitudes of the normal reaction
force on the ball exerted by the spheres A and B respectively. Match the value of v given in column–I
with corresponding results in column–II.
A B P m
A R d d
v NA NB A
B –I v –II
Column–I Column–II
(A) v gR (p) maximum value of NA = 0
(B) v 2gR (q) minimum value of NB= 0
(C) v 3gR (r) maximum value of NB = 6 mg
(D) v 5gR (s) maximum value of NB = 4 mg
(t) maximum value of NB = 2 mg
–I –II
(A) v gR (p) NA = 0
(B) v 2gR (q) NB = 0
(C) v 3gR (r) NB = 6 mg
(D) v 5gR (s) NB = 4 mg
(t) NB = 2 mg
Ans. (A) – p,t ; (B) – p,q ; (C) – q,s ; (D) – p,q,r
Sol. Ball only loose contact with surface B when v is in range 2Rg v 5Rg so for A,B,D maximum
value of NA is zero for option C ball lose contact with surface B at some point.
B v 2Rg v 5Rg A,B,D NA
CB
maximum value of NB is lowest point and given NB
mv 2
N = mg +
R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
2 If first excitation potential of a hydrogen like atom is V electron volt, then the ionization energy of this
atom will be:
H– V
3V
(A) V electron volt (B) electron volt
4
4V
(C*) electron volt (D) cannot be calculated by given information.
3
3V
(A) V (B)
4
4V
(C*) (D)
3
1 1 3
Sol. First excitation energy = RhC 2 2
= RhC
1 2 4
3
RhC = V e.v.
4
4V
RhC = e.v.
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. In a hydrogen atom following the Bohr’s postulates the product of linear momentum and angular
momentum is proportional to (n)x where ‘n’ is the orbit number. Then ‘x’ is :
H (n)x ‘n’
‘x’ :
(A*) 0 (B) 2 (C) –2 (D) 1
1
Sol. Linear momentum mv
n
angular momentum mvr n
product of linear momentum and angular momentum n0
1
mv
n
mvr n
n0
4. When the energy of the incident radiation is increased by 20%, the kinetic energy of the photoelectrons
emitted from a metal surface increased fro m emitted 0.5 eV to 0.8eV. The work function of the metal is:
(A) 0.65 eV (B) 1.0 eV (C) 1.3 eV (D) 1.5 eV
20% (
) 0.5 eV 0.8eV :
(A) 0.65 eV (B*) 1.0 eV (C) 1.3 eV (D) 1.5 eV
Ans. (B)
Sol. KEmax = h –
0.5eV = h – ....(A)
0.8eV = 1.2 h – ....(B)
solving = 1 eV
5. If the kinetic energy of the particle is increased to 16 times its previous value, the percentage change in
the de-Broglie wavelength of the particle is :
(A) 25 (B*) 75 (C) 60 (D) 50
16
:
(A) 25 (B) 75 (C) 60 (D) 50
Ans. (B)
Sol. KE = 16 times V = 4 times
h 0
De-broglie wavelength = one forth 0 . So De-Brogli wave will decrease by 75%
mV 4
. KE = 16 V = 4
h 0
= 0 75%
mV 4
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
hc 1240
Sol. Energy of the photone E = = 12.75 eV
97.5
This energy is equal to energy gap between n = 1 (– 13.6) and n = 4(–0.85). So by this energy, the
electron will excite from n = 1 to n = 4. When the electron will fall back, numbers of spectral lines
n(n 1)
emmitted =
2
(4)(4 1)
= 6
2
hc 1240
. E = = 12.75 eV
97.5
n = 1 (– 13.6) n = 4(–0.85) n = 1 n = 4
n(n 1)
n = 1
2
(4)(4 1)
= 6
2
7. Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is sent from one city to another city through copper wires.
The fall of potential per km is 8 volt and the average resistance per km is 0.5 The power loss in the wire
is:
150 km
8 0.5
(A) 19.2 W (B*) 19.2 kW (C) 19.2 J (D) 12.2 kW
Ans. (B)
Sol. Total voltage drop = 150 × 8 = V
total resistance of wire R = 0.5 × 150
V2 (150 8)2
Power loss = = = 19.2 KW
R 0.5 150
= 150 × 8 = V
R = 0.5 × 150
V2 (150 8)2
= = = 19.2 KW
R 0.5 150
8. The resistance in the two arms of the meter bridge are 5 and R , respectively. When the resistance
R is shunted with an equal resistance, the new balance point is at 1.6 1 . The resistance 'R' is :
5 R R R
1.6 1 'R'
:
5 R
A B
100 – 1
1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5 1
Sol.
R 100 1
5 1.6 1
R/2 100 1.6 1
Solving 1 = 25 cm and R = 15
1 = 25 cm R = 15
9. A potentiometer circuit has been set up for finding the internal resistance of a given cell. The main
battery, used across the potentiometer wire, has an emf of 2.0 V and a negligible internal resistance.
The potentiometer wire itself is 4 m long. When the resistance, R, connected acrose the given cell, has
values of .
(i) infinity (ii) 9.5
The 'balancing lengths, on the potentiometer wire are found to be 3m and 2.85 m, respectively.
The value of internal resistance of the cell is :
4m
2.0 V
R
(i) (ii) 9.5
3m 2.85 m
(A) 0.25 (B) 0.95 (C*) 0.5 (D) 0.75
Ans. (C)
Sol. Internal resistance of the unknown cell is
1 3
r 1 R= 1 (9.5 ) = 0.5
2 2.85
1 3
r 1 R= 1 (9.5 ) = 0.5
2 2.85
10. Following figures show the arrangement of bar magnets in different configurations. Each magnet has
magnetic dipole m . Which configuration has highest net magnetic dipole moment ?
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Ans. (C)
(b) Mnet = m – m = 0
12. Consider atoms H, He+, Li++ in their ground states. If L1, L2 and L3 are magnitude of angular momentum
of their electrons about the nucleus respectively then :
H, He+, Li++ L1, L2 L3
- :
(A*) L1= L2 = L3 (B) L1 > L2 > L3 (C) L1< L2 < L3 (D) L1 = L2 = L3
nh
Sol. Angular momentum =
2
i.e. same for all
nh
=
2
13. Consider atoms H, He+, Li++ in their ground states. Suppose E1, E2 and E3 are minimum energies
required so that the atoms H, He+, Li++ can achieve their first excited states respectively, then -
H, He+, Li++ E1, E2 E3
-
(A) E1 = E2 = E3 (B) E1 > E2 > E3 (C*) E1 < E2 < E3 (D) E1 = E2 = E3
Sol. E z 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-23
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. A charge particle q0 of mass m0 is projected along the y-axis at t = 0 from origin with a velocity V0. If a
uniform electric field E0 also exists along the x-axis, then the time at which debroglie wavelength of the
particle becomes half of the initial value is :
m0 q0 t = 0 y– V0
x – E0
m0 v0 m0 v0 m0 v0 m0 v 0
(A) (B) 2 (C*) 3 (D) 3
q0E0 q0E0 q0E0 q0E0
h
Sol. Initial debrogle wavelength = .
m0 v0
h
After any time t, =
m0 v 0 q0E 0 t
When becomes half of the initial value :
h h m0 v0
= m0v0 = q0E0t t= 3
2m0 v 0 m0 v 0 q0E 0 t q0E0
15. The electric field intensity at all points in space is given by E = 3 ˆi - ˆj volts/metre. The nature of
equipotential lines in x-y plane is given by
E = 3 ˆi - ˆj x-y
Low potential High potential
High potential y Low potential
y y y
The equipotential lines will be perpendicular to electric field. Also electric field points from high potential
region towards low potential region. Therefore nature of equipotential lines in x-y plane is given by
figure 2.
xy-
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-24
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. A string of length 1.5 m with its two ends clamped is vibrating in fundamental mode. Amplitude at the
centre of the string is 4 mm. Minimum distance between the two points having amplitude 2 mm is:
1.5
4 2
(A*) 1 m (B) 75 cm (C) 60 cm (D) 50 cm
Sol. = 2 = 3m
Equation of standing wave
y = 2A sin kx cos t
y = A as amplitude is 2A.
A = 2A sin kx
x= x1 = m
and .x= x2 = 1.25 m x2 – x1 = 1m
= 2 = 3m
(x = 0 )
y = 2A sin kx cos t
y = A 2A
A = 2A sin kx
x= x1 = m
x= x2 = 1.25 m x2 – x1 = 1m
17. An open organ pipe containing air resonates in fundamental mode due to a tuning fork. The measured
values of length l (in cm) of the pipe and radius r (in cm) of the pipe are l = 94 ± 0.1, r = 5 ± 0.05. The
velocity of the sound in air is accurately known. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of
the frequency of that tuning fork by this experiment, will be
= 94 ±
0.1, r = 5 ± 0.05
(A*) 0.16 (B) 0.64 (C) 1.2 (D) 1.6
v
Sol. f= where e = end correction = 0.6 r
2( 2e)
v
f= e = = 0.6 r
2( 2e )
v v
f= =
2( 2 0.6r ) 2( 1.2 r )
f v ( 1 .2 r ) v 1 .2 r
= – = –
f v 1. 2 r v 1 .2 r
v
here = 0 (given)
v
f 1 .2 r
× 100 = – 100
f 1 .2 r
for maximum % error : l = 0.1, r = 0.05
% : l = 0.1, r = 0.05
f 0.1 1 .2 0.05
100 = × 100 = 0.16% ...Ans.
f max 94 1.2 5
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-25
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. A small block of mass 'm' is placed on bigger block of mass M, which is placed on a frictionless
horizontal surface. The two blocks are given equal speed u, but opposite directions, as shown in the
figure. After sometime, it is observed that both the blocks are moving in the direction of motion of the
u
lower block, with a speed greater than . It can be concluded that -
2
'm' M
u
u
2
u
friction m u
Horizontal m
M u frictionless surface
u
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// M
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
19. A meter bridge is set-up as shown, to determine an unknown resistance ‘X’ using a standard 10 ohm
resistor. The galvanometer shows null point when tapping-key is at 52 cm mark. The end-corrections
are 1 cm and 2 cm respectively for the ends A and B. The determined value of ‘X’ is
'X' 10 ohm
52 cm (null-point)
A B (end-corrections) 1 cm 2 cm 'X'
(A) 10.2 ohm (B*) 10.6 ohm (C) 10.8 ohm (D) 11.1 ohm
Sol. 1
= 52 + 1 = 53 cm
2
= 48 + 2 = 50 cm
1 x
2 R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-26
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
20. Two full turns of the circular scale of a screw gauge cover a distance of 1mm on its main scale. The
total number of divisions on the circular scale is 50. Further, it is found that the screw gauge has a zero
error of –0.03 mm. While measuring the diameter of a thin wire, a student notes the main scale reading
of 3 mm and the number of circular scale divisions in line with the main scale as 35. The diameter of the
wire is :
1mm
50 –0.03 mm
3 mm 35
(A) 3.32 mm (B) 3.73 mm (C) 3.67 mm (D*) 3.38 mm
Sol. Least count of screw gauge
0 .5
mm = 0.01 mm
50
Reading = [Main scale reading + circular scale reading × L.C.] – (zero error)
= [+ × L.C.] – ()
= [3+ 35 × 0.01] – (–0.03) = 3.38 MM
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-27
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. What is the amount of power delivered by the ac source in the circuit shown (in watts).
()
(A) 500 watt (B) 1014 watt (C*) 1514 watt (D) 2013 watt
(5) 200 watt
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
i1 R1
i2
R2
Sol.
Erms 130
i1rms = = 10 A
X2C R12 13
Erms
i2rms = 13 A
XL2 R 22
2
Power dissipated = i1rms R1 i22rmsR 2 = 102 × 5 + 132 × 6
2
= i1rms R1 i22rmsR 2 = 102 × 5 + 132 × 6
= power delivered by battery
= 500 + 169 × 6
= 1514 watt
2. A smooth sphere A of mass m collides elastically with an identical sphere B at rest. The velocity of A
before collision is 8 m/s in a direction making 60º with the line joining the centres at the time of impact.
Which of the following is/are possible :
m A B A
60º 8 m/s
(A) the sphere A comes to rest after collision
A
(B) the sphere B will move with a speed of 8 m/ after collision
B 8 m/s
(C*) the directions of motion of A and B after collision are at right angles
A B
(D*) the speed of B after collision is 4 m/s. B 4 m/s
Sol. Sphere A moving with velocity v has a component v/2 along the line joining the centres of the spheres
at the time of collision and another component v/2 perpendicular to the previous direction. After
collision the component along the line will interchange i.e. B will move with v/2 velocity i.e. 4 m/s
along the line joining the centres and A moves with v/2 velocity at perpendicular direction to B.
3. When a hydrogen atom is excited from ground state to first excited state then
(A) its kinetic energy increases by 10.2 eV.
(B*) its kinetic energy decreases by 10 .2 eV.
(C*) its potential energy increases by 20.4 eV.
(D*) its angular momentum increases by 1.05 × 10–34 J-s.
(A) 10.2
(B*) 10 .2
(C*) 20.4
(D*) 1.05 × 10–34 ×
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. ground state n = 1
n = 1
first excited state n = 2
n = 2
10
1 14.4 10
KE = (z = 1) KE = eV
4 0 2r
Now r = 0.53 n2 Aº (z = 1)
14.4 10 10
(KE)1 = eV = 13.58 eV
2 0.53 10 10
(KE)2 = ev = 3.39 ev
KE decreases by = 10.2 ev
= 10.2 ev
1 e2 14.4 10 10
Now PE = = ev
4 0 r r
10
–14.4 10
(PE)1 = ev = –27.1 ev
0.53 10 –10
14.4 10 10
(PE)2 = = –6.79ev
0.53 10 10 4
PE increases by = 20.4 ev
= 20.4 ev
Now Angular momentum ;
nh
L = mvr =
2
h 6.6 10 34
L2–L1 = = = 1.05 × 10–34 J–sec.
2 6.28
4. Two identical soap bubbles each of radius r and of the same surface tension T combine to form a new
soap bubble of radius R. The two bubbles contain air at the same temperature. If the atmospheric
pressure is p0 then find the surface tension T of the soap solution in terms of p0, r and R. Assume
process is isothermal.
r T
R p0
T p0, r R
p 0 ( 2r 3 R3 )
Ans. T = 2
4(R 2r 2 )
Sol. Total number of moles of air in the two soap bubbles = number of moles of air in the resulting bubble.
2pv p v
=
RT RT
2pv = p v
4T 4 3 4T 4
2 p0 r = p0 R3
r 3 R 3
4T 3 4T
2 p0 r = p0 R3
r R
p 0 (R 3 2r 3 ) p 0 (R 3 2r 3 )
T= 2 2
= 2
8r 4R 4( 2r R2 )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
An experimental setup of verification of photoelectric effect is shown in the diagram. The voltage across
the electrodes is measured with the help of an ideal voltmeter, and which can be varied by moving
jockey ‘J’ on the potentiometer wire. The battery used in potentiometer circuit is of 20 V and its internal
resistance is 2 . The resistance of 100 cm long potentiometer wire is 8 .
20 V 2 100 cm 8
The photocurrent is measured with the help of an ideal ammeter. Two plates of potassium oxide of area
50 cm2 at separation 0.5 mm are used in the vacuum tube. Photo current in the circuit is very small so
we can treat potentiometer circuit an independent circuit.
The wavelengths of various colours is as follows :
50 cm2
0.5 mm
5. The number of electrons appeared on the surface of the cathode plate, when the jockey is connected at
the end ‘P’ of the potentiometer wire. Assume that no radiation is falling on the plates.
‘P’
(A) 8.85 × 106 (B) 11.0625 × 109 (C*) 8.85 × 109 (D) 0
Sol. Q = CV
A
ne = 0 V
d
2.85 10 12 10
n= 16
0.5 10 3 1.6 10 19
n = 8.85 × 109 Ans.
6. It is found that ammeter current remains unchanged (2 A) even when the jockey is moved from the end
‘P’ to the middle point of the potentiometer wire. Assuming all the incident photons eject electron and
the power of the light incident is 4 × 10–6 W. Then the colour of the incident light is
(A) Green (B) Violet (C) Red (D*) Orange
'P' (2 A)
4 × 10–6
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
nhC
Sol. P=
where n = no. of photons incident per unit time.
Also, = ne
hC
P=
e
( 2 10 6 )( 6. 6 10 34 )(3 10 8 )
=
( 4 10 6 )(1.6 10 19 )
9 .9 9900
= 10 7 m = Å = 6187 Å
1 .6 1. 6
Which came in the range of orange light.
7. Which of the following colour must give photoelectric effect from this cathode :
(A*) Green (B*) Violet (C) Red (D*) Blue
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. The range of wavelength for red light is beyond the wavelength of incident light.
8. When other light falls on the anode plate the ammeter reading remains zero till, jockey is moved from
the end P to the middle point of the wire PQ. Thereafter the deflection is recorded in the ammeter.
P
PQ
(A) The minimum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is 16 eV
(B*) The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is 8 eV
(C) Work function of the potassium oxide is 4 eV
(D*) The minimum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is zero
(A) 16 eV
(B*) 8 eV
(C) 4 eV
(D*)
Sol. Stopping potential VS = 8V and KE = eVS
KE = 8eV Ans.
9. A small spherical ball of mass m is projected from lowest point (point P) in the space between two fixed,
concentric spheres A and B (see figure). The smaller sphere A has a radius R and the space between
the two spheres has a width d. The ball has a diameter very slightly less than d. All surfaces are
frictionless. Speed of ball at lowest point is v. NA and NB represent magnitudes of the normal reaction
force on the ball exerted by the spheres A and B respectively. Match the value of v given in column–I
with corresponding results in column–II.
A B P m
A R d d
v NA NB A
B –I v –II
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Column–I Column–II
(A) v gR (p) maximum value of NA = 0
(B) v 2gR (q) minimum value of NB= 0
(C) v 3gR (r) maximum value of NB = 6 mg
(D) v 5gR (s) maximum value of NB = 4 mg
(t) maximum value of NB = 2 mg
–I –II
(A) v gR (p) NA = 0
(B) v 2gR (q) NB = 0
(C) v 3gR (r) NB = 6 mg
(D) v 5gR (s) NB = 4 mg
(t) NB = 2 mg
Ans. (A) – p,t ; (B) – p,q ; (C) – q,s ; (D) – p,q,r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
2. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of
the remaining cylinder is V and its mass M. It is suspended by a string in a liquid of density where it
stays vertical. The upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the liquid surface. The force on
the bottom of the cylinder by the liquid is :
( R) R
M, V ( )
h
[
(A) Mg (B) Mg – V g
(C) Mg + R2h g (D*) g(V + R2 h)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. [Flower – Fupper] by liquid = Upthrust
F2 – F1 = upthrust
F2 = F1 + upthrust
F2 = gh ( R2) + V g
F1
Upthrust
F2
or F2 = g(V + R2h)
In this problem, we did not take the force due to air pressure on the cylinder. This is because force due
to air pressure is cancelled. At top and bottom of the cylinder the force due to air pressure is equal and
opposite.
Sol. [F – F] =
F2 – F1 =
F2 = F1 +
F2 = gh ( R2) + V g
F1
Upthrust
F2
F2 = g(V + R2h)
3. The density of ice is x gm/cc and that of water is y gm/cc. What is the change in volume in cc, when m
gm of ice melts?
x gm/cc y gm/cc. m gm
cc
(A) M (y – x) (B) (y – x)/m (C) mxy (x – y) (D*) m (1/y – 1/x)
m m
Sol. v = vf – vi = .
y x
4. A block of steel of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm is weighed in water. If the relative density of steel is 7. Its
apparent weight is :
5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm
7
(A*) 6 × 5 × 5 × 5 gf (B) 4 × 4 × 4 × 7 gf (C) 5 × 5 × 5 × 7 gf (D) 4 × 4 × 4 × 6 gf
Sol. Wapp = mg – FB
Wapp = Vg – wVg
= ( – w) Vg
= (7 w – w) Vg = 6 w Vg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10 11
5. The atomic weight of boron is 10.81 g/mole and it has two isotopes 5B and 5B . The ratio (by
10 11
number) of 5B : 5B in nature would be :
10.81 gm/mole 105 B 115B 10
5B : 11
5B
:
(A*) 19 : 81 (B) 10 : 11 (C) 15 : 16 (D) 81 : 19
Sol. Let 105 B and 11
5 B be in the ratio m:n .
10 11
5B 5B m:n
Average atomic weight
m 10 n 11 m 0.19 19
10.81 = = =
m n n 0.81 81
6. The graph in the figure shows how the displacement of a particle describing S.H.M. varies with time.
Which one of the following statements is not true ?
3T
(A) the force is zero at time (B*) the velocity is maximum at time T/2
4
(C) the acceleration is maximum at time T (D) the P.E. = total energy at time T/2
3T
(A) (B) T/2
4
(C) T (D) = T/2
Sol. the velocity is maximum at time T/2
T/2
7. Two blocks of masses 6kg and 3kg are attached to the two ends of a massless spring of spring
constant 2 2 N/m. If spring is compressed and released on a smooth horizontal surface then find the
time period (in seconds) of each block.
6kg 3kg 2 2 N/m
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
6 3
Sol. T= 2 , = = 2kg
k 6 3
8. An orbital electron in the ground state of hydrogen has an angular momentum L1, and an orbital
electron in the first orbit in the ground state of lithium (double ionised positively) has an angular
momentum L2 .Then :
L1 (
) L2
(A*) L1 = L2 (B) L1 = 3L2 (C) L2 = 3L1 (D) L2 = 9L1
Sol. Doubly ionised positively lithium ion is a hydrogen like atom :
n h
hence : L = m v r = for both
2
which depends only on the value of n.
h
Also for both n = 1. Hence; L1 = L2 = ; Hence (1).
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. The frequencies of x-rays, rays and ultra-violet rays are respectively f1, f 2 , f3 then correct inequilities
are ;
x- f1, f2 , f3
(A*) f1 < f2, f2 > f 3 (B) f1 > f2, f2 > f3 (C) f1 > f2, f2 < f 3 (D) f 1 < f2, f2 < f3
10. A person with a defective sight is using a lens having a power of +2D. The lens he is using is
+2D
(A) concave lens with f = 0.5 m (B) convex lens with f = 2.0 m
(C) concave lens with f = 0.2 m (D*) convex lens with f = 0.5 m
(A) f = 0.5 m (B) f = 2.0 m
(C) f = 0.2 m (D*) f = 0.5 m
1 1
Sol. f= metre
p 2
f = 0.5 m this is positive so lense is convex lense.
f = 0.5 m
11. During a negative beta decay,
(A) an atomic electron is ejected
(B) an electron which is already present within the nucleus is ejected
(C*) a neutron in the nucleus decays emitted an electron
(D) a proton in the nucleus decays emitting an electron
- ,
(A)
(B)
(C*)
(D)
12. A ball of mass m moves with speed v and stikes a wall having infinite mass and it returns with same
speed then the work done by the ball on the wall is :
m v
:
(A*) (B) mv J (C) m/v. J (D) v/m J
13. A satellite is revolving around earth in a circular orbit. At some instant the speed of the satellite is
increased 2 times its orbital speed keeping its direction unchanged. Then, the new path of the
satellite is :
2
(A) circular (B) straight line (C) elliptical (D*) parabolic
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
Sol. The orbital velocity,
GM
v0 =
r
Its velocity is increased by 2 times, new velocity
2
GM 2GM
v= 2 = escape velocity
r r
The path is parabolic in case of escape velocity.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. Two particles of combined mass M, placed in space with certain separation, are released. Interaction
between the particles is only of gravitational nature and there is no external force present. Acceleration
of one particle with respect to the other when separation between them is R, has a magnitude :
M
R
GM GM
(A) 2
(B*)
2R R2
2GM
(C) (D) not possible to calculate due to lack of information
R2
(D)
Sol.
GM1M2 GM1M2
a1 = 2
/ M1 a2 = / M2
R R2
acceleation of M1 w.r.t. M2
M2 M1
arel. = a1 + a2
G(M1 M2 ) GM
= = .
R2 R2
15. Protons and singly ionized atoms of U235 & U238 are passed in turn (which means one after the other
and not at the same time) through a velocity selector and then enter a uniform magnetic field. The
protons describe semicircles of radius 10 mm. The separation between the ions of U235 and U238 after
describing semicircle is given by
U235 U238
10 mm U235
U238 –
U-238 U-235 p
16. A nuclear transformation is denoted by X(n, ) 73 Li . Which of the following is the nucleus of element
X?
X(n, ) 73 Li X ?
12
(A) 6 C (B*) 10
5 B (C) 95 B (D) 11
4 Be
A 1 7 4
Sol. Z X 0n 3Li 2 He
It implies that
A+1=7+4
A = 10
and Z + 0 = 3 + 2
Z=5
Thus, it is Boron 10
5 B
10
5 B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions along x and y directions according to,x = 3 sin
100 t; y = 4 sin 100 t. (x, y are in meter and t is in sec.)
x y x = 3 sin 100 t; y = 4
sin 100 t. (x, y t )
(A) Motion of particle will be on ellipse traversing it in clockwise direction.
(B*) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with slope 4/3.
4/3
(C) Motion will be a simple harmonic motion along x axis with amplitude 5.
x-5 I
(D) Phase difference between two motions is /2.
/2
Sol. x = 3 sin 100 t
y = 4 sin 100 t
Equation of path is ()
y 4
x 3
4
i.e. () y x
3
4
which is equation of a straight line having slope
3
Equation of resulting motion is r xiˆ yjˆ
4
3
r xiˆ yjˆ
(3iˆ 4ˆj) = sin 100 t
Amplitude is () 32 42 = 5
18. If the dimensions of a physical quantity are given by MaLbTc , then the physical quantity will be
(A*) pressure if a =1, b= –1, c = –2 (B) velocity if a =1, b = 0, c = –1
(C) acceleration if a =1, b= 1, c = –2 (D) force if a =0, b= –1, c = –2
MaLbTc,
(A) a =1, b= –1, c = –2 (B) a =1, b = 0, c = –1
(C) a =1, b= 1, c = –2 (D) a =0, b= –1, c = –2
Sol. (i) Dimension of velocity = [M0L1T–1]
Here, a = 0, b =1 , c = –1
(ii) Dimensions of acceleration = [M0L1T–2]
Here, a = 0, b = 1 , c = –2
(iii) Dimensions of force = [M1L1T–2]
Here, a = 1, b =1 , T = –2
(iv) Dimensions of pressure = [M1L–1T–2]
Here, a = 1, b = –1 , c = –2
The physical quantity is pressure.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. The photon radiated from hydrogen corresponding to 2nd line of Lyman series is absorbed by a
hydrogen like atom ‘X’ in 2nd excited state. As a result the hydrogen like atom ‘X’ makes a transition to
nth orbit. Then,
x
'x' n
(A) X = He+, n = 4 (B) X = Li++, n = 6 (C) X = He+, n = 6 (D*) X = Li++, n = 9
Sol. (D) Energy of nth sate in Hydrogen is same as energy of 3nth state in Li++.
3 1 transition in H would give same energy as the 3×3 1× 3
transition in Li++.
Sol. (D) nth Li++ 3nth
3 1 H 3×3 1× 3
Li++
20. A point object is placed at a distance 20 cm from the focus of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 20
cm. Find the distance (in cm) of the image from the focus.
20 cm 20 cm
(cm )
(A*) 5 cm. (B) 10 cm. (C) 15 cm. (D) 20 cm.
Sol. Using newton’s formula
xy = f2
20 y = (10)2 y = 5 cm.
BOARD PROBLEMS
1. Define decay constant [1 Mark]
Ans. Decay constant of a radioactive element is the reciprocal of the time during which the number of atoms
left in the sample reduces to 1/e times the original number of atoms in the sample.
1
e
2. Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 1 :2. What is the ratio of their nuclear densities ?
1:2 [1 Mark]
Sol. Since the nuclear density is same for all nuclei.The ratio of their densities are 1:1 i.e 1 : 2 = 1 : 1
1 :1
3. (i) Draw the graphs showing variation of inductive reactance and capacitive reactance with frequency of
applied a.c. source.
(ii) Can the voltage drop across the inductor or the capacitor in a series LCR circuit be greater than the
applied voltage of the a.c. source ? Justify your answer. [3 Marks]
(i)
(ii) L-C-R
4. State the working of a.c. generator with the help of a labelled diagram. The coil of an a.c. generator
having N turns, each of area A, is rotated with a constant angular velocity . Deduce the expression for
the alternating e.m.f. generated in the coil. What is the source of energy generation in this device?
N A w
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Initially capacitor is uncharged, at t = 0 switch is closed. Charge on capacitor when current in the circuit
is 10% of maximum current :
t = 0 (switch)
10% :
3. A particular hydrogen like atom has its ground state Binding Energy =122.4eV.It is in ground state.
Then:
BE 122.4 eV
(A*) Its atomic number is 3.
(A*) 3
(B) An electron of 90 eV can excite it.
(B) 90eV
(C*) An electron of kinetic energy 91.8eV can be brought to almost rest by this atom.
(C*) 91.8 eV
(D*) An electron of KE nearly 2.6 eV may emerge from the atom when electron of KE 125ev collides
with this atom
(D*) 125 eV 2.6eV
4. Figure shows K & K X-rays along with continuous X-ray. Find the energy of L X-ray.
(Use hc = 12420 evÅ)
x K K X-L X-(hc = 12420 evÅ)
Sol. = EK – EK
1 1 12420
= 12420 = = 6210 eV = 6.21 KeV
1 2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. In a certain binary star system each star has the same mass as our sun and they revolve about their
CM. The distance between them is same as the distance between earth and the sun. What is their
period of revolution in years.
( )
T
[ Ans. T ' Here T = 1 year]
2
Sol.
4 2 3
T2 = r ..........(i)
GM
2
r
GMm 2
Mv 2
GM 2
= = 2
r2 r /2 2r T'
2 2
GM r
=
2r T '2
2 2 3
T'2 = r
GM
1 4 2
= r3
2 GM
1 2
= T
2
T
T' = .
2
1
T´= year
2
6. Photons having energy equivalent to line of lyman series of H atom can eject electrons from a metal.
These electrons can excite H atoms upto n=2 level .If the maximum work function of the metal in eV ,
is , find the integer next to
H
H n = 2 eV
Ans. 3
1 1
Sol. Energy equivalent to line of lyman series 13.6
12 42
1 1
So according to the question 13 .6 2
– 10.2
1 42
2.55 or max
= 2.55.
So the next integer is 3.
1 1
13.6 2
– 10.2
1 42
2.55 or max
= 2.55.
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A steady current 4 A flows in an inductor coil when connected to a 12 V dc source as shown in figure 1.
If the same coil is connected to an ac source of 12 V, 50 rad/s, a current of 2.4 A flows in the circuit as
1
shown in figure 2. Now after these observations, a capacitor of capacitance F is connected in series
50
with the coil and with the same AC source as shown in figure 3 :
12 1
4 A 12 V 50 rad/s (ac)
2 2.4 A
1
F -3
50
9. The average power supplied to the circuit after connecting capacitance in series is approximately equal
to:
(A*) 24 W (B) 72 W (C) 144 W (D) None of these
Sol. 7 to 9. : When connected with the DC source
12
R= =3
4
V
When connected to ac source =
Z
12
2.4 = L = 0.08 H
2 2 2
3 L
2 2
Vrms Vrms R
Using P = rms
Vrms cos = cos = 2
= 24 W
Z 2 1
R L
C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. All voltmeters are ideal and reading of voltmeters V1 and V2 are given by V1 = 3 Volt and V2 = 4 Volt in
all cases. Match the following :
V1 V2 V1 = 3 Volt V2 = 4
Volt
Column–I Column–II
(t) Applied voltage is lagging in phase from current.
Ans. (A) – (p,s) ; (B) – (p,t) ; (C) – (q,t) ; (D) – (r,s)
3 5
Sol. (A)
37°
4
V3 = 5V
current is lagging
4
–37°
(B)
5
3
V3 = 5V
Voltage is lagging
3
(C)
4
V3 = 1V
Voltage is lagging
(D) 4
3
V3 = 7V
Current is lagging
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Board Problems
1. Give the SI unit of electrical permittivity of free space ? [1 Mark]
SI
Ans. C2N–1m–2.
2. The potential difference across a given copper wire is increased. What happens to the drift velocity of
the charge carriers ? [1 Mark]
?
Ans. Thus, vd V i.e. if potential difference is increased, drift velocity of the electrons will increase.
v d V
3. A bar magnet is cut into two equal pieces transverse to its length. What happens to its dipole moment ?
[1 Mark]
Ans. magnetic moment of each will be (2l) = ml i.e one half of that of the original magnet.
4. What orientation of an electric dipole in a uniform electric field corresponds to its stable equilibrium ?
[2 Marks]
Ans. When the electric dipole aligns itself along the direction of electric field (P parallel to E), the torque on
the dipole becomes zero. Obviously, this orientation of the electric dipole (length parallel to the electric
field) corresponds to its stable equilibrium.
(P, E )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. What is the amount of power delivered by the ac source in the circuit shown (in watts).
()
(A) 500 watt (B) 1014 watt (C*) 1514 watt (D) 2013 watt
(5) 200 watt
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
i1 R1
i2
R2
Sol.
Erms 130
i1rms = = 10 A
X2C R12 13
Erms
i2rms = 13 A
XL2 R 22
2
Power dissipated = i1rms R1 i22rmsR 2 = 102 × 5 + 132 × 6
2
= i1rms R1 i22rmsR 2 = 102 × 5 + 132 × 6
= power delivered by battery
= 500 + 169 × 6
= 1514 watt
2. A smooth sphere A of mass m collides elastically with an identical sphere B at rest. The velocity of A
before collision is 8 m/s in a direction making 60º with the line joining the centres at the time of impact.
Which of the following is/are possible :
m A B A
60º 8 m/s
(A) the sphere A comes to rest after collision
A
(B) the sphere B will move with a speed of 8 m/ after collision
B 8 m/s
(C*) the directions of motion of A and B after collision are at right angles
A B
(D*) the speed of B after collision is 4 m/s. B 4 m/s
Sol. Sphere A moving with velocity v has a component v/2 along the line joining the centres of the spheres
at the time of collision and another component v/2 perpendicular to the previous direction. After
collision the component along the line will interchange i.e. B will move with v/2 velocity i.e. 4 m/s
along the line joining the centres and A moves with v/2 velocity at perpendicular direction to B.
3. When a hydrogen atom is excited from ground state to first excited state then
(A) its kinetic energy increases by 10.2 eV.
(B*) its kinetic energy decreases by 10 .2 eV.
(C*) its potential energy increases by 20.4 eV.
(D*) its angular momentum increases by 1.05 × 10–34 J-s.
(A) 10.2
(B*) 10 .2
(C*) 20.4
(D*) 1.05 × 10–34 ×
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. ground state n = 1
n = 1
first excited state n = 2
n = 2
10
1 14.4 10
KE = (z = 1) KE = eV
4 0 2r
Now r = 0.53 n2 Aº (z = 1)
14.4 10 10
(KE)1 = eV = 13.58 eV
2 0.53 10 10
(KE)2 = ev = 3.39 ev
KE decreases by = 10.2 ev
= 10.2 ev
1 e2 14.4 10 10
Now PE = = ev
4 0 r r
10
–14.4 10
(PE)1 = ev = –27.1 ev
0.53 10 –10
14.4 10 10
(PE)2 = = –6.79ev
0.53 10 10 4
PE increases by = 20.4 ev
= 20.4 ev
Now Angular momentum ;
nh
L = mvr =
2
h 6.6 10 34
L2–L1 = = = 1.05 × 10–34 J–sec.
2 6.28
4. Two identical soap bubbles each of radius r and of the same surface tension T combine to form a new
soap bubble of radius R. The two bubbles contain air at the same temperature. If the atmospheric
pressure is p0 then find the surface tension T of the soap solution in terms of p0, r and R. Assume
process is isothermal.
r T
R p0
T p0, r R
p 0 ( 2r 3 R3 )
Ans. T = 2
4(R 2r 2 )
Sol. Total number of moles of air in the two soap bubbles = number of moles of air in the resulting bubble.
2pv p v
=
RT RT
2pv = p v
4T 4 3 4T 4
2 p0 r = p0 R3
r 3 R 3
4T 3 4T
2 p0 r = p0 R3
r R
p 0 (R 3 2r 3 ) p 0 (R 3 2r 3 )
T= 2 2
= 2
8r 4R 4( 2r R2 )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
An experimental setup of verification of photoelectric effect is shown in the diagram. The voltage across
the electrodes is measured with the help of an ideal voltmeter, and which can be varied by moving
jockey ‘J’ on the potentiometer wire. The battery used in potentiometer circuit is of 20 V and its internal
resistance is 2 . The resistance of 100 cm long potentiometer wire is 8 .
20 V 2 100 cm 8
The photocurrent is measured with the help of an ideal ammeter. Two plates of potassium oxide of area
50 cm2 at separation 0.5 mm are used in the vacuum tube. Photo current in the circuit is very small so
we can treat potentiometer circuit an independent circuit.
The wavelengths of various colours is as follows :
50 cm2
0.5 mm
5. The number of electrons appeared on the surface of the cathode plate, when the jockey is connected at
the end ‘P’ of the potentiometer wire. Assume that no radiation is falling on the plates.
‘P’
(A) 8.85 × 106 (B) 11.0625 × 109 (C*) 8.85 × 109 (D) 0
Sol. Q = CV
A
ne = 0 V
d
2.85 10 12 10
n= 16
0.5 10 3 1.6 10 19
n = 8.85 × 109 Ans.
6. It is found that ammeter current remains unchanged (2 A) even when the jockey is moved from the end
‘P’ to the middle point of the potentiometer wire. Assuming all the incident photons eject electron and
the power of the light incident is 4 × 10–6 W. Then the colour of the incident light is
(A) Green (B) Violet (C) Red (D*) Orange
'P' (2 A)
4 × 10–6
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
nhC
Sol. P=
where n = no. of photons incident per unit time.
Also, = ne
hC
P=
e
( 2 10 6 )( 6. 6 10 34 )(3 10 8 )
=
( 4 10 6 )(1.6 10 19 )
9 .9 9900
= 10 7 m = Å = 6187 Å
1 .6 1. 6
Which came in the range of orange light.
7. Which of the following colour must give photoelectric effect from this cathode :
(A*) Green (B*) Violet (C) Red (D*) Blue
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. The range of wavelength for red light is beyond the wavelength of incident light.
8. When other light falls on the anode plate the ammeter reading remains zero till, jockey is moved from
the end P to the middle point of the wire PQ. Thereafter the deflection is recorded in the ammeter.
P
PQ
(A) The minimum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is 16 eV
(B*) The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is 8 eV
(C) Work function of the potassium oxide is 4 eV
(D*) The minimum kinetic energy of the emitted electron is zero
(A) 16 eV
(B*) 8 eV
(C) 4 eV
(D*)
Sol. Stopping potential VS = 8V and KE = eVS
KE = 8eV Ans.
9. A small spherical ball of mass m is projected from lowest point (point P) in the space between two fixed,
concentric spheres A and B (see figure). The smaller sphere A has a radius R and the space between
the two spheres has a width d. The ball has a diameter very slightly less than d. All surfaces are
frictionless. Speed of ball at lowest point is v. NA and NB represent magnitudes of the normal reaction
force on the ball exerted by the spheres A and B respectively. Match the value of v given in column–I
with corresponding results in column–II.
A B P m
A R d d
v NA NB A
B –I v –II
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Column–I Column–II
(A) v gR (p) maximum value of NA = 0
(B) v 2gR (q) minimum value of NB= 0
(C) v 3gR (r) maximum value of NB = 6 mg
(D) v 5gR (s) maximum value of NB = 4 mg
(t) maximum value of NB = 2 mg
–I –II
(A) v gR (p) NA = 0
(B) v 2gR (q) NB = 0
(C) v 3gR (r) NB = 6 mg
(D) v 5gR (s) NB = 4 mg
(t) NB = 2 mg
Ans. (A) – p,t ; (B) – p,q ; (C) – q,s ; (D) – p,q,r
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
2. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of
the remaining cylinder is V and its mass M. It is suspended by a string in a liquid of density where it
stays vertical. The upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the liquid surface. The force on
the bottom of the cylinder by the liquid is :
( R) R
M, V ( )
h
[
(A) Mg (B) Mg – V g
(C) Mg + R2h g (D*) g(V + R2 h)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. [Flower – Fupper] by liquid = Upthrust
F2 – F1 = upthrust
F2 = F1 + upthrust
F2 = gh ( R2) + V g
F1
Upthrust
F2
or F2 = g(V + R2h)
In this problem, we did not take the force due to air pressure on the cylinder. This is because force due
to air pressure is cancelled. At top and bottom of the cylinder the force due to air pressure is equal and
opposite.
Sol. [F – F] =
F2 – F1 =
F2 = F1 +
F2 = gh ( R2) + V g
F1
Upthrust
F2
F2 = g(V + R2h)
3. The density of ice is x gm/cc and that of water is y gm/cc. What is the change in volume in cc, when m
gm of ice melts?
x gm/cc y gm/cc. m gm
cc
(A) M (y – x) (B) (y – x)/m (C) mxy (x – y) (D*) m (1/y – 1/x)
m m
Sol. v = vf – vi = .
y x
4. A block of steel of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm is weighed in water. If the relative density of steel is 7. Its
apparent weight is :
5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm
7
(A*) 6 × 5 × 5 × 5 gf (B) 4 × 4 × 4 × 7 gf (C) 5 × 5 × 5 × 7 gf (D) 4 × 4 × 4 × 6 gf
Sol. Wapp = mg – FB
Wapp = Vg – wVg
= ( – w) Vg
= (7 w – w) Vg = 6 w Vg
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10 11
5. The atomic weight of boron is 10.81 g/mole and it has two isotopes 5B and 5B . The ratio (by
10 11
number) of 5B : 5B in nature would be :
10.81 gm/mole 105 B 115B 10
5B : 11
5B
:
(A*) 19 : 81 (B) 10 : 11 (C) 15 : 16 (D) 81 : 19
Sol. Let 105 B and 11
5 B be in the ratio m:n .
10 11
5B 5B m:n
Average atomic weight
m 10 n 11 m 0.19 19
10.81 = = =
m n n 0.81 81
6. The graph in the figure shows how the displacement of a particle describing S.H.M. varies with time.
Which one of the following statements is not true ?
3T
(A) the force is zero at time (B*) the velocity is maximum at time T/2
4
(C) the acceleration is maximum at time T (D) the P.E. = total energy at time T/2
3T
(A) (B) T/2
4
(C) T (D) = T/2
Sol. the velocity is maximum at time T/2
T/2
7. Two blocks of masses 6kg and 3kg are attached to the two ends of a massless spring of spring
constant 2 2 N/m. If spring is compressed and released on a smooth horizontal surface then find the
time period (in seconds) of each block.
6kg 3kg 2 2 N/m
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
6 3
Sol. T= 2 , = = 2kg
k 6 3
8. An orbital electron in the ground state of hydrogen has an angular momentum L1, and an orbital
electron in the first orbit in the ground state of lithium (double ionised positively) has an angular
momentum L2 .Then :
L1 (
) L2
(A*) L1 = L2 (B) L1 = 3L2 (C) L2 = 3L1 (D) L2 = 9L1
Sol. Doubly ionised positively lithium ion is a hydrogen like atom :
n h
hence : L = m v r = for both
2
which depends only on the value of n.
h
Also for both n = 1. Hence; L1 = L2 = ; Hence (1).
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
9. The frequencies of x-rays, rays and ultra-violet rays are respectively f1, f 2 , f3 then correct inequilities
are ;
x- f1, f2 , f3
(A*) f1 < f2, f2 > f 3 (B) f1 > f2, f2 > f3 (C) f1 > f2, f2 < f 3 (D) f 1 < f2, f2 < f3
10. A person with a defective sight is using a lens having a power of +2D. The lens he is using is
+2D
(A) concave lens with f = 0.5 m (B) convex lens with f = 2.0 m
(C) concave lens with f = 0.2 m (D*) convex lens with f = 0.5 m
(A) f = 0.5 m (B) f = 2.0 m
(C) f = 0.2 m (D*) f = 0.5 m
1 1
Sol. f= metre
p 2
f = 0.5 m this is positive so lense is convex lense.
f = 0.5 m
11. During a negative beta decay,
(A) an atomic electron is ejected
(B) an electron which is already present within the nucleus is ejected
(C*) a neutron in the nucleus decays emitted an electron
(D) a proton in the nucleus decays emitting an electron
- ,
(A)
(B)
(C*)
(D)
12. A ball of mass m moves with speed v and stikes a wall having infinite mass and it returns with same
speed then the work done by the ball on the wall is :
m v
:
(A*) (B) mv J (C) m/v. J (D) v/m J
13. A satellite is revolving around earth in a circular orbit. At some instant the speed of the satellite is
increased 2 times its orbital speed keeping its direction unchanged. Then, the new path of the
satellite is :
2
(A) circular (B) straight line (C) elliptical (D*) parabolic
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
Sol. The orbital velocity,
GM
v0 =
r
Its velocity is increased by 2 times, new velocity
2
GM 2GM
v= 2 = escape velocity
r r
The path is parabolic in case of escape velocity.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
14. Two particles of combined mass M, placed in space with certain separation, are released. Interaction
between the particles is only of gravitational nature and there is no external force present. Acceleration
of one particle with respect to the other when separation between them is R, has a magnitude :
M
R
GM GM
(A) 2
(B*)
2R R2
2GM
(C) (D) not possible to calculate due to lack of information
R2
(D)
Sol.
GM1M2 GM1M2
a1 = 2
/ M1 a2 = / M2
R R2
acceleation of M1 w.r.t. M2
M2 M1
arel. = a1 + a2
G(M1 M2 ) GM
= = .
R2 R2
15. Protons and singly ionized atoms of U235 & U238 are passed in turn (which means one after the other
and not at the same time) through a velocity selector and then enter a uniform magnetic field. The
protons describe semicircles of radius 10 mm. The separation between the ions of U235 and U238 after
describing semicircle is given by
U235 U238
10 mm U235
U238 –
U-238 U-235 p
16. A nuclear transformation is denoted by X(n, ) 73 Li . Which of the following is the nucleus of element
X?
X(n, ) 73 Li X ?
12
(A) 6 C (B*) 10
5 B (C) 95 B (D) 11
4 Be
A 1 7 4
Sol. Z X 0n 3Li 2 He
It implies that
A+1=7+4
A = 10
and Z + 0 = 3 + 2
Z=5
Thus, it is Boron 10
5 B
10
5 B
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions along x and y directions according to,x = 3 sin
100 t; y = 4 sin 100 t. (x, y are in meter and t is in sec.)
x y x = 3 sin 100 t; y = 4
sin 100 t. (x, y t )
(A) Motion of particle will be on ellipse traversing it in clockwise direction.
(B*) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with slope 4/3.
4/3
(C) Motion will be a simple harmonic motion along x axis with amplitude 5.
x-5 I
(D) Phase difference between two motions is /2.
/2
Sol. x = 3 sin 100 t
y = 4 sin 100 t
Equation of path is ()
y 4
x 3
4
i.e. () y x
3
4
which is equation of a straight line having slope
3
Equation of resulting motion is r xiˆ yjˆ
4
3
r xiˆ yjˆ
(3iˆ 4ˆj) = sin 100 t
Amplitude is () 32 42 = 5
18. If the dimensions of a physical quantity are given by MaLbTc , then the physical quantity will be
(A*) pressure if a =1, b= –1, c = –2 (B) velocity if a =1, b = 0, c = –1
(C) acceleration if a =1, b= 1, c = –2 (D) force if a =0, b= –1, c = –2
MaLbTc,
(A) a =1, b= –1, c = –2 (B) a =1, b = 0, c = –1
(C) a =1, b= 1, c = –2 (D) a =0, b= –1, c = –2
Sol. (i) Dimension of velocity = [M0L1T–1]
Here, a = 0, b =1 , c = –1
(ii) Dimensions of acceleration = [M0L1T–2]
Here, a = 0, b = 1 , c = –2
(iii) Dimensions of force = [M1L1T–2]
Here, a = 1, b =1 , T = –2
(iv) Dimensions of pressure = [M1L–1T–2]
Here, a = 1, b = –1 , c = –2
The physical quantity is pressure.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. The photon radiated from hydrogen corresponding to 2nd line of Lyman series is absorbed by a
hydrogen like atom ‘X’ in 2nd excited state. As a result the hydrogen like atom ‘X’ makes a transition to
nth orbit. Then,
x
'x' n
(A) X = He+, n = 4 (B) X = Li++, n = 6 (C) X = He+, n = 6 (D*) X = Li++, n = 9
Sol. (D) Energy of nth sate in Hydrogen is same as energy of 3nth state in Li++.
3 1 transition in H would give same energy as the 3×3 1× 3
transition in Li++.
Sol. (D) nth Li++ 3nth
3 1 H 3×3 1× 3
Li++
20. A point object is placed at a distance 20 cm from the focus of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 20
cm. Find the distance (in cm) of the image from the focus.
20 cm 20 cm
(cm )
(A*) 5 cm. (B) 10 cm. (C) 15 cm. (D) 20 cm.
Sol. Using newton’s formula
xy = f2
20 y = (10)2 y = 5 cm.
BOARD PROBLEMS
1. Define decay constant [1 Mark]
Ans. Decay constant of a radioactive element is the reciprocal of the time during which the number of atoms
left in the sample reduces to 1/e times the original number of atoms in the sample.
1
e
2. Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 1 :2. What is the ratio of their nuclear densities ?
1:2 [1 Mark]
Sol. Since the nuclear density is same for all nuclei.The ratio of their densities are 1:1 i.e 1 : 2 = 1 : 1
1 :1
3. (i) Draw the graphs showing variation of inductive reactance and capacitive reactance with frequency of
applied a.c. source.
(ii) Can the voltage drop across the inductor or the capacitor in a series LCR circuit be greater than the
applied voltage of the a.c. source ? Justify your answer. [3 Marks]
(i)
(ii) L-C-R
4. State the working of a.c. generator with the help of a labelled diagram. The coil of an a.c. generator
having N turns, each of area A, is rotated with a constant angular velocity . Deduce the expression for
the alternating e.m.f. generated in the coil. What is the source of energy generation in this device?
N A w
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. Initially capacitor is uncharged, at t = 0 switch is closed. Charge on capacitor when current in the circuit
is 10% of maximum current :
t = 0 (switch)
10% :
3. A particular hydrogen like atom has its ground state Binding Energy =122.4eV.It is in ground state.
Then:
BE 122.4 eV
(A*) Its atomic number is 3.
(A*) 3
(B) An electron of 90 eV can excite it.
(B) 90eV
(C*) An electron of kinetic energy 91.8eV can be brought to almost rest by this atom.
(C*) 91.8 eV
(D*) An electron of KE nearly 2.6 eV may emerge from the atom when electron of KE 125ev collides
with this atom
(D*) 125 eV 2.6eV
4. Figure shows K & K X-rays along with continuous X-ray. Find the energy of L X-ray.
(Use hc = 12420 evÅ)
x K K X-L X-(hc = 12420 evÅ)
Sol. = EK – EK
1 1 12420
= 12420 = = 6210 eV = 6.21 KeV
1 2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. In a certain binary star system each star has the same mass as our sun and they revolve about their
CM. The distance between them is same as the distance between earth and the sun. What is their
period of revolution in years.
( )
T
[ Ans. T ' Here T = 1 year]
2
Sol.
4 2 3
T2 = r ..........(i)
GM
2
r
GMm 2
Mv 2
GM 2
= = 2
r2 r /2 2r T'
2 2
GM r
=
2r T '2
2 2 3
T'2 = r
GM
1 4 2
= r3
2 GM
1 2
= T
2
T
T' = .
2
1
T´= year
2
6. Photons having energy equivalent to line of lyman series of H atom can eject electrons from a metal.
These electrons can excite H atoms upto n=2 level .If the maximum work function of the metal in eV ,
is , find the integer next to
H
H n = 2 eV
Ans. 3
1 1
Sol. Energy equivalent to line of lyman series 13.6
12 42
1 1
So according to the question 13 .6 2
– 10.2
1 42
2.55 or max
= 2.55.
So the next integer is 3.
1 1
13.6 2
– 10.2
1 42
2.55 or max
= 2.55.
3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A steady current 4 A flows in an inductor coil when connected to a 12 V dc source as shown in figure 1.
If the same coil is connected to an ac source of 12 V, 50 rad/s, a current of 2.4 A flows in the circuit as
1
shown in figure 2. Now after these observations, a capacitor of capacitance F is connected in series
50
with the coil and with the same AC source as shown in figure 3 :
12 1
4 A 12 V 50 rad/s (ac)
2 2.4 A
1
F -3
50
9. The average power supplied to the circuit after connecting capacitance in series is approximately equal
to:
(A*) 24 W (B) 72 W (C) 144 W (D) None of these
Sol. 7 to 9. : When connected with the DC source
12
R= =3
4
V
When connected to ac source =
Z
12
2.4 = L = 0.08 H
2 2 2
3 L
2 2
Vrms Vrms R
Using P = rms
Vrms cos = cos = 2
= 24 W
Z 2 1
R L
C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. All voltmeters are ideal and reading of voltmeters V1 and V2 are given by V1 = 3 Volt and V2 = 4 Volt in
all cases. Match the following :
V1 V2 V1 = 3 Volt V2 = 4
Volt
Column–I Column–II
(t) Applied voltage is lagging in phase from current.
Ans. (A) – (p,s) ; (B) – (p,t) ; (C) – (q,t) ; (D) – (r,s)
3 5
Sol. (A)
37°
4
V3 = 5V
current is lagging
4
–37°
(B)
5
3
V3 = 5V
Voltage is lagging
3
(C)
4
V3 = 1V
Voltage is lagging
(D) 4
3
V3 = 7V
Current is lagging
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Board Problems
1. Give the SI unit of electrical permittivity of free space ? [1 Mark]
SI
Ans. C2N–1m–2.
2. The potential difference across a given copper wire is increased. What happens to the drift velocity of
the charge carriers ? [1 Mark]
?
Ans. Thus, vd V i.e. if potential difference is increased, drift velocity of the electrons will increase.
v d V
3. A bar magnet is cut into two equal pieces transverse to its length. What happens to its dipole moment ?
[1 Mark]
Ans. magnetic moment of each will be (2l) = ml i.e one half of that of the original magnet.
4. What orientation of an electric dipole in a uniform electric field corresponds to its stable equilibrium ?
[2 Marks]
Ans. When the electric dipole aligns itself along the direction of electric field (P parallel to E), the torque on
the dipole becomes zero. Obviously, this orientation of the electric dipole (length parallel to the electric
field) corresponds to its stable equilibrium.
(P, E )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. The rest mass of an electron as well as that of positron is 0.51 MeV. When an electron and positron are
annihilate, they produce gamma-rays of wavelength(s)
0 .51MeV
(A*) 0.012 Å (B) 0.024 Å (C) 0.012 Å to (D) 0.024 Å to
Sol. (A) Since electron and positron annihilate
34
hc 6. 6 10 3 10 8
E Total 6 19
( 0. 51 0. 51) 10 1.6 10
12
1.21 10 m 0.012Å .
3
Sol. (A) Kinetic energy of the molecules of a gas at a temp. T is kT
2
3 14
To initiate the reaction kT 7. 7 10 J
2
3 23 14
1.38 10 T 7. 7 10 T 3. 7 10 9 K .
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A hydrogen like atom of atomic number Z is in an excited state of quantum number 2n. It can emit a
maximum energy photon of 204 eV. If it makes a transition to quantum state n, a photon of energy 40.8
eV is emitted. The value of n will be
Z 2n
204 eV n
40.8 eV n
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
Sol. (B) Let ground state energy (in eV) be E1
Then from the given condition
E
E 2n E1 204 eV or 12 E 1 204 eV
4n
1
E1 1 204 eV …..(i)
4n 2
and E 2n E n 40.8 eV
E1 E1 3
2 2
E1 40.8 eV …..(ii)
4n n 4n 2
1
1
From equation (i) and (ii), 4n 2 5 n 2
3
4n 2
4. Two radioactive materials X1 and X 2 have decay constants 10 and respectively. If initially they
have the same number of nuclei, then the ratio of the number of nuclei of X1 to that of X 2 will be 1/e
after a time
X1 X 2 10
1
X1 X 2
e
(A) 1/(10 ) (B) 1/(11 ) (C) 11/(10 ) (D*) 1/(9 )
10 t t
Sol. (D) N1 N0 e and N2 N0 e
N1 1 1 1
e e( 10 )t
e 9 t
t .
N2 e 9
5. From a newly formed radioactive substance (Half life 2 hours), the intensity of radiation is 64 times the
permissible safe level. The minimum time after which work can be done safely from this source is
(- 2 )
64
(A) 6 hours (B*) 12 hours (C) 24 hours (D) 128 hours
(A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 24 (D) 128
n 6 n
N 1 1 1 1
Sol. (B) n 6.
N0 2 64 2 2
After 6 half lives intensity emitted will be safe.
Total time taken 6 2 12 hrs.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A radioactive nucleus is being produced at a constant rate per second. Its decay constant is . If N0
are the number of nuclei at time t = 0, then maximum number of nuclei possible are
t = 0 N0
7. What will be the angular momentum of a electron, if energy of this electron in H-atom is –1.5eV
(in J-sec)
–1.5eV
34 34 (C*) 3.15 10 34 34
(A) 1.05 10 (B) 2.1 10 (D) 2.1 10
13.6
Sol. (C) Energy of electron in H atom E n eV
n2
13.6 13.6
1. 5 2
n2 3
n 1.5
Now angular momentum
h 3 6 .6 10 34 34
L n 3.15 10 J sec
2 2 3. 14
8. The ratio of speed of an electron in ground state in Bohrs first orbit of hydrogen atom to velocity of light
in air is
e2 2e 2 0 e3 2 0 hc
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 0 hc hc 2 0 hc e2
9. Half lives of two isotopes X and Y of a material are known to be 2 × 109 years and 4 × 109 years
respectively. If a planet was formed with equal number of these isotopes, then the current age of planet,
given that currently the material has 20% of X and 80% of Y by number, will be
X Y 2 × 109 4 × 109
X
20% Y 80% -
(A) 2 × 109 years (B) 4 × 109 years (C) 6 × 109 years (D*) 8 × 109 years
N
Sol. Nx = 0 . e 1t = 0.2 N0
2
N0
Ny = . e 2t = 0.8 N0
2
e( 1 2 ) = 4 t = 8 × 109 years
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. A particle of mass m oscillates between P1 and P2 inside a fixed smooth spherical shell of radius R. At
any instant the kinetic energy of the particle is E. Then the force exerted by the particle on the shell at
this instant is :
m R P1 P2
E
E E 2E 3E
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
R 2R R R
Sol.
mv 2
N – mg sin = ............(i)
R
1
As mv2 = mgh ............(ii)
2
h 2E
N = mg
R R
E 2E 3E
=
R R R
11. Two identical capacitor C1 and C2 are connected in series with a battery. They are fully charged. Now a
dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of C2. The potential difference across C1 will :
C1 C2
C2 C1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. When a centimetre thick surface is illuminated with light of wavelength , the stopping potential is V.
When the same surface is illuminated by light of wavelength 2 , the stopping potential is V/3. The
threshold wavelength for the surface is :
V
2 V/3
4 8
(A) (B*) 4 (C) 6 (D)
3 3
hC
Sol. = + eV ...(i)
hC eV
= + ....(ii)
2 3
3 · II – I
3 hc hc
1 =2 =
2 4
th
=4
13. Two boats are moving along perpendicular paths on a still lake at night. One boat moves with a speed
of 3ms-1 and the other boat moves with a speed of 4ms-1 in the directions such that they collide after
some time. At t = 0, the boats are 300m apart. Two boats will collide after time_________.
3ms-1 4ms-1
t = 0 300m
(A*) 60 s (B) 30 s
(C) 120 s (D) Data is insufficiant
Sol. VB,A = 5 m/s
4
B
3 5
A
300
t= = 60 s.
5
14. The ratio of the energy density of magnetic field in the middle region of a solenoid to that in end region
is :
(A*) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 4 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
B2
Sol. The expression of magnetic energy density is
2 0
The magnitude of magnetic field at end region is half that of at middle region. Hence the ratio of
magnetic field energy densities at middle region to the end region is 4:1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. A small sized mass m is attached by a massless string (of length L) to the top of a fixed frictionless solid
cone whose axis is vertical. The half angle at the vertex of the cone is . If the mass m moves around in
a horizontal circle at speed v, what is the maximum value of v for which mass stays in contact with the
cone ? (g is acceleration due to gravity.)
m ( L) (
) m
v v (g
)
16. In determination of young modulus of elasticity of wire, a force is applied and extension is recorded.
Initial length of wire is ‘ 1 m ’. The curve between extension and stress is depicted then young modulus
of wire will be:
‘ 1 m ’
4mm
Extension ( )
2mm
4000KN/m
2
8000KN/m2
Stress ()
(KN/m2)
(A*) 2 × 109 N/m2 (B) 1 × 109 N/m2 (C) 2 × 1010 N/m2 (D) 1 × 1010 N/m2
F
Sol. (A) = = slope of curve ( )
Ay (F / A ) y
3
( 4 2) 10
y 3
4000 10
Given () = 1m
3
4000 10
y= 3
= 2 × 109 N/m2
2 10
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. In the figure a capacitor of capacitance 2µF is connected to a cell of emf 20 volt. The plates of the
capacitor are drawn apart slowly to double the distance between them. The work done by the external
agent on the plates is :
2 F 20 V
Method
U + WB + Wext = Uf + loss
Process is slow so energy loss is zero work done by battery = WB = QE
= WB = QE
Q = Qf – Qi = 20 – 40 = – 20
WB = – 20 × 20
1 1
2 × 202 – 20 × 20 + Wext = 1 × 202 + 0
2 2
Wext = 200 J
18. One end of light inelastic string is tied to a helium filled balloon and its other end is tied to bottom of a
water filled container at point O. The container lies on a fixed horizontal surface and is pulled
horizontally towards right with constant horizontal acceleration of magnitude a. Assuming no relative
motion of balloon and water with respect to container, the string will be inclined with vertical line passing
through O by an angle. (g is acceleration due to gravity)
O
'a'
'O' (g )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
a
(A*) = tan–1 and string will be on right of vertical line passing through O.
g
g
(B) = tan–1 and string will be on right of vertical line passing through O.
a
a
(C) = tan–1 and string will be on left of vertical line passing through O.
g
g
(D) = tan–1 and string will be on left of vertical line passing through O.
a
a
(A*) = tan–1 O
g
g
(B) = tan–1 O
a
a
(C) = tan–1 O
g
g
(D) = tan–1 O
a
Sol.
Let the density of gas and water by g and . The volume enclosed by balloon is V.
Then the FBD of balloon is as shown
F a
In equilibrium tan = x
Fy g
Sol.
0 max v v E max
Bmax = = v Emax =
0 0
= 3.33 × 10–9 weber/m2
2 c2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. The rest mass of an electron as well as that of positron is 0.51 MeV. When an electron and positron are
annihilate, they produce gamma-rays of wavelength(s)
0 .51MeV
(A*) 0.012 Å (B) 0.024 Å (C) 0.012 Å to (D) 0.024 Å to
Sol. (A) Since electron and positron annihilate
34
hc 6. 6 10 3 10 8
E Total 6 19
( 0. 51 0. 51) 10 1.6 10
12
1.21 10 m 0.012Å .
3
Sol. (A) Kinetic energy of the molecules of a gas at a temp. T is kT
2
3 14
To initiate the reaction kT 7. 7 10 J
2
3 23 14
1.38 10 T 7. 7 10 T 3. 7 10 9 K .
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A hydrogen like atom of atomic number Z is in an excited state of quantum number 2n. It can emit a
maximum energy photon of 204 eV. If it makes a transition to quantum state n, a photon of energy 40.8
eV is emitted. The value of n will be
Z 2n
204 eV n
40.8 eV n
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
Sol. (B) Let ground state energy (in eV) be E1
Then from the given condition
E
E 2n E1 204 eV or 12 E 1 204 eV
4n
1
E1 1 204 eV …..(i)
4n 2
and E 2n E n 40.8 eV
E1 E1 3
2 2
E1 40.8 eV …..(ii)
4n n 4n 2
1
1
From equation (i) and (ii), 4n 2 5 n 2
3
4n 2
4. Two radioactive materials X1 and X 2 have decay constants 10 and respectively. If initially they
have the same number of nuclei, then the ratio of the number of nuclei of X1 to that of X 2 will be 1/e
after a time
X1 X 2 10
1
X1 X 2
e
(A) 1/(10 ) (B) 1/(11 ) (C) 11/(10 ) (D*) 1/(9 )
10 t t
Sol. (D) N1 N0 e and N2 N0 e
N1 1 1 1
e e( 10 )t
e 9 t
t .
N2 e 9
5. From a newly formed radioactive substance (Half life 2 hours), the intensity of radiation is 64 times the
permissible safe level. The minimum time after which work can be done safely from this source is
(- 2 )
64
(A) 6 hours (B*) 12 hours (C) 24 hours (D) 128 hours
(A) 6 (B) 12 (C) 24 (D) 128
n 6 n
N 1 1 1 1
Sol. (B) n 6.
N0 2 64 2 2
After 6 half lives intensity emitted will be safe.
Total time taken 6 2 12 hrs.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. A radioactive nucleus is being produced at a constant rate per second. Its decay constant is . If N0
are the number of nuclei at time t = 0, then maximum number of nuclei possible are
t = 0 N0
7. What will be the angular momentum of a electron, if energy of this electron in H-atom is –1.5eV
(in J-sec)
–1.5eV
34 34 (C*) 3.15 10 34 34
(A) 1.05 10 (B) 2.1 10 (D) 2.1 10
13.6
Sol. (C) Energy of electron in H atom E n eV
n2
13.6 13.6
1. 5 2
n2 3
n 1.5
Now angular momentum
h 3 6 .6 10 34 34
L n 3.15 10 J sec
2 2 3. 14
8. The ratio of speed of an electron in ground state in Bohrs first orbit of hydrogen atom to velocity of light
in air is
e2 2e 2 0 e3 2 0 hc
(A*) (B) (C) (D)
2 0 hc hc 2 0 hc e2
9. Half lives of two isotopes X and Y of a material are known to be 2 × 109 years and 4 × 109 years
respectively. If a planet was formed with equal number of these isotopes, then the current age of planet,
given that currently the material has 20% of X and 80% of Y by number, will be
X Y 2 × 109 4 × 109
X
20% Y 80% -
(A) 2 × 109 years (B) 4 × 109 years (C) 6 × 109 years (D*) 8 × 109 years
N
Sol. Nx = 0 . e 1t = 0.2 N0
2
N0
Ny = . e 2t = 0.8 N0
2
e( 1 2 ) = 4 t = 8 × 109 years
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. A particle of mass m oscillates between P1 and P2 inside a fixed smooth spherical shell of radius R. At
any instant the kinetic energy of the particle is E. Then the force exerted by the particle on the shell at
this instant is :
m R P1 P2
E
E E 2E 3E
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
R 2R R R
Sol.
mv 2
N – mg sin = ............(i)
R
1
As mv2 = mgh ............(ii)
2
h 2E
N = mg
R R
E 2E 3E
=
R R R
11. Two identical capacitor C1 and C2 are connected in series with a battery. They are fully charged. Now a
dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of C2. The potential difference across C1 will :
C1 C2
C2 C1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
12. When a centimetre thick surface is illuminated with light of wavelength , the stopping potential is V.
When the same surface is illuminated by light of wavelength 2 , the stopping potential is V/3. The
threshold wavelength for the surface is :
V
2 V/3
4 8
(A) (B*) 4 (C) 6 (D)
3 3
hC
Sol. = + eV ...(i)
hC eV
= + ....(ii)
2 3
3 · II – I
3 hc hc
1 =2 =
2 4
th
=4
13. Two boats are moving along perpendicular paths on a still lake at night. One boat moves with a speed
of 3ms-1 and the other boat moves with a speed of 4ms-1 in the directions such that they collide after
some time. At t = 0, the boats are 300m apart. Two boats will collide after time_________.
3ms-1 4ms-1
t = 0 300m
(A*) 60 s (B) 30 s
(C) 120 s (D) Data is insufficiant
Sol. VB,A = 5 m/s
4
B
3 5
A
300
t= = 60 s.
5
14. The ratio of the energy density of magnetic field in the middle region of a solenoid to that in end region
is :
(A*) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 4 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
B2
Sol. The expression of magnetic energy density is
2 0
The magnitude of magnetic field at end region is half that of at middle region. Hence the ratio of
magnetic field energy densities at middle region to the end region is 4:1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
15. A small sized mass m is attached by a massless string (of length L) to the top of a fixed frictionless solid
cone whose axis is vertical. The half angle at the vertex of the cone is . If the mass m moves around in
a horizontal circle at speed v, what is the maximum value of v for which mass stays in contact with the
cone ? (g is acceleration due to gravity.)
m ( L) (
) m
v v (g
)
16. In determination of young modulus of elasticity of wire, a force is applied and extension is recorded.
Initial length of wire is ‘ 1 m ’. The curve between extension and stress is depicted then young modulus
of wire will be:
‘ 1 m ’
4mm
Extension ( )
2mm
4000KN/m
2
8000KN/m2
Stress ()
(KN/m2)
(A*) 2 × 109 N/m2 (B) 1 × 109 N/m2 (C) 2 × 1010 N/m2 (D) 1 × 1010 N/m2
F
Sol. (A) = = slope of curve ( )
Ay (F / A ) y
3
( 4 2) 10
y 3
4000 10
Given () = 1m
3
4000 10
y= 3
= 2 × 109 N/m2
2 10
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
17. In the figure a capacitor of capacitance 2µF is connected to a cell of emf 20 volt. The plates of the
capacitor are drawn apart slowly to double the distance between them. The work done by the external
agent on the plates is :
2 F 20 V
Method
U + WB + Wext = Uf + loss
Process is slow so energy loss is zero work done by battery = WB = QE
= WB = QE
Q = Qf – Qi = 20 – 40 = – 20
WB = – 20 × 20
1 1
2 × 202 – 20 × 20 + Wext = 1 × 202 + 0
2 2
Wext = 200 J
18. One end of light inelastic string is tied to a helium filled balloon and its other end is tied to bottom of a
water filled container at point O. The container lies on a fixed horizontal surface and is pulled
horizontally towards right with constant horizontal acceleration of magnitude a. Assuming no relative
motion of balloon and water with respect to container, the string will be inclined with vertical line passing
through O by an angle. (g is acceleration due to gravity)
O
'a'
'O' (g )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
a
(A*) = tan–1 and string will be on right of vertical line passing through O.
g
g
(B) = tan–1 and string will be on right of vertical line passing through O.
a
a
(C) = tan–1 and string will be on left of vertical line passing through O.
g
g
(D) = tan–1 and string will be on left of vertical line passing through O.
a
a
(A*) = tan–1 O
g
g
(B) = tan–1 O
a
a
(C) = tan–1 O
g
g
(D) = tan–1 O
a
Sol.
Let the density of gas and water by g and . The volume enclosed by balloon is V.
Then the FBD of balloon is as shown
F a
In equilibrium tan = x
Fy g
Sol.
0 max v v E max
Bmax = = v Emax =
0 0
= 3.33 × 10–9 weber/m2
2 c2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
DPP No. : 85
Total Marks : 37 Max. Time : 39 min.
Single choice Objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.1 (3 marks 3 min.) [03, 03]
Multiple choice objective ('–1' negative marking) Q.2 to Q.3 (4 marks 4 min.) [08, 08]
Comprehension ('–1' negative marking) Q.4 to Q.9 (3 marks 3 min.) [18, 18]
Match the Following (no negative marking) (2 × 4) Q.10 (8 marks 10 min.) [08, 10]
1. Two coherent point sources S1 and S2 emit sound of frequency 80 Hz. Source S1 starts emitting sound
1
second after the start of S2. Both sources are at same phase when started. If intensity due to each
960
source at the position of detector is 0, then the resultant intensity observed by the detector shown in
figure is : (speed of sound = 320 m/s)
S1 S2 , 80 Hz S2
1
S1
960
0 (= 320 m/s)
(A) 0
(B) 2 0
(C*) 3 0
(D) 4
=
3
res
= 0
+ 0
+ 2 0 0 cos
3
res
=3 0.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. In the following figure all surfaces are assumed to be frictionless and pulley is assumed to be ideal. The
block 'A' is projected towards the pulley 'P' with an initial velocity u0 then select correct option :
'A' 'P'
u0
(A)
u0
nm
L0
m (B)
2u 0
(A*) the string would become tight at t
g
u 20
(B) the distance travelled by 'A' before the string is taut is
g
2u 20
(C*) the distance travelled by 'B' before string is taut is
g
n 2
(D*) the common speed of the blocks just after the string is taut is u0
n 1
2u 0
(A) t
g
u 20
(B) 'A'
g
2u 20
(C) 'B'
g
n 2
(D) u 0
n 1
Sol. When the string is taut again both the block would travel the same distance
1
hence u0t = gt2 [as 'B' is falling freely]
2
2u 0 2u 0
hence t = in this time 'A' and 'B' would travel a distance of
g g
also when same impulse acts along the wire the change in momentum would be same for both blocks.
J = nmv – nmu0 (for block A)
–J = mv – m(2u0) (for block B)
nmv – nmu0 = 2mu0 – mv
(n + 1) v = (n + 2)u0
n 2
v u0
n 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol.
1 2
u0t = gt ['B' ]
2
2u 0 2u 0
t = 'A' 'B'
g g
J = nmv – nmu0
–J = mv – m(2u0)
nmv – nmu0 = 2mu0 – mv
(n + 1) v = (n + 2)u0
n 2
v u0
n 1
3. Switch S is closed for a long time at t = 0. It is opened, then:
t = 0 S :
1 LV 2
(A) total heat produced in resistor R after opening the switch is
2 R2
1 LV 2 R1
(B*) total heat produced in resistor R2 after opening the switch is
2 R 2 R1 R 2
1 R 2LV 2
(C*) heat produced in resistor R1 after opening the switch is
2 (R1 R 2 )R 2
V R1
(D) Current through R1 just after opening the switch is .
R R1 R 2
1 LV 2
(A) R
2 R2
1 LV 2 R1
(B*) R2
2 R 2 R1 R 2
1 R 2LV 2
(C*) R1
2 (R1 R 2 )R 2
V R1
(D) R1 .
R R1 R 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
Resistive force proportional to object velocity
At low speeds, the resistive force acting on an object that is moving through a viscous medium is
effectively modeled as being proportional to the object’s velocity. The mathematical representation of
the resistive force can be expressed as
R = – bv
Where v is the velocity of the object and b is a positive constant that depends on the properties of the
medium and on the shape and dimensions of the object. The negative sign represents the fact that the
resistance force is opposite to the velocity.
Consider a sphere of mass m released from rest in a liquid. Assuming that the only forces acting on the
sphere are the resistive force R and the weight mg, we can describe its motion using Newton’s second
law. Though the buoyant force is also acting on the submerged object, the force is constant and effect
of this force can be modeled by changing the apparent weight of the sphere by a constant force, so we
can ignore it here.
dv dv b
Thus mg – bv = m =g– v
dt dt m
Solving the equation.
mg
v= (1 – e–bt/m)
b
where e = 2.71 is the base of the natural logarithm.
The acceleration becomes zero when the increasing resistive force eventually balances the weight. At
this point, the object reaches its terminal speed vT and then on it continues to move with zero
acceleration.
mg – bvT = 0
mg
vT =
b
bt
Hence v = vT (1 e m )
In an experimental set–up, four objects I, II, III, IV were released in same liquid. Using the data
collected for the subsequent motions, values of constant b were calculated. Respective data are shown
in table.
Object I II III IV
Mass (in kg.) 1 2 3 4
Constnat b
3.7 1.4 1.4 2.8
in (N-s)/m
R = – bv
v b
'm' R
mg
dv dv b
mg – bv = m =g–v
dt dt m
.
b
v= (1 – e–bt/m)
m
e = 2.71,
vT
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
b
mg – bvT = 0 vT =
m
bt
v = vT (1 e m )
I, II, III, IV
b
I II III IV
( ) 1 2 3 4
5. Which object would first acquire half of their respective terminal speed in minimum time from start of the
motion if all were released simultaneously ?
?
(A*) (B) (C) (D) IV
Sol. V = VT(1 – e–t/(m/b))
m
Thus can be taken as time constant in which object would acquire 0.63 fraction of VT. Thus particle
b
m
with minimum would acquire half of the terminal speed first.
b
N s
6. If an object of mass 2 kg and constant b = 4 has terminal speed vT in a liquid then time required
m
to reach 0.63 vT from start of the motion is :
2 kg b = 4 vT
0.63 vT :
(A) 2.0 sec. (B) 1.26 sec (C) 0.33 sec (D*) 0.5 sec.
m 2 m
Sol. = = 0.5 s.(0.63 VT is achieved in first time constant i.e. )
b 4 b
7. A small sphere of mass 2.00 g is released from rest in a large vessel filled with oil. The sphere
approaches a terminal speed of 10.00 cm/s. Time required to achieve speed 6.32 cm/s from start of the
motion is (Take g = 10.00 m/s2) :
2.00 10.00 /
6.32 /
(g = 10.00 /2) :
(A) 5.00 × 10–3 s (B*) 1.00 × 10–2 s (C) 2.5 × 10–3 s (D) 1.00 × 10–3 s
mg
Sol. Using VT =
b
m
= 10–2 s
b
In this time sphere would achieve 0.63 fraction of its terminal speed 10 cm/s.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. At the start of motion when object is released in the liquid, its acceleration is :
(A) 0 (B) 0.63 g
(C*) g (D) Depends on the mass of the object ()
Sol. At t = 0 V=0
i.e. there is no resistive force so acceleration is g only.
9. If buoyancy force were also taken into account then value of terminal speed would have
(A*) decreased. (B) increased.
(C) remained same. (D) increased or decreased depending upon density of liquid.
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
Sol. By taking into account buoyant force, effective constant force in downward direction would decrease.
Initially it was mg, then it becomes (mg–Fb).
Thus geff will have value less than g so
mgeff
VT will increase.
b
10. In Column– , some physical quantities are given and same possible SI units are given in column– .
Match the the physical quantities in Column with the units in Column
- SI -
-
Column – I Column – II
2
B qv watt sec ond
(a) (P)
meter 3
v – Magnitude of velocity
B – Magnetic field
q – Charge
– Magnetic flux
farad volt 2
(b) hgR (Q)
sec ond
h – Planck's constant
g – Gravitational acceleration
R – Rydberg constant
b4 Newton
(c) (R)
A metre 2
– Stefan's constant
b – Wien's constant
A – Area
Newton metre
(d) (S)
RC sec ond
– Coefficient of viscosity
R – Resistance
C – Capacitance
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
– I – II
2
B qv
(a) (P)
3
v –
B –
q –
–
( )2
(b) hgR (Q)
h –
g –
R –
b4
(c) (R)
A 2
–
b –
A –
(d) (S)
RC
–
R –
C –
Ans (A) p,r (B) q,s (C) q,s (D) p,r
B 2 qv ( qvB) B F Newton
Sol. (a) = unit of pressure
BA A metre 2
metre joule
(b) hgR = (Joule-second) 2
(metre–1) = = unit of power
sec ond sec ond
4 4 4 4 4
b T ( AT ) ( joule / sec) (metre) 4 joule
(c) 2
= = unit of power
A A A (metre 2 ) 2 sec ond
F 1 Newton 1 Newton
(d) = = unit of pressure
RC 6 rv (RC ) metre (sec ond) metre 2
metre
sec ond
joule
sec ond
watt sec ond sec ond Newton metre Newton
(P) 3
= 3 3
= = unit of pressure
metre metre metre metre 2
( farad volt 2 ) joule
(Q) = unit of power
sec ond sec ond
Newton
(R) = unit of pressure
metre 2
Newton metre joule
(S) = unit of power
sec ond sec ond
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
B 2 qv ( qvB) B F
(a) =
BA A 2
(b) hgR = (–) 2
(–1) = =
b4 4 4
T ( AT 4 ) 4 ( / )( )4
(c) = =
A A A 2
( 2 )2
F 1
1
(d) = =
RC 6 rv (RC ) ( ) 2
(P) = = =
3
3
3
2
( 2 )
(Q) =
(R) =
2
(S) =
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. If average power absorbed by induction coil (L = 1H) is 1W, then the resistance of the coil is :
i=cos t
L=1H
(L = 1H) 1W , :
(A) 1 (B*) 2 (C) 4 (D) 8 (5) 0
2 2 2 2
Sol. Z ( L) R 1 R
2
2 1
P 1 irms R R ,R=2
2
2. A, B, C, D, E, F are conducting plates each of area A and any two consecutive plates separated by a
distance d. The net energy stored in the system after the switch S is closed is:
A, B, C, D, E, F A d S
:
3 0A 2 5 0A 2 0A 0A
(A) V (B) V (C*) V2 (D) V2
2d 12d 2d d
0A
Sol. (C) Ceff = since effective capacitance between plates A and E is zero.
d
A
Ceff = 0 A E
d
1 A
U= CV2 = 0 V2
2 2d
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. A particle is moving in x - y plane. At an instant, it has velocity (4 iˆ + 4 ĵ ) m/s and acceleration
(3 iˆ + 5 ĵ ) m/s². At that instant, the radius of curvature of its path will be :
x-y (4 î + 4 ĵ ) m/s (3 iˆ + 5 ĵ ) m/s²
?
y
4 m/s
3 m/s2
4 m/s
(A*) 16 2 m (B) 15 m
(C) 18 m (D) None of these
4m/s
2
4 2
5m/s
v2 ( 4 2 )2
Sol. 45° R =
an 1
3m/s2 4m/s (5 – 3 )
2
3sin45°
4. A material satisfies the relation (H + M) = 0, where H and M are magnetic field and magnetisation
respectively, then material is
(A) nonmagnetic (B) paramagnetic (C) ferromagnetic (D*) diamagnetic
(H + M) = 0, H M
(A) (B) (C) (D*)
5. Two metal spheres of same radius R are placed at a very large distance from each other, and they are
connected by a coil of inductance L, as it is shown in the figure. One of the spheres is loaded with
electric charge. At what time, after closing the switch S, does the charge on this sphere decrease to half
?
R L
S
L
S
(A) 4 0 LR 4 (B) 0 LR (C*) 2 0 LR (D) 2 0 LR
2 4 2 4
(E) None of these
Sol. C=2 R
0
T= 2 LC = 2 2 0 RL
T
Required time = 2 0 LR
4 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
6. Block 'A' is placed over the block 'B' as shown in the figure. Wedge is fixed and there is no friction.
Between block 'B' and fixed inclined. Force of friction on the block 'A' is :
'A' 'B' 'B'
'A'
8. The temperature of an spherical isolated black body falls from T1 to T2 in time 't'. Then time t is :
T1 T2 't' t :
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(A) t (B) t 2 2
(C*) t 3 3
(D) t 4 4
T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1
dT
Sol. Power radiated P = 4 r2 T4 = ms
dt
dT 4 r 2 dt
= = c dt
T4 m
T2
dT 1 1
4
= ct t= K 3 3
.
T1
T T2 T1
(A*) t2 – t1 = 4 (B) t2 – t1 = 2
(C) t1 = 2 log25 (D) t2 = log2100
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
N0 t1
Sol. N0 e ..........(i)
5
2 n5
t1 = = 2 log25 (use logab. logba = 1)
n2
9N0 t2
N0 N0 e ..........(ii)
10
2 n10
t2 = = 2 log210 = log2100
n2
(i) / (ii) gives ,
(t2 t1 )
2 e
n2 = (t2 – t1)
From graphs t1/2 = 2 sec.
t1/2 = 2 sec.
n2 n2
So, = =
t1/ 2 2
n2 = (t2 – t1)
t2 – t1 = 2.
10. A wedge is placed on a smooth horizontal surface. One side of the wedge is curved into a circular
quadrant of radius R. An insect crawls on the circular part with a constant speed v. A force F is applied
on the wedge so that it (wedge) remains stationary at all the times. The value of F when the radial line
of the position of the insect makes an angle with the horizontal is
R
v F
F
mv 2 (m M)v 2 mv 2
(A) 0 (B*) cos (C) cos (D)
R R R cos
Sol. Taking the wedge + insect as system and applying. Newton’s II law in horizontal direction,
V2
F= m .cos M 0
R
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. A disc of mass m is connected with an ideal spring of spring constant k inside a lift as shown.The lift
starts moving with constant acceleration (a î aˆj) . At the same moment disc starts rolling without sliding
on the wall of lift (from rest). If spring is in natural length initially then friction force acting on disc as a
function of y is given by: (y is the displacement of the disc with respect to lift)
m k
(a î aˆj)
y : (y )
2
(A) –ky (B) (mg + ma – ky)
3
1
(C*) (mg + ma – ky) (D) mg + ma – 2ky
3
(5) None of these
(mg ma ky )R frR 1
Sol. = fr = (mg + ma – ky)
3 2 1 3
mR mR 2
2 2
12. The given system is displaced by distance ‘A’ and released. Both the blocks (each of mass m) move
together without relative slipping in the whole process. The magnitude of frictional force between them
at time ‘t’ is :
‘A’
m ‘t’
:
x=0
smooth
KA KA KA
(A*) |cos t| (B) cos t (C) |sin t| (D) KA |cos t|
2 2 2
K
where ( ) =
2m
Sol. a= x2
Kx KA
a= = cos t
2m 2m
KA
f = ma = cos t .
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. A particle is performing SHM along x-axis such that its acceleration along x-axis is :
a = 2 – x where a is in m/s2 and x is in meter. If speed of the particle at x = 1 is zero then
INCORRECT statement is :
x- x– a = 2 – x
a m/s2 x x = 1 :
(A*) time period of oscillation is second (B) amplitude of oscillation is 1 m
3
(C) speed of the particle at x = 1.5 m is m/s (D) speed of particle at x = 3 m is zero
2
(A*) (B) 1 m
3
(C) x = 1.5 m m/s (D) x = 3 m
2
Sol. a = –[x – 2]
mean position x = 2, left extreme x = 1, right extreme x = 3
x = 2 x = 1, x = 3
amplitude x = 1
=1
vmax = 1 ; v= A2 x2
1 3
= 1 1 = .
4 2
14. A particle is performing SHM along a straight line. Its amplitude is A and time period T. The minimum
2
A 2 3
time interval between two instants, when magnitude of its acceleration becomes is: 2
T
A T
2
2 3 A
2
T
(A*) T/6 (B) T/12 (C) T/3 (D) 2T/3
15. A 1m long wire having tension of 100 N and of linear mass density 0.01 kg/m is fixed at end A and free
at end B. The point C which is 20 cm from end B is constrained to be stationary. To create resonance in
this wire, the minimum frequency of the tuning fork will be :
1m 100 N 0.01 kg/m A B
C B 20 cm
:
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. In a Young's double slit experiment, the slits are 1 mm apart and are illuminated with a mixture of two
wavelengths = 750 nm and ' = 900 nm and distance between slit and screen is 2m. At what
minimum distance (in mm) from the common central bright fringe on a screen the bright fringe from one
interference pattern coincides with a bright fringe from the other?
, 1 mm = 750 nm ' = 900 nm
2m
(mm ) ?
(A) 6mm (B) 12mm (C) 8mm (D*) 9mm
Sol. The mth bright fringe of the pattern and the nth bright fringe of the ' pattern are located at
mth ' nth
mD n' D '
ym = and ym' =
d d
m 6
Equating them =
n 5
Hence the first position at which overlaping occurs is
9
6 2 750 10
y6 = y5' = 3
m = 9 mm.
1 10
17. Interference fringes were produced using white light in a double slit arrangement. When a mica sheet of
uniform thickness of refractive index 1.6 (relative to air) is placed in the path of light from one of the
slits, the central fringe moves through some a distance. This distance is equal to the width of
30 interference bands if light of wavelength 4800 Å is used. The thickness (in 1 m) of mica is:
1.6
30 4800 Å
( m) :
(A) 90 (B) 12 (C) 14 (D*) 24
t D
Sol. (D)Shift of fringe pattern = ( – 1)
d
30D(4800 10 10 ) D
= (0.6) t
d d
30 × 4800 × 10–10 = 0.6
30 4800 10 10 1.44 10 5
t= = = 24 × 10–6
0.6 0.6
18. The magnetic induction and the intensity of magnetic field inside an iron pole of an electromagnetic are
10 Wb m–2 and 250 Am–1 respectively. What is the relative permeability of iron ? ( 0 = 4 × 10–7 Hm–1)
(Iron pole)
10 Wb m–2 250 Am–1 ? ( 0 = 4 × 10–7 Hm–1)
10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
(A) (B*) (C) (D)
6 3 5
Sol. The permeability is given by = B/H
= B/H
B 10 10 5
Relative permeability r
= =
0 0H 4 10 7 250
19. In an electromagnetic wave, the electric field oscillates sinusoidally with amplitude 48 Vm–1, the RMS
value of oscillating magnetic field will be nearly equal to :
, 48 Vm–1 (sinusoidally)
:
(A) 1.6 × 10–8T (B) 16 × 10–9 T (C) 144 × 108T (D*) 11.3 × 10–8T
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
E0 48
Sol. B0 = = 16 × 10–8 T
c 3 108
8
B0 16 10
Brms = 8 2 10 8 T
2 2
20. A thin uniform wire AB of length 50 cm and resistance 1 is connected to the terminals of a battery of
emf 1 = 2.2 V and internal resistance 0.1 . If the terminals of another cell (assume ideal) are
connected to two points 25 cm apart on the wire AB without altering the current in the wire AB, then
emf 2 of cell in volts is :
50 cm 1 AB, 1 = 2.2 V
0.1 () AB 25
cm AB
2
(A) 0. 5 V (B*) 1V (C) 1.2 V (D) 0.8 V
1 2.2
Sol. current i 2A
r R 0.1 1
25 1
resistance of 25 cm wire (25 cm ) 1
50 2
1
so emf 2 2A 1V
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
DPP No. : 87
1. (C) 2. (B,D) 3. (B,C,D) 4. (B,C) 5. 0.86 6. 2
7. 15 8. (C) 9. (B) 10. (A) – p, r, s ; (B) – p, q, r, s, (C) – p (D) – p, r, s ;
1. Tuning fork A and B produce 4 beats when sounded together. When they are tuned with same
sonometer wire, the resonance lengths are 128 cm and 130 cm respectively. The frequency of A
is__________.
A B 4
128 cm 130 cm A
(A) 240 Hz (B) 250 Hz (C*) 260Hz (D) 270 Hz
[ Ans. 260 ]
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Graph shows variation of source emf V and current i in a series RLC circuit, with time.
V RLC i
V/i
V
i
t
4. For the given uniform semi-circular disc of mass m and radius r. Choose the correct alternative(s) :
(C : Centre of mass of the disc, O : Centre of the circular part)
m r :
(C : , O : )
(A) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through O
mr 2
is
4
mr 2
O
4
(B*) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through O
mr 2
is
2
mr 2
O
2
(C*) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through A
3mr 2
is
2
3mr 2
A
2
(D) the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing through C
mr 2
is
2
mr 2
C
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. An inclined plane making an angle of 30° with horizontal is placed in a uniform horizontal electric field E
of 100 V/m. A particle of mass 1 kg and charge 0.01 C, is allowed to slide down from rest from a height
of 1 m. If the coefficient of friction is 0.2, find the time taken by the particle to reach the bottom.
(g = 9.8 m/s2)
30° 100 V/m 1m
1 kg 0.01 C
0.2 (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Ans . 0.86
6. The gravitational potential energy of a satellite revolving around the earth in circular orbit is – 4 MJ. Find
the additional energy (in MJ) that should be given to the satellite so that it escapes from the
gravitational field of earth. Assume earth's gravitational force to be the only gravitational force on the
satellite and no atmospheric resistance.
– 4 MJ
(MJ )
Ans. 2
Sol. PE = –4 MJ
TE = –2MJ
The additional energy required to make the satellite escape = +2MJ.
= +2MJ.
7. A river of width 100 m is flowing with a velocity of 1.5 m/s. A man start from one end with rest relative
the river. He raws with an acceleration of 2 m/s2 relative to the river. If the man want to cross the river
in minimum time, by how much distance (in meters) will he be drifted (flown) in the direction of river flow
during the crossing.
100 m 1.5 m/s
2 m/s2
()
Ans : 15
Sol.
From A to B in y–direction,
y-A B ,
1
Sy = uyt + ayy2
2
1
100 = 0 + (B) t2
2
t = 10 sec.
From A to B, in x–direction,
x-A B, ,
Sx = uxt
Sx = (1.5) × (10) = 15 m.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
A U–tube, open from both the ends, contains two arms, arm–1 and arm–2 each of having equal cross–
section and height of each arm is 1m. Water of density w and an unknown liquid of density is filled as
shown.
U– –1 –2
1m w
A tuning fork of frequency 300 Hz is vibrated on arm–1, then air column vibrates in fundamental tone. If
the same tuning fork is vibrated on arm–2, , then air column vibrates in 1st overtone Vsound = 300 m/sec.,
g = 10 m/sec2, density of water w = 103 kg/m3, atmospheric pressure = 105 Pa). Neglect the effect of
surface tension and end correction.
300 Hz –1 –2
(V = 300 m/sec., g = 10
m/sec2, w
= 103 kg/m3, = 105 Pa).
Sol.
2
= 0.75 m
0
+ wg(0.75) = 0
+ g (0.25)
=3 w.
9. Now we use a tuning fork of frequency 302 Hz, instead of 300 Hz, with how much velocity should we
move the tuning fork, so that resonance is created with the air column in any arm ?
300 Hz 302 Hz
?
(A) 2 m/sec. towards the tube (B*) 2 m/sec. away from the tube
(C) 4 m/sec. towards the tube (D) 4 m/sec. away from the tube
(A) 2 m/sec. (B*) 2 m/sec.
(C) 4 m/sec (D) 4 m/sec.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-20
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. For resonance appeared frequency for the tube should be still 300 Hz
300 Hz
V V0
f' = f0
V Vs
300 0
300 = 302
300 ( V)
V = 2 m/sec away from the tube.
V = 2 m/sec
10. Consider a uniform wire of length , cross-sectional area A. Young’s modulus of the material of the wire
is Y. Some information related to the wire is given in column-I and dependence of the result is given in
column-II. Then match the appropriate choice between the columns and match the list given in options :
Column-I Column-II
(A) Let us suspend the wire vertically from a (p) Young’s Modulus
rigid supported and attach a mass m at
its lower end. If the mass is slightly pulled
down and released, it executes S.H.M.
of a time period which will depend on
(B) Work done in stretching the wire up to length (q) elongation (x)
+ x will depend on
(C) If the given wire is fixed between two rigid (r) length ( )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-21
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
, A. Y -I
–II
-I -II
(A) (p)
m
(B) + x (q) (x)
(C) (r) ( )
(D) F (s) (A)
x
F = kx, k
k
Ans. (A) – p, r, s ; (B) – p, q, r, s, (C) – p (D) – p, r, s ;
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-22
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
2. The ratio of intensities of two waves is 9 : 1. They are producing interference. The ratio of maximum
and minimum intensities will be
9 : 1
(A) 10 : 8 (B) 9 : 1 (C*) 4 : 1 (D) 2 : 1
2
I1 9
1 1
I I2 1 4
Sol. (C) max
Imin I1 9 1
1 1
I2 1
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. Two light sources are said to be coherent if they are obtained from
(A) Two independent point sources emitting light of the same wavelength
(B*) A single point source
(C) A wide source
(D) Two ordinary bulbs emitting light of different wavelengths
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Sol. When two sources are obtained from a single source, the wavefront is divided into two parts. These two
wavefronts acts as if they emanated from two sources having a fixed phase relationship.
4. In a certain double slit experimental arrangement interference fringes of width 1.0 mm each are
observed when light of wavelength 5000 Å is used. Keeping the set up unaltered, if the source is
replaced by another source of wavelength 6000 Å, the fringe width will be
1.0 mm 5000 Å
6000 Å
(A) 0.5 mm (B) 1.0 mm (C*) 1.2 mm (D) 1.5 mm
1 1 1.0 5000 6000
Sol. (C) or or 2 1. 2 mm .
2 2 2 6000 5000
5. Two coherent light sources S1 and S2 ( = 6000 Å) are 1mm apart from each other. The screen is
placed at a distance of 25 cm from the sources. The width of the fringes on the screen should be
- S1 S2 ( = 6000 Å) - 1 25
(A*) 0.015 cm (B) 0.025 cm (C) 0.010 cm (D) 0.030 cm
6000 10 10 25 10 2
9 3
Sol. (A) 3
150000 10 0 . 15 10 m 0 . 015 cm .
10
6. The figure shows a double slit experiment P and Q are the slits. The path lengths PX and QX are n
and (n 2) respectively, where n is a whole number and is the wavelength. Taking the central fringe
as zero, what is formed at X
- P Q PX QX n
(n 2) n X
X
n
P
(n+2)
(A) First bright (B) First dark (C*) Second bright (D) Second dark
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Sol. (C) For brightness, path difference n 2
So second is bright.
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
7. A polaroid is placed at 45o to an incoming light of intensity I0 . Now the intensity of light passing through
polaroid after polarisation would be
I0 45o
(A) I0 (B*) I 0 / 2 (C) I0 / 4 (D) Zero
2 I0
Sol. (B) I I0 cos 2 = I0 cos 45
2
b
8. In the visible region of the spectrum the rotation of the place of polarization is given by a 2
. The
optical rotation produced by a particular material is found to be 30° per mm at 5000 Å and 50° per
mm at 4000 Å . The value of constant a will be
b
a 2
5000 Å
b b
30 a and 50 a
(5000 )2 (4000 )2
50
Solving for a, we get a per mm
9
9. What will be the angle of diffracting for the first minimum due to Fraunhoffer diffraction with sources of
light of wave length 550 nm and slit of width 0.55 mm
550 nm, 0.55 mm
(A*) 0.001 rad (B) 0.01 rad (C) 1 rad (D) 0.1 rad
Sol. (A) Using d sin n , for n =1
9
550 10 3
sin 3
10 0 . 001 rad
d 0 .55 10
10. Angular width ( ) of central maximum of a diffraction pattern on a single slit does not depend upon
[DCE 2000; 01]
( )
(A*) Distance between slit and source (B) Wavelength of light used
(C) Width of the slit (D) Frequency of light used
(A) f>jhZ ,oa lzksr ds e/; dh nwjh ij (B) ç;qä çdk’k dh rjaxnS/;Z ij
(C) f>jhZ dh pkSM+kbZ ij (D) ç;qä çdk’k dh vko`fÙk ij
Sol. (A) For single slit diffraction pattern d sin (d slit width)
1
Angular width = 2 2 sin
d
It is independent of D i.e. distance between screen and slit
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
11. In the figure shown the acceleration of A is, a A = 15 ˆi 15 ˆj then the acceleration of B is: (A remains in
contact with B)
A a A = 15 ˆi 15 ˆj , B : (A, B )
= aB cos 53º
aB
aB = – 5 m/s 37°
aB 5iˆ
12. In the figure shown the potential energy U of a particle is plotted against its position ' x ' from origin.
Then which of the following statement is correct. A particle at:
U ' x '
:
13. A block of mass 5 kg is released from rest when compression in spring is 2m. Block is not attached
with the spring and natural length of the spring is 4m. Maximum height of block from ground is : (g = 10
m/s2)
2m 5 kg
4m (g = 10 m/s2)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Sol. By energy conservation,
1 1
kx2 = mgh + mv2
2 2
1 1
= × 300 × (B)2 = 5 × 10 × 2 + × 5v2
2 2
v2 = 200
v 2 sin 2 30 º
Also, H= = 2.5 m
2g
So, total height from ground
= 3 + 2.5 = 5.5 m.
14. Two equal masses are connected by a spring satisfying Hooke's law and are placed on a frictionless
table. The spring is elongated a little and allowed to go. Let the angular frequency of oscillations be .
Now one of the masses is stopped. The square of the new angular frequency is :
:
2 2
(A) 2 (B*) (C) (D) 2 2
2 3
Sol. k
=
m1m 2
=
m1 m 2
2k
=
m
k
2= m
2
2 k
2 = m = 2 . Ans. (B)
15. Two bodies A and B have emissivities 0.5 and 0.8 respectively. At some temperatures the two bodies
have maximum spectral emissive powers at wavelength 8000 Å and 4000 Å respectively. The ratio of
their emissive powers at these temperatures is:
A B 0.5 0.8
8000 Å 4000 Å
5 5
(A*) (B) 10 (C) (D) None of these
128 16
Sol. Let the body have temperatures T1 and T2 respectively at wavelength 1 = 8000Å and 2= 4000Å.
From Wien’s displacement law
T = constant
1T1 = 2T2 or 8000 × T1 = 4000T2
T1 1
or =
T2 2
Emissive power = e AT4
4
e1T14 0 .5 1 5
Ratio of emissive powers at these temperature is = = × =
e 2 T24 0 .8 2 128
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
16. An isolated and charged spherical soap bubble has a radius ‘ r ‘ and the pressure inside is atmospheric.
If ‘ T ‘ is the surface tension of soap solution, then charge on drop is:
‘ r ‘
‘ T ‘
2r T 2r T
(A) 2 (B*) 8 r 2r T 0 (C) 8 r rT 0 (D) 8 r
0 0
4T
Sol. (B) Inside pressure must be greater than outside pressure in bubble. This excess pressure is
r
provided by charge on bubble.
4T
r
2
4T
=
r 2 0
4T Q2 Q
= 2 4
.......
r 16 r 2 0 4 r2
Q = 8 r 2rT 0
17. A charged particle, initially at rest at O, when released follows a trajectory as shown. Such a trajectory
is possible in the presence of
O
O
(A*) electric field of constant magnitude and varying direction
(B) magnetic field of constant magnitude and varying direction
(C) electric field constant magnitude and constant direction
(D) electric and magnetic fields of constant magnitudes and constant directions which are parallel to
each other.
(A*)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Sol. In option B it will not move, in option C & D path will be straight line.
Ans. (A)
18. In the following displacement (x) vs time (t) graph, at which among the point P, Q and R is the objects
speed increasing ?
(x) (t) P,Q R
x P
Q
t
R
(A*) R only (B) P only (C) Q and R only (D) P, Q, R
Sol. |slope| is increasing at point R
R Ans. (A)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-6
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
19. Two positively charged sphere of masses m1 and m2 are suspended from a common point at the ceiling
by identical insulating massless strings of length . Charges on the two spheres are q1 and q2,
respectively. At equilibrium both strings make the same angle with the vertical. Then
m1 m2
q1 q2
(A) q1m1 = q2m2 (B*) m1 = m2 (C) m1 = m2sin (D) q2m1 = q1m2
Sol. T
mg
F
tan (F same )
mg
1
tan
m
m1 m2
Ans. (B)
20. A box when dropped from a certain height reaches the ground with a speed v. when it slides from rest
from the same height down a rough inclined plane inclined at an angle 45° to the horizontal, it reaches
the ground with a speed v/3. The coefficient of sliding friction between the box and the plane is
(acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s–2)
v
45° v/3
( 10 m/s–2
(A*) 8/9 (B) 1/9 (C) 2/3 (D) 1/3
Sol. Case-1
v 2gh
Case-2
U kE wf
B
45°
1 2gh 8
mgh m mgh
2 9 9
Ans. (A)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-7
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. A planet is revolving around a star with a time period of 2 days, if radius of star trippled keeping mass
same. Planet will revolve with these changed parameters. Select correct option(s) :
2
:
(A) with time period of 6 days
1
(B) with rd orbital speed of initial orbital speed
3
1
(C) with potential energy times of its initial potential energy
3
(D*) None of these
(A) 6
1
(B)
3
1
(C)
3
(D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-8
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
2. The angles of incidence and refraction of a monochromatic ray of light of wavelength at an air-glass
interface are i and r, respectively. A parallel beam of light with a small spread in wavelength about a
mean wavelength is refracted at the same air-glass interface. The refractive index of glass depends
on the wavelength as ( ) = a + b/ 2 where a and b are constants. Then the angular spread in the
angle of refraction of the beam is
i r
( ) = a + b/ 2 a b
2
sini 2b 2b tanr 2b (a b / )sini
(A) 3
(B) 3
(C*) (D)
cosr a 3 b 3
3. A particle of mass m and charge q is fastened to one end of a light string of length l . The other end of
the string is fixed to the point O. The whole system lies on a frictionless horizontal plane. Initially, the
mass is at rest at A. A uniform electric field in the direction shown is switched on. Then :
m q l O
() A
:
A
E
l
60°
O B
2qE
(A) the speed of the particle when it reaches B is
m
qE
(B*) the speed of the particle when it reaches B is
m
(C*) the tension in the string when particles reaches at B is 2qE
(D) the tension in the string when the particle reaches at B is zero
2qE
(A) B
m
qE
(B*) B
m
(C*) B 2qE
(D) B
Sol. Work done by tension = 0
Work done by Electric field = qE × l (1–cos60°)
qE 1 qE
(B) mV 2 V
2 2 m
mV 2
(C) T qE T 2qE
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-9
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. A block of mass m = 20 kg is kept at a distance R = 1m from central axis of rotation of a round turn
table (A table whose surface can rotate about central axis). Table starts from rest and rotates with
constant angular acceleration, = 3 rad/sec2. The friction coefficient between block and table is =
x
0.5. At time t = from starting of motion (i.e. t = 0) the block is just about to slip. Find the value of
30
x.(g = 10 m/s2)
( ) R = 1m
m = 20 kg = 3 rad/sec2
x
= 0.5 (t = 0) t =
30
x (g = 10 m/s2)
Ans. 20
Sol.
initial = 0
=0
= Angular velocity at time t t
= initial × t
= × t
= 0 + 3 × t = 3t
(ii) Force diagram for block as seen from above is :
1
× 100 = 9 × 1 + (3t)4 .(A)
4
(3t)4 = 16
3t = 2
20
t= sec
30
x=2
Ans. 20
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-10
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
5. In figure shown there are three metallic large plates. The middle plate carries a total charge q. Plates 1
& 2 (which are uncharged) are connected by a wire. Find the charge induced on each surface of 1 & 2.
Given l2 = 2 l1.
q 1 2 ( )
1 2 2 = 2 1.
(–q–y)
x y –y (q+y) (q–x)
A E1 E2
B
C
x (q x ) q q
= x= & q–x=
2A 0 2A 0 2 2
Since VA = VC VA – VB = VC – VB
y ( q y)
E1 1
= E2 2
= 1 2 1
A 0 A 0
y 1 = – 2q 1 – 2y 1
2q
3y 1 = – 2q 1
y=
3
2q q
So, –q–y=–q+ =
3 3
q
So, Charge on outer surface of plate 1 is x =
2
2q
Charge on inner (interfacing) surface of plate 1 is y =
3
q
Charge on outer surface of plate 2 is q – x =
2
q
Charge on inner (interfacing) surface of plate 2 is (–q – y) =
3
q 2q
Ans. q1(outer) = , q1(inner) =
2 3
q q
q2(outer) = , q2(inner) = .
2 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-11
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
COMPREHENSION
Figure shows a YDSE setup having identical slits S1 and S2 with d = 5 mm and D = 1 m. A
monochromatic light of wavelength = 6000 Å is incident on the plane of slit due to which at screen
centre O, an intensity I0 is produced with fringe pattern on both sides. Now a thin transparent film of 11
µm thickness and refractive index µ = 2.1 is placed in front of slit S1 and now interference pattern is
observed again on screen.
S1 S2 d =
5 mm D = 1 m = 6000 Å
O I0
11 µm µ = 2.1 S1
S1 S1
Incident
Light d O d O
D D
S2 S2
Screen
7. Due to placement of film in front of S1, how many bright fringes cross the point O of screen excluding
the one which was at O earlier :
S1 O
O
(A*) 20 (B) 21 (C) 42 (D) None of these
8. After placement of film, the distance of nearest point from O below it where intensity is I0 is :
O I0
(A) 0.1 mm (B) 0.06 mm (C*) 0.02 mm (D) None of these
Sol. After introducing the film, path difference at point O is
O
= t (µ – 1)
= 11 × 10–6 × 1.1 = 12.1 × 10–6 m
Phase difference at point O is
O
2 2
= × = 12.1 × 10–6
6 10 7
121
= =
3 3
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-12
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
Thus intensity at point O is O
I
I = I0 cos2 = I0 cos2 =3 0
2 6 4
Now path difference at point in terms of is
O
6
12.1 10
0
= = 20.167
6 10 7
Thus due to placement of thin film 20 bright fringes cross the point O.
20 O
9. Two coherent point sources of light having wavelength are seperated by a distance d. A circle is
drawn in space surrounding both the point sources as shown. The plane of circle contains both the
point sources. The distance d between both the sources is given in column-I and the total number of
corresponding points of maximum intensity and minimum intensity on the periphery of the shown circle
are given in column-II. Match each situation of column-I with the results in column-II.
d
d-I
-II -I -II
Column-I Column-II
(A) d = 99.4 (p) 398 points of maximum intensity
(B) d = 99.6 (q) 400 points of maximum intensity
(C) d = 100 (r) 396 points of minimum intensity
(D) d = 100 (s) 400 points of minimum intensity
-I -II
(A) d = 99.4 (p) 398
(B) d = 99.6 (q) 400
(C) d = 100 (r) 396
(D) d = 100 (s) 400
Ans. (A) p,r (B) p,s (C) q,s (D) s
Sol. (A) When d = 99.4 398 points of maximum intensity are formed on periphery of circle and 396points
of minimum intensity are formed on periphery of circle
(B) When d = 99.6 398 points of maximum intensity are formed on periphery of circle and 400
points of minimum intensity are formed on periphery of circle
(C) When d = 100 400 points of maximum intensity are formed on periphery of circle and 400
points of minimum intensity are formed on periphery of circle
(D) When d = 100.4 402 points of maximum intensity are formed on periphery of circle and 400
points of minimum intensity are formed on periphery of circle
(A) d = 99.4 398 396
(B) d = 99.6 398 400
(C) d = 100 400 400
(D) d = 100.4 402
400
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-13
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
1. An infinitely long cylidrical object with radius R has a charge distribution that depends upon distance r
from the axis like this : = ar + br2 (r R, a and b are non zero constant, is volume charge density). If
a
electric field outside the cylinder is zero then value of is :
b
R r
= ar + br2 (r R, a b , )
a
:
b
(A) 3R/4 (B*) – 3R/4 (C) –4 R/3 (D) 4 R/3
Sol. By Gauss Theorem
Net charge inside cylinder = 0 = 0
R
(2 r dr )h 0 (ar br 2 )rdr 0
O
aR 3 bR 4 a 3R
=0 = –
3 4 b 4
2. When an small object is placed at a distance x1 and x 2 from a lens on its principal axis, then real image
and a virtual image are formed respectively having same magnitude of transverse magnification. Then
the focal length of the lens is :
x1 x2
x1 x2 x1 x2
(A) x1 – x2 (B) (C*) (D) x1 + x2
2 2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-14
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
f f
Sol. m= m1 =
f u f x1
f
m2 = m1 = –m2
f x2
2f = (x1 + x2)
x x2
f= 1 .
2
3. A parallel plate capacitor of initial capacitance C0 , attached with a vertical spring shown in figure. The
upper plate of capacitior is fixed and the other plate connected with spring (of spring constant K), which
is free to move. The area of each plate is A and it is an equilibrium position initally, the distance
between the plates is d0. When the capacitor is connected with an electric source of emf V, due to this
a new equilibrium appears, with the distance between the plate as d1. Mass of the each plate is m.
Then choose the correct options :
C0
( K)
A d0
V d1
m :
C 0 d0 V 2 C 0 d0 V 2
(A*) spring constant is K = K =
2d12 (d0 d1 ) 2d12 (d0 d1 )
2 2
C0 d0 V C0 d0 V
(B) spring constant is K = K =
4d12 (d0 d1 ) 4d12 (d0 d1)
2
C 0 d0 V
(C) spring constant is K =
d 20 ( d0 d1 )
C 0 d0 V 2
(D) spring constant is K =
d12 ( d0 d1 )
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-15
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
4. Magnetic field along x-axis varies according to the relation . B B0 xiˆ Given a coil of area A with its axis
along x-axis is connected over the top of a plastic trolly which moves along x-axis with velocity v. If the
resistance of coil is R, then (at t = 0, coil is at x = 0 and v = v0 )
x- B B xiˆ A
0
x-
v x– R (t = 0 x = 0
v0 )
(A*) The flux linked with the coil at any position x is B0xA
B0 Av 0
(B*) An observer at origin ‘O’ finds the induced current as anticlockwise if trolley moves with
R
constant velocity v = v0.
(C*) If the trolly has acceleration then the induced current as a function of time t is given as
B0 A(v 0 t)
anticlockwise
R
(D*) If the trolly has acceleration then the induced current as a function of position x is given as
2
B0 A v0 2 x
anticlockwise
R
(A*) x B0xA
B Av
(B*) ‘O’ 0 0 ( ) v = v0
R
B 0 A(v 0 t)
(C*) t ()
R
2
B0 A v0 2 x
(D*) x ( )
R
d dx
Sol. = B.A = B0xA B0 A = B0Av
dt dt
d | e | B 0 v.A
apply e= i= anticlock wise
dt R R
B 0 A(v 0 t)
v = v0 + t anticlock wise
R
v 02 2 x
v2 = u2 + 2 x, i = B0A anticlock wise
R
5. Voltage sensitivity of a DC voltmeter can be decreased by :
[Made MP Sir 2010-11] [CE_IN]
(A*) Increasing the resistance (used for conversion into voltmeter) connected in the series with the
galvanometer
(B*) Increasing the torsional stiffness of the torsional spring used in galvanometer
(C) Increasing the magnetic field in the galvanometer
(D*) Decreasing the number of turns in the coil of galvanometer
(A*) ()
(B*)
(C)
(D*)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-16
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
v
Sol. ig = and (NBA)ig
Rg R
NBA 1
So, sensivity = .
V C (R g R)
6. A fiber of length 10 km is illuminated with light from an light emitting diode (LED) which is turned on and
off repeatedely for equal amount of time. The speed of the pulses of light are 2.00 × 108 m/s and
2.1 × 108 m/s in fiber. Maximum frequency of LED so that pulse arrive without overlapping is 10X
(KHz). Calculate X.
10 km (LED)
(ON) (OFF)
(pulses) 2.00 × 108 m/s 2.1 × 108 m/s (overlapping)
10X (KHz) X
Ans. 42
10km 10km
Sol. t= –
2 10 8 2.1 108
10 10 3 2.1 2 1 1
= =
108 4.2 10 4 (42)
f = 42 × 104 = 420 Khz = 60 × Khz X = 42
COMPREHENSION
25
A diatomic ideal gas changes its state from A to B as shown in the figure. TA = 300 K, R = J(mole)–
3
K–1, 1 atm = 105N/m2 . U represents internal energy of gas.
1
25
A B TA = 300 K, R = J(mole)–
3
K–1, 1 atm = 105N/m2 U
1
p(atm)
A
3
1 B
0 2 V(lit)
1 3
(A*) (B)
(C) (D)
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-17
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
8. Maximum internal energy of the gas is :
(A) 10 J (B) 7.5 J (C) 750 J (D*) 1000 J
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-18
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
– –
(A) X– (p) 3.473 Å.
30 KV
(B) 2 eV (q) 0.19
(C) Z = 81 (r) 0.41
K
(D) 5.7 W/m2 (Å ) (s) 8.64
1015
Ans. (A) –r ; (B) – s ; (C) – q ; (D) – p
hc 12420 0
Sol. (A) 0.414 A
eV 30000
h 6.626 10 34
(B) 8.6 10 10 m
2mK 31 19
2 9.1 10 2 1.6 10
c 3Rc
(C) a(Z b) (Z 1)
4
1 3(1.09 107 )
(81 1)
4
= 0.19 Å
Nhc Nhc 1015 6.6 10 34 3 10 8
(D) = = 3.473 Å.
I 5.7
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-19
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
r=R+h R
x= (R h) 2 R2
= h 2 2hR
x = 25000 + 2. 500 6.4 100000
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. An oscillator is producing FM waves of frequency 2 kHz with a variation of 10 kHz. What is the
modulating index
2 kHz FM 10 kHz
(A) 0.20 (B*) 5.0 (C) 0.67 (D) 1.5
f 10
Sol. m= = =5
fc 2
4. The carrier frequency generated by a tank ciruit containing 1 nF. capacitor and 10 H inductor is
1 nF 10 H
(A) 1592 Hz (B) 1592 MHz (C*) 1592 kHz (D) 159.2 Hz
1 1
Sol. = =
LC 10 9 10 10 6
= 10 × 0.1592 = 1592 kHz.
7
5. A TV. tower has a height 150 m. What is the population density around the TV. tower if the total
population covered is 50 lakh ? (Radius of earth = 6.4 x 106 m)
150 m 50
(= 6.4 x 106 m)
(A) 82.6 km–2 (B) 800.6 km–2 (C*) 828.6 km–2 (D) 876.6 km–2
Sol. N= d 2
22
50 × 105 = 2 6. 4 10 6 150
7
= 828.6 km–2
6. The TV. transmission tower in Delhi has a height of 240 m. The distance up to which the broadca~t can
be received, (taking the radius of earth to be 6.4 x 106 m) is -
240
(6.4 x 106 m )
(A) 100 km (B) 60 km (C*) 55. km (D) 50 km
Sol. d= 2Rh = 2 6. 4 10 6 240 = 55 km
7. In an amplitude modulated wave, for audio frequency of 500 cps, the appropriate carrier frequency will
be :
500 cps
(A) 50 c/s (B) 100 c/s (C) 500 c/s (D*) 50000 c/s
Sol. fc = 100 f m = 100 × 500 = 50000 cps.
8. For a carrier frequency of 100 kHz and a modulating frequency of 5 kHz what is the width of AM
transmission–
100 kHz 5 kHz AM (width)
–
(A) 5 kHz (B*) 10kHz (C) 20 kHz (D) 200 KHz
Sol. = 2 m = 2 × 5 = 10 kHz.
9. If a carrier wave of 1000 kHz is used to carry the signal, the length of transmitting antenna will be equal
to -
1000 kHz (carry) (transmitting)
-
(A) 3 m (B) 30 m (C*) 300 m (D) 3000 m
c
Sol. h= = = 3×108/106 = 300 m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. The AM wave contains three frequencies, viz : AM
f f f f f
(A) c , c s , c s (B) 2fc, 2(f c + fs), 2(fc – fs)
2 2 2
(C*) fc,(fc + fs), (fc – fs) (D) fc , fc, fc
Sol. Cm(t) = (Ac + Am sin mt) sin ct
Ac
= Ac sin ct + cos ( c – m)t
2
Ac
– cos ( c + m)t
2
11. A wedge (inclination = 30° from horizotnal) is moving with an acceleration a = 4m/s2 vertically up as
shown in figure. What is acceleration of block of mass 1 kg w.r.t. wedge & normal reaction by wedge on
block respectively. All surfaces are smooth. Choose correct pair : (g = 10 m/s2)
= 30° a = 4m/s2
1 kg
(g = 10 m/s2)
= 30°
12. Figure shows the roller coaster track. Each car will start from rest at point A and will roll with negligible
friction. It is important that there should be at least some small positive normal force exerted by the
track on the car at all points, otherwise the car would leave the track. With the above fact, the minimum
safe value for the radius of curvature at point B is (g = 10 m/s2) :
() A
B (g = 10 m/s2) :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. Two immiscible liquids are poured in a U–tube having densities = 1.0 × 103 kg/m3 and 1 2
= 3.0 × 103
h
kg/m3. Find the ratio of heights (of the liquids above their interface) 1 .
h2
U– = 1.0 × 103 kg/m3
1 2
= 3.0 × 103 kg/m3
h
1
h2
14. The free electron concentration (n) in the conduction band of a semiconductor at a temperature T
Kelvin is described in terms of Eg and T as-
T (n), Eg T -
–Eg/kT 2 –Eg/kT 2 –Eg/2kT 3/2 –Eg/2kT
(A) n = ATe (B) n = AT e (C) n = AT e (D*) n = AT e
16 –3
15. Pure Si at 300 K has equal electron (ne) and hole (nh) concentrations of 1.5 × 10 m . Doping by
22 –3
indium increases nh to 4.5 × 10 m . Calculate ne in the doped Si-
16 –3
300 K Si (ne) (nh = 1.5 × 10 m )
22 –3
nh = 4.5 × 10 m ne
9 –3 6 –3
(A*) 5.0 × 10 m (B) 6.0 × 10 m
3 –3 9 –3
(C) 7.0 × 10 m (D) 4.0 × 10 m
16. In a N-P-N transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the
collector, the emiitter current ( E) and base current ( B) are given by-
N-P-N 10 mA 90%
( E) ( B)
(A) E = 1mA; B = 11 mA (B*) E = 11 mA; B = 1 mA
(C) E = –1 mA; B = 9 mA (D) E = 9 mA ; B = –1 mA
17. For the logic circuit shown the Boolean relation is-
A
B
Y
C
(A) Y = ABC (B) Y = A + BC (C*) Y = (A + B) C (D) Y = AB + C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. A wall is moving with constant velocity u towards a fixed source of sound of frequency 'f'. The velocity of
sound is 'v'. The wavelength of the sound reflected by the wall is
u f
v
v v u v u v u v
(A) (B) (C) (D*) .
f f f v u f
v u
Sol. Frequency of sound reflected by wall f' = f
v
v u v u v
Wavelength of sound reflected by wall =
f v u f
v u
f' = f
v
v u v u v
=
f v u f
19. A stationary observer receives sonic oscillations from two tuning forks, one of which approaches and
the other recedes with same speed. As this takes place the observer hears the beat frequency of 2 Hz.
Find the speed of each tuning fork, if their oscillation frequency is 680 Hz and the velocity of sound in
air is 340 m/s. [ Use g = 10 m/s2 ]
2 Hz
680 Hz 340 m/s
(A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s (C*) 0.5 m/s (D) 1.5 m/s
v v
Sol. (C) f0 = 2 Hz
v vs v vs
vs = 0.5 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
TARGET : JEE (Main + Advanced) 2016
EST INF ORM AT IO
r=R+h R
x= (R h) 2 R2
= h 2 2hR
x = 25000 + 2. 500 6.4 100000
2
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-1
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
3. An oscillator is producing FM waves of frequency 2 kHz with a variation of 10 kHz. What is the
modulating index
2 kHz FM 10 kHz
(A) 0.20 (B*) 5.0 (C) 0.67 (D) 1.5
f 10
Sol. m= = =5
fc 2
4. The carrier frequency generated by a tank ciruit containing 1 nF. capacitor and 10 H inductor is
1 nF 10 H
(A) 1592 Hz (B) 1592 MHz (C*) 1592 kHz (D) 159.2 Hz
1 1
Sol. = =
LC 10 9 10 10 6
= 10 × 0.1592 = 1592 kHz.
7
5. A TV. tower has a height 150 m. What is the population density around the TV. tower if the total
population covered is 50 lakh ? (Radius of earth = 6.4 x 106 m)
150 m 50
(= 6.4 x 106 m)
(A) 82.6 km–2 (B) 800.6 km–2 (C*) 828.6 km–2 (D) 876.6 km–2
Sol. N= d 2
22
50 × 105 = 2 6. 4 10 6 150
7
= 828.6 km–2
6. The TV. transmission tower in Delhi has a height of 240 m. The distance up to which the broadca~t can
be received, (taking the radius of earth to be 6.4 x 106 m) is -
240
(6.4 x 106 m )
(A) 100 km (B) 60 km (C*) 55. km (D) 50 km
Sol. d= 2Rh = 2 6. 4 10 6 240 = 55 km
7. In an amplitude modulated wave, for audio frequency of 500 cps, the appropriate carrier frequency will
be :
500 cps
(A) 50 c/s (B) 100 c/s (C) 500 c/s (D*) 50000 c/s
Sol. fc = 100 f m = 100 × 500 = 50000 cps.
8. For a carrier frequency of 100 kHz and a modulating frequency of 5 kHz what is the width of AM
transmission–
100 kHz 5 kHz AM (width)
–
(A) 5 kHz (B*) 10kHz (C) 20 kHz (D) 200 KHz
Sol. = 2 m = 2 × 5 = 10 kHz.
9. If a carrier wave of 1000 kHz is used to carry the signal, the length of transmitting antenna will be equal
to -
1000 kHz (carry) (transmitting)
-
(A) 3 m (B) 30 m (C*) 300 m (D) 3000 m
c
Sol. h= = = 3×108/106 = 300 m
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-2
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
10. The AM wave contains three frequencies, viz : AM
f f f f f
(A) c , c s , c s (B) 2fc, 2(f c + fs), 2(fc – fs)
2 2 2
(C*) fc,(fc + fs), (fc – fs) (D) fc , fc, fc
Sol. Cm(t) = (Ac + Am sin mt) sin ct
Ac
= Ac sin ct + cos ( c – m)t
2
Ac
– cos ( c + m)t
2
11. A wedge (inclination = 30° from horizotnal) is moving with an acceleration a = 4m/s2 vertically up as
shown in figure. What is acceleration of block of mass 1 kg w.r.t. wedge & normal reaction by wedge on
block respectively. All surfaces are smooth. Choose correct pair : (g = 10 m/s2)
= 30° a = 4m/s2
1 kg
(g = 10 m/s2)
= 30°
12. Figure shows the roller coaster track. Each car will start from rest at point A and will roll with negligible
friction. It is important that there should be at least some small positive normal force exerted by the
track on the car at all points, otherwise the car would leave the track. With the above fact, the minimum
safe value for the radius of curvature at point B is (g = 10 m/s2) :
() A
B (g = 10 m/s2) :
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-3
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
13. Two immiscible liquids are poured in a U–tube having densities = 1.0 × 103 kg/m3 and 1 2
= 3.0 × 103
h
kg/m3. Find the ratio of heights (of the liquids above their interface) 1 .
h2
U– = 1.0 × 103 kg/m3
1 2
= 3.0 × 103 kg/m3
h
1
h2
14. The free electron concentration (n) in the conduction band of a semiconductor at a temperature T
Kelvin is described in terms of Eg and T as-
T (n), Eg T -
–Eg/kT 2 –Eg/kT 2 –Eg/2kT 3/2 –Eg/2kT
(A) n = ATe (B) n = AT e (C) n = AT e (D*) n = AT e
16 –3
15. Pure Si at 300 K has equal electron (ne) and hole (nh) concentrations of 1.5 × 10 m . Doping by
22 –3
indium increases nh to 4.5 × 10 m . Calculate ne in the doped Si-
16 –3
300 K Si (ne) (nh = 1.5 × 10 m )
22 –3
nh = 4.5 × 10 m ne
9 –3 6 –3
(A*) 5.0 × 10 m (B) 6.0 × 10 m
3 –3 9 –3
(C) 7.0 × 10 m (D) 4.0 × 10 m
16. In a N-P-N transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the
collector, the emiitter current ( E) and base current ( B) are given by-
N-P-N 10 mA 90%
( E) ( B)
(A) E = 1mA; B = 11 mA (B*) E = 11 mA; B = 1 mA
(C) E = –1 mA; B = 9 mA (D) E = 9 mA ; B = –1 mA
17. For the logic circuit shown the Boolean relation is-
A
B
Y
C
(A) Y = ABC (B) Y = A + BC (C*) Y = (A + B) C (D) Y = AB + C
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-4
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029
18. A wall is moving with constant velocity u towards a fixed source of sound of frequency 'f'. The velocity of
sound is 'v'. The wavelength of the sound reflected by the wall is
u f
v
v v u v u v u v
(A) (B) (C) (D*) .
f f f v u f
v u
Sol. Frequency of sound reflected by wall f' = f
v
v u v u v
Wavelength of sound reflected by wall =
f v u f
v u
f' = f
v
v u v u v
=
f v u f
19. A stationary observer receives sonic oscillations from two tuning forks, one of which approaches and
the other recedes with same speed. As this takes place the observer hears the beat frequency of 2 Hz.
Find the speed of each tuning fork, if their oscillation frequency is 680 Hz and the velocity of sound in
air is 340 m/s. [ Use g = 10 m/s2 ]
2 Hz
680 Hz 340 m/s
(A) 1 m/s (B) 2 m/s (C*) 0.5 m/s (D) 1.5 m/s
v v
Sol. (C) f0 = 2 Hz
v vs v vs
vs = 0.5 m/s
Corporate Office : CG Tower, A-46 & 52, IPIA, Near City Mall, Jhalawar Road, Kota (Raj.) - 324005
Website : www.resonance.ac.in | E-mail : [email protected]
PAGE NO.-5
Toll Free : 1800 200 2244 | 1800 258 5555 | CIN: U80302RJ2007PTC024029